IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 1.1 imgu Uit2A |25 ■^ Ui |22 Uta4. HA 1.4 11.6 Hiotographic Sdences Corporation 23 WBT MAIN STiHT WnSTIR.N.Y. U5M (71«)t7a-4JiC3 CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHIVI/ICIVIH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microraproductions / Institut Canadian de microraproductions historiquaa -JWBiflWft ^ • ■ r Technical and Bibliographic Notaa/Notas tachniquas at bibliographiquas ■ : . The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibiiographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a 6t^ possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la m6thode normale de filmage sont indiquis ci-dessous. t 1 , Coloured covers/ ^ Couverture de couleur Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur ( 1 / Covers damaged/ V Couverture endommag^e Pages damag signifie "A SUIVRE ', le symbole V signifie "FIN". Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre film6s it des taux de reduction diffirents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour ixre reproduit en un seul clich6, il est fiimt i partir de Tangle supirieur gauche, de gauche h droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images nAcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la mithode. i «* 32X 1 t 3 4 5 6 nk w SAiXiiNo BsmaoTioirs FOR OP H AM ,"f'sJ msw siiiiiiivc^ niRixrf iHilvs FOB TUDi ''■ ■ ■ ■ * ■■ ' ■*■■ *-*^'*^-''*' ■^'"'*"i;* t^V' ,. ■ ■■-'"■'"^■•■ ..Tj ' <1|^|(iir afro y>ir and Caiiqikte Epitome qfProctioal Nao^Hm^ 14'' •■i Be-aihil^ip^ tiiyiied, and cotudderably augment, ..^tm»k ■muk-x mmmtiaiif^^ 3. ^ TL. c^ % THE i» THE ( , V'.- - .. Bays SURVEY F. Bl D] And Ret, Author o TI Charts '>.. /ik ~ ■If''.*?", J FOR t%e iSa0t •• Bay I'Argent, Harbour Mille, Grand le Pierre, English and New Harbours, Harbour Femme, and Harbour la Conte or Story Harbour Long and Belle Harbours, Cinq Isles, Corben and Baude do I'Arier Bays, and St. Jacques Harbour Blue Pinion, Boxy Harbour, Great Bay de I'Eau, Barry sway Bay, Harbour Briton, and Connaigre Bay ... 36 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 47 48 49 50 51 5-> I F F \ 36 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 47 48 49 50 51 I ' I CONTENTS. V I'ai^e Pass Island, Kcmarkit on Fortune lioy, Soundings, Ilcrmitago Bay, Long iHlund, GaltnuH, Picarre, and Uound Harbours ... ... ... 53 Long Island Harbour, Bay of Despair, Great Jarvis Harbour, Bonne Bay, Faclieux, and Hare Bay ... ... ... ... ... ... 54 Devil, Chaleur, Francois, and Oar Bay, Capo la Ilunc, Penguin Islands, and VVhnle or La Hune Hock and Buy ... ... ... ... 55 La Hune Harbour, Ramea Isles and Harbour, Old Man's Bay, and Mosquito Harbour ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 56 White Bear Bay, Red Island Harbours, Burgeo Isles, and Wolf Bay ... 57 Ha-Ha, Great Barachais, Connoire and Cutteau Bays, Grand Bruit, Rootte, and La Poilo Bays ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 58 Great and Little Harbours, Gaily Boy's Harbour, N.E. Ann, Garia Bay, La Moine, and La Couo Harbours ... ... ... ... ... 51) Rose Blanche, Conney & Otter Buys, Dead Islands Harbour, & Port aux Bascjuo 60 Grand Bay, Cape Ray, and the Island of St. Paul ... ... ... 61 Cape North, Tides ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 62 IV.— THE WESTERN COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND. From Cape Ray to the Strait of Belle Isle Cod Roy Harbour and Road ... St. George's Bay, Cape St. George, and Port-a-Port Bay of Islands Lark and York Harbours, Cape St. Gregory, and Bonne Bay Cow Head, Ingornachoix Bay, Port Saunders, and Ilawke's Harbour Point Rich, Port aux Choix, Bay of St. John, Point Ferolle, and New Ferolle Mjuy ••• ••• ••• ••• ■•• ••• •>• ••• Old Ferolle, Bays of St. Geneveive and St. Barbe, and Mistaken Cove Savage Cove, Boat Harbour, Tides, &c. v.— THE COAST OF LABRADOR. From York Point to Sandwich Harbour York or Chateaux Bay Cape Charles, Cape Charles and Cutter Harbours, St. Lewis River and Sound, Deer Harbour, and Cape St. Lewis ... Petty, Sophia, Charlatie, Mecklenburgh, and St. Francis Harbours... Sealing Bight, Fishing Ship Harbour, and Gilbert's River... Cape St. Michael, Occasional Harbour, St. Michael's Bay, Duck Harbour, Hawke Bay, Eagle Cove, and Capliu Bay Partridge Bay, Seal Islands, Shallow and Sandy Bays, Spotted Island, Sand Hill Cove, and Table Bay The Gannets, Curlew Harbour, Isthmus Bay, Hare Harbour, and Sandwich j^ifty ««• ••• ••• •■• •*• ••> ••• ••• From Chateaux Bat to Cape Whittle, at the entrance of the Gulf of St. Lawrence ... ... «.* •«• ••• •" Red Bay ... ... ... ... ••• ••• ... ••• Black, Diable, Forteau, and Bradore Bays Bradore and Belles Amours Harbour ... Middle Bay, Five Leagues Harbour, Bonne Esperance Harbour, Whale Island, Esquimaux River and Islands Shecatica Bay, Shag Islands and Rocks ••• . Cumberland and Sanely Island Harbours, Port and River St. Augustine, Eagle Harbour, and Ha-liii Bay ... 62 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 77 78 79 80 81 82 VI CONTKNTfl. Vuge Fish Harbour, (Iroiit Mecattina Island, and Meoattina Ilnrhour ... ... K\ Grand Point of Mecattina, Hay Ue i'ortagc, Little Mccuttina Island, anil Hare Harbour... ... ... ... ... ... ••• ... H4 Wtttaghoistic Island and Sound, Wapitagun Harbour, Capo Whittle, Remarks . HO Magnetic Uoaritigs and DistanocH, in Nautical Miles, from Place to Place, on the difl'erent CoastH of the Island of Newfoundland ... ... ... ... 87 \l.—THE GULF OF ST. LAWIiENCE. Rkmarks ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 8!) The Island of St. Paul — Dearings and Distances ... ... ... ... 90 Currents at the entrance of the Gulf, Winds, and Magdalen Islands ... 91 Bird, Byron, and Anticosti Islands ... ... ... ... ... 93 The North Coast, from Cape Whittle to the River St. John, including the MiNOAN Islands ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 90 Coacoacho Bay and Olamanosheobo River ... ... ... ... 97 Wttsh-shecootia and Kegashka Bays, Natashqunn Point and Little Natashijuan Harbour ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 98 Mingnn Islands — St. Genevieve Harbour ... ... ... ... 99 Betchewun and Charles Harbours and Clearwater Point ... ... ••• 100 Esquimaux Island and Harbour ... ... ... ... ... 101 Min<;an Island and Harbour ... ... ... ... ... ... 102 yn.— THE EASTERN COAST OF CAPE BRETON ISLAND. From Cape North, southward, to the Gut of Canso ... ... ... ... 103 St. Ann's Harbour and La Bras d'Or ... ... ... ... ... 104 Sydney, Scatari, and Louisbourg Harbours ... ... ... ... 100 Gabarus, Chedabucto Bay, Cranberry Island, Milford Haven, and Gut of Canso 107 Inhabitant, Arichat, and Crow Harbours; Fox Island Anchorage and Cerberus Rock ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 108 The South Coast of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, from Cape North to Point Escumenac, including Prince Edward's Island and the Northumberland Strait 108 Cape North, Sea Wolves Island, Port Hood, Iloudic Bank, and Gut of Canso (western entrance) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 109 Ship, Holland, Aubuskee, and Pomquet Harbours ... ... ...110 Antigoniash Harbour, Malignant Cove, Merigumish Harbour, and Pictou Island and Reefs ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Ill Pictou Harbour and Light ... ... ... ... ... ... 112 Caribou Reefs and Harbour and Cnpe St. John ... ... ... ... 113 Amet Island and Shoals, Tatamagouche, Oak Island, and Wallace Harbour ... 114 Pugwash Harbour and Reefs, Lewis Head, Philip River, and Cold Spring Head 115 Tignish and Gaspereau Rivers, and Capes Tormentine and Jourimam ... 110 Shediac, Cacagne, and Buctouche Harbours ... ... ... ...117 Richibucto and Kouchibouguac Rivers ... ... ... ... ...118 Sapin Ledge and Point Escumenac ... ... ... ... ...119 Prince Edward's Island ... ... ... ... ... ... 119 Cape East and Cardigan Bay ... ... ... ... ... ... 119 Murray Harbour, Wood Islands, Indian and Rifleman Rocks, Pinnet River, Prim Point, and St. Peter's Island ... ... ... ... ... 120 Governor Island and Hillsborough Bay ... ... ... ... 12] Bedeque Harbour, Cape Egmont, and West Point and Reef ... ... 122 North Point— Tides ... ... ... ... ... ... ...123 ^ \ Vage . K\ '. H4 . HO 87 8!) 90 91 !)3 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 10.1 104 106 inso 107 108 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 119 119 120 121 122 123 CONTiCNTg. !l i North Coant of Prince Edwariti Inland Ht. Poter'rt, Httvnjze, Truciulu', (iroiit uidI Little llustico, nn»l Ciri'iiville Har- bourM, Oiipu AyU'Mhury, Uichiuond liiiy, nixl Mulpuquu lliii-bour ... Cn!ii-uiii|K>t[uc> lliirhour The Wkst Coast of tlu; Gui.r of St. Lawrf.nck, from Point Kscumuimc to Cape (fiistpe, itu;lit(ling tiiu IliiyN of Mirumiclii, Ciuilour, und (itispu Point Kscuinunac Miraniiclii liay and Cliuthatn ... Dou;(laHtown, Nowcastle, Nulsontown, Tides, Vin Harbour, and Cluilour Hay . Shippigan Flat, MiMooit Harbour, and Fisherman'M LtMlge FukeMudie Shoul, Sliinpigaii Sound, Carru(iuetto Island, Slioal, antl Harbour, nml Mizzinette Lutigu Batiiurst Harbour, Nipisigliit Jlay, Huron Island, Nash River, and Dalhousic Island and Harbour Ristigouchc River, Cani[)bcll Town, Carlton Road, and Casoapcdiac Bay lliehmond, Carlisle Point, Nouvelle River, and Port Daniel Mftcrjuereau Point, Cape Despair, Rctnaventure Island, Peroo Rock, Mai Hay, Toint Petre, Gaspe Ray, and Cape (Jaspe Douglastown, Cape Ilaldnuand, Gaspo Harbour, and Currci'.ts Vll Pagu 124 124 125 126 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 YlU.—NOIiTH COAST OF THE RIVER ST. LAWRENCE. From the River St. John to Point de Monts, and from thence to Point Mille Vache 136 River St. John, Magpie and Ridge Points, and Sawbill, Shall(>r, and Manitou Rivers ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 136 Basin River, Moisic iJay and River, Sandy Point, and Seven Islands and Bay . 137 St. IVIargaret's Point and Great Cawee Island Anchorage ... ... ... 138 English Point, Egg Island, Calumet River, and Trinity Bay ... ... 139 Pouit de Monts, Cape St. Nicholas and Harbour, Point St. Giles, and Mani- couagan Shoals ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 140 Bersimis Point, Cape Colombier, Port Neuf, and Point Mille Vache... ... 141 The SouTUERN Shore of the River St. Lawrence, from Cape Gaspe to the Island of BIc ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 142 Griffin's Cove; Great Pond, Magdalen, and Mount St. Louis Rivers; Cape St. Ann and River, and Capo Chatte ... ... ... ... ... 142 Matane and Matis Harbours ... ... ... ... ... ... 143 Father Point and Barnaby Island ... ... ... ... ... 144 Isle of Bic and Isle of Bicquettc and Reefs ... ... ... ... 145 From Bic Island along the Southern Shore, with the Islands, Rocks, and Shoals in the River to Quebec ... ... ... ... ... ... 146 The Alcides Rocks, and Razade, Basque, Apple, and Green Islands ... 146 Green Island Beacon and List of New Buoys ... ... ... ... 147 Cacana, Barret's Ledge, and Red and White Islands ... ... ... 148 Hare Island and Shoals, Middle Ground, Pilgrim Islands and Shoal, and Ka- mourasca Islands ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 149 The Northern Shore, from Point Mille Vache to Coudre Island ... ... 150 Esquimines Islet and Red Islet Reef ... ... ... ... ... 150 Lark Point and Reef, Bar Reef, Cape Basque, Bay of Rocks, Murray Bay, Goose Cape, Coudre Island, and Prairie Bay ... ... ... . . 151 St. Paul's Bay, South Traverse and Light-vessel, Wood and Stone Pillars, Seal Islands and Reef, and Roche Avignon ... ... ... ... 152 Goose, Crane, and Bayfield Islands ... ... .. ... 153 The Southern Shore ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 153 Wye and Belle Chasse Rocks, Beaumont Reef, Island of Orleans, and Basin of Quebec ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 154 Middle and North Channels ... ... ... ... ... ... 155 North Traverse ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 156 VIU CONTENTS. Page Directions for Vessels sailing up the River St. Lawrence, from Anticosti to Quebec ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ••• 156 Directions for Vessels bound down the Gulf ... ... ... ... 168 Rates of Pilotage ... ... ... ... ... ... ••• 169 IX.— THE SOUTHERN COAST OF NOVA SCOTIA. From Chedabucto Bay to Halifax Harbour ... ... ... ... 170 Description of the Land; Cape Canso ... ... ... ... ... 170 Harbour of Canso, Dover Bay, Raspberry Harbour, and White Haven ... 171 Torbay, Coddle's and Country Harbours, Harbour Island, and Fisherman's Harbour ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 172 Bickerton Harbour, St. Mary's River, Wedge Isle, and Jegogan and Liscomb Harbours ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 173 Bay of Islands, Beaver and Sheet Harbours, and Mushaboon ... ... 174 Spry, Deane or Poi)e's, and Tangier Harbours; Shoal Bay; Ship, Owl's Head or Keppel, and Jedore Harbours ... ... ... ... ... 175 Brig Rock, PoUuck Shoal, and Jedore Ledges ... ... ... ... 176 From Halifax to Cape Sable ... ... ... ... ... ... 176 General Remarks ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 176 Halifax Town and Harbour and the Ledges ... ... ... ... 177 Reid's Rock and Mac Nabb's Island Directions for Halifax Harbour Sambro and Pennant Harbours, Tennant's or Bristol Bay, and Prospect and Leith Harbours Dover Port, Margaret's Bay, Owl's Head, French Cove, Head Harbour or Delaware River, and Ingram River ... Hubbert's Cove and North- West Harbour Mahone Bay Lunenburg Bay Le Have River and Port Metway or Medway Liverpool Bay and Port Matoon or Mouton Ports Jolie and L'Ebert and Sable River Rugged Island and Green Harbours, and Shelburne or Port Rose way Cape Negro Harbour Port Latour or Haldimand and Barrington Bay ... Cape Sable, Bonnetta and Favourite Coves, Brazil Rock, Magnetic Bearings and Distances between Halifax and Cape Sable 178 179 181 182 183 184 18.5 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 Ca Ca X.—THE ISLE OF SABLE AND BANKS OF NOVA SCOTIA. Description . . Remarks ... 193 ... 197 XI.— THE WEST AND NORTHERN COASTS OF NOVA SCOTIA, AND THE COAST OF NEW BRUNSWICK, INCLUDING THE BAY OF FUNDY, WITH THE MAN AN ISLANDS, ^c Remarks Cape Sable to Brier's Island Seal Island .. , Tusket River, Pubnico Harboui', Green Island, and Cape Forchu Yarmouth, the Lurcher Rock, and Trinity Ledge Brier's Island to Chignecto Bay ... Brier's Island Long Island, St. Mary's Bay, and Grand Passage 197 Ca 198 198 199 200 200 Re 200 A 201 ... 170 ... 170 ... 171 m's ... 172 itnb ... 173 ... 174 ead ... 175 ... 176 ... 176 ... 176 ... 177 ... 178 ... 179 and ... 181 r or ... 182 ... 183 184 185 186 ... 187 ... 188 189 ... 190 191 ... 193 ... 197 AND ... 197 ... 198 ... 198 ... 199 ... 200 ... 200 ... 200 ... 201 CONTENTS. Petit Passage, Annapolis Gut, Annapolis to the Basin of Mines Tides; Haute Island... Chignecto Bay Chignecto Bay to the Manan Islands and Passamaquoddy Bay North Coast of the Bay of Fundy; Quaco Ledge... St. John's Harbour and City of St. John Signals made at Partridge Island Tides; Musquash Harbour Maces or Mason's Bay, and Beaver and Etang Harbours ... Wolf and Manan Islands Wood Island, Manan Ledges, and Gannet Rock ... Three Machias Seal Islands and Passamaquoddy Bay St. Andrew's General Directions and Remarks for Sailing to and within the Tides IX PnKO ... 202 ... 203 ... 204 ... 204 ... 204 ... 205 ... 206 ... 207 ... 208 ... 209 ... 210 ... 211 ... 212 Bay of Fundy ; 213 XIL— COAST OF THE UNITED STATES. From Passamaquoddy Bay to Cape Elizabeth General Remarks and Sailing Directions Little and Great Machias Bays ; Moose-a-Peck Head to Machias ... Machias to Goldsborough, Goldsborough Harbour, Pleasant Bay Bowbear Harbour, Dyer's Bay, Goldsborough Harbour, and Mount Desert XSiQrllCl ••• «•• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• Frenchman's Bay, Blue Hill Sound, and Isle au Haute Martinicus Island and Penobscot Bay and River ... Owl's Head Harbour... Camden Harbour and George's River ... John's Bay and Townsend Harbours and Sheepscut River... Kennebeck River and Seguine Island ... New Meadow's River and Hussey Sound Cape Elizabeth and Portland Harbours... Cape Elizabeth to Cape Anne Wood and Richmond Islands, Kennebunk Harbour, White Hills and Boon XsitlUU ••• ••• •■• ••• ••• ••! ••• ••• York and Portsmouth Harbours, Isles of Shoals, and White Island ... Londoner's, Star, Cedar, Smutty Nose, and Hog Islands ... Duck Island and Newbury Port Hampton Harbour and Plum Island Ipswich and Annis Squam or Squani Harbour ... Cape Anne to Cape Cod Cape Anne Harbour ... Salem Harbour, and Misery, Cat, and Eagle Islands Beverley and Manchester Marblehead Harbour... ^JVl3X>v/0 ••• •!• ••■ ••• ••• •■• ••• •■• Broad Sound, Boston oClwUnliG ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••■ Plymouth Harbour ... Cape Cod ... Billingsgate Island ... Wellfleet harbour and Barnstaple Bay and Harbour Cape Cod to Cape Malabar Description of the Banks between Cape Sable and Cape Cod Cashes Ledge Jeffery's and St. George's Banks • Remarks on the Deviation or Local Attraction A useful Table for finding the Distance of an Object by Two Bearings, and the Distance run between them [N. America — Part T.] *A 214 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 241 242 243 244 245 246 246 251 251 252 255 256 ( ^ ) A List and Description of the LIGHTHOUSES situate between the STRAIT of BELLE ISLE and CAPE MALABAR, including those in the GULF and RIVER of ST. LAWRENCE; xoith References to the pages lohere further particidars respecting them may be found in the folloioing Work. — (Corrected to 1849.J -♦ CAPE SPEAR.— A lighthouse, exhibiting a powerful revolving light, at 275 feet above the level of the sea, which shows a brilliant flash at intervals of one minute, and visible 8 leagues in clear weather. (Page 7.) ST. JOHN'S.— Fort Amherst lighthouse stands on the South Head, at the entrance of the harbour of St. John, and shows a brilliant fixed light. (Page 7.) HARBOUR GRACE.— On an islet, off the mouth of the harbour, a light is shown from the top of a square wooden building. It is an effective and useful light (fixed). The islet is accessible only in moderate weather by ladders up the cliffy, on the landward side. (Page 9.) CAPE BONA VISTA. — The lighthouse on this cape exhibits a revolving light, which shows a red and white light alternately. The period of its revolution is 2 minutes, and its eleva- tion 150 feet. (Page 15.) ST. PIERRE OR ST. PETER'S LIGHTHOUSE.— On Gallantry Head, on the south side of the island, is a fixed light, visible, in clear weather, 5 leagues. (Page 47.) There is also a fixed harbour-light on Canon Point, St. Pierre, visible 3 miles, from 1st of May to 15th of December. (Page 48.) ST. PAUL'S ISLAND LIGHTHOUSES.— There are two lighthouses on this island, one on the south point, and the other on a rock close to the north end of tlie island. The northern one is a bi-illiant fixed light, elevated 140 feet above the level of the sea, and visible 6 leagues between the bearings of N. by E. and E. by N. The southern light revolves, and is visible 6 leagues between the bearings of west and S.S.E. A bell is tolled at the southern light- house in foggy weather, worked by machinery. (Pages 61 & 90.) HEATH POINT LIGHTHOUSE.— On the extremity of the east point of Anticosti Island a lighthouse has been erected, which shows a bright fixed light. The lantern is elevated 100 feet above the sea; it is visible 6 leagues in clear weather. (Page 94.) ANTICOSTI S.W. POINT LIGHTHOUSE shows a revolving light from 25th March to 31st December, from sunset to sunrise. Tlic lantern is elevated 100 feet above high water, and the light may be seen 5 or 6 leagues between the bearings of N.N.W., round by west and south, to S.E. by E. (Page 94.) SYDNEY LIGHT (Breton Island).— On Flat Point, on the eastern side of the entrance, is au octagonal tower of wood, 90 feet high, and painted vertically red-and-white. It exhibits a brilliant fixed light at 160 feet above the level of the sea, seen in clear weather 5 leagues off". (Page lOfi.) SCATARI ISLAND LIGHT.— The light-tower is on the N.E. extremity of Scatari Island, painted white, exhibiting a revolving light, about 90 feet above the sea, visible 1 minute, and invisible J a minute alternately. A boat to render assistance to vessels in distress, and a gun to answer signals when required. (Page 106.) LOUISBOURG LIGHT (Breton Island).— This light is fixed, and stands on the eastern side of the entrance to Louisbourg Harbour; it shows a fixed light. The lighthouse is a square building, painted white, with vertical black stripes on either side, which renders it conspicuous when the back land is covered with snow. (Page 107.) GUT OF CANSO (western entrance). — A fixed light is now exhibited on the western side of the northern entrance of the Gut of Canso, which may be seen as far as Cape St. George. (Page 109.) List of Lighthouses, ^c. XI >i» PICTOU LIGHT is on the S.E. side of the entrance. It is painted red-aud-wliite, in vertical stripes, and exhibits a brilliant fixed light, 65 feet above the sea. (Pago 112.) POINT ESC^MENAC (Miramichi entrance).— A fixed light is now established on Point Escumr.u lie southern point of Miramichi Bay. Tlie lighthouse is painted white. (Pages H. % 126.) POINT PRIM LIGHT (Prince Edward's Island).— On Point Prim, the eastern point of entrance to Hillsborough Bay and Charlotte Town, a fixed light has been established, as a guide to vessels entering the bay in the night. (Page 120.) CAPE DE MONTS LIGHT.— A lighthouse has been erected upon the high land of Capo de Monts, exhibiting a fixed light, 100 feet above the level of the sea. This lighthouse stands on the north shore of the entrance of the River St. Lawrence, nearly opposite Cape Chatte, and forms a conspicuo'^s land-mark. (Page 140.) BiCQUETTE LIGHT. — A light, revolving at equal intervals of 2 minutes, is shown from a lantern, 130 feet above the level of the sea, on the islet of Bicquette, from the 15th of April to the 15th of December. A gun, a 9-poundcr, is placed near the lighthouse, and will be fired every hour during foggy weather and snow-storms. (Page 145.) GREEN ISLAND LIGHT.— On the north point of Green Island, which is on the south side of the river, is a light-tower, exhibiting a fixed light, 70 feet above the level of low water mark, from the 15th of April to the 10th of December. (Page 146.) RED ISLAND LIGHT. — A tower has lately been erected on Red Island, which exhil)its a fixed light every night during the navigable season. (Page 148.) SOUTH PILLAR LIGHT.— A revolving ligl t will be shown from the tower erected on the Stone Pillar; it revolves at regulated intervals of 2^ minutes, and lighted during the season of the navigation. (Page 152.) TRAVERSE FLOATING LIGHT.— A light-vessel is moored in the South Traverse off Cape St. Roque, in the Narrows, 5 miles above the first buoy on the south shore, and shows a fixed light. (Page 152.) LAKE ST. PETER (above Quebec). — A light-vessel is moored at the western end of Lake St. Peter, about 47 miles below Montreal, and a buoy is moored near it; these indicate the entrance to the South Channel. (Page 166.) GUISBOROUGH HARBOUR LIGHT.— This light is situated at the head of Chedabucto Bay, near the entrance to Milford Haven; it is a fixed light, and serves as a guide to Guisborough Harbour. (Page 170.) CRANBERRY ISLAND LIGHTS.— This lighthouse is an octagonal tower, built of wood, 88 feet in height, painted red and white horizontally, and showing two fixed lights, one above another. (Page 170.) WEDGE ISLAND.— Off St. Mary's River, eastward of Halifax, a beacon is erected 140 feet above the level of the sea, painted white, and covered at the top. (Page 173.) BEAVER ISLAND 1.IGHT.— A lighthouse has been erected on Beaver Island, to the eastward of Halifax. It exhibits a revolving light, visible 1^ minute and dark ^ a minute. (Page 174.) SAMBRO' LIGHT, on the west side of Halifax Harbour entrance, an octagonal tower, 197 feet high, with a brilliant fixed light. There is a small party of Artillery attached, with two 24-pounders for signals. (Page 177.) SHERBROOK TOWER LIGHT, on Manger's Beach, Halifax Harbour.— This is a fi.Ked red light, to be left on the starboard side when entering the harbour. (Page 178.) DEVIL'S ISLAND BEACON.— A beacon of wood, painted white, and 50 feet in height, is erected on Devil's Island, at the eastern side of the entrance to Halifax Harbour. (Page 178.) LUNENBURG LIGHT is upon the S.E. point of Cross Island, at the entrance of Lunenburg Bay; the tower is octagonal, painted red, with two lights placed vertically, 30 feet apart •^A 2 xu List of Lighthouses, Sfc. The lower light is fixed, and tho upper light is flashing, showing a flash at intervals of n minute, abruptly changing irom light to dark. (Page 185.) LIVERPOOL LIGHT.— A lighthouse is built on Coflin's Island, at tho entrance of Liver- pool Harbour, 90 feet above the sea level, octagon shape, painted red-and-white horizontally, and shows a brilliant light, revolving once in every 2 minutes. (Page 187.) CAPE ROSEWAY LIGHTS. — Shelburne light-tower on Capo Roscway, is of an octagon shape, painted black-and-white vertically, and exhibits vertically two brilliant fixed lights. The larger upper light is 150 feet above the level of the sea, the lower one 36 feet below it. (Page 189.) CAPE SABLE.— Seal Island Light. — A lighthouse is now erected on the highest part of tho southern Seal Island; it exhibits a brilliant fixed light, 170 feet high. The tower ia of an octagon shape, white. (Page 198.) CAPE FORCHU LIGHT (Nova Scotia).— On the western side of the entrance to Yarmouth is a lighthouse, exhibiting a brilliant revolving light, visible 1| minute, and invisible ^ a minute. The building is painted red-and-white, vertically, and elevated 145 feet above the level of the sea. (Page 199.) BRYER'S ISLAND LIGHT.— This lighthouse is painted white, and exhibits a brilliant fixed light, elevated 90 feet above the level of the sea, and stands about ^ a mile N.E. from the N.W. point of the island. (Page 200.) ANNAPOLIS GUT. — On Point Prim, at the western side of tho entrance to Annapolis, a lighthouse is erected, exhibiting a fixed light, 76 feet above the sea. (Page 202.) BLACK ROCK LIGHT.— On Black Rock, situated on the south side of the Mines Channel, a lighthouse has lately been erected, which exhibits a brilliant fixed light. (Page 203.) APPLE RIVER LIGHT. — A lighthouse has lately been erected, which exhibits two fixed horizontal lights. This light-tower stands on the south side of Chignecto Bay. (Page 204.) POINT ENRAGE LIGHT. — On the north side of Chignecto Bay is a square lighthouse, exhibiting a brilliant fixed light. The house is painted white, and is elevated about 120 feet above high water. (Page 204.) QUACO HEAD LIGHT (on the north side of the Bay of Fundy).— The lighthouse is erected on a small rock near this head, with a brilliant revolving light, which is full and dark twice in a minute. The lighthouse is painted wlute-and-red, in horizontal stripes. (Page 204.) ST. JOHN'S HARBOUR. — The lighthouse is built upon Partridge Island, and exhibits a brilliant fixed light, at 110 feet above the level of the sea, and having a bell neai* it, which is tolled in thick weather. The lighthouse is painted red-and-white, in vertical stripes. (Page 205.) ST. JOHN'S BEACON LIGHT is within Partridge Island; it is erected on a spit which dricL- at § ebb. The tower shows a fixed light, and is painted white-and-black, in vertical stripes; the light is white, and about 35 feet above the level of the sea. (Page 205.) POINT LEPREAU, north side of the Bay of Fundy. — The lighthouse erected upon this point exhibits two brilliant fixed lights, one 28 feet above the other, and both lights can be seen from every point of the compass where they may be useful. The lighthouse is painted red- and-white horizontally, in stripes 5 feet broad each. (Page 208.) GANNET ROCK LIGHT, to the southward of Grand Manan.— This lighthouse is intended to warn vessels of their approach to tho dangerous ledges lying off the south side of Grand Manan, and exhibits a brilliant flashing light. The brilliant flash appears for 40 seconds, succeeded by 20 seconds of darkness. The lighthouse is blac-k-and-white, in vertical stripes. (Page 210.) MACHIAS SEAL ISLANDS. — There are two lighthouses on the southernmost of these islands, standing 200 feet apart; and they exhibit brilliant fixed lights, horizontally, about 45 feet above high water; the lights bear E.S.E. and W.N.W. of each other. ^ S \\ N c: B s. E List of Lighthouses, SfC. xni Vessels standing to the northward, between these lights and the Gannet Rock, should tack off the moment they bring the lights in one, as they will then be only J of a mile from the Murr Ledges; if more than 5 miles to the eastward of the lights. (Pago 211.) HEAD HARBOUR LIGHT, Passamaquoddy Bay, is a brilliant fixed light, on the N.E. ex- tremity of Campo Bello, jvs a guide tovi; sels entering the main channel to West Isles, Moose Island, and the inner buy of Passamaquoddy, and to enable vessels to enter Head Harbour at all times. The light is 60 feet above high water mark. The lighthouse is painted white, with a red cross upon it. (Page 211.) ST. ANDREW'S HARBOUR LIGHT serves to point out the narrowest part of the entrance. There is also a beacon. (Page 213.) UNITED STATES. MOUNT DESERT ROCK.— The lighthouse erected on this rock sIk.ws a bright fixed light, 56 J feet above the level of the sea. Columbian Ledge, surveyed by Captain Owen, lies S.W. by S., 1203 yards from the rock; inside there are 22 fathoms; outside, close to the rock, 17 to 35 fathoms. (Page 215.) WEST QUODDY HEAD LIGHT.— This lighthouse is erected upon a low point of land, on the western side of tlic entrance to Scoodic River. It shows an improved fixed light, 90 feet above the level of the sea; and is furnished with an alarm bell, which, in foggy weather, is struck 10 ;imes every minute. This light may be seen 20 miles off. (Page 215.) LIBBEE ISLAND LIG HTIIOUSE.— It is situated on the southern part of the island, at the entrance to Machias Bay. The lantern is 65 feet above tlxe level of the sea, and contains a bright fixed light. (Page 215.) MOOSE-PECK HEAD LIGHT.— This lighthouse is situated about 3 leagues S.W. of Lib- bee Island, and revolves at 54 feet above the level of the sea, and is eclipsed twice in every 4 minutes. At 6 leagues off, the duration of light and dark are nearly equal; but on ap- proaching it the time of darkness diminishes, and the light increases. (Page 215.) NASH ISLAND LIGHT, Pleasant River.- There is a ligbUifluae, 47 feet above the hich you leave Petit Manan will carry you must ) which ex- . from the utermost of the sea; bearing from level of the sea, on this island, containing a fixed light, of on your starboard hand going in. Coming from the we| on your port hand; give it a berth of ^ a mile, then you up with Nash Island light; leave it on your star steer N.E. by E., 2^ miles, which will take you into PETIT MANAN LIGHT.— A lighthouse of stone h; hibits a fixed light, at 53 feet above the level of the entrance of the Port of Goldsborough. (Page 216.) CRANBERRY ISLANDS.— Baker's Island lighthouse is Cranberry Islands, and exhibits a brilliant fixed light, at 70 that on Petit Manan W.S.W., 5 leagues. (Page 217.) ;'i,;i BEAR ISLAND. — On this island there is a fixed bright light; it lies near the centre of the passage between Sutton's Island and Mount Desert ; it is small, and covered with spruce- trees. The light stands upon the western end, elevated 65 feet above the level of the sea, and visible, in clear weather, 12 to 15 miles. (Page 217.) SADDLE BACK ROCK, or LEDGE.— On the S.E. end of this is built a lighthouse, of hewn granite, and of that colour; it is elevated 40 feet above the level of the sea, exhibiting a fixed light, and may be seen, in clear weather, 15 miles. You may near it on all sides within a cable's length. (Page 219.) EAGLE ISLAND LIGHT is fixed, and bears about north, 20 miles from Saddle Back Rock light. (Page 219.) XIV List of Lighthouses, SfC. MARTINICUS ISLAND.— This island lies at the mouth of Penobscot Buy. On the rock sonth of the island are two fixed lights, 82 feet above the level of the sea, attached to u dwelling-house, 40 feet apart, and bearing S.S.E. and N.N.W. from each other. (Page 219.) OWL'S HEAD LIGHT.— This light is on the western side of Penobscot Bay, and bears nearly N. by E. from White Head light; it is built upon the easternmost part of Owl's Head, and shows a fixed light, 147 foet above the level of the sea. There is a good harbour on your port hand as you go to the eastward. The harbour makes with a deep cove ; it has 4 fathoms, muddy bottom. (Page 220.) CASTINE LIGHTHOUSE is on Dice's Head, at the entrance of Castinc Harbour, Penob- scot Bay. It is a fixed light, 116 feet above the level of the sea; N.W. ^ W. from Fort Point Ledges, and from the eastern end of Long Island S.E. by E. ^ E. The shore near the lighthouse is bold. (Page 220.) On Old Ford Point, above Castine, there is a lighthouse, to indicate the direction to Prospect Harbour. (Page 220.) WHITE HEAD LIGHTHOUSE stands on the western side of the entrance to Penobscot Bay, and exhibits a fixed light, elevated 58 feet above the level of the sea. Attached to this light is a bell, weighing 1000 lbs., striking in foggy weather three times in a minute. The light is small, but of great importance, as all vessels bound to Penobscot Bay, going in shore, are obliged to pass by the light, through the Muscle liidges. (Page 220.) CAMDEN LIGHT. — The lighthouse is situated on the S.E. part of Negro Island, and con- tains a fixed light, elevated 49 feet above the level of the sea. (Page 221.) BROWN'S HEAD LIGHT.— On Brown's Head, at the western entrance of Fox Island Passage, is a fixed light, 80 feet above high water. (Page 221.) FRANKLIN'S ISLAND LIGHT is on the north end of Franklin's Island, which is on the eastern side of the entrance to George's River; it is a fixed light, 50 feet above the level of the sea. (Page 221.) MANHEIGAN LIGHT. — On Manheigan Island, south of the entrance to George's River, is a revolving light, alternately red and white; time of revolution 2 min. 15 sec; elevation 170 feet above the level of the sea. You can run close to the island on either side, taking care to go between some dry ledges on the northern side of it. (Page 221.) PENMANQUID LIGHT.— This light is on the eastern point of St. John's or Bristol Bay; is fixed, and 75 feet above the level of the sea. It is a light to Bristol and Waldoborough Rivers; bears N.W. ^ W. from Manheigan revolving light, distant 4 leagues. (Page 222.) BURNT ISLAND LIGHT is fixed, at 55 feet above the sea. It is placed near the entrance of Townsend Harbour. You may run for the light without danger when it bears N. by E. (Page 222.) SEGUINE LIGHT is off the mouth of Kennebec. This lighthouse is of the first class, and exhibits a brilliant fixed light, at 200 feet above the level of the sea, and may be seen, in clear weather, 9 leagues. (Page 223.) POND ISLAND LIGHT, off Kennebec River, is a fixed light, 52 feet above the level of the sea; it lies N. ^ E., nearly 2 miles from Seguine River; bearing N.N.E., it leads directly to the river. (Page 223.) HENDRICK'S HEAD LIGHT, at the mouth of Sheepscut River, is a brilliant fixed light, 30 feet above the level of the sea, on the starboard hand going in. (Page 224.) PORTLAND LIGHT.— This lighthouse is built of stone, on a point of land called Portland Head, and contains a fixed light, 85 feet above the level of the sea. (Page 225.) FORT HILL OBSERVATORY bears N.N.W. ^ W., 4 miles from Portland light, is on an eminence 141 feet above high water mark; the building, 32 feet high, is painted red, and the telescope placed near the top, by means of which vessels may be discovered 15 leagues off; and their colours or private signals, 8 leagues' distance. (Page 225.) W< CA BC w: PC Wl . Nl IPI Al CA On Ei TI List of Lighthouses, ^r. XV CAPE ELIZABETH LIGHTS are situated on Cape Elizabeth, south of the entrance to Portland Harbour, about 140 feet above the level of the sea, and 300 yards apart, bearing from each other S.W. ^ W. and N.E. ^ E. The western light revolves in 2 minutes; the eastern is n fixed light. (Page 226.) WOOD ISLAND LIGHT is on the south side of Saco Bay; this is a brilliant revolving light, at 53 feet above the level of the sea, and eclipses once in Ij minute, and appears total until within the distance of 6 or 7 miles. (Pugc 226.) CAPE PORPOISE LIGHT.— The lighthouse stands on the S.W. part of Goat Island, and contains a fixed light, 33 feet above the level of the sea. (.Page 227.) BOON ISLAND LIGHT.— This island is very low, about i of a milo in length. The light- house stands near the west end of the island; the building is 50 feet high, and shows a fixed light, 70 feet above the level of the sea. (Page 227.) WHALE'S BACK LIGHTHOUSE is situated on the east side of Portsmouth Harbour. Its height is 68 feet above low Avater mark. It has two fixed lights, one 10 feet below the other. (Page 228.) PORTSMOUTH LIGHTHOUSE is near the mouth of the harbour, on the west side, on the N.E. point of Greet Island, near Fort Constitution; it is 85 feet above the level of the sea, and shows a fixed light. (Page 228.) WHITE ISLAND LIGHTHOUSE (Isles of Shoals,) stands on the south point of White Island, and exhibits a light, 67 feet above the sea, which revolves once in 3:^ minutes; it is triangular, and exhibits in succession, a bright red, a blue, and brilliant light of the natural colour: this last may be distinguished, in clear weather, about 7 leagues, and on approach- ing, the I'cd and blue in succession. A bell is suspended in the tower, and kept tolling during thick weather, both by night and day; its sound may le heard about 4 miles off. (Page 228.) NEWBURY PORT LIGHTS.— There are two lighthouses on the south side of the entrance, upon the north end of Plumb Island, which exhibit fixed lights, and so constructed as to be easily moved, a circumstance requisite from the frequent shifting of the bar at the mouth of Newbury Port Harbour. (Page 230.) IPSWICH LIGHTS. — There are two lighthouses on Ipswich Beach; they bear from each other W. ^ N. and E. ^ S. : keeping the two lights in one lead over the bar. The western light is a revolving one, the eastern light is fixed, (Page 233.) ANNIS SQUAM LIGHT. — The lighthouse is octagonal, painted white, with a light on Wigwam Point, upon the eastern side of the entrance. It is a fixed light, about 50 feet above the level of the sea; it may bo known by its being lower than any other lighthouse on the coast of Massachusetts, and its inland situation. (Page 233.) CAPE ANNE, ( Two Lights on TTiatcher's Island),— These lighthouses containt fixed lights, and are about ^ of a mile apart. The lanterns are elevated about 90 feet above the level of the sea; the lights bear from each other N. by E. jj E. and S. by W. | W., and may be seen 7 or 8 leagues off. (Page 234.) On STRAITSMOUTH ISLAND is a fixed light, about 35 feet above the level of the sea. (Page 234.) EAST POINT LIGHT, Gloucester Harbour.— Th\a is a fixed light, 57 feet above the sea, visible 6 leagues; you must give it a berth of a mile hi rounding the point, before you boar up for Ten Pounds Island light. (Page 234.) TEN POUNDS ISLAND LIGHT, Cape Anne's Harbour.— Thia is a small fixed light on Ten Pounds Island, within the harboui-, 45 feet above the level of the sea; it is intended to lead up to the harbour. (Page 235.) SALEM (BAKER'S ISLAND LIGHTS).— There are now two separate lighthouses on Baker's Island, the bases of which are about 45 feet above the level of the sea. One is 72 feet, the other 81^ feet high, and bear from each other N.W. i W. and S.E. ^ E.; the southern light is the highest, and is visible 6 or 7 leagues. (Page 236.) f XVI List of Lighthouses, Sfc. CAT ISLAND BEACON.— This island bears 8.W. by W., near 2 milea from Baker's Island, and 1^ milo from Marblehead Neck. The beacon consists of a spar, 40 feet high, to the top of which is annexed a cask, of about ISO gallons, which is seen at sea, 20 to 30 feet above the land. (Page 236.) MARBLEHEAD HARBOUR LIGHT.— This is a fixed light, 40 feet high, and is shown on the point of the neck, on the S.E. side of the harbour. (Pago 238.) BOSTON LIGHTHOUSE is situated on Little Brewster Island, on the north side of the entrance to the harbour. The light is a revolving one; it appears brilliant 40 seconds, and obscured 20 seconds, alternately. (Page 240.) LONG ISLAND LIGHT, Boston IlARBOun.— This is situated on the N.E. point of Long Island, and shows a fixed ligh^ 80 feet above the level of the sea, to enable vessels to run through the passage of the Broad Sound at night. (Page 240.) SCITUATE LIGHT. — These lights are situate nearly midway between Boston and Ply- mouth. This lighthouse shows two lights one above the other; the lower one is red, and the upper one is brilliant, 50 feet above tho level of the sea. (Page 242.) PLYMOUTH. — GcRNET Point Lights. — There are two lights on the Gurnet, a round hummock on the north side of the entrance to Plymouth Harbour. There are two light- houses, containing fixed lights, 96 feet above the level of the sea, and 18 J feet apart, visible 5 leagues. (Pago 243.) CAPE COD LIGHT.— This is a fixed light, 220 feet above the level of the sea, in latitude 42° 3', and longitude 70° 3' west; on the eastern side of Cape Cod the light is seldom seen mere than 6 leagues, on account of the haze over tho cape. (Page 244.) RACE POINT LIGHT, Cape Cod, is situated 155 feet distant from high water-mark, and 25 feet above tho level of the sea; it is a revolving light, on the same principle as that of Boston. (Page 245.) LONG POINT LIGHT, Province Toavn.— At .he entrance of this harbour is a f.xed light, 25 feet above the level of tho sea. (Page 24i<.) BILLINGSGATE LIGHT.— There is now a lighthouse erected upon Billingsgate Island, fitted up with lamps and reflectors, and bearing a fixed light, 40 feet above the level of the sea. From the west end of the island a shoal extends off full 10 miles, in a W. by S. ^ S. to aW. by N. direction from the lighthouse. (Page 245.) BARNSTAPLE HARBOUR LIGHT.— This is a fixed light, erected on a dwelling-house, over which it is elevated 16 feet; the light is on the west or starboard side of the entrance. (Page 246.) NAUSET BEACH LIGHTS.— On the eastern side of Cape Cod peninsula have been erected three lighthouses, 150 feet apait. (Pago 251.) CHATHAM LIGHTS are two fixed lights on James's Head, 70 feet above the level of tho sea; but they are only of use running over the shoals, os the beach has made out 2 or 3 miles since they were erected. (Page 2'jl.) MONOMY POINT LIGHT.— Tliis is a fixed light, 25 feet above the level of the sea, situated on Monomy Point, the extreme southern point of Cape Cod peninsula, and about 3 leagues to the southward of Chatham lights. (Pago 251.) < I ADDENDA. Since this Work teas published, the following alterations have been made, affect' ing the navigation therein described, and which the mariner will please mark with his pen in their respective places, before perusing the directions therein given. January, 1850. U6KT on MINOT'8 LEBOE. — The lighthouse recently erected on Minoi's Ledge is now so far completed, that it has been determined to exhibit a fixed light thereon, of the first order, on and after the evening of January 1st, 1850. Minot's Ledge, or Cohasset Rocks, is 8 miles S.E. ^ E. from Boston lijjht, and con- sists of fifteen large rocks out of water, and ledces all round these rocks, extending north and south, from 3^ to 4 miles. The depth of water round the rocks is 5 and 6 fathoms. When this light shall be lighted up, Scituate light, which is 6 miles to the southward of Cohasset Rocks, showing two lights, one red and the other white, will be sus- pended, by order of the Departments. Masters of vessels, pilots, and other persons interested, are requested to take espe- cial notice hereof. Custoni'House, Boston, Nov., 15th, 1849. (Page 243.) P. Gbeelt, Jun., Superintendent of Lights. CASHES LEDGE. — Another account, from the recent U. S. Coast Survey, 1849; extracted from the " Nautical Magazine," vol. xviii., p. 432. "Cashes Ledge. — Iteport from Lieut. Com. Charles H. Davis, U.S.N., dated June 12th, 1849, giving the particulars of his recent determination of the position of Cashes Ledge, off the coast of New England. "The determination Lieut. Com. Davis places Ammen's Hoek of Cashes Ledge in latitude 42° 56' north, and longitude 68° 51' 30'' west. As this differs nearly 12 miles in latitude and 12 miles in longitude from the last previous determinations, this official report is of the greatest importance to navigators. " The U. S. Steamer Bib, employed on this survey, remained at anchor on the rock 24 hours, during which time the boats were employed in repeated examinations of the surface of the rock. The sea was smooth, the wind west, the weather perfectly clear, and the southern and western horizon well defined. The latitude was observed — 1st, by the meridian altitude of the moon by three observers, agreeing within ^ a minute ; 2nd, by a meridian observation of the sun, with four sextants, agreeing within a mile. The longitude was determined by three chronometers, from Messrs. William Bond & Son, which were proved to have gone correctly. "The least water on this rock is 26 feet, although a less depth has been reported by the fishermen. The extent of the rock havin" 10 or less fathoms upon it, is about J a mile in a N.W. by W. and S.E. by E. direction, and very narrow; it is surrounded by deep water at a short distance particularly on the S.E. side, whei'e the depth sud- denly increases to 60 fathoms. "Note. — This rock has been named Ammen's Rock, in compliment to the officer who discovered it." [N. America — Part L] JUST PUBXiZSHED, By CHARLES WILSON, fEiaie J, W, JITorie 4* tWiiaon}, AT TIIK NAVIGATION WAREHOUSE AND NAVAL ACADEMY, iVb. 157, Leadenhall Street, near the lioyal Exchange, LONDON. A New Chart of the EAST COAST OF ENGLAND, from Dungencssto New-*' castle-upon-Tyne, including the Entrances of the River Thames to London, and the Coast of France, &c. from Boulogne to Flushing; with enlarged plans of the following Harbours, &c.:— Harwich Harbour and Entrance to ditto; the Stanford Channel, Cockle Gat, Boston Bar, Yarmouth lloads, and Coast from Covehithe Ness to Winterton Ness; Tees Bay, &c. to Port INIiddlesboro'; Scarborough, Hartlepool Bay, New Seaham Harbour, Sunderland Port, and the River Tyne to Newcastle : with various views of the principal Headlands Lighthouses, &c., and accompanied by a Book of Sailing Directions. — Drawn and compiled from the latest Surveys, by J. S. Honns, F.R.G.S., Hydrographer. ] 2 The above chart, for the convenience of purchasers, is sold in separate parts as follow : SuEET 1 . — From Dungeness to Orfordness, including the River Thames to Lon- don, and the Coast of France, &c. from Boulogne to Flushing. Price (without Directions) 4 o Pabt I. — The above continued to Wisbeach and Boston, &c. ; with enlarged plans of Harwich Harbour, the Stanford Channel, Cockle Gat, and Boston Bar, with views Price 7*. 6rf.; with Book of Directions. 9 Pakt II. — From Southwold and Lowestoff to Newcastle, including Yarmouth, Lynn Deeps, River Ilumber, &c. ; with enlarged plans of the Stanford Channel, Cockle Gat, Boston Bar, Yarmouth Roads, &c.; River Tees, &c. to Port Middlesboro', Scarborough, Hartlepool Bay, New Seaham Harbour, Sunder- land Port^ and the River Tyne to Newcastle, &c. with views... Price 9*.; with the Book of Directions 10 6 A New Chart of the GULF of FLORIDA and the BAHAMA ISLANDS, with the various Passages to and from New Providence; with enlarged Plans of Nassau Harbour and the new anchorage off the S.E. part of New Providence, with various Views of Headlands, Lighthouses, &c. Accompanied by a Book of Sailing Directions. Drawn and compiled from the latest Sur- veys, by J. S. HoBBS, F.R.G.S., Hydrographer 8 *. d. J^aflins Bivtctionsl ■ , f, ■ ■ • ' , , ( r • FOR ''"' '' "'1' f I '■' ' '"■•' THE COASTS, HARBOUES, AND ISLANDS OF .: .-M \, NOKTH AMERICA. & JV^OTE. — The bearings throughout the work are magnetic, and the soundings those taken at low water. An order, recentli/ issued by the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty, states, that in order to prevent mistakes which frequently occur from the similarity of the words starboard and larboard — in future, the word PORT is to be sub- stituted for LARBOARD in all H.M. ships or vessels. I . ."M.^n., "U.:* Labradore by the Straits of Belle Isle; and its south-western extremity from Breton i.^V~nd and JNova Scotia, by the great entrance into the gulf. Its length, from Cape Race to Cape Norman, is nearly 5^ degrees, and its breadth, from Cape Spear to Cape Anguille, about 6 degrees 51 miles; bemg very narrow at the northward, but becoming wide ae you approach southerly; its extremes lie between the latitudes of 46" ar and 51" 40', and the longitudes of 52° 40' and 59" 31' west. The general features of this large island are unequal, but for the most part high and woody, while the interior rises up in lofty grandeur, and gives birth to numerous lakes and rivers; the hills are covered with snow nearly five months in the year, and the banks near the shores are subject to heavy fogs, accompanied by snow and sleet; yet the summers on the island are generally dry and hot, and the winters clear and free from fogs. The whole circuit or the island is indented with inlets and bays, many of which are exten- sive, commodious, and well sheltered, where vessels ride in perfect security; into these bays and harbours numerous rivulets continually run, which, besides the hue purity of [N. America — Fart L] B 2 General Description of the their water, aflbrd abundance of trout and other fish. Most of tho harbour* have com- pleto anchora(i|efl, with clear and good channels into them, bo that they can be navigated at all times without the assistance of a pilot { they are fVcriuently situated so near to one another, that in many places they form a succession of Imrbours, but they are not all inhabited; the towns and villages are in general to bo i'^und in the larger branches only, where the situation and soil are most convenient; tlf inhabitants at present aro sairl to amount to nearly 100,000 persons. Cod fishing is the universal employment, for which they have their stages for drying, with their storehouses for curing aud laying up their fish, till the season arrives for disposing of them. The fisheries and oil trade nf the island have very much increased of late, and large quantities n-u sent to Great Britain and the colonies, as well as to the United States and continental Europe. The two principal towns belonging to the English, are St. John's, situated on the east- ern side of the island, and Placentia on tho southern side, both possessing excellent harbours ; the interior of the country is but little explored, and so overgrown with pines, firs, and birch, that, except where the inhabitants have made roads, it u almost Impassable. The French possess the right of fishing and drying their nets on the north and west shores of Newfoundlan(f; and they also may fish in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, but not within the distance of 3 leagues from any of the coasts belonging to Great Britain. The small islands of St. Pierre and Minquelon were given up to the French, on condition that no fortification shall be erected there, nor more than fiO soldiers kept up in the establishment. It was agreed in 1818 that the vessels belonging to the United States should hove, in common with British subjects, the privilege of fishing on the southern coast, between Cape Roy and the Ramea Islands, and on the western and northern coasts, fi om Cape Ray to Quirpon Islands ; also on the shores of the Magdalen Islands, and on the coasts, bays, harbours, and creeks of Labradore, from Mount Joli through the Straits of Belle Isle and thence northward, indefinitely along the coast as heretofore, but without pre- judice to the exclusive rights of the Hudson s Bay Company. And they also have the liberty to dry and cure fish on any of the unsettled bays, harbours, and creeks of the southern ports of Newfoundland and Labradore, but so long only as they shall remain unsettled. The BAirXf of mwrOVlTDLAini. — To the eastward, ns well as to the south- ward of tho island of Newfoundland, are n«tv oral extensive aand-hanks^ abounding with fish of various kinds; in sounding, the bottom is commonly covered with quantities of shells, and frequented by shoals of small fish, most of whicn serve as food for cod; and these thrive so amazingly, and arc ho inconceivably nuir veam, that although many hundreds of vessels have been annually supplied with them for more than two centuries, yet such a prodigous consumption has not apparently diminished their numbers. At the present time it is computed that Great Britain, France, and the United States, annually employ above 3000 sail of small craft, which, with those engaged in curing, drying, and pacxing the fish, cannot amount to less than 100,000 persons, supported by tile fishery atone; so that it must prove a most valuable branch of commerce for the merchK », a livelihood for the industrious poor, and an excellent nursery for seamen. But the fishery b not confined only to the banks, but extends in equal luxuriance to the shores and harbours of Newfoundland, Nova Scotia, and Breton Island. The fish commonly are most abundant where the bottom is sandy, a.ia Uie iJe'|.(h about 30 fathoms: where the bottom is of mud th'iy are observea to ')>-» Ick' t:i r serous, 'n winter they appear to retire to the deep water; but in February, I ':>- -b,^ua April, they come again on the banks, and fatten rapidly. The Great Bank of Newfoundland is to the eastward of the island, and extends from about the latiinde of 43" to 47° north, or upwards. Its form, like those of the other banks, is irreg^ilar, and not easily ascertained or defined; but about the latitude of 45°, its breadta >i nearly 5 decrees; to the southward it narrows almost to a point, and seems inseD:>ii) '^ .r to drcp into fathomless water; but the north end, which is nearly in the latituilo of Caue li.oyle, ic :.bout 60 miles across having 45 to 48 fathoms, sand and shells. lu je ]f.i>Lude of Cai'-r Race, or in 46° 40' north, soundings in 76 fathoms, whitish sand, w.f iho island ot cwfoundland and Nova Scotia, a chain of banhs extend almost 2 degrees from the lu I; these are called the Oreen Banh, St. Peter's, Banquera Snhle J. ''ind Bank^Scc, oil these have soundings over them of various depths, fVom 20 to 70 ts 'horns, admirably situate'l, in dark weather, to warn the mariner of his approu' h towarcn the land. The Outer, or Ftdee Bank, called also the Fle/nnh Cap. — This is a patch of risitig ground, lying 3 degrees to the eastward of tho edge ot the Great Bank, in 'atitud' 17° 30' north, and longitude 44° 10' west; its length is suppoK d to be about ii miles, and breadth 60 miles; on it are from 76 to 158 fathon -<; betM een it and the i-astern edge of the Great Bank is much deeper water, the b< torn being very fine san \ and oaze, which will hardlv stick to the lead; as you enter upon the Great Bank to 1 will have fine whitish sand, speckled black. Should you nml e the bank in this latitude, between 46° and 47°, you must be very careful to avoid h, ing drifted upon tl e Cape Race, or Virgin Rocks. These banks are frequently erjv loped in most dense fogs, which, from the middle of spring to December, have been k own to last 8 and 10 days successively ; at such times they are oflen so thick that you will not be able to see any object at 10 fathoms distance; a continual drizzling ram ia dropping from your saMs and rigging, a general calm prevails, and sometimes attt aded mtn a considerable swell of the sea, so that you are constantly in fear of running foul ' f some vessels, or being drifted by the currents upon some danger, which, from a total nability of discovering, you will have great difficulty to avoid. Added to this, the ct rents which surround the island of I!9^cwfoundland are frequently so violent and t>> irregular, sometimes driving towards the shore, and sometimes towards the sea, tha the greatest caution will always be found necessary, while the known current coming from the northern regions, sweeps along the shores of Labradore, and in the sprii g detaches immense ice-bergs, which float to the southward, and become exceedingly langerous, especially in foggy weather; some of these masses will frequently be gr( unucd it 40 and 50 fathoms water, and others will be met with farther out to seaward, at the distance of 125 or 130 leagues from the laud. Fortunately these formidable objects may generally be discovered, even in dark weather, by a white and bright appearance of the &y above them, and also by the roar of the waters breaking against them ; they may also be ap- prehended bv the intense coldness they diffuse to a great distance around them; they continue and are usually met with as late as June, July, and August. Your approach towards the banks may be known by the numerous sea-fowls which will attend you, as roches, mallmauks, and divers; these latter are seldom found more than 30 leagues off the banks, but malimauks and others are occasionally seen all across the Atlantic, but in the vicinity of the banks they become numerous. The great fishery begins in May, and continues till the latter end of September. The Tmonr, or OAVI BJkOE &00X8, are extremely dangerous; their exact situation has been ascertained to be in latitude 46° 26' 15" north, and longitude 50 i57 ■ 30" west. They extend in an irregular chain, or cluster, S.W. by W. and N.E. by E., 800 yards. The least water is on a white rock, in 4J fathoms, with 5 to 6J fathoms all around it, the bottom distinctly visible. Towards the extremity of the shoal are fVoin 7 to 9 fathoms on detached rocks, with deep water between them, the OTrrent setting M' M.W., a mile an hour. The bank on which the shoal is situated ex- tends E. by S and W. by S., 4^ miles, its broadest part 2 J miles, with regidar sound- ings of from 28 to 30 t'athoms, when they suddenly deepen, on its outer edge, to 39 and 43 fathoms. Tho sea breaks violently over these rocks in bad weather. In order, therefore, to avoid these dangers, it will be prudent to keep about the parallel of 46°, and when you reach the outer edge of the bank, and have obtained B 2 4 ' ., Sailing Directiom from soundings in longitude 48° 30' or 49° west, then, if bound for St. John's Harbour, steer north-westward for Cayxj Spear; but if bound for the Gulf of St. Lawrence, endeavour to cross the bank in 45° 30', and when about in the 55° or 56° of longitude, shape your course north-westerly for St. Paul's Island', or Cape North or Breton Island. In thick weather the lead should be kept going when leaving the western edge of the Green Bank, to ascertun when you fall into the deep guUey of 80 to 90 fathoms, mud, which runs N.N.E. and S.S.W., about 60 miles, between St. Peter's and the Green Bank. The middle of the guUey is in latitude 45° 35' north; by sounding in this gulley, and feeling the edges of the banks on each side of it, you will obtain a ^esh departure. Vessels from Great Britain, in the spring or winter, should keep well to the north- ward; for it has been long observed, that vessels from the Pentland Firth and the Clyde have invariably made their passages quicker than those from Bristol or the English Channel. The A'^erican packets always keep well to the northward during the win- ter season. Vess^, ■ bound to the Bay of Fundy, in the summer, would do well to keep far to the northward as latitude 47°, until they had reached longitude 40° west, then edge away so as to cross the tail of the bank in about latitude 43° 30' north; at this season you will be more clear of the numerous fishing-vessels that resort to the banks, and perhaps fall in with less ice ; but a strict look-out for the latter is always necessary^ After being to the westward of the banks, endeavour to keep in latitude 43°, to avoid the northern edge of the Gulf Stream; but in the winter the bank should be crossed well to the northward, to guard against the north-westers, which blow very heavy. "We have known two vessels pass the Pentland Firth together, in the mouth of April, bound to the lower ports in the St. Lawrence; the one had a passage of 21 days, and the other 7 weeks; the latter ship being the fastest sailer of the two. In comparing logs afterwards, it appeared they were both in about longitude 30° west on the same day, but the one was about TOO miles to the southward, with a gale at west, while th^ :^ to the northward was running 9 knots, with a fresh gale at N.E. All the ships which kept to the northward had fine passages. Currents. — The direction of the currents at the north and south, and on the eastern approach to the Great Bank, varies little from E.S.E. to S.S.E. (true), and is generally between these points; its velocity is seldom less than 8 to 10 miles in the 24 hours, and sometimes increases to 24 and 30 miles. Mariners should observe, that outside all the banks, and especially off the south part of the Great Bank, the currents boil and form such strong eddies, that a vessel becalmed, or with light winds, cannot estimate her position with exactness; this is probably occasiotied by the edge of the Gulf Stream. The currents on the Great Bank have a variable direction, of which the wind is not the onlv cause, as it is, at times, in a different direction. The fishermen state, that the current every day makes the round of the compass; and it is found, by close obser- vation, that beyond the meridian of Cape Race it is mostly to the westward. Vessels bound to the Gulf of St. Lawrence should take care to notice and make a proper allowance for the currents, which set from the eastward all along the southern shore of Newfoundland, and often with fatal velocity, causing violent indraughts into the various bays, occasioning the wreck of many vessels, and the loss of numerous lives. These currents chiefly prevail between Cape Race and Cape Ray ; more vessels have been lost near St. Shot's and Cape Pine than on any other part of the island. That these accidents are chiefly attributed to currents, there can be but little doubt. It is well understood by tb.o boat-masters employed in the fisheries, that there is generally a strong current setting in from the eastward along the southern coast of Newfoundland, which, after passing Cape Pine, runs towards St. Mary's and Placentia Bays. This current will be felt at least 20 leagues S.W. of Cape Pine, and becomes more rapid as you approach the land; its velocity increases as the wind favours its direction; but it is at all times of sufficient magnitude to endanger the safety of any vessel approaching from the S.W. in foggy weather. The fishermen, when coming from the westward, invariably use the lead, depending more on the depth of water than the compass. -.■..-- .■...:.- : ,1. - ■ . f. \ ,: ),i ■■ ,-.■■, Ir ■\- ^ i\_', ^i-' r. i ■ ■: ■,■:' • , ■ ■■:': \u Cape Race to St. John's Harhour. tt II.— EAST COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND. \K FROM CAPE RACE TO ST. JOHN'S HARBOUR. Variation 24 degreet west. GAPE AACS is the S.E. point of Newfoundland, and lies in 46° 39' 44'' north latitude, and in 63° 7' longitude west from Greenwich ; it is table land, moderately high; near it is a black rock, and several smaller ones around it. The cape itself is clear of wood, steep, and about 50 feet high. E.S.E. from Cape Race is a fishing-bank, over which are froin 17 to 20 fathoms water ; it is named the New Bank, and is about 5 miles long and 2 miles broad. From Cape Race to Cape Ballard the course is N.E. by E., distance 8 miles. About a mile southward of Cape Ballard is Chain Cove Head, appearing high and dark: between the points is a cove ; and to the \testward of Chain Cove Head is Chain Cove, having a black rock above water lying before it. Southward of this is Clam Cove, only fit for boats. RENOWES. — About | of a league N.E. from Cape Ballard, lie some small rocks, off Small Point; and 3 J miles beyond Small Point are the Renames Rocks; they are moderately high and bold- to, being distant from the land about a mile ; 1 f mile to the northward of these lies Renowes Island, situated near the main land; and about a mile to the southward of the entrance to Renowes Harbour, which is but an indifferent place of shelter, with a depth of water of 15 feet ; to sail into it you must keep the north shore on board, for several rocks lie scattered about its entrance, and S.E. winds commonly send in a very rough sea. FERMOSE. — Near 3 miles farther north is Fermose, or Fermowcs Harbour, and between them is Bear's Cove, off which a sunken rock lies a cable's length from the shore. There is no danger in sailing into Fennose Harbour, though the entrance is narrow; just within it, on the northern side, is a small cove, where a fishery is carried on, but the anchorage is indifferent; farther in is Admiral's Cove, where merchant-vessels ride land-locked, in 7 and 8 fathoms; and a mile within that, on the southern side, is Vice Admiral's Cove ; large ships anchor on its south side, in 12 and 15 fathoms, muddy ground, and very convenient for both wood and water. On the same side, farther in, 18 Sheep's Head Cove, directly off which, near the middle of the channel, is a hank, with only 9 feet, constituting the only known danger within this harbour. From Fermose Harbour, about a mile N.E. by E., is Bald Head ; N. by E. from which, a mile farther, is Black Head. AQUAFORT. — From Black Head to the entrance of Aquafort Harbour the course is N. by W., distant a mile, at the mouth of which is a rock above water; to the north- ward of this rock is the passage in, having 15 fathoms water; the harbour runs in W.N.W., about 3 miles, becommg narrow as you advance; here you have 4 fathoms water ; within the narrows, on the northern shore, is a little cove, where vessels may heave down, the shore being steep. To sail up, give the stony beach on the north shore a berth, it being shoal, except at the point of the narrows, where it is bold-to. FERRYLAND HARBOUR is to the northward, and its entrance is between Ferryland Head and Bois Island, being little more than ^ a cable's length wide. Ferry- land Head has two rocks near it, called the Hare's Ears; when you have passed these, and are within Bois Island, it becomes wider, having good anchorage, with 8 and 10 fathoms, but N.E. winds send in a heavy sea over the low rocks which run from Bois Island to the main. From Bois Island to Goose Island the course is N.N.E. ^ E,, distant ^ a mile, and from Goose to Stone Island the course is N.N.E. ^ N., distant ^ a mile. CAPLIN BAY. — At 2^ miles from Goose Island is Caplin Bay, running in N.W. by N.; there is a passage into it on either side of Goose Island; to the northward of Goose, and between it and Stone Island, there is no danger, the islands being bold-to; but, in passing between it and the Island of Bois, take care to keep the point of Ferryland Head open to the eastward of Bois, by which means you will avoid a sunken 6 Sailing Directions from rock, having only 2 fathoms water over it; this rock lies nearly midway between Goose Island and Cold East Point : and, having passed this roclc, no other danger will be found in sailing up the bay to the best anchorage, which is abreast of a cove on the port shore, and ^ a mile within Scogin's Head, with 16 fathoms water. From Ferryland Head to Cape Broyle, the course is nearly N.N.E., distant 2f miles. Cape Broyle is high land, making somewhat in the form of a saddle, and is the most re- markable land on this part of the coast. South of the north part of the cape, f of a mile, lies the Old Harry Rock, over which are only 3 fathoms water, though between the main and it are 20 fathoms. E.N.E. of the cape, distant f of a mile, are the Horse Rocks, having from 7 to 14 fathoms over them: the mark for these rocks is, a white house on Ferryland Downs, open with Stone Islands; and the head of Cape Broyle Harbour open, will lead directly upon them. In stormy weather the sea breaks very high over them. CAPE BROYLE HARBOUR runs in about 4 miles, between Cape Broyle and Brigus Head, their distance from each other being 1^ mile. Within the entrance, on the north side, is Admiral's Cove, where you may anchor in 12 fathoms water, good ground, but exposed to the S.E. The best anchorage will be found above the Narrows, in 7 fathoms ; the only danger in the way is the Saturday's Ledge, which lies about 1 J cable's length outside of the Narrows, on the north shore ; bring the saddle of Brigus Head open of the point of Admiral's Cove, and you will clear it; and after you get beyond the Narrows, anchor, in 7 fathoms, good ground, very convenient for both wood and water. BRIGUS. — This is a small cove, or harbour, a little to the northward of Brigus Head ; but it is only fit for boats. At 4^ miles from Cape Broyle is Cape Neddick, a kind of table land, moderately elevated, and steep-to. From Cape Neddick to Baline Head is 1^ mile; 4^ of a mile to the northward of this is Baline Cove, fit only for boats. The outer part of Great Island is about 2i miles N.E. by E. ^ E. from Cape Neddick ; and from Baline Head to Spear Island, the course is N.N.E.^E., distant a mile. Within this island is a fishery, but the anchorage is unsafe, and the bottom rocky. A mile to the northward is Toad's Cove, fit only for boats ; i a mile from which is Tinker's Point, the southern boundary of Momables Bay : this piuce is nearly a mile deep ; it is open, and its northern point forms the southern part of Witless Bay ; about f of a mile from which is Green Island ; and the same distance to the northward of Green Island, is Gull Island, about a mile in length, and ^ of a mile in breadth, the land appearing high. WITLESS BAY extends inwards full 2 miles from Gull Island, but lies open to the sea; the g.-ound is tolerably good, and the depth of water moderate; but half-way up is a le^e of rocks off the northern shore, part of which are seen at half-tide. BAY OF BULLS. — At 1 J mile to the northward of Gull Island is the southern point of the Bay of Bulls, and from hence to the northern point, called the Bull Head, the course is E.N.E. ^ E., distant 1^ mile: between these points the bay runs up N.W. by W., nearly 2 miles, and then N.W. by N., a mile farther, to the river head. Within this bay the riding is good, in from 20 to 16 fathoms; and after you have passed Bread and Cheese Point there is a cove ; off this latter point lies a sunken rock, at the distance of about ^ a cable's length, having passed which, the bay is free from danger, and the shores bold; run up and anchor over against John Clay's Hill, bringing it to bear N.E. by N., having 12, 13, and 14 fathoms; the merchant-vessels run farther in to 10 and 7 fathoms. From Cape Broyle to the Bay of Bulls the course is N.E. byN., distance 4 J leagues. From Bull's Head to the south point of Little, or Petty Harbour, from which a reef of rocks stretches out about ^ of a mile, the course is N.E., distance 8^ miles. The south point of Petty Harbour is distant from the north point 2 J miles, between which lies the bay, running in 2 miles; at the bottom of this is a cove and fishery. About midway between the Bay of Bulls and Little Bay is a cavern, having an opening at its summit, through which, whenever the sea runs higli, the water spouts through, forming a remarkable appearance, which may be seen far off; it is, therefore, significantly enough named the Spout. From the north, or Lady Point of Little Harbour, Cape Spear bears N.E., distant 2} miles; it has a low and ragged appearance, and is the easternmost part of New- i \ eagues. a reef The which About r at its St. John^s Harhmtr to Bacalieu Island. 7 foundland, and lies in latitude 47° 30' 53" north, and in longitude 52° 40' west. Vessels from the eastward, upon getting into soundings, and bound for St. John's, generally steer for this point. Between the cape and the entrance to St. John's are three bays; the first is called Cape Bay, and lies between Cane Spear and Black Head, the second is called Deadman's Bay, and lies between Black Head and|Small Point ; and the third is called Freshwater Bay, and lies between Small Point and Fort Amherst. On Cape Spear is a revolving light, 275 feet above the level of the sea; it shows a brilliant flash, at intervals of a minute ; visible 8 leagues off in clear weather. ST. JOBN'S HARBOUR is one of the principal places in Newfoundland, being the seat of Government; and although its entrance is narrow, its harbour is excellent, and its situation readily known, botn by the block-house built on Signal Hill, at the north side, and Fort Amherst on its south head, or point of entrance. The channel from point to point is only 360 fathoms wide; but it gets wider just within the points than between them, decreasing again as you approach the Chain Rock, for from the latter to the Pancake Rock, the distance is only 95 fathoms, these rocks both being above water, and steep-to: Chain is the northern rock, and Pancake Rock lies on the south side of the channel. Between the two latter rocks, and in the narrows, are three small knolls, with 18 to 24 feet on them. On Fort Amherst, on the south head of the harbour of St. John's, is a brilliant fixed light; also a battery and signal-post. In approaching the harbour of St. John's with a large ship, care must be taken to avoid tne Vestal Itock, which lies about 50 fathoms off the southern, or Fort Amherst Point; over this rock are 18 feet water; the marks for it are. Fort William, or the old garrison, iust open of the south head; and the outer Wash Ball Rock open to the east- ward of the Cuckold's Head; these latter rocks lie close to the northern point of the harbour, and are always above water, being steep-to, and, therefore, not dangerous. The course in is N.W. by W., the shore contmuing bold until you get near to the Pan- cake, then give the south side a small berth ; contmue the same course, or rather more inclined to the westward, keeping Fort Amherst flagstaff open to the northward of Frederick's Battery flagstaff; you will, by these means, fiVoid the Prosser, a rock on the port side, runnmg off the end of another rock, formed like a saddle, with 18 feet water in the hollow, and only 5 feet oa its outside; yet it is steep-to, having not less than 5 fathoms close to it; so soon as you are within, and have passed the Prosser Rocks, you may steer up as you please, both shores being clear of dangers, and anchor in from 4 to 10 fathoms water, on a bottom of mud, and lying quite land- locked. The winds from the S.W. to the southward, as far as N.E. by E., blow in, all other directions of the wind either baffle or blow out of the Narrows; with the latter winds you must warp in, for the convenience of doing which, rings are fixed in the rocks on each side. The anchorage within the Narrows has from 10 to 16 fathoms, and a little before you enter the Narrows there are 20 fathoms. The tides rise 5 feet, neaps 3^, but very irregular, being much influenced by the winds : and the variation is about 2 points west. It is high water, full and change, at about 7h. 50m. FROM ST. JOHN'S HARBOUR TO BACALIEU ISLAND. We recommend the mariner to be careful lest, if a stranger to the coast, he should mistake Kitty Vitty, a small place fit only for boats, lying about a mile to the north- ward of St. John's, for St. John's itself; at a distance it has the appearance of a good harbour. It must, therefore, be observed, that at the south side of Kitty Vitty is a round hill, shaped like a haycock, standing upon Cuckold's Head ; while St. John's Harbour may be distinguished by Fort Amherst, which appears white; and by the flag-staves on the hill, over the north point of entrance : these will sufficiently denote the right entrance. About a mile from Cuckold's Point is a small point or projection of the land ; and IJ mile farther is Sugar-Loaf Point, tapering upward, and much resembling a sugar- loaf. At 2^ miles farther is Red Head, between Sugar-Loaf Point and which is Logy Bay. ,,.v., ,,,„v. , - ,. . . ., , .,,,,.,;,,, ,„,- ,;,„;„.... 8 Sailing Directions from TORBAY. — At 1^ mile from Red Head is the south point of Torbaj, which is somewhat lower than the others. From this point to Gveen Cove, the customary place where vessels anchor, the course is W.N.W., about 2 miles, where you may ride in 14 and 12 fathoms, but it is much exposed to seaward. This bay is large, being a f\ill league in extent. From off its northern point is Bkflat rock, where the sea breaks. A heavy swell sets from the eastward into the bay, so that it ia not a good place to lie in. From Flat Rock Point, which is low, dark land, the coast runs northerly to Black Head, a distance of 3| miles; the latter bearing N. ^E., distant 5 miles from Torbay south point. CAPE ST. FRANCIS.— From Black Head to Cape St. Franc's the course is N.N.W., distant a league. Cape St. Francis has. a white appca* aiioe, and is itself low, but above it the land rises high. A little south of the cape is S je Cove, a place used in bad weather for splitting and salting their fish.* OiT *h- ;.5Vtj there is good fishing; and with northerly, westerly, and southerly winds, you will lie safe within the cove. About 1^ mile east of the cape lie the Brandy Rocks, in a triangular position, the outermost being distant from the cape 1| mile; the sea breaks over them, and there is a channel between them and the cape, but too dangerous to be attempted There are also other islets lying before the cove, a short distance off. These rocks add con- siderably to the safety of Shoe Cove. There is also another small cove, fit for boats, to the northward of the cape, which may be used with the wind off-shore. OOV OEFCION BAT.f — Cape St. Frances, which we have already described, is the southern point of Concepcion Bay. From Cape St. Francis to the southern point of Bacalieu Island, which may be considered the other point or boundary of Concep- cion Bay, the course and distance is N.N.E. ^ N., 5§ leagues. This is an extensive and deep bay, running to the south-westward, and comprehending many lesser bays and inlets. BELLE ISLE.— At 4 leagues S.W. by W. from Cape St. Francis is Belle Isle, in length 5^ miles, and in breadth about 2. This island is lofty, and its eastern side is nearly 3 miles off the main; there is, on this side, a beach, to the southward of which is good anchorage, in 30 fathoms, sandy ground; and a league farther, near the south part of the island, is also tolerable anchorage in from 15 to 30 fathoms. At the south end of the island is a small cove, called Lance Cove, where fishing-vessels sometimes resort to, and find good shelter for 5 or 6 vessels. A mile from the south part of the island lies a rock, over which is 3 fathoms water. At 2 miles S. by W. from Lance Cove lies a small low island, called Little Belle Isle; W.S.W. of which, distant IJ mile, is Kelly's Isknd, of middling height, and about f of a mile in length. Within Belle Isle, on the main, is Portugal Cove, the anchorage within which is not considered safe. To the southward is Broad Cove ; and at the bottom of the bay is Hollyrood Harbour, in depth about 3^ miles, in a cove, on the west side of which, is good anchorage in 8, 9, 10, or 12 fathoms water, and room enough to moor. Following the coast, about IJ mile from Hollyrood entrance, is Harbour Main, about 1^ nxile in depth and ^ a mile wide; it is an open place, but near the upper part you may anchor in from 7 to 10 fathoms water. O * In the Nautical Magazine for June, 1832, p. 190, will be found a copious description of the mode of fishing and curing in Newfoundland ; together with the important duties to be performed by the cut-throat, header, splitter, and salter. — From the British America; by John McGregor, Esq. 1832. t Concepcion Bat. — It is a fact worthy, perhaps, of a passing notice, that the land in and about the neighbourhood of Concepcion Bay— very probably the whole island — is rising out of the ocean at a rate which promises, at no very distant day, materially to affect, if not to render useless, many of tlic best harbours we now have on the const. At Port dc Grave a series of observations have been made, which undeniably prove the rapid displacement of the sea-level in its vicinity. Several large flat rocks, over which schooners might pass some 30 or 40 years ago with the greatest facility, are now approaching the surface, the water being scarcely navi- gable for a skiff. At a place called the Cash, at the head of Bay Roberts, upwards of a mile from the sea-shore, and at several feet above its level, covered with 5 or 6 feet of vegetable mould, there is a perfect beach ; the stones being rounded, of a moderate size, and in all res- pects similar to those now found in the adjacent land-washes. — Newfoundland Times, 1846. St. John's Harbour to Bacalicu Island. /■ ^ SALMON COVE. — A mile farther is Salmon Cove, the entrance to which is a mile wide. ITie course in is W.S.W., about 2^ miles ; it then divides into two branches, one to the westward, about a mile, the other southward, H mile; in either of these branches the anchorage is 'good, but the southern river is considered the better one, there being no danger in entering. In the western branch a rock lies at a small dis- tance from the starboard shore, having on either side a passage ; but the southern one is the wider of the two. ui- i COLLIERS BAY. — ^To the northward, pearly a league, lies Colliers Bay, running inward south-westwardly, full 2 leagues; 1 J mile from the entrance of which lies a sunken rock, nearly mid-channel, on both sides of which the channel is good; this rock is visible at three quarters' ebb. At 2^ miles up the bay is good anchorage, in 10 fathoms water, on the eastern side, and opposite a small cove ; into this cove vessels may go, and ride in 3 and 4 fathoms water. Higher up the bay is another cove, at the further t Bacalieu Island to Cape Bonamta. It Green Ba^ is anchorage in 15 and 16 fathoms, but It would be dangerous to go far into the bay, which is quite open to the eastward. At the bottom of this bay is a phicc where the Indians dig ochre to paint themselves. . _ At 4J miles to the north-eastward of Green Bay is Deyil's Point Cove, a place of little note, and farther on is Flamborough Head, black and steep- to; there is no good place of shelter hereabout, nor from Carbonierre to the island Bacalieu, except with the wind off shore. BAY VERDE is about ^ a mile to the westward of the head, and up to the cove is f of a mile ; the entrance is not above a cable's length across, and vessels lie about ^ a cable's length from the head of the bay, in 5 fathoms water, having a cab!e fastened to the shore, and an anchor out astern; six or seven ships can lie m this manner, but S.W. winds blowing right in, would make that a dangerous situation : it is also a bad place for either wood or water; but the great quantities of fish which resort here, occa- sion it to be much frequented. It is a place easily known by Bacalieu and the pro- jecting land, called Split Point. Bay Verde Head itself will serve to point out its position, for these three heads (Bay Verde Head, Split Point, and Bacdieu Island,) appear prominent bluff land, very similar to one another, as you come from the south- ward; and there is no hidden danger in entering the bay. The island Bacalieu is high land, nearly 4 miles long and 1^ brood, it is distant 1^ mile from the main, and between is a good channel: nearly midway, between its south- ern point and Split Point is a sunken rock, over which, in blowmg weather, the sea generally breaks, although it is 7 fathoms under water, and steep-to all round. From Split Point, about 4^ miles, is the Point of Grates, having rounded which, you will open Trinity Bay. . ; . . ,. i. . ,, , , .. , 4 FROM BACALIEU, OR BACALHAO ISLAND, TO CAPE BONAVJSTA. TBINITT HAT is, like Concepcion Bay, wide and extensive, and forms itself south- westward; like that also, it contains many lesser bays and harbours within it; these will be regularly described in rotation. Point Grates is the south-eastern point of the bay; from which, distant about 2 miles, is Break-heart Point, and between them is a kind of bay, where boats, with an off-shore wind, ride in safety ; within this bay is a ledge of rocks above water. To the southward of Break -heart Point is Scurvy Island, and between this island and Sherwick Point is a bay running in S.S.E. about f of a mile; the course from Break-heart Point to Sherwick Point is S.W. by W., 3 miles. Off the latter is a rock above water; this forms the northern point of Old Perlican; vessels cannot go betwee*^ the island and point, although the passage appears good and open, because uie ground is altorrether foul and rocky; always, therefore, run m to the southward of the island, and, when you have passed it, anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms : this cannot be considered a good harbour, as the ground is bad for holding, and with the wind at N.W. you will then be obliged to buoy your cables. From Old Perlican to Salvage Point the course is W. f N., distant 5 miles; Salvage Point requires a good berth, having a reef of rocks running out from it nearly a mile ; the point itself is low. From Salvage Point to Hunt's Head (he course is W. by S., distance 6i miles; and a mile to the eastward of the head is Hunt's Harbour, fit for small craft only; 2 miles off which is Hunts Harbour Rock, over which the sea generally breaks ; bring King's Head open of the Sugar Loaf, and you will clear it to the northward. At 2 miles farther is King's Head, and from King's Head to the Sugar Loaf the course and distance is S.W. J W., about 3 miles. Eastward of the Sugar Loaf is Sillee Cove, fit only for boats, and unsafe for vessels. NEW PERLICAN. — ^From the Sugar Loaf to the north point of the entrance of New Perlican, the bearing is S.W. i W., distance 2 miles ; and a mile farther is the harbour, small, but tolerably good, within which you may ride land-locked, in from 5 to 10 fathoms; the shores arebold-to. and free from danger; the entrance is nearly 2 miles wide, being bounded by Smutty Nose Point on the east, and Gorlob Point on the west; but as you advance the harbour becomes narrower, so that at the anchorage it will scarcely be ^ a mile broad. C 2 12 6'atltng Directions from HEART'S CONTENT.— At 3 miles from New Perlican w Heart's Content, a {jood harbour, fit for any ship, with excellent anchorage toward the north shore, in Irom 8 to 12 fathoms water. A league farther is Heart's Desire, fit for boats only; and 3 J miles beyond that is Heart's Deli-jht, another cove, adapted for small craft only. From Heart's Delight, about 3 miles, is Long Point, projecting considerably into the bay ; and a league farther is Witless Bay, by no means a place of safety, being' too much exposed, and the bottom rocky. Between Long Point and Wit which you leave on yorr port side. Witless Bay are two small islands, A mile from Witless Bay is Green Harbour, where vessels may anchor in from 7 to 10 fathoms; 3 miles farther is Hope-all-a^hcad; 2 miles beyond which is New Har- bour, a place of shoal water, and only fit for boats. pILDO HARBOUR.— At 2 J miles from New Harbour Is Dildo Harbour, within which is very good anchorage, in a cove, at the northern side of the entrance, in from 8 to 20 fathoms water, good clean ground. At 3 miles from thence is Chapel Bay, the mouth of which is a mile broad, and the bay about 3 miles deep ; here, behind a small island, about 2 miles in, is good anchorage, in from 8 to 12 fathoms. About 3 miles to the northward is Long Cove, running nearly in the same direction to Chapel Bay ; and 7 miles farther is the point of Tickle Harbour Bay, which runs inward, in a south-westerly direction, full 8 miles; there is no danger in the way; and, though little frequented, the anchorage is safe. BAY OF BULLS.— To the northward is the Bay of Bulls, running in a N.N.- Westerly direction to within 2 miles of Chance River, in P!acentia Bay; there is very good anchorage in various parts of this bay, in 12 and 10 fathoms water, particularly on the western side, in a cove, about 1^ mile from the entrance, with from 10 to 15 fathoms, sandy ground; to the N.E. is Bull Island; and 5 miles farther Copper Island ; both these lie very near the shore. We now open Deer Harbour, an extensive place and good for anchorage, but barred with many shoals ; the first shoal lies midway be- tween Tickle Point and Deer Island, having 6 fathoms on its shallo>vest part, and, therefore, not dangerous; but ^ of a mile farther in is a bank, with only 2 and 2J fathoms water ; bring the point of the N.E. cove open of Shallop Cove Point, and you will go clear to the westward in 7 fathoms water. There is also another shoal lying off the point on the outside of Shallop Cove, on which there are 2^ fathoms: this will be avoided by just opening the point of Deer Island with the first point on the 'nain, within Deer Island; and aft^r you have passed Harbour Island, you may anchor on good ground, in froni 10 to 26 fathoms. The entrance of Deer Hai*bour bears from the north point of Bacalieu Island W. ^ S., distant about 13 leagues. Full 2^ miles N.E. from the entrance to Deer Harbour is Jones's Ilai'bour, the mouth of which is not above ^ a mile wide, and the channel in is, in several parts, still less; it runs in 2^ or 3 miles, and has good anchorage in from 5 to 24 fathoms water. To the southward is a high and steep island, called Jones's Island; about 4 miles from which is Bald Head ; and 2 miles farther Ganny Cove : its entrance is confined, being not more than ^ of a mile wide; there is, nevertheless, good riding within it in 10, 12, and 15 fathoms ; about a cable's length off the north shore, just at the entrance, lies a sunken rock, and about a mile S.S.E. from the south point of Long Island, is another rock, by some called White Island, just appearing above water; this rock bears S.W. from Random South Head. Random North Head lies W. by N., distant 9 J leagues from the north end of Baca- lieu Island, and about 4^ leagues N. by W. from New Perlican. RANDOM SOUND lies to the westward, and comprehends several arms and har- bours : thus Random and Smith's Sounds unite, and form Random Island, the channels being long, narrow, and circuitous; at the junction of the two sounds is a small island, with a bar of only 2 fathoms water, the passage being not a mile broad. About 3 leagues from Random North Head lies Hickman's Harbour, where you will find good anchor- age in 15 fathoms. Random North Head bears from Random South Head N.E. ^ E., distant S miles. When you are within the entrance of Random Sound there is a branch runs in towards the S.W., about a mile within which is Fox Cove, fit for boats; and 2 miles farther Little Heart's Ease, a similar cove running in 4- of a mile, then dividing into two branches; the western one has 4 and 5 fathoms within it, but the eastern branch is shallow, and adapted for boats only. There is also an anchorage, 2 miles farther, on the same side, m a cove with an island before it, with 8 fathoms; and BacaUeii Island to Cape Bonavista. 13 I i T It not fur from this Is another cove, on the northern tiidc, where a vessel mny ride in 7 fathoms. SMITH'S SOUND has generally deep water, and is, in most places, a mi'le wide, until you get near the head. Shut-in Harbour is on the starboard side ; it is nearly at the entrance, and has no safe anchorage, the ground being r v ; 3 miles farther up is Pope's Harbour, which is also encumbered with rocka^ a aAot.. lying near the middle of it. The direction of the channel is westward about 7 J leagues. To the eastward of Random Island are Duck and Green Islands, both lying a considerable distance from the main; the latter is hich, and may be seen so far as Trinity Harbour, it bears from Bo ^venture Head S.W . \ W., distant about 6 miles ; and Bonaventure Head bears from the entrance of Smith's Sound E. by N., distant 5 miles. To the north- westward of Green Island is Anthony Island and Ireland's Eye ; the latter is 3^ miles in length, and lies in a S.W. and N.E. direction, making the port side of the entrance to Smith's Sound. The northern point of Ireland's Eye bears from Bonaventure Head nearly S.W., distant 5^ miles. There is a small place of anchorage called Ryder's Harbour, formed by a little island near the main, and bearing from Green Island VV. \ N., distant 4 miles ; the passage to it is round the west end of the point, off which are some scattered rocks, both above and under water; within this harbour are 3 fathoms water, and about ^ of a mile from Ryder's Island the N.W. arm branches off, running westward a mile, and being about :| of a mile wide ; here are 7 fathoms and good anchorage. From Bonaventure Head to Port Bonaventure is 2 miles ; but when you are a mile off, and to the southward of the head, the harbour to the Admiral's Stage will lie about N. by W. PORT BONAVENTURE'S best entrance is between two smallislands, but you may go on either side of them in 3 and 4 fathoms water ; with a leading wind there will be little danger, ond when you are within, and have passed these islands, anchor in 4 and 5 fathoms; southerly winds here send in a very heavy sea; there is, however, a secure place for boats withm a point behind the Admiral's Stage, appearing like a great pond, where 100 boats may lie, even with bad weather, in safety. From Bacalieu north point to Bonaventure Head, the course and distance is N.W. ^ W., 22^ miles. Bonaventure Head is remarkably high and p+'^ep. From Bonaventure Head to the entrance of Trinity Harbour, the course and dis- tance are N.E. ^ N., 4^ miles, and from Bonaventure Head to the Horse-chops E. ^ N., 8 miles. . , -< TRINITY HARBOUR is considered one of the best and largest harbours in all Newfoundland, having several arms and coves, where some hundred ships may ride land-locked. It is a place which you may safely turn in or out, being bold-to on each side, and having no danger but what is visible; except when going into the S.W. arm, where the Admiral's Stage usually is, there is a shoal, called the Muscle Bank, which shoots off from the point within the small island on the port side going in, and extends over N.N.W., about ^ the breadth of that arm. Being within that bank, which will discover itself by the colour of the water, you mav edge over close to the south shore, or keep your lead going to avoid the Muscle Bank, giving it a little distance; the mark for avoiding it is the house, standing over the steep perpendicular rock, situated between Tavernor's Point and Ship Cove, open of the Neddick; keep this mark on, until you are half-way over to the Neddick, then haul towai-d the S.W. branch, taking care to avoid the south shore, till you shut in Tavernor's Point with the Neddick ; you will then go within the Muscle Bank. You may anchor in from 14 to 10 fathoms, and approach near to the stage on shore, so as to make a stage with top-masts to your stage on shore, to load or unload your ship. This will be found a most excellent harbour; for, after you are in the S. W . arm, you will perceive another branch running up to the N.W., which is continued by another to the S.W.; but there is a bar, or ledge, at the entrance of the S.W. arm. The N.W. arm is also a large place, having good anchorage for 500 sail of ships. Besides the before-mentioned arms, the main harbour turns up to the north. Ships being within the harbour's mouth, may safely ride in a large cove on the stai'board or east side, land-locked, on gooc' ground; here the planters live. Over against that cove, on the port or Avest side, are two other coves ; the southernmost of thein is called the Vice- Admiral's Cove, very convenient for curing fish ; and above, or 14 Sailing Directions from to tlie northward of that, is a large covo, or arm, called Qots' Cove, whore there is room enough for 300 or 400 sail of ships to ride, all on clear ground; there, neither winds, sea, nor tide can hurt you : and in tliis place ships may Tie undiscovered until the weather becomes clear and open. There are several other anchoring places in this harbour with good clean ground. The bottom every where is tough clay, with 4 and 5 fathoms water, within 2 boats' length of the shore; and 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, and 14 fathoms, and in some places more, in the middle of the arms and channels. You may turn in or out readily, observing your tide, which rises about 4 feet, and sometimes more. ROniNHOOD'S BAY.— Sherwick Head, which is the eastern point of Trinity Harbour, fbrnis also the south-western boundary of Robinhood's Bay, the entrance to which is a mile wide, and the bay extends northward nearly 2 miles; here vessels fre- quently ride and fish, in from 7 to 17 fathoms water; at the further, or upper end of this buy are some apots of shallow water, but at its entrance, and between Hherwick and Fox Island Points, there is no danger whatever. SALMON COVE and ENGLISH HABOUK lie to the eastward of Robinhood's Bay, being only divided from it by a narrow neck of land, called Fox's Island. The former of these runs in northerly, and is considered a good fishing place; it is clear of dangers, and has a good depth of water, fVom 17 to 10 and 8 fathoms; the eastern shore is bold-to, and at the farther end of the cove there is a small run of water, which extends about 2 miles to the northward. ENGLISH HARBOUR is situated at the south-eastern entrance of Salmon Cove; it is a clean bay, where you may ride in 4 and 5 fathoms water. From hence the coast rounds to the eastward to the Horsechops, a distance of more than 3 miles; it is all high land, steep-to and without danger. To the north-eastward of Horsechops is Green Bay, open, and entirely exposed to the southward; at the eastern part of this bay is a small sandy beach with a rivulet of water ; this place is little freouented, and is neither convenient for ships to fish or ride in. When you have passed this bay, there is no sheltering cove or place until you reach Ragged and Catalina Harbours. RAGGED HARBOUR is so named from the rough and craggy appearance of the surrounding rocks, which render it unsafe for either boats or ships to enter; but for those who intend going there, we shall observe, they must /,'o to the northward of the reef of rocks at its entrance, running on north, until the harbour comes quite open, then you may steer in between the Round Island near the main, and a large black rock, being the outermost of the ragged ones before mentioned ; sail on until you are to the westward of them all, or until you get the south head of Catalina to appear between the westernmost rock and the main, then anchor. A river of good water is at the head of the harbour. CATALINA HARBOUR is nearly 2 miles to the northward of Ragged Harbour, and is in the latitude of 48° 31' 15^' north, bearing from the north pomt of Bacalieu Island nearly north, distant 24 miles. It is a good harbour for small vessels, and may be known by a singular green island at the south point of its entrance; nearly ^ a mile to the north of this island is the Brandy Rocks, a ledge, over which the sea frequently breaks; you may go on either side of these rocks, giving the little island a berth, or with a leading wind between the island and the main, though this passage is exceeding narrow, in 4 and 5 fathoms. Just within the entrance of the harbour is Charlton Rock, or Shoal, lying nearly mid-channel, over which are only 8 feet water; you must avoid bringing the north point of Green Island on with Burnt Head, the south point of the harbour, for that will carry you right upon the rock; there is a passage between the island and the rock, and also between the rock and the north shore, only steering nearer the main, about f over. LITTLE CATALINA BAY lies inward on the northern side; from Catalina Har- bour to Little Catalina the course is about N.E,, l^mile; and thence to the north head of the bay E.N.E., a little easterly, 3J miles; when within the harbour you may anchor close to the shore in 4 and 5 fathoms, land-locked; or to the southward of the Little Green Island in 3^ fathoms, or by running up 2 miles farther, obtain fresh water. In the S.W. arm, or branch of the river, where there is anchorage in 5 fathoms, the har- bour runs westerly. Sometimes the water in this harbour will suddenly rise 3 or 4 feet, then fall again, and in certain seasons it will often do so two or three times in 3 or 4 hours. It abounds with salmon, and the herb, Alexander, grows luxuriantly on the Capo Bonamsta to Cajn Frr,h. U I little island. Near n Binall covo at the N.W., is a sort minoriil, « a plitterinjf nature, generally ciilled fire-stone. Excellent willicks um\ i'ound on ho r^ck^ From the south to the north head of Catalina the course is N.L. ^' E., 'li> i( 6^ milea, and between them are from 13 to A fathoms water; the wiioK; v ii a kind of broken ground, and in blowing weather the sea frcc^uontly breakH «A\ over it. From the north head of Catalina to Flower's Point, the course is N.N.E. \ E., diitMit 2^ miles; and a mile to the eastward of the point lie some sunken rocha; you may go between Flower's Point and these rocks, in 6 fothoms water, but it is more advisa- ble to pass on the outside of them ; this you will readily do by bringing Gull Island open of Spiller's Point, or by keeping the south head of Catalina open of the north head. From Flower's Point to Bird's Island is 2 miles ; within Bird's Island is a small bay where ships can occasionally ride, in one branch which runs up toward the west, and in the other, amidst some rocks, which are above water. Bird's Island Bay extends so far as Cape L' Argent. rather a low rocky point, From Flower's Point to Capo L' Argent is 3 J miles ; it is having also a large rock above water lying oiSf it. From Cape L' Argent to Spiller's Point is 1^ mile; between these points the lead falls into very deep water. Spiller's Point is steep and bold-to, but not very high, with a rock above water near it; over the point you may discern the high land of Port Bonavista a great way off at sea. From Spiller's Point to Cape Bonavista the course is north, distant almost a league ; between tnem is a deep bay, which mi^ht be mistaken for the harbour of Bonavista, from the head of which it is only divided by a neck of land, 2 miles over, and from Ked Head Bay, it is not above a musket shot. Hitherto the allowance made for the variation of the compass has been two points west, which it is presumed will be found sufficiently near to the truth for all the pur- poses of navigation; but from hence, to the northward, it appears to have generally in- creased. The Admiralty surveyors found the polarity or the needle subjected to several localities at different parts of the coast, and becoming less as you get embayed. At the capes which form Bonavista Bay, the variation in 1820 was 30° 28' west, at Barrow Harbour 28° 30' west, and at Happy Adventure only 28°. :i FKOM CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE FREELS (NORTH)* ' Variation 28* west. - i: •*,. CAPS SOMAVZSTA is in latitude 48° 42' north, and longitude 63° 8' west. On it there is a revolving light, showing a red-and-white light alternately, at intervals of 2 minutes; it is elevated 150 feet above the level of the sea; and kept open of Spiller's Point, will keep vessels clear of the Flowers Rocks. The cape appears from a distance of a bluish colour, and is a steep rocky point, having 4 fathoms close to the shore. Somewhat less than J of a mile N.N.E. from the extremity of the cape lies Gull Island, which, though small, may easily be recognized, by being of moderate height, and elevated in the middle, making something like a round hat with broad green brims, and visible 4 or 5 leagues off when the weather is clear. N.N.E. ^ E., distant 3^ miles from Gull Island, is the Old Harry Rock, having only 13 feet water over it; from this a reef or hank extends to the N.E., nearly 3 miles, having several dangerous spots upon it, of only 18 feet and 3 or 4 fathoms ; the outer edge of this danger h called the Young Harrys and lies in latitude 48° 48' north, and Ktngitude 53° 6' west; at its northern extremity is 10 fathoms water, and a little farther off 45 fathoms; between the Young Harry and the middle ground of 18 feet, are 12, 20, and 50 fathoms ; to the northward of the middle ground are 60 and 40 fathoms, to the east- ward 19 and 20 fathoms, to the southward, and between it and the Old Harry, 26, and 31 fathoms; at the north part of the Old Harry are 11 fathoms, to the westward 30 * So called to distinguish it from a cape of the same name situated ou the southoru pturt of Newfoundland, near St. Mary's Kuy. , ; ,, ,„. s, . ,; , ,.!/ }$ Skill' tig Direct torn from and 18 fathoms water in it, and no danger except a sunken rock of 3 fathoms water, which lies about 200 yards to the N.E. of Green Island; or they may go to the west- ward of Stone Island, and run on southerly until they open the points of the harbour, and having passed Moses Point, sail to the southward of Swerry's Rocks; these are always visible, and have no passage between them and the point; here they may anchor in 10 or 8 fathoms. The inner passage, between Cape Bonavista and Green Island, is frequently attempted by small essels; the channel is in some parts narrow, and the ground foul; about a mile to the south-eastward of Green Island is the ledge of red rocks; you may go be- tween these and the land into Red Cove ; there are 6 fathoms water, and in the cove 4^, 4, and 3 fathoms ; but the ground is all foul ; there is a passage also to the southward of these rocks, and between them and the western head, in which are 6 fathoms. A little to the eastward of western head is a small rock under water; it lies about a cable's length from the shore, and the sea commonly breaks over it, but boats can go between it and the shore. To the southward is Red Head, or Point, and farther on is Moses Point; between these is another opening, called Bayley's Cove; you may, in fathnmH, to the S.W. fathonis, and a little farther S.W. i57 fathoms. Abundance of fiHh arc (*aui;ht by the bouts whi<>h fr(>(|uent thi.t bunk, l)ut it \h very dnngerouH for shipping. 'J'he 8(!a commonly bri-akH over Old Hurry, uiiIcha in fine weather and the water be very Hmo«)th; but tlie other nart of tlic HhouU nhow themselves only in, or immediately atler, heavy gales on the snore. In order to avoid the Old Harry, you should bring Gull Island on with tlie Green Ridge, which lies conHiderably inland; but yu !"u.-(t neware, for this murk will curry you too close to the Young Hurry, Captain liullock, who surveyed tluH part in 1820, nays, " Vessels running along shore, to avoid these rocks, must be careful in keeping Cupe Ronuvista open with the westernmost extremity of a high range of land to tiio southward, called tiie Inner Ridge; these dangers, together with the lutig ledge, culled the Flowers, already noticed, render it very imprudent for a mariner to uttenipt making land hereabout in thick or boisterous weather; indeed, at any time, the iHluncl of Raca- lieu is the best and safest land-full for the stranger that is bound to any part of Ronavista Ray." ., „ . ;„. . BOMAYISTik BAT. — This extensive bay is formed, on the south, by Cape Rona- vista, and on the north by Cape Freels; these capes lie N. if K. and S. }W. from each otiier, and comprehend a distance of 37 miles, between which the coast is much in- dented with bays nnd inlets of the sea, most of which are navigable, but diiiicult, rocky, anr at thoir an- chors, and not unfrequcntly many of their Htoges are destroyed. Vv«Mel.s, during tho auuimer months, commonly moor under Swerry Head in 8 or 10 fathoms; but even here, and every other part of this harbour, the ground is so rocky and uneven, that you will be oWigecf to buoy up your cable. BLACK HEAD HAY. — This is a wide and deep bay, comprehended between Black Head to the eastward, and Southern Head to the westward. Black Head bears from Cape Bonavista W.S.W. ^ S., distant /5 miles; Southern Head bears from Cape Bo- navista W. J N., distant 1 1 miles ; and Black Head and Southern Head bear from each other E.S.E. J S. and AV.N.W. f N., being nearly 7 miles apart. On the western side of Black Head Bay is KING'S COVE, distant about 4 miles from Southern Head; this is also a fishing establishment, but still more objectionable, aa a place of shelter, than Bonavista, for this is directly open to seaward, the ground is all foul. KEELS. — This is another establishment for the fisheries, and situated in one of the coves about midway between Southern and Western Heads; between these two heads ore four other coves : but neither Keels nor any of these coves, are fit or good places for anchorage, especially with ships of burthen. From Western Head the lane avoi j SANDY COVE lies farther up Newman's Sound, and has good anchorage; it may readily be known, having the only sandy beach on the north side of the sound ; there ia no danger in entering, and it is perfectly safe, the depth of water being from 10 to 20 fathoms. In sailing to this place, and keeping along the northern shore, between Barrow Harbour and Sandy Cove, you will meet with a rocky islei, called Half-imij Rock; it is steep-to, and has 4 fathoms close to it: there is also a deep-water channel between it and the main, but keep outside, and pass to the southward of it, and there will be no danger. GREAT AND LITTLE ADVENTURE COVES. — These are two snug little coves, lying about J of a mile above Sandy Cove, and on the same side of Newman's Sound; but, from the narrowness of their entrances, they are fit only for small vessels. Between these coves, and off a point of land which separates them, lies a sunken rock, about 80 yards from the shore, with only 4 feet over it. Off the entrance to Great Adventure Cove lies Sydney Island ; the passage in is to the northward of this island, for between the island and Harbour Head there is no passage. NORTH BROAD COVE.— The entrance to this place lies 1? mile from Harbour Head, and is on the northern shore ; it is a convenient and well-sheltered anchorage, and may be easily known by a round island lying at its western side, named Black Duck Island. Sailing into the cove, you should keep the island on board until you make a tickle* between it and the westers shore, to avoid a sunken rock at its eastern side ; after which, it is advisable to keep as close as possible to the '"''s';ern shore, for there is a dangerous rock lying mid-channel: being inside of this rock, you may anchor in from 10 to 25 fathoms, muddy ground. Wood and water may easily be obtained. In advancing farther up Newman's Sound, there are some other dangerous rocks lying off the northern shore, one of which is called the Shag Rock, and lies J of a mile beyond Black Duck Islet; and a mile farther on is the ^a^« Rock: both these are under water, and distant about a cable's length from the land; they have 4 and 5 fathoms close to them, and a passage between them and the shore, of 6 and 7 fathoms : therefore, in sailing up Newman's Sound, the northern shore should always have a good berth; keep nearly ^ a mile off, and you will avoid them all. SALVAGE BAY lies on the northern side of the promontory which divides it from Newman's Sound; it has several runs of fresh water within it, but no place of good shelter. DAMNA HARBOUR lies to the northward of Salvage Bay; between them are several small islands and rocks, the largest of which is named the Baker's Loaf, and is a narrow island, about J of a mile long. To go to this place from Gull Island, Bona- vista, you should steer W.N.W. f N., about 7 leagues, and round the Shag Islands; * Tickle — a narrow passage between the islands and rocks. iiii Cape Bonavista to Cape Freeh. n proceed thence to the noi liward of the Baker's Loaf, or steer N.W. by W. from the Gull towards Ship Island, which may readily be known by a remarkable bald point, like a sugar-loaf; then W. | S. from Ship Island, 5^ miles, will bring you to the en- trance of Damna Harbour : this place is well adapted for the reception of small ves- sels, but its very narrow entrance disqualifies it for ships of burthen. Tliere is a rock off the southern part of the entrance, and another off the northern side of the island, which lies in the middle of the harbour. There is good anchorage all round the island, in 4 and 5 fathoms, sandy bottom. Fresh water is easily procured, but the wooding is scarce. MORRIS'S COVE.— This lies on the north side of Morris's Island, and Is con- sidered to be a safe anchorage. In sailing for this place. Captain Bullock advises the mariner to keep Ship Island well on board, on account of a dangerous ree/" which ex- tends from Flat Island nearly § of the way towards Ship Island, on some parts of which are not above 17 or 18 feet. Proceed, therefore, to the northward of Ship Island, pass- ing at not more than ^ a mile distance; and when you are well inside, avoid shutting in Lackington Rock with Varket Island : this latter will be known by its appearing like two singular hummocks, on account of there bein^ several cliisters of rocks between Ship and Horsechop Islands; steer for Varket until you get abreast of Lackington Rock, then keep Lackington Rock on the northern extremity of Ship Island, until the Varket bears north, in order to clear the two sunken rocks off the en(f of Morris's Island. You may then steer directly for the cove, which you can enter without fearing obstruc- tion, and anchor in any part thereof, in 25 to 5 fathoms; but the western side of the cove is to be preferred. Wood is plentiful here, but water in the summer season rather scarce. BAY OF FAIR AND FALSE. — This place may contain several good anchorages; but it is so filled with small islands and rocks, that no description we could give would be of any use to the mariner. A cluster of large islands extends off the frontage of this bay, full 20 miles, or so far as Offer Gooseberry Island; between these are pas- sages innumerable, with deep water; there is also a wide channel, running from Fair and False Bay, and Morris's Island, to the northward : this leads to Bloody Bay, which then turns westward, and is divided into various branches, forming the N.W. Arm, the Middle Arm, aad the N.E. Arm ; this latter being a peculiar and extensive channel, running in one direction, southward, almost to Newman's Sound, and in another almost to Damna Harbour : all these are navigable, and afford places of good anchor- age, and plenty of both wood and water. There is also an open strait from Bloody Bay to the eastward, through Bloody and Cottel's Reaches, and out to the northward, of Offer Gooseberry Island. Other channels branch, off to the northward from Bloody and Cottel's Reaches, and between the Lakeman's Islands, running into Pitt's Sound, Locker's, and Content Reaches, and tlience to Freshwater Bay. Witliin these, and on the northern shore, are Hare, Locker's, Trinity, Indian, and many other lesser bays, coves, and inlets, abounding with good anchorages, and calculated to afford shelter for shipping of all descriptions, in cases of necessity: these are, at present, but little known, and frequented only by the constant traders ; we shall, therefore, proceed to those which are the usual places of resort, and are better situated for the purpose of fishing. Vessels coming from the south-eastward, and bound to the northward, for New Har- bour, Greeuspond Tickle, Cat Cove, the N.W. Arm, or anchorages adjacent, frequently take their departure from Cape Bonavj^ta; in which case, their course will be N. by W., to clear the Eastern Rock, which lies E.S.E., distant 1^ mile from Offer Gooseberry Island, and is situated in latitude 48° 57' north, and longitude 53° 32' west. From thence they should steer N. J E., to Copper Isknd, at th j mouth of Greenspond Tickle. Here pilots may frequently be obtained to conduct you to this, or any of the adjoining anchorages. There is good holding ground between Greenspond Island and the main ; but the water is generally so deep, that a vessel is liable to be drifted on shore in the act of weighing; nor is there sufficient room to veer out a lengthened, cable, in heavy gales from the S.W., to which quarter it is much exposed. ,{,, ; Ships coming from the eastward, or round Cane Freels, must be careful to go clear of the Charge Mock, which lies S.E. f S., 2^ miles from Gull Island of Cape Freels; this has only 6 feet water over it, and is circumscribed by a large spot of rough fishing ground, with from 8 to 30 fathoms upon it. From the Gull Island of Cape Freels you i 1 2^ Saiting Directions from \ I . may run iinmotliately for the Stinkinfj: Islands, taking care not to onen Cape Freels to the eastward of the former ; this will carry you inside the danger. You should keep a good look-out for the mid rocks, which appear just above water, and lie 2 miles N.N.E. \ E. from the Stinking Islands; but vessels not bound up the bay, are strictly recommended to keep outside of them all ; for should the weather become suddenly thick and fon;gy, a circumstance by no means unusual, more especially with an easterly wind, you will run great hazard of getting bewildered among the innumerable rucks which are scattered so profusely about this part of the coast, and. from which neither compass nor chart can extricate you. In the winter months, when north-easterly gales are generally heavy and continuous, the sea breaks exceedingly high over several spots of the Stinking Banks, which lie E. by N. fi'om the islands, distant about 2^ miles. In tAVO places there are only 7 fathoms f)ver these banks ; and in such weather, although a ship would not strike, she would be in great danger of foundering in the tremendous sea which would then frequently break over her ; but when the weather is settled, and. the sea smooth, they are by no means dangerous. Having rounded the Stinking Islands, and wishing to sail into New Harbour, or Cat Cove, you may, with propriety, steer S.W. by W. ^ W. directly for Offer Gooseberry Island, until you bring Pouch and Flower Islands to touch each other ; you will then be 2 miles outside of the three rocks, which lie 1^ mile to the southward of Flower Island: the outer »ock has 3 fathoms over it, the middle rock 14 feet, and the inner rock only 11 feet. You will now alter' your course to W. \ S., keeping the white face of Chalky Hills a little on the starboard bow, which will take you clear of Copper Island dangers; then, should the inclemency of the weater prevent your getting a pilot on board, you can continue this course until you bring Shoe Cove Point, which may be distinguished by its semblance to white marble, to bear N.W. | W.; then shape your course W.N. W. for Indian Bay. , ,- . NEW HARBOUR is situated on the eastern side of Indian Bay, about 2 miles from the Shoe Cove Point; this place, during easterly winds, will be quite inaccessible, on account of its narrow entrance; in this case, you must proceed onward, about 4 miles, for Cat Cove. CAT COVE. — In order to reach this place, you will proceed between Silver Hair and Brown Fox Islands and main; and as you approach the latter, the channel narrows, and you will have a narrow island on your starboard side ; this is Cat Island, behind which is Cat Cove ; you will have no difficulty in distinguishing this island, it being the only part that is .covered virith live woods, for the surrounding forests have all been destroyed by some general conflagration. Off the upper part of Cat Island^lie two high green rocks ; you must go round these, for the water Is too shoal to go between them : having done so, you may run on until you get some distance inside uie upper point of the island, when you may anchor in from 5 to 13 fathoms, with a hawse open to the N.W., the winds from that quarter being most heavy and squally. In working in, you may stand close to either shore, except off the point of the island, as there is a sunken rock within 100 yards of it, with not more than 10 feet water over it. NORTH-WEST ARM.— This is situated on the main, in latitude 49° 7' north, and is the place ol safety nearest to Cape Freels; but its entrance is very difBcult, on account of the number of islands that surround it, and these islands are almost undis- tinguishable one from the other, from their similarity of appearance. In coming from the southward for the North-Wcst Arm, the greatest danger you will have to encounter is the Northern Rock, which never has less tnaqr22 feet over it; this lies N.E., distant 1| mile frcm the Copper Island; this island you will easily recognise by its having no wood upc. . it, and by its height. In fine weather and a smooth sea, vessels may pass over the rock in perfect safety ; but in hard gules, the waves beat over it incredibly high. To avoid it, be careful to open Fool's Island, which is somewhat higher and more prominent than the rest, and which is covered with trees, except about the summit, to the west- ward of the Western Pond Rock, until you get Butterfly Island to touch the inner part of Flower Island, or until Puffin and Copper Islands touch each other; then, leaving the Pond Rocks on your starboard °'de, steer in for Fool's Island; it is advisable to Keep this island well on board, for there is a sunken rock lying mid-channel, exactly between it and Partridge Island Rocks; this danger has only 18 feet water over it: but no mark can be given to avoid this rock. The course then u]> the arm will be N.W. \ W., and so soon as you get inside of Odd Island, you may anchor, on muddy ground, in from ' > Frcels lid keep 2 miles strictly uddenly easterly lie rocks neither rly gales ral spots lies. In ilthough inendous tied, and hour, or ioseberry will then f Flower the inner rhite face (er Island 1, pilot on h may be »ape your t 2 miles iccessible, rd, about Iver Hair I narrows, id, behind being the e all been ! two high cen them : r point of len to the ag in, you is a sunken north, and flicult, on ost undis- niing from encounter E., distant having no pass over high. To prominent the west- I inner part eavinw the }le to Keep ly between ut no mark ^ W., and id, in from Qtpfi Freeh to the Strait of Belle hie. 23 7 to 9 fathoms, Fool's Island Hill bearing S.E. to S.E. by S. During the dry suimnor months vessels are under the necessity of sending I'rom hence to Loo Cove lor water; and wood is not to be procured, unless at the distance of 12 miles. GllEENSPOND TICKLE. — Greenspond is a square island, about a mile in breadth each way, the centre of it lies in latitude 49° 4' north. A reef of rocky islets runs off' its southern psirt all the way Puffin Island. Greenspond Tickle lies on the south-eastern part of the island, and is of very little importance, being incapable of receiving any ves- whosc draught of water exceeds 14 feet: the dangers, in going to this place, are the Northern Rock, the Cook-room, and Harbour Rocks; but it will be almost impossible to get into this harbour with an adverse wind, or even with a fair one, without the assistance of a pilot. Ships sometimes run in, and anchor between Greenspond Island and the main, but the channel is narrow, the water very deep, and it lies too open to the S.W. winds to be considered a place of safety. In order to sail into it you must get to the westward of Copper Islands; in so doing, be careful of the Midsummer Rock, which lies nearly W. by S. i S., distant a mile from Copper Island, and has only 5 and 6 feet over it: observe, when you shut in Silver Hair Island by Shoe Cove Point, yoa will be within side of the danger ; it is also necessary to give Newals and Ship Island a wide berth, as the water shoals off" them to a considerable distance. . i ; CAPE FREELS TO THE STRAIT OF BELLE ISLE. 7^ I ^ .1 Variation allowed 2'^ points west. .i,. CAPE FREELS lies in latitude 49° 15' 30" north, and in longitude 53* 31' west. It is formed of three points, — the South Bill, the North Bill, and the Middle, or Cape Freels. There are many shoals and rocky dangers about them all, therefore a wide berth should be given them at all times. Over these points is some high land, commonly called the Cape Ridge, which is visible at a considerable distance. FUNK ISLAND.— N.E. J E. from Cape Freels, distant 31 miles, lies the Funk Island. This is little more than a sterile rock, and cannot be seen i'arther than at the distance of 10 or 12 miles; but it will always be distinguished by the great number of birds whicli continually hover over it. About 200 yards north of Funk Island is a large rock above water, and N.W. by W., 180 yards from this, are still larger rocks; they are all barren, and only the resort of sea birds, that inhabit and breed there. Between these rocks are 18, 37, and 42 fathoms water, with a clear passage; but between the eastern rock and Funk Island there is a dangerous sunken rock, of only 10 feet water, over which the sea generally breaks; near this su ken rock are 14 and 16 fathoms, and between it and Funk Island, 30, 25, 56, 38, 24, and 17 fathoms: off" the western point of Funk Island are some rocks, and at its eastern part a sort of creek, with 5 fathoms in it. It is also reported, that a ledge of rocks lies S.W. from Funk Island, distant about 7 miles. BRENTON ROCK. — Between the Wadham and the Funk Islands a dangerous rock was discovered, on the 28th of September, 1836, by Captain Evan Piercy, of the brig St. John, during a heavy gale of wind, whilst empl: yed in the autumnal cir- cuit, with the Honourable Judge Brenton and Nicholas Slabb, Esq., Deputy Sheriff", &c., on board. Breakers were distinctly seen upon a rock, bearing, by compass, W. ^ S., a little southerly, from the Funk Islands, distant about 7 miles. This bearing was taken on a fine clear evening; and it was the opinion of all on board, that the rock, though not appearing above water, would take up any vessel. The position given it is about latitude 49° 41' north, and longitude 45° 15' west; but it appeared by no means exact, and it must be considered, as yet, uncertain. Navigators must, therefore, be the more cautious how they use the channel between the Wadham and Funk Islands. , ;,f) .* ,^/ About N.N.W., 7 miles from Funk Island, is said to be a rock, but it vva«t not dis- covered by Captain Bullock, who carefully sought for it. Taere is also a shoal, called the Cleopatra, said to lie N.W. by W. ^ W., distant 20 miles from Funk Islanc , and about 11 miles eastward of Fogo Island. Both these latter positions are doubtful. DUREL'S LEDGE, or SNAP ROCK.— This is a dangerous reef, and said lo lie about 7 leagues N.W. by N. from Funk Island ; the sea breaks over it continually ; and S4 Sailhig Directions from I I h I nearly N.W. by W., distant 3 leagues from Durel'a Ledge, is another danger, called CromwelVs Ledge; it is supposed to bear E.S.E. J E., distant 10 or 11 miles from Little Fogo Islands. N.N.W. ^ W. from Cape Freels, distant 6^ miles, is the Outer Cat Island ; it is con- nected to the main by a sandy reef, which is impassable for shipping, and forms the southern point of Deadman'a Bay ; a little before you come to the Outer Cat, you will see a remarkable hill, called the Windmill Hill, and near it the Little Cat Island. In sailing to or from Cape Freels, the shore should have a good berth, although there are soundings all the way, and they decrease gradually towards the shore. Deadman's Bay is formed by the Outer Cat Island to the southward, and l^eadman's Point to the northward ; the soundings within it are regular, and the bay without rocks, unless close to the shore; but it is totally unsheltered, and open to all easterly winds. Having passed Deadman's Point, you will approach the Penguin Islands; these are two in number, and bear from Cape Freels N.N.W. \ W., distant 14 and 15 miles ; between them the passage is clear, with from 5 J to 7 fathoms water; but vessels should not go within them and the shore, for there are several rocky reefs, which render it par- ticularly dangerous. RAGGED HARBOUR lies to the north-westward of the Penguins, distant 6 miles: the main land hereabout is low and sandy, and the passage, from the eastward, rocky and dangerous; it should, therefore, not be attempted b^ a stranger, or without o. pilot. To the north-westward is Ladle Cove Island ; and 7 miles beyond that is Rod y Bay. Rocky Bay lies in about latitude 49° 25' north, and longitude 54° 12' west. At its entrance, which is wide, lie three islands. Noggin Island, Green Island, and farther south is White Island; you may pass between each of these in 7 fathoms; between Rocky Point and Green Island in 7, 8, 13, or 10 fathoms; and between Gretn Island and White Island in 13 and 14 fathoms; between Noggin Island and the western point of the bay, there are 3^, 7, 12, 9, and 4 fathoms ; the bottom of these bays, for there are three openings, is rocky, and vessels cannot go far into them. The WADHAM ISLANDS. — These are a cluster of islands lying to the north- westward of Cape Freels, in about the latitude of 49° 35' north. They consist of seven scattered islands, separated from each other by channels from 1 to 1|J mile wide; the largest of these is called Peckford's Island, which is 1^ mile long, lies in the direction of north and south, and bears from Cape Freels nearly N. ^ W., distant 21 miles. From its southern part towards the land about Ragged Harbour, there are a number of rocky islets and reefs, with channels between them, rendering the navigation of this part extremely hazardous. N.N.W. ^ N., IJ mile from Peckford's Island, is White Island; but a passage between them should not be attempted, for there are several small rocks lying off the north and north-western part of Peckford's Island, some of which stretch out almost as far as White Island. N.W. by W. from Peckford's Island, about 4| miles, is Copper Island. Duck Island lies W.N.W. | N., 2^ miles from Peckford's Island, and about a similar distance S.S.E. i^E. from Copper Island. There are also some small rocks lying off the N.W. end of Duck Island, which, being visible, can always be avoided with ease. S.S.W. ROCK. — This is a small detached rock above water, bearing from Offer Island S.S.W., distant 2^ miles; it is in latitude 49° 33' north, and in longitude 53° 46' west; near it are 13, 17, and 21 fathoms. About N.N.E., distant 2 miles from the S.S.W. Rock, is a small island; and a little more to the eastward is Offer Island; this is the most easterly of all the Wadham Islands. There is yet a rock to describe, which lies E.S.E. } E. from Offer Island, distant about 1| mile, called the E.S.E. Ground; this is dangerous, and must have a berth in passing either north or south of it. About I of a mile S. by W. from Offer Island lies the Tom Cod Rock, also dangerous. Tun FOGO XSXiANDS lie to the north-westward of the Wadham Islands. Great Fogo is a large island, 4 leagues long and 9 miles broad ; off its south-western point lie th Indian Islands; and N.E.by N., 3| miles from the body of the Great Fogo, are the Little Fogo Islands. Numerous other rocks and small islands are scattered about thein. FOGO HARBOUR. — This harbour is very secure, with good anchorage, in any part above the Harbour Rock. I* has two tickles (so called in Newfoundland), or narrow passages between islands and rocks; these may be entered with any wind except from the south to the S.W., which winds blow out of both. To enter the eastern tickle, you should borrow on Rag's Island, keeping the extreme of Fogo Island nearly IS It] buj bef keJ offl poj the ini the sa^ un| geii 6 sh(] sidj sel Cape Freds to the Strait of Belle Isle. or. -•, called les from it is con- n'ras the you will and. In tbere are lan's Bay nt to the ilesa close these are 15 miles; ids should Jer it par- ntGmiles: ard, rocky out » pilot, locly Bay. jst At its anA farther is; between retn Island astern point [or there are ► the north- isist of seven lewide-, the ;he direction ,nt 21 miles, ixe a number ration of this 'nd, is White e are several and, some of ford's Island, l^ miles from opper Island, which, being ig from Offer L in longitude t 2 miles from 3 Offer Island; ck to describe, ■d the E.S.E. \ or south of it. vlso dangerous, glands. Great estern point lie ,t Fogo, are the red about them. ihorage, in any yrfoundland), or with any wind inter the eastern yo Island nearly open of Lane's Island, until Gappy 's Island comes open of Sim's Island; you will then clear the shoals off Tilly's roint. To avoid the Harbour IJock, biinj]; Mess",-!. Slade and Cox's fhig-slaff on with the eastern chinniey of their dwelliiig-liouse; it will be necessary to get this mark on before Boatswain's Island clones with JJullock's Point. In coming from the westward, it is advisable to make free with Fogo Island, in order that you may distinguish the small islands that form the tiekle, which, if passed with westerly winds, can seldom be regained, owing to the constant set there is to the east- ward. Having passed Little Motion, keep tlio extreme point of the head over the Narrows Point, until you get past Bullock's Point, when the above directions will clear all the harbour's dangers. Coining from the eastward, and bound to Fogo Harbour, you must be careful to avoid the Dean's Rock, which is a sunken rock, and lies between Joe Batt's Point and the harbour. Steer W.N.W. until Brimstone Hill, a remarkable round mountain, appears in the centre of the harbour; then steer for the east tickle, which may be known by the lantern on the top of Sim's Island, making the west side of the tickle. Give a good berth to the point on the starboard side, and run right up the harbour, keeping near the south side, and you will carry from 5 to 3 fathoms through. Imme- diately you get round the point, steer S.W., to avoid the Harbour Rock, and follow the directions given above for anchoring. The middle tickle appears the widest, but it is fit only for boats; the other two must be adopted as best suits the wind. LITTLE FOGO ISLANDS He nearly N.E., distant 4 miles from Joe Batt's Point. There are numerous rocks about them, both above and under water, making this part of the coast exceedingly dangerous. A little to the eastward of Little Fogo is a small rocA just above water, called the North- Eastern Rock; and somewhat in this direction, distant 10 or 11 miles, is said to lie CromweWs Ledge, the exact position of which is not well determined, although it is considered extremely dangerous. Northward of Little Fogo are the Turr Rocks; and from hence, in the direction of the western side of Great Fogo Island, are the Storehouse Rocks, the Seals' Nests, Gappy and Stone Islands, the Jigger and Black Rocks, and various other dangers, all having deep water round them, and tending to increase tbe difficulty of the navigation. About 4 miles E.N.E. of Little Fogo Islands lie the Ireland Rocks, on which the sea always breaks. This is the north-easternmost rock of the Fogo Reefs ; it lies in latitude 49° 52' north, and longitude 54° 4' west. From this rock the reefs extend nearly 13 miles, in a west direction, to Fogo Head Rock, which lies about a mile north- westward of Fogo Harbour. There are several deep-water channels between the reefs and islets, which ini^^ht be taken by those well acquainted. The Barrack Rocks lie S.E. by S., 4 miles fioin the Little Fogo Islands, and 5 miles eastward of the N,E. part of Fogo Island ; they e:.tend N.W. and S.E., a full mile, and part of them are above water. The Inspector Rock lies 2 miles south-eastward of the Barrack Rocks, and 7^ mi'.es N.E. J E. from Cape Fogo; on this rock the sea generally breaks. CHANGE ISLANDS TICKLE.— This harbour is accessible when Fogo Harbour is not; it is very secure, and has good anchorage, with 6 or 7 fathoms, muddj bottom. It carries on a successful fishery. In general the islands about it are low and marshy ; but there is abundance of fire-wood, though water is scarce. The passage in is between the Ruth's Rock and the Tobacco Islands, the mark being, Brimstone Head kept between both, which will clear all the dangers on the northern shore, and also off iSkinness Harbour; or you may bring the tickle to the westward, between the points of the land, and steer directly through in great safety. TOULINQUET HARBOUR.— This harbour is sheltered from all winds except those from the north to N.E., when, in heavy gales, it becomes dangerous. In enter- ing either by the eastern or western channels, you must take the greatest care to avoid the White Ground; to clear which, you must bring Messrs. STades' dwelling-house open of Sim's Island, and keep it so until French Head opens through the eastern pas- sage. This is very commonly called Burnt Island Tickle, and should not be attempted unless you are thoroughly acquainted with the navigation, or in cases of great emer- gency. The anchorage is mostly foul ; but the best and most secure is about 5 or 6 fathoms off Colburn's Stores. Both wood and water are scarce. If the mariner should be here either early or late in the year, Back Harbour, which is off the western side of the table-land, will be found a preferable place of shelter; and a few small ves- sels may ride there with much safety. You may proceed on either side of Gull Island, [N. Amebic A — Pakt T.] E 526 Sail'uui Dhoctions from Ivinpf with the wostorn head open of Datux Tslanil. The i.slands ahout the harbour of TouliiKiuet arc moderately hi}i;h, and bounded by dark-coloured slate cliffs; it may readily be known by the Gull Island, or table-land. FIJRTUNE HARBOUR.— This harbour lies between the Bay of Exploits and New Bay; it is good when attained; but the entrance, which is the western tickle, is ex- tremely narrow and dangerous, on account of the high land around it, from which all winds baffle, except those blowing directly in. Water is acarce in the sunuuer-tirae ; and it is only inhabited during the fishing-season. TRITON HARBOUR (Great Triton Island.— The entrance to this harbour is between the Great and Little Denier Islands. In entering, you will see Francis Island, which has a reef running to the south-westward, to Avhich you must give a berth; but both the Denier Islands ai-e bold-to, and free from danger. Little Denier Island lies S.W., ^\ miles from the Sculpia Rocks, on approaching which, the harbour opens of the high land of Great Denier. Its shores are exceedingly bold, and there- fore it is always to be pi'eferred to Cutwell Harbour. Its great depth of \vater will be avoided by running into Inspector's or Scrub Cove, where vessels may moor with hawsers to the trees in perfect security. Water is plentiful, except in very dry seasons. The tides here, and also upon all the eastern coast of Newfoundland, have nearly the same rising, the springs being about 6 feet, neaps 4 feet; but these are much influenced by the winds. CUTWELL HARBOUR (Long Island.) — This harbour has a spacious entrance, sufHcient for the largest ships to beat into, with secure anchorage iix 10 to 5 fathoms, sand and mud; the best anchorage is W. by N., 3 miles from the southern head. The arm runs in fidl 1^ mile above the narrows, in which there is abundance of wood and water; and it is well adapted for heaving down and re-fitting vessels. At the entrance is Foolscap Rock, the marks for which are, Copper Island seen through Indian Tickle, and Mark Island on with the White Point. To clear the extreme of Southern Head touching the north end of Hurdrix Bay, Gidl Island, opens to the westward of the Stag Rocks. The only dangers within the heads are the rocks on the eastern shore ; and most of these are visible at half- tide. NIPPER HARBOUR.— This harbour lies to the north-eastward of Green Bay, about 4^ miles, and is fronted by several small islands, between which are several small channels; but the best and safest is between them and the northern shore, in which the water is deep, and the shores bold. The harbour is rather confined and small, and therefore only fit to accommodate small vessels : but it is the most safe and secure on the shore of Cape St. John, and has excellent anchorage in from 7 to 14 fathoms water; the land about is high and barren, but it is well supplied with water, and may easily be distinguished by the islands which lie off it. The ISLAND of TOULINQUET lies to the westward of Fogo, and has several small islands about it; here is situated what is called Toulin(juet Bay; and to the south- westward of Toulinquet Island is the harbour of Herring Neck, which is said to be a spacious, fine harbour, and fit for any vessels. CAPE ST. JOHN. — From Toulinquet Bay to Cape St. John the course is N.N.W., distant 10^ leagues. This is a high and rugr,ed point of land, in latitude 49° 58' north, and longitude 55° 29' west, and may readily be Icnown by the small high round island to the south-eastward, distant from the northern pitch of the cape about 5 miles ; this is called the Gull Island, and is the third of that name on this side of Newfoundland. Perhaps it will be better we should hereafter distinguish this as the Northern or St. John's Gull; that near Cape Freels, as the Middle or Cape Freels Gull; and the one lying off Cape Bonavista, as the Bonavista or South Gull. Cape St. John is the point where, by treaty, the French fisheries begin; their boundary continues thence north- ward, and round the western coast, so far as Cape Ray. The Bishop Rocks lie nearly 2 miles to the southward of Cape St. John, over which the sea breaks in bad weather. On the coast to the southward of the cape are several fishing harbours, particularly Shoe Cove, Tilt Cove, and Snook Harbour; the latter is the best with south-easterly winds. Foolscap Rock, keep the rdrix Island, until Green ar< lyi Capo Fi-fich to the Strait of Belle Isle. 87 irbour of ; it may and New ;e, is ex- which all iier-tirae ; larbonr iu ! Francis st }»ive a le Denier e harbour ntl there- er will be iioor with very dry ,vc nearly are much 1 entrance, 5 fathoms, lead. The wood and e entrance ian Tickle, , keep the intil Green jers within le at half- ireen Bay, veral small e, in which and small, and secure 14 fathoms ir, and may has several [) the south- said to be a is N.N.W., >° 58' north, ound island miles; this (vfoundland. them or St- and the one is the point lence north- over which e are several the latter is Between the Po;»o Islands and Cupe bt. .lohn the charts commonly represent various deep bays and inlets, several of the harbours of which have been already described. There can be little doubt the Great Bay and River Exploits, and the Bay of Notre Dame, afford many other i)laces of good anchorage, and of easy access, which, when fully explored, may become hereafter fre(|uented, better understood, and prove highly beneficial. LA SCIE. — About 5 milr ■■ to the westward of Cape St. John is the little Harbour or Cove of La Scie, to sai'v mco which there is no danger whatever; but it is open to N.N.W. winds, which throw in a heavy sea. The best holding ground is just within a little cove on the starboard side, in 15 fathoms, muddy bottom; but further in the ground is not so good. GREAT AND LITTLE ROUND HARBOURS.— The former of these is a good and convenient place for vessels enga<;ed in the fishing trade; there is no danger in sailing in or out, both shores being bold-to. The anchorage lies within the two inner points, where vessels jnay ride in 4 or 5 fathoms water, secure from the weather, and entirely land-locked. Little Round Harbour, which lies round a point to the north- eastward, about 1^ mile distant, is merely a cove, and totally unfit ior shipping. PACKET HARBOUR is to the north-westward of Confusion Bay, and about 5 miles N.W. by N. from Great Round Harbour ; its entrance bears from the channel between the Horse Islands nearly S.W. by S. It may be known by its southern head, which is a high and rocky mountain ; the northern head is somewhat lower, and there are three rocky islets lying directly off" its point. Both points are bold-to; but a little to the southward of the three rocky islets is a small shoal, with 2^, 3, and 4 fathoms upon it. The channel between it and these rocks has 7, 8, and 9 fathoms, and the water across the entrance is from 8 and 9 to 19 and 20 fathoms; a similar depth con- tinues more than ^ of a mile in, where the harbour divides into two channels, the one running northward, and the other west and S.W. The northern arm is about ^ of a mile long, and has 20, 18, and 19 fathonis at iis entrance, becoming shallower as you advance. Vessels running in here should keep the starboard shore on board, for about f up the channel on the port side is a rocky shoal, a small part of which occasionally appears above water; on the other part of this shoal are from 3 feet to 4 fathoms. Having passed this shoal, steer up mid-channel, and anchor in 5, 7, or 8 fathoms; the northern part near the land becomes shallow : and a rivulet here falls into the bay, which is said to issue from some extensive lakes about 2 miles inland. The south- western channel is somewhat narrower than the northern one, but is quite free from danger; the shores on both sides are steep-to and bold, and you will have 12, 10, 9, 8, and 7 fathoms for ^ a mile in ; it then shallows to the head of the bay, where there is a sandy beach and a river running southward : this is a snug and secure place for vessels to run into whenever occasion may re(iuire. To the northward of the northern point is a mountain, called Signal Hill, commonly having a signal-post upon it, and serving to point out its situation. When the wind is between N.W. and S.W. the entrance to Packet Harbour should not be attempted, as then the squalls off the land are both heavy and changeable; and to miss stays when in the narrows would be dangerous. If ajjprehensive of bad weather, it would be better to make for Round Harbour. ST. BARBE, OR HORSE ISLANDS, are situated nearly equi-distant between Partridge Point and Cape St. John, bearing from the latter N. by W. and N.N.W., distant about 5 leagues; these are two islands, and form a circuit of nearly 2 leagues, appearing moderately high. There is a rock above water lying to the northward of the easternmost, distant 1^ mile; and on the east side of the same island there are some sunken rocks, which stretch out in some places near a mile from the shore; at the S.E. part of this island there is a little cove, fit only for boats; there is a safe channel between these islands, with 40 to 48 fathoms, black mud, but it is seldom attempted ; the eastern island is the largest. Following the shore of Newfoundland, to the north-westward of Cape St. John, there are two bays, called Mings Bight and Bay Verte ; but although these may be places of good anchorage, they are little frequented by shipping. Hardy IlARitouR lies about 3 miles N. ^ E. of Packet Harbour, having Woody Island lying before it : fishing is cai'ried on hei'e, but with strong sea winds it is inconvenient. E 2 $28 Sailing Directions from Tho north side of Wood Island is rocky to nenr 2 cables off. The Mings Islands lie fi miles north-westward of Wood Island: they consist of two large ruch, and lie oil" the N.W. point of Mingo IJidit, having a passage between. Tiic Sisters' lloclc lies nearly 2 miles N. by W. of the Mings Islands; unit the sea always breaks. About J of a mile northward is a dangerous rock, with only 3 feet water on it: these latter rocks lie near the centre of the entrance to Green Bay. LA FLEUR DE LYS.— This harbour lies to the northward of Mings and Verto Bays, and the south-eastward of Partridge Point, from which it is distant about a league, and derives its very approp'-iate name from three remarkable hillocks just over it. It is small, but safe, and secured from all winds, having excellent anchorage in its N.E. arm, in 4 fathoms water. To avoid a rocky shoal that lies 100 yards off the island, borrow towards the eastern saore, until you get Bluff Head open to the island. There is plenty of wood, but in a dry season water becomes scarce. It is, however, very con- veniently situated for the fisheries, and is commonly frequented by French vessels. WHITE BAY. — This is a large and extensive arm of the sea, being at its entrance, from Cape Partridge to Cat Head, full 5 leagues wide, and running in a south-westerly direction, about 15 leagues, to its head, where it is contracted to a river's mouth, 1 ^ mile wide. In this bay, or gulf, are several islands, coves, and inlets, affording both anchor- age and shelter; these are Lobster Harbour, Southward Arm, Middle Arm, Pigeon Islands, Westward Arm, Purbeck Cove, Granby's Island, Gold Cove or River's Ilead, Goat and Sop Islands, Sdp's Arm, Jackson's Arm, French Cove, Great and Little Coney Arms, and Great and Little Cat Arras, j LOBSTER HARBOUR lies about 4 leagues south-westward of Partridge Point. This is a small round harbour, with a shallow naiTow entrance, having, at low water, in some places, not above 8 or 9 feet water ; but when you have once entered, there are 12 and 13 fathoms all over the harbour. Small vessels therefore sail in generally at the flood-tides. It is high water, full and change, about 6h. 45m.; springs rise 6 feet, neaps 4. The southward ARM lies about 5 miles from Lobster Harbour, and farther up the bay. Here a ship may anchor with great safety, in 17 fathoms water, about 3 miles within the heads; but there is also good anchorage in any part below this, and before you are advanced so far up, in 20 and 25 fathoms. A little above the inner point, on the northern side, is a muscle bank, which stretches quite across the arm, and nearly dries at low water; and when you have passed this, you will have 11 and 12 fathoms water, and the channel continues deep until you approach the river's head. This is the first great inlet on this side of the gulf, and may therefore be readily recognized. MIDDLE ARM.— Tins inlet lies about IJ mile W.S.W. from the Southward Arm; at its entrance is a rochy island, which is joined to the shore by a shoal, over which are 1 and 2 fathoms water. This inlet runs in to the southward, about 3 or 4 miles. To enter it, you will do v/ell in keeping the port shore on board: it is fitted only for small vc^^ls. At 2 leagues W. by S. from Middle Arm is Hawling Point; and between them lie the Pigeon Islands, about which the ground is good for fishing. WESTWARD ARM.— This lies S.E. of Hawling Point, and runs up nearly 4 miles; here large vessels may anchor in 14 to 16 fathoms wather. There is a cove on each side of its entrance : that to the north-eastward is named Bear Cove, where smaller vessels may moor securely, and ride safe from all winds, in about 12 fathoms water; the other is called Wild Cove, a very indifferent anchorage, open to the north-w/>sterly winds, and the bottom rocky and foul. PURBECK COVE. — About 5 leagues down from the River's Head, and near the S.E. side of the bay, lies Granby's, or Mid Bay Island, without either cove or place of shelter. On the south-eastern part of this island is a shoal running off the length of 2 cables, with not more than 9 feet water over it; and nearly abreast of this island, on the S.E. side of White Bay, is Purbeck Cove, where shipping may find safe anchorage, and lie with good conveniences for the fisheries. This is the last cove on this side of White Bay. Here the Bay is only 5 miles wide. Having passed to the southward of Granby's Island, the bay narrows, and runs up about 5 leagues towards Gold Cove, wlierc the river branches out into several streams, and is commonly called the River's Head. ands Ho 1(1 lie ort' lock lies About se latter 1(1 Verto a hniguo, Ilt it. It its N.E. ic island, There fcry cou- ■ssels. entrance, westerly , 1 ^ uulc li ancbor- u, Pigeon ;r'8 ifeiid, iid Little ge Point, ow water, red, tbere generally rings rise id farther ter, about V this, and i the inner ! arm, and tre 11 and ver's head, be readily yard Ann ; which are miles. To y for small d between 'ly 4 miles; ve on each 2re smaller iins water ; h-w/'sterly id near the or place of e length of I island, on anchorage, this side of d runs up al streams, Cape Frcfth to the Strait of Belle Isle. On returning up the western side of White Hay, you will jKirceivo Sop's IMand; about .'1 miles in length, and 11 miles in circuit; near its southern end is Goat's Island; these form a long passage, or arm, called Sop's Arm: at the northern part of which a vessel may safely anchoi, just inside the nortli side of Sop's Island; this will be thu best side of the channel, or passafr<\ into the arm; but there is anchorage in deep water between Sop's Island and the main, before you reach so far up as (ioat's Island: there is also a small cove at the north end of the island, called Son's Cove ; and two other coves oj)nosite the main, called Hart's Coves, in all which the fisheries arc carried on, although snips generally anchor in the upper part of the arm, and within side of Goat's Island. JACKSON'S ARM. — About 3 J miles to the northward of Sop's Island is Jackson's Arm; to enter which vou will pass a ragged point, low and round; the water here is deep, except in a small cove on the starboard side, where a vessel should moor head and stern. This place affords the largest timber in White Bay. Frenchman's or French Cove is about 2 miles to the northward of Jackson's Arm, and oilers good and safe anchorage. LITTLE AND GREAT CONEY ARMS.— Nearly 4 miles to the north-eastward of Frenchman's Cove, is Coney Arm Head, the most remarkable land on the western side of W^hite Bay, and bears W. ^ N., distant 8^ leagues from Cape Partridge. The land here projects out \^ mile, forming a deep bight, called Great Coney Arm. In this place there is no good shelter for shipping; but in Little Coney Arm, which lies to the west- ward of the head, is convenient anchorage for small vessels, although its entrance is too shallow for large ships; here fishing craft frequently rendezvous. GREAT AND LITTLE CAT ARMS. — To the north-eastward of Coney Arm Head, distant 10^ miles, lies the Great Cat Arm ; and 2 miles farther is Little Cat Arm ; this former inlet runs up to the westward full 2^ miles ; off its northern point are some rockn above water; to avoid wnich, keep nearer to the southern shore. You will find the water deep, and no good shelter, unless vou approach the head or farther end of the n Tu, where you will lie secure and land-locked. When entering Little Cat Arm, keep on the north side, by which you will avoid a rock lying near tiie south shore. LITTLE HARBOUR DEEP.— You will now be to the northward of White Ba;^, and following the shore, will perceive the entrance into Little Harbour Deep; this place is much exposed to south-easterly winds, and by no means a good harbour; off its northern point are some rocks, which are always above water; they lie J a mile from the shore, and afford good fishing about their environs. The water is not very deep in any part of this inlet ; and when you get up half-way from the entrance to the head, or farther end, it becomes (juite shoal. Grande Vache is an inlet, about IJ mile deep, lying a mile from Little Harbour Deep; this is also open to the southerly winds, and may be known, when near the shore, by the northern point appearing like an island, and bearing N.W. \ N. from Cape Partridge, distant 15 miles; it is but an indifferent place for shipping, and seldom frecjuented. ORANGE BAY, or GREAT HARBOUR DEEP, lies 7 miles N.E. by E. from Grande Vache. This may be known from any other inlet, by the land at its entrance being much lower than any land on the nortn side of White Bay, and by its bearing N. JW., distant 5 J leagues from Cape Partridge; it forms a large harbour, and when you get about 3 miles within its entrance, divides into two branches: in the northern arm the water is too deep for vessels to anchor, until they have run up near the head ; but in the western arm there is no anchorage, having 50 fathoms near its head. A little within the entrance of Orange Bay there is a cove on each side, frequented by the fishing vessels ; but t' ege are very dangerous for a ship to lie in, for although they moor head and stern, yet, should a gale come on from the eastward, there is little safety to be depended upcn. FOURCHEE. — This place is little frequented, and there is no anchorage until you approach its farther end, where you will find a cove on the northern side; this cove is 2 or 3 miles above the entrance, and very small vessels may anchor there, in 18 fathoms, mooring head and stern. The land on both sides is extremely high and steep to the shore. There is also another arm running in above 2 miles farther than the 80 Sailing Th'rcrtlons from cove, but it is so nan-nw, and )ias hucIi a (U'ptli oi' watur, that it is alinuHt uouloiis to shipping. IIOOIMNU HAimOUH.— Aliout .'> miles to tiio north -eastward of Founhi-o, and (I niilos Houtii-W(!f*tward ot'C-annda Head, licM tiiu cntrancu to Hooping Harbour, or Sans Fond. This nhice has two aruix, or bays, tlie one running up northward, tlu! otiier westerly. Near tlie head of the northern arm you may anehor, ni (» fathoms, although onen to the southward; the anchorage is rueommencled by Captain iiulloek, as sate; although the western arm is more sheltered, the water is much deeper, having 1(! to 'i4 fathoms near its head. The entrance of this harbour lies N.N.E. \ K., distant '27 milcH from Partridge I'oint. CANADA HKAI) lies about (l miles N.K. by E. j E. of Hooping Harbour; it is elevated land, and very easy to be distinguished either from the northward or south- ward; but when you are directed to the eastward of it, it becomes hidden by the high land up the country, commonly called the clouds. CANADA HAY. — This is an inlet of considerable si/c and extent ; at its southern entrance is Canada Head, from whence it runs N.N. -easterly full 4 leagues; here ves- sels caught in easterly gales may seek shelter, and anchor in safety. In entering, when you get above the two rocky islets which lie near Bido's Head, and called the ('ross Islands, you will see u low white point, and another black one a little beyond it; off this latter, distant '2 cables' lengths, lies a minken rock ; keep, therefore, towards the middle of the bay, and you will nnd no danger, except a roi'n above water, which lies about a mile below the point of the narrows; this you will endeavour to leave on your port hand, keeping mid-channel, and you will have 10 fathoms through the narrowest part. Soon after you have passed the narrows, the bay widens, and is above a mile across, and you may then ancuor, in from 18 to '20 fathoms, good holding ground, and secure from all winds. Hut this bay is not much frequented, and only occasionally resorted to in case of necessity. ENGLEE HARBOUR is situated on the north side of Canada Bay. To sail into this place you must pass a low point, appearing white, and forming the northern point of entrance into Camida Bay; tlien keep near ti>e shore of the island, to avoid the reef which runs to the southward from Bide Arm, until you get abreast of the next point, which makes the harbour : haul round to the S.E., taking care not to come too near the point, for it shoals a full cable's length oflT. Having so far advanced, you can anchor in from 15 to 7 fathoms, good holding ground; but tnis is well up the cove, which is too small to lie in, unless you moor head and stern. In Bide's Arm, which runs up N.N.E. from Entice, almost 2 leagues, there is no good anchorage, the water being too deep ; but withm the south end of Englee Island is a good harbour for shallops, although from thence to where the ships lie, there is no channel, even for boats, unless at high water, or beyond half-tide. GOUFRE HARBOUR is in the S.W. corner of the bay, about 2 miles westward of Canada Head, and 3 miles from the north point of the entrance; in this harbour, which runs in S.W., near a mile, is good safe anchorape, in 15 fathoms, well 8helteie(i from wind and sea. Canada II:h bour is the first on tin port hand within Canada Head ; here is a fishery establislinieiit. As it is unsafe with N.E. winds, the ships anchor in Goufre, and only use this harboiw wiih boats. CONCH HARBOUR bear^ uwirlv E.N.E. ^ E., distant 11 miles from the entrance of Canada Bay; it lies very oi)cn to tl»c winds from the south, but has good anchorage, well up to the head, in 1 1 fathoms water, good holding ground. S. by \V. from Conch, distant 2 leagues, is lii'liard's Harbour, called by the French, Botitot; this is a bad place for shipping, but v»'ry convenient lor thv fishing craft. CAPE ROUGE HARBOUR lies E.N.K- from the harbour of Conch, and bears N.W. by W. from the south end of the island of (iroais, distant 3 leagues: its northern 1)oint is called Cape Rouge. The isles Grouis and Bell Isle contribute to shelter this larbour from the heavy swells of the Atlantic ; the southern part of Its entrance is shallow and rocky, and ' i the S.W. ai-m is the harbour shoal. The best anchorage is in the northern arm, in any depth of water. Ships may beat in or out, but the centre of the harbonr is too deep tor anchorage. Directly opposite to its entrance is a small island, named Rouge Island ; its northern end re(juires a berth in passing. BELL ISLE AND (iROAIS ISLAND. — These are high islands, lying olf the N.E. coast of Newfoundland, i'rom which they are separated 9 or 10 miles. Bell Isle Cdpt^ lurch to the Strait of llrllr hlr .11 i« *hfl ftouttiorninnst, nml tlio larj?»!r i.««liin tniloM in K'u;i»li, nml (I broiul; tlu-ri' is 11 littlt' liiirlmiir iit itx .south part, wluTf fisliiii;; cnit't orcusioiiitlly rosort, but not ciil- (Miliited for riliippin;^: other ckvom may \n\ found uhout the nhori's of the Ishirul, wiicre shul- lu|)8 soiniitiiiieH tiiku Hhcltor. Oil' ItMsoiith-weHti'rii rtiiK' li«>H (ireeii Itthiiiil, ii miiiiiII rocky iHU't; nnd to the Doitthwitrd ii hunk of utmniliitffn extendi, with 1'2, *i(), 'J.>, mid .'JO futhoinM; there .\re noniu rorku, both iiltove iind uiidcr water, at the ttontli point of hell Inh;: Home of tiM'se lie '2 miles from the land, 'i'lie south rock, which is almve water, lies 2 miles H.W. from the south point of the island, and :i sunken rock lieH ^ of a mile S.W. of it; this io ih<> southernmost rock. (rllOAIS ISLAND lies to the north-eastward of Hell Isle; and \» about 7 luileH in lenjjth, and i)^ miles broad, its northern point lying in latitude 50° HW north. OtV this end, and also off the N.W. part of the island, an; several rocks above water; other- wise tluH islund is bold all round, and between it and the main are from 'JO to 70 fathoms water; and in the channel between it and liell Isle, which is 5 miles wide, there are from 40 to JH fathoms, dark mud and rotten shi'lls. To clear the rocks lyinp; oil' the N.W. point of the island, you should not brinu the N.E. point to the southward of S.E. CUOQIIE IIAUHOIJR.-The entrance to this harbour is in hititude flP 2' JIO' north; it is if of ii mile wide, and somewhat diiHou:t to discover; it bears N.W. J N. from (Jroais, distant .'< leaj^ues. When the north point of Bell Isle is clear of the southern part of Groais, you will be a little to the southward of Crotiue; and this mark will not fail pointing out to tho.- about a mile, you will see the river divide into two branches; anchor hereabout. Water and wood can be obtained from either side of the northern branch ; or by run- ning your boat to the farther end of the other arm, you may furnish yourself with both these articles. The land here is covered with the dwarf pine, which is indeqcnous to the country; the soil appears to have been composed of rotten and decayed leaves: it is wet and spongy, and the trees do not attain any great dinici\sions, the largest being not more than 1,^ '"idi in diameter, and the wood, when full grown, not goo«T. There is a little cove at tike southern entrance, called Irish Hay, in which are 13, 10, 8, and /) fathoms; anu tmy.^ rocks above water at the head of the bay, near which is a little rivulet of frwki "waiter. GREAT %i» LITTLE ST. JULIEN.— About 4 miles to the north-eastward of the harb«war ot Cromie lie Irish and St. .lulien's Islands; near which are the harbours of Great .ind Little St. Julien, and also ttiiat of (iraudsway ; ihese are all adjacent to the island of St. .lulien, and bear to the norrli -westward of the northern part of the island of (Jroiiis. The S.W. end of the island ot' St. Julien 's but little separated from the main, and cannot be distinguished to be au island untii you arrive verv near it; there is at this end no passage except for boat^ ; therefore, to sail iuto either oi these harbours, you may keep clo^e to the N.E. end of the isl.'t ui; and in passing that, the harbours will open to your view. Great St. Julien is the easternmost harbour, :o which there is no danger until you get within the entrance; then you will tind the starboard shore to be shoal nearly ^ over : but when you have passed the first stages, you may anchor in from 8 to 4 fathoms water. To sail into Little St. Julien, you will first steer for Groat St. Julien Harbour, in order to clear aawnAen rock, which lies directly before the harbour's mouth; and having arrived opposite the entrance of Grandsway, steer into the harbour, and anchor in 5 or 4 fathoms water. It will be requisite for all ships which go into either of these hai'bours, to moor both head and stern : but Grandsway is not a harbour for shipping, although it is extremely convenient for fishing craft. The FISHOT ISLANDS.— About 3 miles N.E.^E. from St. Julien Island, lies the southernmost of the Fishot Islands, which is the largest of the group, and has a har- Sailing Directions from hour of the same name on its western side. These islands extend in a ST.E. direction, nearly 4 miles, to the N.E. island: this island is surrounded hy shoals to some distance; but there are passages between it and the next two islands to the southward, which may be taken in fine weather. Fishot Harbour may be approached either from the northward or the southward, by those well acquainted, but it is only fit for vessels drawing 10 or 11 feet water. Between Fishot Harbour and the N.E. island there are numerous shoals scattered about; but the eastern shores of these islands are all clear to within ^ of a mile of the shore. HARE BAY. — The entrance of this bay is formed by the Fishot Islands on the south, and Cape Goose on the north; they are 5 miles apart. From hence this bay extends to the N.W., about 6 leagues, to the Northern Arm, and is about 6 miles in width ; within it are several good harbours, but they are not much frequented. The south side of the bay is bordered by rocks and islets; the northernmost and most remarkable are the Spring and Brent Islands. The Spring Islands lie 6 miles within the entrance of the bay, on the south side ; and 4 miles farther lie the Brent Islands. The Southern Arm runs in about S.W. by W., 5 or 6 miles from the eastern side of the Brent Islauds, where good and well sheltered anchorage may be found in 10 or 12 fathoms; you may also find good anchorage, in 5 or 6 fathoms, to the westward of the southernmost of the Brent Islands. The north side of the bay is all clear and safe. On this side, 11§ miles from Cape Goose, is IIow Harbour. HOW HARBOUR.— The entrance to this harbour lies 11 J miles N.W. from Cape Goose, and N.E. by N., 3^ miles from the eastern part of the Brent Islands, and is by far the best harbour in Hare Bay, having safe anchorage in every part. The surround- ing hills are bai'ren; but small stunted wood maybe found in the valleys. To the northward a range of marshes and ponds extend as far as Pistolet Bay. The harbour is about If mile long, and nearly ^ a mile wide. A small rock lies off its western foint, but it is very near the land ; and the upper part of the harbour shoals gradually, n the middle of the harbour are 10 fathoms. GOOSE HARBOUR. — This harbour is situated on the western side of Cape Goose. It is small, but very secure, and has most excellent anchorage in 4 or 5 fathoms. Vessels can sail in with a westerly wind; and rings are fixed, to assist vessels warping In with a contrary wind. Vessels generally moor head and stern in this harbour. CAFE OOOSE (in latitude 51° 17' 20'^ north) is one of the most remarkable points on this coast, and may be seen at a great distance; In certain positions it appears like an island. Near Cape Goose are the three remarkable mountains; and farther In the interior are the Capillalre Mountains, which are a great height. CREMALLIRE HARBOUR lies about 2 miles northward of Cape Goose; it is a spacious and good harbour, with excellent anchorage in 7 or 8 fathoms water ; It is sup- plied with abundance of wood and water, and Is a good port for men-of-war to put into. In coming from the southward there is a shoal between Notre Dame Island and the port side of the entrance, which may be easily avoided by keeping near mid- channel. ST. ANTHONY HARBOUR.— This lies a little to the eastward of Cremallire Bay, and Is a safe place, having good anchorage in 6 or 7 fathoms water, on a bottom of blue clay; Its entrance lies N.W. by W., 1^ mile from Cape St. Anthony. It can- not easily be mistaken, from the remarkable high land on its southern shore, and being the first opening on the port side as you enter the large bay within St. Anthony Point. This bay runs in north, 3 miles, and has 25 to 35 fathoms In it, and is (juite open to south and S.E. winds. St. Anthony Harbour Is well supplied with wood and water, and is commonly frequented by French fishing-vessels. Cape St. Anthony lies in lati- tude 51° 22' north, and longitude 55° 31' west. French Point, which lies IJ mile to the eastward, has sometimes been mistaken for the cape. , BRAHA HARBOUR lies 3 miles north-eastward of French Point. It Is small, but aaf , having good anchorage within It; the bottom Is sandy, and the shores are bold and steep-to. It generally has 4 or 5 French vessels In It during the fishing season. The Braha Shoal lies S. 74° E. (true), distant 1^ mile from the Needle Rocks; it Is reported to have 12 feet on it, but Lieut. Bullock says he never Ibund loss than 16 feet. With a little sea it occasions breakers; but the common current will always create a Cape Freeh to the Strait of Belle Tsle. 33 constant ripple. This is the most dangerous rock on this part of the coast. There is a good passage between it and the shore, with 22 fathoms just within the rock, and 47 fathoms near mid-channel. ST. LUNAIRE BAY lies in latitude 5i° 30' north, and longitude 53° 28' west. At the southern point of its entrance lie two islands, between both of which there is a narrow boat-passage; but the only channel for ships is to the northward of them; here the entrance is almost ^ of a mile wide, and both shores bold-to. Having entered between the points of the bay, you will perceive some small rocky islets a-head of you ; there is a passage on either side of these, bi;t none between, for they are connected by a rochy reef of shallow water; you will, therefore, steer to the northward of them all; and on the northern shore you will see Amelia Harbour, where, within Red Island, you may anchor in 15 fathoms, or farther in, and nearer the head of the bay, in less water. The starboard side of this bay is rocky, and is sheltered from the westward by some high islands; but towards the top of the bay is a sandy beach, where some small brooks empty themselves. To the northward of High Island is a sandy cove, having some little islets within it; but the depth is shallow, and there is a knoll of 3 fathoms lying before its entrance. To the westward is an opening, called N.W. Bay, the land on both sides being high, and the passage into it clear of danger; biit its farther end becomes suddenly very shallow. There ir Iso another narrow entrance to the N.W. Bay, behind a high island, which forms its southern boundary; but this is rocky, and ft only for boats. Between this high island and the two islands at the entrance of Lunaire Bay, is a wide space, with very good anchorage, in 15, 18, or 20 fathoms water; here vessels may lie secure from south-easterly gales ; but in going to it you must avoid a rock of only 10 feet water; this rock lies to the westward of Plate Island, about \ of a mile, and exactly the same distance from the eastern point of the high island which forms the southern boundary to N.W. Bay. There is also an opening to the southward, called S.W. Bay; it has not been explored, but its entrance appears to be clear of danger, and has a depth of 9, 8, and 7 fathoms; the shores on each side ai-e rocky. Lieutenant Bullock says, "This excellent harbour will contain 100 vessels in perfect sjifety ; is remarkably easy of access, and may always be recognized by the appearance of the White Cape. The best and most convenient anchorage will be found at Amelia Cove, in from 5 to 7 fathoms. The approach and entrance are bold and steep-to, only observing to give the points of the southern islands a good berth. Both wood and water ai'e to be obtained without difficulty ; and it affords, ia every respect, a good and secure anchorage." GRIGUET BAY is situated about a league to the north-eastward of St. Lunaire Bay, and is formed by Stormy Cape to the northward, and White Cape to the south- ward, having several good coves or harbours for shipping engaged in the fisheries. In this bay lies Camel's Island, rising up in the middle like the hump of a camel, and .scarcely to be distinguished from the main land in sailing along. Behind this island is situated the S.W. harbour, a narrow channel, running in nearly 2 miles, with from 4 to 10 fathoms vater in it; there is & shoal at its entrance. The NORTH HARBOUR runs in within Stormy Cape, and has, at its entrance, a rock above water, which is bold-to all round, and vessels may sail on either side of it, and anchor in 6 fathoms water. In the passage which leads to the N.W. and S.W. harbours there is an island, which contracts the channel, rendering the passages narrow ; the best and safest entrance is to the northward of this island, giving the outer point of the N.W. harbour a little berth, and so soon as you get within the island, you will open both harbours; that which runs in north-westward is the larger of the two, and is 2 miles deep; you should sail upon its western side, having 14, 16, and 18 fathoms, until you get inside the point, a little within which is a bank of 7 or 8 fathoms; but when you have passed over this, you will again drop into 16 and 17 fathoms; and as you approach the head of the bay, you will lessen your water to 7, 6, and 5 fathoms, every where good anchorage, and well sheltered from all winds. The two islands of Griguet lie outside of Camel's Island, and, together, form between them several small, but snug harbours for fishing vessels. Lieutenant Bullock observes, " The north bay is insecure in spring and fall, on account of its being exposed to southerly gales ; the S.W. bay is, therelbre, recommended, where there is good anchorage in 5 or 6 fathoms water. Camel's Islands' Harbour will always [N. America — I'abt I.] F 34 Sailing Directions from be found too intricate for a stranger, and should never be attempted without the assist- ance of a pilot." WHITE ISLANDS. — You will now perceive the White Islands, lying to the north- eastward of Stormy Cape, from which they are distant a league, and about 2 miles from the shore opposite; they are small, of moderate height, and have several rocks in- side, both above and under water ; but these are not considered to be dangerous, as they are easily discoverable, even in fine weather; and the passage between them and the main is very safe, having a depth of 40 fathoms in it; these islands lie in latitude 54° 35' north, and longitude 55"* 21' west. QUIRPON ISLAND.— This lies off the north-eastern part of Newfoundland, and forms the S.E. point of entrance to the Strait of Belle Isle; it is large, high, and bar- ren; and Cape De-^rat is visible, in clear weather, full 12 leagues to seaward. LITTLE QUIRPON. — There is a narrow channel which runs in to the southward of Quirpon, and divides it from the main; here lies Little Quirpon Harbour, to enter which there is no danger but what you will easily perceive ; vessels commonly moor head and stern, and lie there perfectly secure. DEGRAT AND PIGEON COVES.— These coves lie on the eastern side of Quir- pon Island, and to the northward of Cape Degrat ; at their entrance are several small rocky islets and rocks above water, affoi'ding behind them very fair security for ship- ping, in 4 fathoms water, and good conveniences for fishing. CAPE BAULB, which is the northern extremity of Quirpon Island, lies in latitude 51° 39' north, and in longitude 55° 27' west; it is rocky and steep-to, and may be ap- proached very near with great safety. Having rounded this cape, you will perceive a rocky point to the southward leading to the harbour of Quirpon. GREAT QUIRPON HARBOUR lies on the N.W. side of the island, and; its entrance is between it and Graves Island ; in your approach tOAvards it from the north- ward you may borrow as close as you please to Bauld Head, there being no invisible danger until you arrive at the entrance of the harbour, where there are some shoals, which must be left on your port side; to do this, keep Black Head, on Quirpon Island, open of all the other land, until Raven Point comes over Noddy Point, then haul in/or the harbour, going not nearer than the distance of ^ a cable's length from the point of Graves's Island ; the anchorage within the island is every where good, with room and depth enough for any ships, and the ground holds well : but the best place to ride in will be towards the upper end of Graves's Island, abreast of Green Island, in 7 fathoms water. The passage to the Inner Harbour, on either side of Green Island, is very good for ships of moderate water, through which you will have 3 fathoms, and above Green Island you have excellent riding in 7 fathoms. There is also a passage to this harbour through Little Quirpon Harbour, but it is too narrow and intricate for any one to at- tempt, unless they are perfectly acquainted with the navigation. In and about Quirpon are conveniences for a great number of vessels employed in the fisheries, and good fish- jng throughout; the land every where is high, and wears a barren appearance. NODDY HARBOUR.— This place lies a little to the westward of Quirpon Har- bour, and runs in between Noddy Point and Cape Raven ; there is no danger in entering, and you will pass to the starboard of the little island that lies about a mile within the entrance, and anchor above it in 5 fathoms water; or you may, with a small vessel, run farther up into the basin, and anchor in 2^ or 3 fathoms; here is a stage within the island, and on the eastern side of the harbour, with convenient room for many vessels. GULL ROCK AND MARIA'S LEDGE.— The Gull Rock lies W.N.W.^W. from Bauld Cape, in the island of Quirpon, distant 2 miles; and N.N.E., nearly 2 miles from Cape Raven ; it is always above water. Maria's Ledge lies nearly S.W. from the Gull Rock, distant 1^ mile, and north, about a mile from Cape Raven, being distant about a mile from Maria's Head. In standing in from the northward lor either QUIRPON or NODDY HARBOURS, you need be under no apprehension of danger from the Gull or Maria Rocks, for both are above water : the passage between them is J a league wide, and very safe ; but it will be prudent to pass nearer the Gull Rock, because of the N.W. Ledge, which never appears but in bad weather; this N.W. Ledge bears west, a little south, distant 1 j- mile from the Gull Rock, and you should not attempt the pas- sage between it and tiie main, on account of other rocks that are said to lie about, and places of shallow water. Cape Freeh to the Strait of Belle Isle. 35 To the westward are the Sacred Islands. Great Sacred Island lies about N.W. by W. \ W. from Bauld Cape, distant 5^ miles, and S.E. by E. i E. from Cape Norman, nearly 12 miles. Little Sacred Island is a mile to the south-eastward of the Great Island ; the passage between them is safe, and you may sail round both, for they are high and bold; within them, on the main, and to the W.S. -westward, is Sacred Bay, tolerably large, with numerous rocky islets within it ; the shores of this place abound with wood, and, therefore, it is much resorted to for the use of the fisheries at Quirpon and Gri- guet, &c. Cape Onion forms the north point of Sacred Bay, being high and steep; near It is a remarkable rock, called the Mewstone, and much resembling that in Plym».uth Sound. There is a little cove to the southward of this rock, where a vessel may occa- sionally resort to with safety. HA-HA BAY. — From Cape Onion to Burnt Cape the course is W. f N., about 4^ miles; it has a white appearance, and rises from the seaward to a considerable height. On the eastern side of Burnt Cape is Ha-Ha Bay, which runs in southerly about 2 miles; it lies open to northerly winds; but, when you are within the cape, you will find anchorage in 6 or 7 fathoms ; or you can go farther up, and ride well sheltered in 3 or 2 J fathoms. This is a convenient place for the fisheries, and has plenty of wood. PISTOLET BAY.— This bay lies between Burnt Cape and the Norman Ledges, which bear from each other N.W. by N. and S.E. by S., distant about 4 miles; the bay is extensive, and reaches several miles each way, having good anchoring ground in most parts, particularly on the western side, a little above the islands, in about 5 fathoms water. The shore is tolerably well furnished with wood, and contributes to supply those places which are destitute of that article. COOK'S HARBOUR lies in the N.W. part of Pistolet Ba}, and within the islands ■^out 2 miles above Norman Ledge Point. These ledges are about a mile to the east- i'- >.'d of the north point. To clear these dangers as you enter, be sure to keep Burnt '•'.pe well open of the outer rocks that lie off the islands at the western entrance to Pistolet Harbour; and, if going in, so soon as you consider yourself to be to the south- ward of these ledges, steer in for the harbour, leaving the islands and rocks on your port side ; keep the southern shore on board, for fear of a ledge of rocks that juts out from a little rocky island on the other side ; and so soon as you get within the island, haul over for the northern shore, and anchor, in 4 or 5 fathoms water. This harbour is capable of being made very convenient, with several fishing rooms; and proper stages for the boats to resort to, and cure their fish, might be erected in all the coves between it and Cape Norman. CAPS IfO&BKAN is the northernmost point of Newfoundland, in latitude 51° 38' north, and longitude 55° 36' west, being of a moderate, even height, and very barren appearance, which continues far inland ; it is about a league to the north-westward of the ledges. From Cape Norman the shores of Newfoundland turn south-westerly, and will be described hereafter. BELLE ISLE. — This island, which lies at the entrance of the strait to which it communicates its name, should be called the Northern Belle Isle, in order to distin- guish it from those we have already described, lying to the southward; 'i is about 9k miles long, and 4^ miles broad, being distant from Bauld Head, in Quirpon Island, about 14 miles, and from the coast of Labradore 12 miles; it is moderately high, and wears a uniform sterile appearance. On its north-western shore there is a small harbour, called Lark Cove, or Ilarbour, lying within an island almost close to the land, and fit only for small craft; and at the eastern side of the island is another cove, called Batteaux Creek, frequented occasionally by shallops. About 2 miles to the north-east- ward of this island lies a ledge of rocks, part of which appear above water, and over these the sea breaks very high ; this is called the N.E. Ledge; you will have 15 and 20 fathoms close to it, and 55 between it and the north part of the island. The soundings about this Belle Isle are very irregular; near the island you will seldom find less than 20 fathoms, except on a S7nall bank, said to lie to the northward, distant 4 miles from its northern part, whereon are only 5 fathoms. The northern part of this island is said to lie in the latitude of 52° 1' north, and longitude 55° 19' west. The S.W. end of the island bears S.E. ;| S., 19 miles from York Point, and N.E. f N., 14 miles from Cape Bauld, in Quirpon Island. F2 86 Sailing Directions from Somidings in the Strait of Belle Isle. — In crossing the Strait of Belle Isle from Quirpon to Chateaux Hay, your soundings will be irregular: from 20 to 30 fathoms on the Newfoundland side, and in some places irom 30 to 38 fathoms; in the stream, or middle of the strait, you will find 25 and 35 fathoms, coarse sand and broken shells ; and towards Chateaux Bay. 45 to 80 faihoms, and within a mile of the coast of Labra- dore, 35, 30, and 25 fathoms. To the northward, between Belle Isle and St. Peter's Bay, there are 59, 87, 96, 63, and 20 fathoms. The soundings afford very little assistance to a vessel at night, or during the fogs, which frequently prevail in all southerly, easterly, and even S.W. winds; it is only with west windr you can depend on clear weather with any certainty. The fogs and currents in the ;'aits render this part of the navigation extremely dangerous. The prevailing currr k is from the northAvard, between Belle Isle and the coast of Labra- dore, bringing down, in some seasons, numerous ice-bergs into the straits, some of which pass into the gulf; this current, with a N.E. wind, has been Known to run 2 knots, at other times almost 'mperceptible, and even running in a contrary direction. III.— THE SOUTHERN COAST OF NEWFOUNULAND. IROM CAPE RACE TO CAPE CHAPEAU ROUGE. Variation 25 degrees west, PRELIMINARY REMARKS.— Vessels bound towards the Gulf of Newfoundland should take the greatest care to notice and make a proper allowance for the currents, which set from the eastward, all along the southern coast of Newfoundland, with fre- quently fatal velocity, causing an impetuous indraught into the various bays, and occa- sioning the much to be deplored loss of many lives, and the ,vreck of numerous vessels. These local currents chiefly prevail on that part between Cape Race and Cape Ray. The British frigate Tweed., the sloop Comus, the transport Harpooner, were all, of late years, lost on this coast; the two latter nearly on the same spot, and within three weeks of each other. II.M. ship Drake, in June 1822, was wrecked about the eastern head of St. Shot's Bay; and in the July following the brig Spence was totally lost on tlie same •laiigers : so that it should seem more vessels have ijeen cast away on the small point of land which divides the two bays of Trepassey and St. Mary, than on any other part of the island; that these accidents were occasioned by the currents, there can be little doubt. It is observed by an oflicer in the Royal Navy, that it frequently happens, a vessel bound from England to Quebec vill strike soundings on the Great Bank of Nev;found- land, and thence shape her course for the Gulf of St. Lawrence, without ever seeing the land, which, probably, is enveloped in fog. When unable or neglecting to make a proper allowance for the above current, which runs sometimes at the rate of 4 milts an hour, he is swept away to the westward; and while he considers himself to be steer- ing fairly for the entrance of the gulf, he is driven on shore, and his vessel becomes a wreck. An able navigator, who has been 20 years employed in the fisheries, and who is a native of Newfoundland, observes, — " It is well understood by all the boat-masters, that there is, in general, a strong current setting in from the eastward, along the western coast of Newfoundland, which, after passing Cape Pine, runs more towards St. Mary's and Placentia Bays. This current will be felt at least 20 leagues to the S.W. of Cape Pine, and becomes more n)pid us you approach the land, its velocity in- creasing as the winds favour its direction ; but at all time.s of sufiicient magnitude to endanger the safety of any vessel approaching from the south or west, in foggy weather, and being ignorant of its existence." In order to avoid the danger arisi.ig from this current, the fishermen, in foggy weather, when returning from the western coast to thelv homes on the eastern shore, 1- Co2)e Race to Cape Chapeau Rouge. 37 seeing J foggy shore, invariably use the lead, depending more upon the depth of water than their compiiss, and always keeping a suflicient distance from the land, to ensure the safety of the vessel. On passing to the eastward of Cape Race, they never approach nearer to the land than 35 fathoms water; the ground being more of an inclined plane on the west than on the east coast, you will find that depth of water at a considerable distance. The ground becomes more broken, and the depth of water increases so fast, that in your course from Cape St. Mary's to avoid Cape Race, you will, when to the eastwai'd of it, find yourself in 50 fathoms, and when advanced a very short distance farther, you Avill drop into 60 and 70 fathoms ; consequently, you will then be clear of any land, and may safely pursue what ^ourse you think proper ; but, in all this navigation, the mariner's safety may be insured by a due attention to the lead. The before-named gentleman, in a letter, dated Bonavista, Newfoundland, February 8th, 18*6, and addressed to the Chairman of Lloyd's, after the Hibemia steamer had been brought up by Cape Race on her homeward voyage, in November 1845; after making several remarks on the probable causes of these dangerous currents, says, — " Had the Hibemia been a vessel under canvas, instead of being propelled rapidly through the water by steam, she would have been brought up at St. Shot's, or about Cape Pine, instead of reaching Cape Race. In such a case I will not even venture to glance at the fearful consequences to her crew and passengers. The admirable pres- ence of mind and cool determined judgment displayed by lier commander, among the I'ocka at Cape Race, would not, I fear, nave been sufficient to bi*ing his vessel off from St. Shot's. Until something has been done to ascertain the true state of the current upon that part of the coast, I would impress upon all commanders approaching Cape Race from the southward and westward, the absolute necessity of making more frequent use of the lead in foggy weather, and not to come within 30 or 35 fathoms on passing or rounding Cape Race. A cast or two of the lead about Cape St. Mary's, and one or two between that and Cape Race, will enable the navigator to conduct his ship, by ob- serving the foregoing precautions, clear of the dangers of that part of the coast, and counteract the force of the current. " If any doubt were entertained, or any proof were wanting, as to the direction oi' the current, after its passing Cape Race, the circumstance of the body of Captain Baker, of H.M. brig Little Drake, having been discovered cast on shore near the Rams or Ramed Island, on the east side of Placentia Bay, and there interied, about 100 miles, or nearly so, from the scene of his unhappy shipwreck, would, I presume, be sufficient to indicate its true course, and to remove all douht, if any existed, on the subject." <;APE race lies in latitude 46° 39' 44" north, and longitude 53° 5' west from Greenwich ; it is situated on the southernmost part of Newfoundland, and lies S.W. ^ W., distant 2^ leagues from Cape Billard; before it lie two or three rocks above water ; these are close to the land, and have 10 fathoms water very near them. Between 6 and 7 miles E.S.E. from Cape Race is the New Bank, being 4 miles long and 1^ broad, and lying N.E. by N. and S.W. by S.; on it are 17, 20, and 25 fathoms, with very deep water on its outside, and ""^ fathoms just within it. Vessels making this part of the coast may know their approach toward the land, by suddenly lessening their waier to the above depths. Near Cape Race is a small inlet, named Cripple Cove ; the land then turns westerly towards Mistaken Point, a distance of 4^ miles. The shores are bold, and oti Mistaken Point, is a rock above water. N.AV. by W., about 2 miles, is the French Mistaken Point: this also has a rock off its extremity; from hence the shore winds N. by W. into Biscay and Mutton Bays; these are seldom frequented, and it is considered dangerous to get embayed there, for the sea commonly drives in, and there is hardly any currents to help you out again. Mutton Bay is formed to the eastward by Cape Mutton, and to the westward by Cape Powies; this lajt is t'^e extreme point of a narrow neck of land that divides Mutton Bay from Trepassey Harbour; it is a long, low, sandy, and stony beach, over which the ships lying in Trepassey Harbour can be distinctly seen. Mutton Bay is about 2 miles deep, and has from 12 to 3 fathoms water in it; but the bottom is toul and rocky. TREPASSEY HARBOUR.— The entrance to this harbour is to the westward of Cape Powles, and the direct course in will be N.E. \ E. Cape Powles lies from French Mistaken Point N.W., about 9 miles; from Cape Mutton W.N.W. | W., 2^ miles; and from Cape Pine N.E. by E., 5 miles. The entrance to Tivpasscy Harbour is J of a mile sa Sailing Directions from wide, and continues of that breadth full 2^ miles up; it then narrows to less than ^ a mile, and opens again to its former width, and there vessels commonly ride. To enter this harbour, ships commonly steer over from Mistaken Point towards Cape Pine, until you fairly open the harbour; you may then safely run along the shore, for it is bold. In sailing into the harbour, you will meet with a rock on the south-eastern shore, lying about a mile from Powles Head, and ^ of a cable's length off the shore : there is also, on the northern side, a shoal which runs along up the harbour, so far as a low green point; to clear this shoal, bring Baker's Point on with a low rocky point at the entrance of the harbour; and when you get so far up as the low green point, you may steer more westerly, and anchor either in the N.W. or N.E. arm, in 5 or 6 fathoms water; both wood and water can be obtained with ease. Fi'om Mistaken ^"'nt to Cape Pine the course and distance are W.N.W. \ W., 4^ leagues ; and f^'o Jape Pine to Cape Freels, west, 1 ^ mile. The land about Cape Pine is barren, anc. jdr rately high. From Cape Freels the shores extend W.N.W., a mile, to Black Heud, and thence N.W. J W. to the eastern reef, and head of St. Shot's Bay. ST. SHOT'S BAY. — This is the fatal spot where so many vessels have been recently wrecked ; the bay is about a mile deep, and from, the eastern to the western head, the bearing is N. by W., distant nearly 3 miles ; it is entirely open and exposed to the sea. ST. MARY'S BAY. — This is an extensive bay, or gulf, commencing on the eastern side at St. Shot's, and on the western side at Point Lance ; the course from the eastern head of St. Shot's to Point Lance being N.W. by N., about 20 miles; from thence the land runs up E.N.E., T' leagues; the land on each side being moderately high, and having several good harbours in it. In proceeding from St. Snot's along the eastern shore, you will pass two little coves, and reach Gull Island ; this lies close in to the land, and bears from the western head of St. Shot's N. \ E., distant 4 miles. From Gull Island to Cape English the bearing and distance are N. by E. \ E., 1^ league. Cape English is high table-land, terminating in a low rocky point, and forming a bay, about a mile deep, to the southward of it; at the bottom of this bay is a stony beach, within which is liolyrood Pond, running E.N.E., nearly 6 leagues, and from ^ a mile to 2 miles in breadth; this occasions the cape to appear like an island, when you are to the southward of it. At 1^ mile N.E. \ N. from Cape English is False Cape; 6^ miles E.N.E. from Cape English is Point la Haye: this is low, and has a ledge of rocks running from it, about ^ of a mile into t'* sea, and above a mile al^ng the shore, on which the waves break furiously in bad wt-cdier ; this is the only danger you will meet with in St. Mary's Harbour. ST. MARY'S HARBOUR.— From Point la Haye to Double Road Point, which is the southern extreme of St. Mary's Harbour, the course and distance are E.N.E., 1^ mile; the land between is low, and wears a barren appearance. Within Double Road Point is Ellis's Point, distant ^ a mile ; these two form the starboard points of entrance to the harbour, which is here nearly a mile wide. You will now perceive the river to be divided into two branches, the one running li.N.E. into what is called Mai Bay, the other south-easterly into St. Mary's Harbour. When you are within Ellis's Point, in St. Mary's Harbour, you can haul to the southward, and anchor abreast of the fishing-stages ar I houses upon a flat, in 4 or 5 fathoms water, where you will ride land-locked ; this liat runs oil" shore about ^ a mile, and between it and the oppo- site shore is from 15 to 30 fathoms water. The best anchorage is about 2 miles above the town, opposite to Brown's Pond, where it is not ^ a mile wide; here also you will lie land-locked in 12 fathoms, and have excellent ground at the farther end of the bay. MAL BAY on the E.N.E. branch, is about a mile wide, and runs up 2 miles, but the anchorage is not good ; a heavy sea frequently sets into it, and unless you run up to its very head, in 5 or 6 fathoms, you can have no place even for occasional security ; it is therefore seldom resorted to. The entrance to these harbours bears from Point Lance nearly east, distant 19 miles. From Trapeau Point the coast runs N.N.E. \ N., above 2 miles, to Shoal Bay, and opposite to the northern point of this Shoal Bay, lies Great Colinct Island; this is about a league in length and 1^ mile broad: the southern end of which bears from Cape English N. by E., distant 3 leagues. There is a safe chan nel on either side of this island, only taking care to give Shoal Bay Point a good berth of I of a mile, in order to avoid some rocka which He ofl'it. On the northern sid(! of Cajje Race to Cape Chapcau ItoiKjo. 39 I the Great Colinet is a stony beach, off which runs a bank, with from 7 to 17 fathoms water, rocky ground. At 1 J mile north-eastward from Great Colinet is Little Colinet Island, above a mile in length and ^ a mile in breadth ; there is deep water all round it. GREAT SALMON RIVER.— E. by N., 4 miles from the northern part of Little Colinet Island, is the entrance to Great Salmon River, which is nearly J of a mile wide, and runs E.N.E., 7 miles. About 3 miles up this river, and on its southern shore, is an opening, called Little Harbour; opposite this, in a small cove, is the best anchorajje in the river, although it is generally good throughout : here you may ride in safety, m 5 or 6 fathon\3 water. The river narrows as you advance up it; and towards its far- ther end becomes very shallow. COLINET BAY. — N.W. by N. from the entrance of Great Salmon River, distant 2^ miles, and N.E. ^ E., ."$ miles from Little Colinet Island, is the mouth of Colinet Bay. Between Salmon River and Colinet Bay is a cove, ij mile deep, with from 13 to 4 fathoms in it; but it is exposed to the S.W., and therefore not much resorted to. Colinet Bay runs in N.E. by N., about 2 miles, where the point of an island on tlie starboard side narrows the passage ; having passed which, the channel opens wider again, and the top of the bay is a sandy shallow beach. Throughout the whole of Colinet Bay the anchorage is good: you will have from 12 to 6 fathoms water up to the narrows; in passing the narrows there are 7 and 8 fathoms, and above it 6, 5, and 4 fathoms, all good ground. NORTH HARBOUR.— To the W.S.W. of Colinet Bay, 4 miles, and N.N.E., about 2 miles from the northern end of Little Colinet Island, is the entrance to North Harbour, which is J of a mile wide, and runs up to the northward 3 miles. The an- chorage is very good about 2 miles up the river, where it is ^ a mile wide, in 5 or 6 fathoms; or vessels may run farther up, where two sandy points stretch out, being ^ a cable's length asunder : keep { ' '^ starboard point on board, and anchor close within the starboard shore. In entering rth Harbour, always keep mid-channel, for the eastern land is somewhat shallow. The land now trends W.S.W. ^ S. towards Point Lance. There are one or two coves in the way, but no place fit lor the reception of shipping. POINT LANCE lies in latitude 46° 48', and Ij a low rugpd point, although the land in the interior rises up, and becomes highly elevated. We have already stated that the course and distance from the eastern head of St. Shot's to Point Lance is N.W. If W., about 20 miles. From Point Lance to Cape St. Mary is N.W. ^ W., about 6^ miles. CAPE ST. MARY is a high, bluff point of land, making like /'ape St. "'''incent on the coast of Portugi'V The land to the northwawl along shore, to a considerable dis- tance, has an even appearance, and is nearly of equal height with the cape itself. W. by S. from Cape Lance, distant full 2 miles, lie the Bull and Coio Rocks ; these are two jflat rocks, lying very near each other, and having many small rocks about them. About a similar distance, but nearer the main, is another rock, appearing at half-tide ; there are 10 fathoms between it and the shore, and 15 fathoms between it and Bull and Cow Rocks. In a similar direction to the Bull and Cow Rocks from Cape Lance, but at 3 leagues' distance, and nearly S.S.W., distant 7 miles from Cape St. Mary's, are two other little rocks, appearing just above the surface of the water, and having the sea iionstantly breaking over them; they lie S.S.E. and N.N.W. from each other, dis- tant 3 cables length, and have 15 fathoms between them; the same depth of water is all around them, excepting towards the S.S.E., where only 6 fathoms will be found 2 cables' length off. xJetween these rocks and Cape St. Mary are 30, 25, and 19 fathoms water; and near the cape are 13, 14, and 15 fathoms. Vessels therefore may proceed between them, and also between the Bull and Cow Rocks and the main, if necessary, for there is no hidden danger; but perhaps it will always be more prudent to go to the southward of both. PIi ACSNTIA BAT. — The entrance to Placentia Bay is formed by Cape St. Mary on the east, and Cape Chapeau Rouge, or Mountain of the Red Hat, on the west ; the former lying in latitude 46° 49' north, and the latter in 46° 53' north, bearing from each other W.N.W. and E.S.K., distant 16| leagues. Cape Chapeau Rouge is the most remarkable land on all the coast, appearing higher than the surrounding shore, and somewhat like the crown of a hat, from which singularity it obtains its name. It is visible 11 or 12 leagues to seaward in clear weather. 40 Sailing Directions from From Cape St. Mary to Cape Breiiie your course will be N. by E., about 9 miles, and from roint Brome to the Virgin Kocks N.E. by N., 12 miles; these rocks He 1 i mile from the main, and always appear above water. A little to the southward of the Virgin Rocks are some whitish clills in the land, by which it may be known if fall- ing in with the land hereabouts in thick weather. About a mile S.S.W. from the Virgin Hocks lies the Girdle lioch. From the Virgin Hocks to Point Verde, the southernmost point of Plucentia Har- bour, the course and distance are N.E. by E. \ E., 6 miles. From St. Mary's Cape to V'jrde Point there is no harbour or place of shelter for ships of any size. PLACENTIA IIAPtBOUll.— Point Verde, or CJreen Point, is low and level, and forms the southern point of the road ; it has a pebbly beach on each side, and several fishing stages within it. At the end of this beach is a high rocky cliff, extending to the S.lii. corner of the bay, where it again terminates in a pebbly beach; this beach then runs E.N.E., a mile, to the Fort Point: on the inside, which faces the S.E. arm of the harbour, stands the town of Placentia. A little southward of the town is a high hill, with a remarkable cliff in the middle of the beach. The outer side of the north point is level, with a clay cliff on its outer part, bearing nearly N.E. by N., distant fronx Point Verde 1^ mile; from this point the land forms a small bay, with a stony beach round it, to the corner of the cliff under Signal Hill; this cliff continues to Freshwater Bay, which is formed in a valley between Signal Hill and Castle Hill, having a pebbly beach around it; here a small rivulet runs down the valley, at which vessels may obtain water. To sail into this road, if coming from the southward, you should keep a league off the land, in order to avoid the Gibraltar Hock, which lies about 2 miles to the westward of Green Point, and has only 8 feet water over it; the mark to go to the northward of which is, the castle, standing on a hill at the northern side of the harbour, and very conspicuous to seaward, open of Point Verde. When you have this castle on with the point, you will pass a little to the northward of the rock ; but when you have the castle well open of the point, you will give the rock a wide berth. Run in with this mark, keeping your lead goin", for there are regular soundings on both sides, and then proceed to the anchorage in Freshwater Bay, and under Castle Hill, at ^ of the distance over from that side, where you will lie in 6 or 7 fathoms water, good ground. At the bottom of the road is a long beach, which terminates in a point to the north- ward, on which stand some houses and an old fortress ; there is also a fort on the oppo- site point. The entrance to the harbour is between these; it is very narrow (not above 60 fathoms across), and has 3i fathoms water in it. When you get within these points the harbour opens, becomes ^ of a mile wide, and extends E.N.E., above 1^ mile, where ships may lie in perfect security, with 6 and 7 fathoms water; in going in, keep nearer to the starboard side. The stream runs into the harbour more than 4 knots an hour. The tide risc-j 6 or 7 feet; and it is high water, full and change, at 15 min. after 9 a.m. N.E. ^ E. from Point Verde, distant 2 miles, and N.N.W. from Moll Point, about 5 of a mile, is the Moll Rock, over which are only 12 feet water, with 8 and 10 fathoms near it. N.E. by N., 5^ miles from Point Verde, is Point Latina. S.W. from Point Latina, distant a mile, is the Wolf Rock, which lies about h a mile from the main, and between Placentia Harbour and Point Latina, and therefore must have a good berth in passing. The shore all the way is low near the sea, but hi^h and ragged inland. A large mile to the eastward of Point Latina is Point Roche, which has a shoal off it, extending ^ of a mile out. LITTLE PLACENTIA HARBOUR runs in to the southward from Point Roche; and S.E. by E. ^ E. from Point Roche, distant 2 miles, is the opposite, or Fox's Point, which may be considered to be the eastern entrance to Placentia Sound. On the western side of this sound is the harbour of Little Placentia, which extends W. by S., above H mile, and is nearly i a mile broad. There is good anchorage in a cove on the northern shore, which you may know by the western side of it being woody ; off the east point of the cove lies a shoal, stretching nearly ^ across the channel ; in this cove are 7 and 8 fathoms water. To the eastward an arm also runs in almost a league, with deep water, but little frequented, called Placentia Sound. Fox's Harbour is a small sandy cove, fit for boats only. SHIP HARBOUR. — From Point Latina to Ship Harbour the course and distance are east, nearly 5i miles. This inlet runs up northerly, 2| miles, and is ^ mile wide. 0(12)0 Race to Capo Chapcau Iloinje. 41 9 miles, Dcks lie ward of liffall- :oni the ;ia Har- Cape to vel, and I several ig to the ich then 111 of the liigh hill, rth point [int from ny beach ■eshwater a pebbly isels may )uld keep I miles to go to the 1 harbour, castle on you have n in with sides, and a of the d ground. he north- the oppo- prow (not Ihin these K., above ; in going nore than jhange, at int, about fathoms rom Point main, and ood berth cd inland. hoal off it, int Roche ; )x's Point, On the W. by S., a cove on voody; off el; in this t a league, u'bour is a id distance mile wide. wide; the best anchorage is in a covo on the west side, in 10 fathoms water, about a milu from the entrance. FOX ISLAND is small and round, and lies N.E. ^ N., distant 3 miles from Point Latina, and 'N.Vi. by W., full 3 miles from Ship Harbour Point. This latter is a low stony point, lying 1 ^ «nile from the entrance of the harbour. Between Fox Island and Snip Harbour Poin,-. is a ledge of rocks, which, in bad weather, will show breakers quite across; between the rocks are 24, 5, 7, and 10 fathoms water. N.N.W., 1^ mile from Fox Island, is the Fishing Rock, steep, and always above water; and N.N.E., 1^ mile from the Fishing Kock, is Rowland's sunken Rock, over which the sea most conmionly breaks. The ram ISLANDS.— This is a cluster of high islands, lying nearly N.E. | E. from Fox Island, distant 3 miles; on the eastern side of these islands is Long Harbour. There is no danger in entering this place ; but the best anchorage will be on the north- ern side, to the eastward of Harbour Island, between it and the main, in 6 or 7 fathoms water, where you will ride secure from all winds. From Long Harbour the shore runs H.N.E., N. by E., and north, ftiU 15 miles, having no harbour or place fit for the reception of vessels, until you reach Little Har- boux', Little South Harbour, and Great South Harbour; within this 8pac3 are sold to be several low islands and rocks; one of which, called the White Rock, from being covered with the dung of birds, lies N.E. by N. from Point Latina, distant 13 miles, and direct midway between Fox Island and Little Harbour. It is abreast of a small place, called Tinny Cove, and full 2 miles off the land : vessels pass on either side. LITTLE HARBOUR has very bad anchorage, and much exposed to south-westerly winds, therefore not much frequented. LITTLE SOUTH HARBOUR lies a mile to the north-westward of Little Har- bour, and has several rocky islands at its entrance, which, in sailing in, must be left on your starboard side, excepting one, on either side of which there is a good passage, with 15 fathoms water. On the southern shore within these islands, is a sunken rock, over which the sea commonly breaks; it lies about a cable's length from the land. Nearly opposite are also some rocks, a cable's length from the shore, which appear at half-ebb; this harbour is 1^ mile long, ^ a mile wide, and has 7, 8, 10, and 12 fathoms water in it ; and the ground, except where these rocks are situated, is tolerably good. GREAT SOUTH HARBOUR lies a mile to the northward of Little South Har- bour; its entrance is, between the middle point and the Isle au Bordeaux, 1^ mile wide, with from 20 to 30 fathoms water; there is no danger in going in, and the anchorage, 1 J mile up, or near the head of the harbour, is very good in 6 and 7 fathoms water. CHANCE HARBOUR. — The Isle au Bordeaux is a high round island, from which the coast runs north-easterly, 4 miles, to the entrance of an inlet, called Come-by- Chance; this runs up full 3 miles, and has from 20 to 3 fathoms water, gradually decreasing in depth unto the farther end; vessels may anchor here on a sandy bottom, but they will be quite exposed to south-westerly winds. NORTH HARBOUR.— About N.N.W., 3 miles from the entrance of Come-by- Chance, is that of North Harbour; it is above a mile wide, and there is no danger in sailing into it, but, like the former, it is too open to be trusted to; there is, however, fair anchorage about 2 miles up, in 7 fathoms water. PIPER'S HOLE.— N.W. by N., distant 2 J miles fu,m the entrance to North Har- bour, is that which leads to Piper's Hole ; the channel in is between Sound Island and the main; in the passage you will have 19, 15, and 12 fathoms, and when to the north- ward of the island 8, 7, and 6 fathoms ; from hence Piper's Hole runs up to the north- ward full 5 miles; but the water is shallow and unfit for shipping. From Piper's Hole, in a south-westerly direction, lie Sound, Woody, and Barren Islands, having a channel between them and the north-western shore, A a mile wide, in which are from 7 to 20 fathoms, and good anchorage all the way. Between Woody and Sound Island is a passage with from 7 to 16 fathoms water in it; that between Woody and Barren Island IS much wider and deeper, having 40 and 50 fathoms. Opposite the northern part of Barren Island is a small cove, called La Plant, fit only for boats. Barren Island is 3^ miles in length, and 1 in breadth ; it is high land, and at its south-eastern part is a small cove, in which is tolerable anchorage in from 8 to 16 fathoms. N.W. by W [N. America — Part I.] G 4^ Sailiny Directions from from the southeru part of Barren iHland is (lulsli, an inlet of very little importance; farlliiir S.W. are Great and Little Sandy Harbours. GREAT SANDY IIARHOUR lies W. ^ S., distant 4 miles from the south end of Barren Island ; to this place there is a passage between Ship Island and the main, with 7, 9, and 17 fathoms water; but the entrance to the harbour is very narrow, and much encumbered with rocks; these arc all above water, and have channels l)etween them; but when you get within the harbour there are and 7 fathoms, and good shelter. LITTLE SANDY HARBOUR \^\ofa. mile to the southward of the Great Har- bour: in it you will have 6 and 7 fatiioms water, good ground; in sailing in, you should pass to the northward of a low rochy which lies at the entrance. You may readily know this harbour by the Bell Island, which lies S.E. ^ E., 1 J mile i>om the mouth of it, and N.E. by N., 13 miles from the western point of Mera,'s ; and from thence to Indian Harbour, which is situated on the eastern side of Merasiieen Island, N.W. by W., 4 miles. To enter this place, you may go on either side of a small island at the entrance ; the passage is safe, but the only anchorage is to the westward of the island, between it and Mera- sheen, and here the ground is uncertain. HARBOUR BUFFET. — On the eastern side of Long Island, about a league from Iroa Island, is Harbour Buffet, a tolerably good harbour, the entrance to which is narrow, but has 13 fathoms water in it; this place may be known by the islands that lie in the mouth and to the southward of it, and by Harbour Buffet Island, which lies E. A S., a mile from the entrance. To sail into this harbour, you nmst steer to the north- Avard of the islands at its mouth, and, being within them, you will perceive the harbour Cape Race to Cape Chapcau Itouijc. 4S lortanco ; rrnth end hu main, row, and between md good ■eat Har- >u should lily know of it, and [ind has a J Islands; Is, nearly i^alen and )assage to If is very ti from 10 I, between it. ing above !n Island. )ered with rly in the <.r of rocks . small but ^oii should s a cable's Iso a small •om shore; in appi'ar- distant 11 . On the fit only for 3 the main 10 S.W. of y Islands is and Long Laped, and above one- horn point mg Island, 1 Harbour, miles. To the passage and Mera- eague from to which is islands that which lies the north- he harbour divided into two branches; one running westward, the other northward. The best nnciiorage is in the northern arm, in 15 fathoms water. MUSCLE IIAIlIiOITR.— On the western side of Long Island, and about 4 miles from its southern end, is Muscle Ilnrbour; the entrance to which is between a low preen point on the starboard side, and a small island on your port hand; the harbour IS jiea.ly 2 miles long, and one broad; and has from 10 to '20 fathoms water within it. Vessels bound to this place may run in between Woody and Iron Islands ft'om the southward, or between Long and Merash(!en Islands from the northward; but in the latter track there arc sotnc rocks to be guarde fathoniH water, good ground, and secure from uU winds. There is not the least danger in going into this harbour, oidy i;iving the low rocks abhvc water, on the port hand, at the entrance, a berth of a cable s ength. LITTLE MOKTIER IJAY.— At 2J miles from the entrance of Mortier Iky lies Croney Point and Islands; about '2 miles farther southward, and nearly a mile west- ward of Mortier East Point, is Little Mortier Hay, at the entrance of which is a round island, called Mortier Island, lying ^ of the distance from the west side; it is bold-to all round, and may be passed on eitlicr side. Close to the Hrst point beyond the island, on the port side going in, is another little island, close under the land; and 2 cables* length from it, in a direct line towards the outer island, is u sunker rock, on which the sea oreaks in bad weather, which is the only danirer in the bay. At the bottom of it, lit mile from Mortier Island, on the east side, is ■. cove, called Fox Cove, where there is fair anchorage, and room for one ship to moor in I) fathoms . good holding ground, two points ojien to the sea, from S.S.E. to S.E. On the west side of the bay is the harbour, which is small ond narrow, but a very good one foi small ships, where they lie moored to the shore. Off the starboard point going i' , is a rock -vhich h always covered at high water. At 1^ mile S.W. by W. from Mortier East Point lies Mortier V nt Head; a mile beyond which is Iron Island; and S.E. A E., 2 leagues from Iron Ishnd, and S.^^^ i W., 5 leagues from Cape Jude, lies the Mortier Bank, the sh ;" part of which ': .bout a league over, and on which there arc said to be only 4 fathoms. The sea breaks heavily on it in blowing weather. IRON ISLAND is small and high. Off its S.W. point is a rock under water; at 3 of a mile to the southward of it is Gregory's Itock; S. ^ \V., ^ of a mile from which is Oalloping Andrews; and S.E. by E. from Iron Island is the White Horse, of 8 fathoms. A W.S.W. course from Marticot s Island will clear all these dangers. GREAT AND LITTLE HURIN HARHOURS.— S.W. ^ W. from Iron Island, distant a league, is the S.E. jioint of Great Hurin Island; and W.N.W., H mile from it, is the north part of Pardy's Island. On the main, within these islands, lie the har- bours of Great and Little Hurin. Vessels bound for Hurin may pass on cither side of Iron Island; the only danger in passing to the northward is the ledge, called the Brandys, which almost always brealc : they lie nearly ^ of a m.ile to the southward of a low rock above water, close under the Hnd of Mortier West Head. My keeping Mortier West Head open to the westward o[ ron Island, you will avoid Gregory's Rock, on which is only 2 fathoms water, ana <., iiich almost always breaks. Vessels nuvy pass with saf v between this rock and Iron Island, by giving the latter a berth of above a cable's ength. GALLOPING ANDREWS.— On the main, within Pardy's Island, are two remark- able white marks in the rocks ; the aorthernmost of these brought on with the north part of Pardy's Island, and Iron Island N.E. ^ N., will lead on the Galloping Andrews, a shoal, with 5 fathoms water on it. The White Horse is a shoal, with 8 fathoms on it, which bears S.E. by E., a mile from Iron Island. The Dodding Bock lies about ^ of a mile from the easternmost part of Great Burin Island. Great Burin Island is about 2^ miles in length, lying N.N.E. and S.S.W., being high land. Near its south end is Cat Island, high and round, lying E.N.E., nearly 4 miles from Corbin Head. From Corbin Head to Shalloway Point the bearing and distance are N.E. ^ N., 4^ miles. Between them, and nearly in the same direction, lie Corbin and Little Burin Islands, both high and round, not more than a cable's length from the shore. 46 Sailing Dircciiotis from SHALLOWAY ISLAND lies N.N.W., a mile from Cat Island, and N.E. by E., ^ of a mile from Little Burin Island. The passage into Burin Harbours, from the southward, is to the westward of Shalloway Island. In sailing in, take care to give Poor Island a berth on your port hand; and, when within Shalloway Island, you may anchor in safety between it and Great Burin Island, in from 12 to 18 fathoms. The best anchorage in Great Burin Harbour is in Ship Cove; the course up to it, after you are within Neck Point (which is to the westward of the Shalloway Island) is N.N.E., about H mile. It is nearly ^ of a mile wide. In sailing up, keep the west shore on board, in order to avoid a sunken rock on the oast shore, at about half-way uj), and nearly a cable's length from the shore. Directly off this is a remarkable hole in the rock, on the same side; and a gully in the laud, from top to bottom, on the western shore. Another roch^ with 2^ fathoms on it, lies above a cable's length to the S.W. of Harbour Point, which is round iinu gi'een, and of a moderate height, joined to Great Burin Island by a low, narrow, sandy neck. BURIN BAY is about a mile N.N.E. of Little Burin Island; it is clear, and about a mile wide every way : here ships may occasionally anchor, and lie almost land-locked. In this bay are two islands, one called Poor Island, low and barren ; the other lies to the northward, before the entrance of Burin Inlet, and is high and woody. BURIN INLET maybe entered on either side of the island; it extends up 5 miles. A little within the entrance, on the east side, ^ a cable's length from the shore, is arock, covered at \ flood; and IJ mile from the entrance, near the middle, is another rocA, to the westward of which is good room, and fair anchorage, in from 7 to 12 fathoms. There are 15 fathoms in the entrance; and, in the middle, 2 miles up, 15 to 23 fathoms; and thence, up to the head, are from 10 to 5 fathoms. The east passage is between Pardy's Island and Iron Island; but it is not safe with- out a commanding gale, and that between the N.N.E; and S.E. CORBIN HARBOUR is about a mile to the northward of Corbin Head, and is a good harbour for small vessels. At ^^ of a mile eastward of this harbour, and 2 cables' length from the shore, is a sunken rock, of 5 or 6 feet water, on which the sea breaks in bad weather. Vessels bound lor this harbour must also avoid a shoal, of 2 fathoms water, which lies E.S.E. from the south point of the entrance, distant \ a mile; the best anchorage is in the north arm, about ^ a mile within the entrance, opposite a cove on the starboard side. From Corbyn Head, which is high, bluff land, to Small Point the lowest hereabout, the course and distance are W.S.W., 2^ miles; and from Small Point to Sauker Head W. h S., 2 miles. There are many headlands between, which form coves, but afford no shelter. The coast is clear of rocks ; and there are 30 fathoms water close to the shore; but a little to the south-westward of Sauker Head there is a small rock, under water ; it lies close in within the land. From Sauker Head, which is a high hill, in the shape of a sugar-loaf, to Cape Chapeau Rouge, the bearing and distance are west, 4 miles ; between lie the harbours of Great and Little St. Lawrence. LITTLE ST. LAWRENCE.— The harbour of Little St. Lawrence is the first to the v/estward of Sauker Head. To sail in, you must keep the west shore on board, to avoid a sunken rock, which lies a little without the point of the peninsula, which stretches off from li.T east side of the harbour. The anchorage is above tlio peninsula, (which shelters it from the sea-winds,) in 3 or 4 fathoms water, a fine sandy bottom. Ships may anchor without the peninsula, in 12 fathoms, goou ground, but this place is open to S.S.E. winds. GREAT ST. LAWRENCE.— The harbour of Great St. Lawrence, which is the ■westernmost, is close to the eastward of Cape Chapeau Rouge. To sail in, you should be careful with westerly, particularly with S.W. winds, not to approach too near the Hat Mountain, in order to avoid the flaws and eddy winds under the high lands. There is no danger but what is very near the shore. The course in is, first, N.N.W., till you open the upper part of the harbour, then N. ^ W. The best anchorage for large ships is before a cove, on the east side of the harbour, in 13 fathoms water. A little above Blue Beach Point, which is the first on the west side, you may lie, only having two points open : and may anchor any where between this point and the point of Low Beech, on tlie same side, near the head of the harbour, observing that, dose to the west shore, Cjpe Chapcau Rouge to Cape Ray. 47 :. ty E., torn the id, when 1 Island, in Ship irestward ide. In the cast rectly off lid, from ies above and of a nd about d-lockcd. er lies to p 5 miles. , is a roch^ r roch, to IS. There oms; and safe with- I, and is a 1 2 cables' breaks in 2 fathoms mile; the ite a cove lereabout, iker Head but afford )se to the cA, under c Chapeau J of Great he first to board, to stretches (which Ships ce is open 1 a, )m ich is the ou should near the ds. There /■., till you argc ships ttle above aving two lOW lierch, vest shore. the ground is not so good as on the other side. Fishing vessels commonly lie at the head of the harbour, above the beach, sheltered from all winds. Garden Bank, whereon are from 7 to 16 fathoms water, lies about ^ a mile off Little St. Lawrence, with Blue Beach Point on with the east point of Great St. Lawrence. FROM CAPE CHAPEAU ROUGE TO CAPE RAY. Variation 25 to 23 degrees West. FERRYLAND HEAD lies W.S.W., amile from Cape Chapeau Rouge; it is a high rocky island, just separated from the main, and, with Chapeau Rouge, are infallible objects to point out the harbours of St. Lawrence. LAUN BAY. — ^AV.N.W., 5 miles from Ferryland Head, lies the Point of Laun, from whence the land turns towards the northward, and forms the bays of Laun ; here are two small inlets, called Great and Little Laun. Little Laun, the easternmost, lies open to the S.W. winds, and, therefore, is no place to anchor in; Great Laun runs in N.E. by N., 2 miles, is nearly ^ a mile wide, and has from 14 to 3 fathoms water. In sailing in, be careful to avoid a sunken rock, which lies about \ of a mile off the east point. The best anchorage is on the east side, about ^ a mile from the head, in 6 and 5 fathoms, tolerably good bottom, and open only to the south and S. by W. winds, which cause a great swell, as tlie head of this place is a bar harbour, where boats can ascend at half-tide, and find conveniences for fishing, with both wood and water. LAUN ISLANDS lie off the west point of Laun Bay, not far from the shore; the westernmost and outermost of which lies W.N.W., westerly, 10 miles from Ferryland Head. Nearly ^ of a mile to the southward of this island is a rock, whereon the sea breaks in bad weather. There are other sunkeii rocks about these islands, but not dan- gerous, being very near the shore. TAYLOR'S BAY lies open to the sea, about 3 miles to the westward of Laun Islands. Off the east point are some rocks, nearly ^ of a mile from the shore. POINT AUX GAUL is a low, narrow point of land, which stretches out a little to the westward of Taylor's Bay. A rock lies off it above water, ^ a mile from the shore, called Gaul Shag Rock, which bears from Ferryland Head AV.N.W. | W., 5 leagues ; there are 14 fathoms close to the off-side of it, but some rockf on its Inside. From Point aux Gaul Shag Rock to the Lameline Islands, the bearing and distance are N.W. by W., a league; between is the Bay of Lameline, which is unfit for shipping, being shallow, and having several islands and rocks about it. The river at the bottom of the bay abounds with salmon. Near the south point of the westernmost Lameline Island is a rock, high above water, called Lameline Shag Rock; from which to Point May the distance is 8 miles. Between lie the Lameline Ledges, which are very dangerous, some of them being 3 milen from the land. To avoid them in the day-time, you should not bring the Lameline Islands t"> the southward of E.S.E., until Point May bears N.E. by N. from you; you may then steer northward between Point ]\Iay and Green Island with safety. By night, approach no nearer than in 30 futhoms water. REMARK. — Mariners who navigate this part of the coast, will do well by observing the appearance of the land, for all that part of Chapeau Rouge and Laun is very high and hilly close to the sea; from Laun Islands to Lameline it is only moderately high; and ti'om Lameline to Po'nt May, the land near the shore is low, with beaches of sand, while inland it becomes mountainous. ST. PIEARE, OR ST. PETER'S ISLAND.— The island of St. Pierre lies 1 1 leagu(!s W. by N. from Cape Chapeau Rouge ; it is about 4 leagues in circumfer- ence, and pretty high, with a craggy, broken, uneven surface. On coming from the westward. Gallantry Head (which is the S.E. point of the island) makes in a round hummock, like a small island, separated from St. Pierre. A little to the N.E. of Gal- lantry Head lie three small islands, the innermost of which is the largest, and called Chiens or Dog Island; within it are the road and hai-bour of St. Pierre. The harbour is small, and has from 20 to 12 feet water; but there is a bar across the entrance, with only 6 feet at low water, luid 12 or 14 at high water. On Gollantr Head is a fixed light, visible, in clear weather, 18 miles. ; ,. 48 Sailing Directions from The road lies on the west side of Dog Island, and will admit ships of any burthen, in 8, 10, or 12 fiithoms water. The best anchorage is on the north side; but in general it is rocky, and exposed to the N.E. winds. Be cautious, in going in or out, of some sunken rocks, which lie about a mile E.S.E. from Boar Island, which is the easternmost of the three islands before mentioned : this is the only danger about St. Pierre but what lies very near the shore. This harbour has been improved by the erection of a light- house on Canon Point, which is on the north side of the entrance to the inner harbour, in latitude 46° 46' 52" north, and longitude 56° 14' west, and about ^ of a mile to the eastward of the town. This is a fixed light, visible 3 miles oft, which is shown only from the 1st May to the 15th December. About 2 cables' length eastward of the lighthouse is anchorage in 5 or 6 fathoms, with the light bearing about W. by N. The passage in between St. Pierre and Dog Island is very narrow, being rocky on both sides; but in the channel are 6, 5, and 4 fathoms. The flood-tide at St. Pierre enters by the S.E. Pass, and also the Passage aux Fletans, going out at the N.E. Pass, and the ebb in an opposite direction ; but at a little distance outside, the current is generally to the N.N.W. The ISLAND of COLOMBIER is rather high, and Kes very near to the N.E. point of St. Pierre; between them is a passage, ^ of a mile wide, with 12 fathoms water. On the north side of the island is a rock, called Little Colomhier; and about \ of a mile E.N.E. from it is a sunken rock, with 2 fathoms on it, called by the French, Basse du Colomhier. GREEN ISLAND is about f of a mile in circuit, and low; it lies E.N.E., about 5 miles from St. Pierre, and nearly in the middle of the channel between it and Point May, in Newfoundland. On its south side are several rocks, above and under water, extending 2;^ miles to the W.S.W. L ANGLE Y, oe LITTLE MIQUELON.— Langley Island lies to the N.W. of St. Pierre, with a passage of about 3 miles wide between, free from danger. It is about 8 leagues in circuit, of a moderate and equal height, excepting at the north end, which is a low point, with sand-hills; off Avhich, on both sides, it is flat a little way; but every other part of the island is bold-to. There is a settlement in the N.E. Bay. There is anchorage on the N.E. side of the island, near Seal Cove, in 5 or 6 fathoms, a little to the southward of the sand-hills, on a fine sandy bottom. GREAT MIQUELON is joined to Langley, or Petit Miquelon, by a long, narrow range of sand-hills, having a beach on each side. Miquelon is 4 leagues in length from north to south, and is about 5 miles in breadth at the widest part : the middle of the island is high land, called the High Lands of Dunne ; but down by the shore it is low, excepting Cape Miquelon, which is a lofty promontory at the northern extremity of the island. Miquelon Rocks stretch off" from the eastern point of the island, under the high land, 1^ mile to the eastward: some are above, and some under water; the outermost are above water, and there are 12 fathoms close to them, with 18 and 20 a mile off". N.E. ^ E., about 4J miles from these rocks, lies Miquelon Bank, on which are 6 fathoms water. Miquelon Road, whicl is large and spacious, lies towards the north end, and on the east side of the island, between Cape Miquelon and Chapeau, which is a very remark- able round mountain near the shore, off" which are some sunken rocks, at the distance of about i of a mile ; but every where else it is clear of danger. The best anchorage is in 6 or 7 fathoms, near the bottom of the road, on fine sandy bottom ; but there you lie exposed to easterly winds. The Seal Rocks, two in number, are above water, and lie about 1^ league oflf from the N.W. side of Miquelon; the passage between them and the island is very safe, and there are 14 or 15 fathoms water within a cable's length all round them. The islands of St. Pierre, Langley, and Miquelon, were ceded to France by England, on condition that no forts should be built on either ; that no more than 50 men of regu- lar troops should be kept there, and that they should have no military stores, or cannon, capable of making a defence. During the late hostilities these isles were annexed to the Government of Newfoundland, having been taken possession of by the British forces, 14th May, 1793; but they have been restored to France, on the original con- ditions, by the treaty of 1814. Cape Chapeau Rouge to Cape Ray. 40 about Point May has a rocky islet at its point; and from thence the land turns N.N.E. to- wards Dantzick Cove and Point, and thence E.N.E. towards Fortune Head. FORTUNE BAT, &c. — From Point May to Pass Island, the bearing and distance are N. by E., 12 leagues. Between them is the entrance to Fortune Bay, which is about 22 or 23 leagues deep; and in which are numerous bays, harbours, and islands. BRUNET ISLAND.— The island of Brunct lies nearly in the middle of the entrance into Fortune Bay ; it is above 5 miles in length, 2 in breadth, and of moderate height; on its N.E. side is a bay, wherein there is tolerable anchorage for ships, in 14 or 16 fathoms water, sheltered from southerly and westerly winds. In the bottom of the bay, at about ^ of a mile from the shore, are some rocks, which must be avoided. Opposite to this bay, on the S.W. side of the island, is a small cove, with 6 fathoms water. The islands lying oif the west end of Brunet, to the southward, are called the Little Brunets, which, with Brunet, may be approached within ^ of a mile all round. The Plate Islands are three rocky islets, of a moderate height, the nearest of which lies W.S.W., a league from the west end of Great Brunet. The southernmost is about 2 miles farther off, and bears from Cape Miquelon E. ^ S., 3 J leagues; and in a direct line between Point May and Pass Island, 17 miles from the former, and 19 miles from the latter. E.S.E., ^ of a mile from the Great Plate, (which is the northernmost) is a sunken rock, whereon the sea breaks, and this is the only danger about them. There are several strong and irregular settings of the tide or currents about the Plate and Brunet Islands, which seem to have no dependency on the moon and the course of the tides on the coast. SAGONA ISLAND, which lies N.E., 2 leagues from the east end of Brunet, is about a mile across each way, of a moderate height, and bold-to all round; on its west- ern side there is a small creek, admitting fishing shallops ; in the middle of the entrance to this is a sunken rock, which occasions it to be diflicult of access, except in very fine weather. A sand bank surrounds this island, running westerly, full 7 miles, upon which are 14, 17, and 20 fathoms water. POINT MAY is the southern extremity of Fortune Bay, and the S.W. extremity of this part of Newfoundland; it may be known by a great black rock, nearly joining to the pitch of the point, and something higher than the land, which makes it look like a black hummock on the point. At about ^ of a mile directly off from this black rock are three sunken rocks, on which the sea always breaks. DANTZICK COVES.— N. byE., 1 J mile from Point May, is Little Dantzick Cove; and 2 miles farther, is Great Dantzick Cove. From Dantzick Point (which is the north point of the coves,) to Fortune HeaV. side of the harbour, about 2 miles within Gull Island, in 15 fathoms water, unless you run above the narrows; there is a salmon fishery at the head of the bay. A little to the westward of Lon^ Harbour is Hare Harbour, fit for small vessels only. At 2 miles to the northward of Hare Harbour is Mai Bay, liaving very deep water, extending north-easterly, about 5 miles, and having no anchorage, except at its farthest end; to the westward of Mai Bay, near the shore, lie the Rencontre Islands, the westernmost of which is ♦ j largest, and has a comraunicatioa with the main at low water. In and about this island is shelter for small vessels and boats. BELLE HARBOUR lies 4 miles N.W. by N. from the westernmost Rencontre Island ; the passage into it is on the western side of the island : and so soon as you have passed the islands you will open a small cove, on the east side, where small vessels can anchor; but large vessels must run up to the head of the harbour, and anchor in 20 fathoms, where there is most room ; it is but an indifferent harbour. About 1| mile westward of Belle Harbour is Lally Cove, behind an island, fit for small vessels only ; the west part of this cove is hi^h and bluff, and is called Lally Head ; to the northward of this head is Lally Back Cove, where ships may anchor, in 14 or 16 fathoms Avater. i. t 2 miles to the northward of L Jly Cove Head are East and North Bays ; in both of tliese is deep water, but no anchorage near the shore. At the head of North Bay is the largest river in Fortune Bay, and appears to be a £<^od place for the salmon fishery, from which circumstance it is named Salmon River. CINQ ISLES BAY.— The Bay of Cinq Isles lies to the southward of the North Bay, and opposite to Lally Cove Head; there is tolerably good anchorage for large ships on the S.W. side cf the islands, in the bottom of the bay. The north arm is a very snug place for small veaoels, and salmon may be caught at its head. CORBEN BAY.— A little to the southward of the Bay of Cinq Isles is CorbenBay, where there is good anchorage for any ships, in 22 or 24 fathoms water. About 2 miles south-eastward from Lally Cove Head are two islands, about a mile distant from each other; the north-easternmost is called Belle Island, and the other Dog Island; they are bold-to all round. Between Dog Island and Lord and Lady Island, which lies off the south point of Corben Bay, something nearer to the latter, is a sunken rock, Avith deep water all round it ; and about ^ of a mile to the northward of Lord and Lady Island, is a rock, which appears at low water. BANDE DE L'ARIER BAY lies on the west point of Belle Bay, and N. i W., 3 leagues from Point Enragee; it may be known by a very high mountain over the bay, which rises almost perpendicularly from the sea, called Iron Head. Chapel Island, which forms the east side of tlie bay, is high land also ; the harbour lies on the west side of the bay, just within the point formed by a narrow low beach, and is a snug place. Between the harbour and Iron Head there is a tolerably good anchorage, in 18 or 20 fothoms. Ban.de de VArier Bank has 7 fathoms water on it, and lies with the beach of Bande de I'Arier Harbour just open of the west point of the bay, and Boxy Point on with the north end of St. Jacques Island. ST. JACQUES.— At 2 miles to the westward of Bande de I'Arier is the harbour of St. Jac(iues, which may be readily known by the ishmd before it, being high at each end, and low in the middle. The passage into the harbour is on the west side of the island, free from danger, as is the harbour, whore you may anchor in from 17 to 4 fathoms. II 2 5i Sailing Directions from BLUE PINION. — About H mile to the westward of St. Jucqiiea is the harbour of Blue Pinion ; und a little to thsj westward of that is English Cove. BOXY HARBOUR.— Boxy Point lies W. J S., 6 miles from St. Jacques Island, and E.N.E. h E., 12f miles fronii the east end of Brunet Island; it is of a moderate height, and the most advanced to the southward of any land on the coast. Boxy Har- bour lies N.E., 3 miles from Boxy Point, in which there is anchorage, in 4 or 5 fathoms water, fine sandy ground : to sail in, bring Boxy Point open of a little black head just within the point, called Friar's Head; in this direction you will kei;i) lUo innlule of the channel, and betwe"n the shoah which lie ofT each point of the Jurbour v^liore iii-3 stages are. W.N.W., a mile from Boxy l^oint, is the island of St. Jolm; JtiiJ league from St. John's Isl nd, is St. John's Head, high, steep, r.vxl era* N.N.W., h .1 r; V. T*>2tvf(!ei. St. John's Head and Boxy Point is St. John's Buy, quite expc^od; ii>. tiu; IjoLtoin d this is John's Harbour, fit for boatt- only. Oii thi.> nortl^ side of t^t. John's Head are tico rocky islets, called the Gull and SJiag; at the wei^t end oj' which are several aunken rocks. GREAT BAY DE L'EAU is abi at 1^ league to the northward of St. John'c. Heiid. In this bay there is good anchorage in various depths, slidtered from ull\\inds. The passage in is on the east side of the island, v/liich ilea iii it:- entrance; ivr only very small vessels can cuter to the westward. BAKRYSWAY BAY.— To the westward of Bay du I'Kiu, about 3 iui:es north frohi St. John's Head, is Little Bay Barrysway, on the west side t.f which there is good anchorage i"'- large ships, in 7. 8, or 10 fathoms; and both wood and water to be obtained with eabJ. HARBOUR BRirON lies to the westward of Little Barrysway, anc" N.N.E., U league from the island .r Segonu. The heads which form the entrance are high, and lie from each otiier S.K. and N.'V'/., distant about 2 miles. Near the east head is a rock above water. 1'ne only danger in going in is a ledge of roch, which stretch 2 cables' length from the soiith point of the S.W. arm, which is more tLf.u a mile within the west head. The only place for ships-of-war to anchor in is above the ledge, before the en- trance of the S.W. arm, in 16 or 18 fathoms, mooring nearly east and west; the bottom is very good, and plenty of wood and water are to be obtained h* re. Opposite to the S.W. arm is tlie N.E. arm, or Jerseyman's Harbour, which is cupable of holding a great number of ships, secure from all winds, in 6, 7, and 8 fathoms water: it has a bar at the entrance, on whicl there are 3 fathoms. The mark to sail over the bar is, the point of Thompson's Beach, which is the south point of the entrance into the S.W. avsn, open of Jerseyman's Head, which is high and bluff, on the north side ot the entrance into Jerseyman's Harbour ; so soon as you open the harbour, haul up to the northward, and anchor. From the west end of Harbour Briton to Connaigre Head, the bearing and distance are W. J N., 6 miles; between are Gull Island and Deadman's Bay, off which there is a bank stretching from the shore, between 2 and 3 miles, whereon the depths vary from 34 to 4 fathoms. The sea, during storms, will sometimes break for a considerable way out from Gull Island. CONNAIGRE BAY. — From Connaigre Head, which is high and craggy, to Basse- terre Point, the bearing and distance are N.W. | W., 7 miles; between is Connaigi'e Bay, which extends about 4 leagues inland. In the mouth of the bay lie the Con- naigre Rocks, above water, which may be approached very near, there being no dan- ger but what shows itself; the channel between them and Connaigre Head is the safest, as a ledge of rocks extends a mile from the north shore, which renders the other channel rather dangerous. Connaigre Harbour is nearly 5 miles above the head, withir a point on the south side of the bay ; it is very small, and the depth of water is 7 fathoms : the paesage in is on the S.E. side of the island which lies before it. Abreast of this harbour, nearly in the middle of the bay, are two islands; and on the north side of the westernmost are some rocks above water. Dawson's Cove is on the N.W. side of the bay, and bears N.N.E., about 4 miles from Connaigre Head, and W.N.W., 2 miles from the west end of the westernmost (and the greatest) island ; the anchorage is in 6 or 5 fathoms, quite exposed to south- erly mod( lies Pj mile 7 lea rath( a fu the 2 oa then Cape Chapeau Rouge to Cape Ray. 53 erly winds. Basseterre Point, which forms the west point of Connalgre Bay, is of moderate height, clear of wood, and irora thence to Pass Island, bold-to. Pass Island lies nearly W. by N., distant 3 miles from Basseterre Point. PASS ISLAND, which is the north-western extremity of Fortune Bay, is a full mile in length, and narrow; it bears from the north point of Miquelon N.E. by N., 7 leagues, and from Point May N. ^ E., 11^ leagues. It lie? near the shore, and is rather lofty. On its south-western side are several rocks above water, which extend a full mile from the island; and to the N.W. is a smiken rock, about ^ of a mile from the island. There is a passage between this island and the main, about the length of 2 cables wide ; it is frequently traversed by small vessels, which sometimes anchor there, on a fine sandy bottom, m 6 fathoms water. The cod fishery about this part is generally considered good and productive. REMARKS ON FORTUNE BAY.— -The general appearance of the land on the northern side of Fortune Bay is hilly, rising directly from the sea, with cran^wy, barren hills, extending 4 or 5 leagues inland, having many rivulets and ponds ; whUe that on the southern side of Fortune Bay has a very different appearance, having less of these rugged hills, and beik.T better clothed with wood, of a short brushy kind, giving to the country an air of greenness and fertility. SOUNDINGS. — ^In the night-time, or in dark, foggy weather, the mariner should not place much dependence on the soundings in lortune Bay, for therein they might be greatly and fatally deceived, inasmuch as, in many places, the -nrater near the shores, and in its creeks and h'lrbours, are often deeper than in the middle of the bay itself. HERMITAGE BAY.— This extensive bapr is bounded on the S.W. by Pass Island, and to the northward by the islands that torm the Bay of Bonne and Great Jervis Harbour, the width being more than 2 leagues; and by the southern shores of Long Island, where it begins to narrow. In sailing along the southern coast from Pass Island, you will discover the Fox Islands, which are distant from Pass Island 10 miles. These islands are situated opposite to the entrance to Hermitage Cove, about f of a mile from the land, and are said to have good fishing about them. Off the northern Fox Island are several rocks above water, and a sunken rock also lies off the south side of this island. To enter Hermitage Cove, you should keep between the islands and the shore, borrowing somewhat towards the main land, where you will find 30, 32, and 37 fathoms water; here you will see the cove open, and may turn in south, having deep water, and without the least danger; the anchorage is good, with every conveni- ence for fishing, and plenty of both wood and water. From hence Hermitage Bay runs in nearly east, for 12 miles, with very deep water, until you get near the head, where it gradually lessens to 25 and 22 fathoms, and farther in to 9 fathoms. There is a small inlet or two on the southern side, but no danger Avhatever. LONG ISLAND, which separates the Bay of Despair from Hermitage Bay, is of a triangular form, about 8 nines long, and nearly 8 leagues in circuit. The eastern passage is very good, but narrow, and is between the east end of Long Island and the main, called the Passage of Long Island. The west entrance into the Bay of Despair, from Hermitage Bay, is by the west end of Long Island. About ^ a mile from its S.W. point are two rocks, both above water, wilh deep water all round them. GALTAUS HARBOUR.— There are four harbours on the south side of Long Island, the easternmost of which is called Galtaus ; this is but small, and lies near the S.E. point of the island. The best channel into the harbour is on the west side of several rocky islands which lie at the entrance, wherein are 4 fathoms, but in the harbour there are from 15 to 24 fathoms. PTCARRE HARROUR.— The next is Picarre, which lies N. by E., ^ a league from the easternmost Fox Island. In going in here, keep near the west point, in order to avoid some sunken rocks off the other. The anchorage ie in the first cove on the east side, in 9 or 10 fathoms, sheltered from all winds. ROUND HARBOUR.— The next harbour, called Round Harbour, is about 2 miles to the westward of Picarre, and fit only for small vessels, the channel in being no narrow. 54 Sailwg Directions from LONG ISLAND HARBOUR is the fourth, and lies about 2^ miles from the west end of Long Island. This harbour has two arms, one running in to the north, the other to the eastward ; they are both very narrow, and have fron\ 40 to 7 fathoms water: the eastern arm has the greater depth, and affords the best anchorage. The pr?sage in is on eitlier side of an Island which lies off' the entrance, and h.-'s several rocks above water about it. BAY or DESPAIR. — The entrance of the Bav of Despair lies between the west end of Long Island and Great Jarvis Island, which lies in the mouth of the harbour of that name. The distance between is 1^ mile, and midway no bottom is found with a line of 280 fathoms. The Bay of Despair forms two capacious arms, one extending full 8 leagues to the north-eastward, the other about 13 miles northward. In the N.E. arm are several arms and islands, and tolerably good anchorage in several places ; in the north arm is very deep water, and no anchorage excepting in the small bays and coves which lie on each side of it; but in an arm of this bay which runs in easterly, there is a fine salmon fishery, and wood in abundance. In the N.E. arm also there are good salmon fisheries at Little River and Gonne River. All the country about this part is mountainous and barren ; but about the head of the bay it becomes level, and has abundance of wood, such as fir, pine, birch, witch hazel, spruce, &c. GREAT JARVIS HARBOUR is situated at the west entrance into the Bay of Despair; it is a safe harbour, with good anchorage in every part of it, in from 16 to 20 fathoms, secure from all winds, and plenty of wood and water. The passage in is on either side of Great Jarvis Island; but the southernmost channel is the safest, therij being no danger in it but the shore itself. In the northern channel are several sunken rocks. To sail in, you should bring the north point between the two rocks above water on the stai'board side, and then steer directly in ; this will carry you clear of some sunken rocks lying on the west point of the island, which appear at low water. The entrance to this harbour may be known by the east end of Great Jarvis Island, which is a high, steep, craggy point, called Great Jarvis Head, and is the northern point of the south entrance to the harbour. BONNE BAY lies about a league to tlie westward of Great Jarvis Head, and nearly N. by E., distant 7 miles from Pass Island ; it has several islands at its entrance, the westernmost of which is the largest and highest. The best passage in is to the eastward of the largest island, between it and the two easternmost islands. The bay runs in north, 4 miles, and there is no danger but what shows itself. You may go on either side of Drake Island, which is small, and nearly in the middle of the bay; between which and two small islands on the west side of the bay, within Great Island, there is anchorage in 20 or 30 fathoms ; but the best place for large ships i" near the head of the bay, in 12 or 14 fathoms, clear ground, and convenient for wood and water. On the N.W. side of Great Island, within the two small islands, is very good anchorage, in from 16 to 24 fathoms, secure from all winds; the entrance to this from the bay is to the northward of the two small islands. In sailing in or out of the bay, approach not too near the south point of Great Island, as there are some sunken rocks lying at | of a mile from the shore. A little to the westward of Bonne Bay is Mosquito Cove, a small inlet, of from 30 to 47 fathoms water. W.N.W., 4 miles from Bonne Bay is the entrants to the Bays of Facheux and Dragon ; this entrance being very conspicuous at sea, the coast may here be readily known. FACHEUX, which is the easternmost branch, is very easily seen to seaward; it runs in N.N.E., 2 leagues, and is ^ a mile wide at the entrance, with deep water in most parts of it. On the west side of the bay are three coves, where ships may anchor, in from 10 to 20 fathoms. Dragon Bay lies in N.W., a league, and is nearly ^ a mile wide, with 60 or 70 fathoms water, and no anchorage excepting near the head; and then you must lie very near the shore. A mile to the westward of Facheux is Little Hole, with shelter for small craft; and a league to the westward of Facheux is Richard's Harbour, a place fit only for small vessels and fishing shallops, with 23 fathoms water in it. with HARE BAY. N.W. by N., a league fi'om Richard's Harbour, is Hare Bay, which ' ' '' ^ ' ' ' of a mile wide, with deep water close runs in N.N.E., about 5 miles, and is about ^ Cape Chapoau Rouge to Cape Itaij. 55 II the west north, the 7 fathoRis age. The i?s several ti tlie west e harbour bund with ues to the i^eral arms III is very ie on eaeli ne salmon n fisheries inous and I of wood, he Bay of oui 16 to sage in is he safest, re several ;wo rocks you clear 3w water, is Island, northern [ead, and entrance, is to the The bay lay go on between !, there is I head of ter. On ichorage, le bay is roach not at ^ of a !, a small eux and 5 readily [; it runs in most ichor, in lile wide, then you ole, with lichard's fathoms y, which ter close home to both shores in all i)arts of it, except about a league up on the west side, whore there is good anchorage, in from 8 to 15 fathoms, with plenty of woo to the ojiposito shore, whereon are from 27 to 43 fathoms. LA IIUNE IIARBOU 11 lies ^ a league to the westvard of Cane La Iluno, and is fit only for small vessels, and open to westerly winds : ()efore it lies an island near tlie siiore. The channel into the harbour is on the N.W. side of the island; there is no danger going in, and you must anchor close up to the head, in 10 fathoms water. This har- bour is well adapted for the fishery, there being good fishing ground about it, and a large beach quite across from the head of the harbour to La Ilune Hay — a space of 800 feet, exposed to the open air, and well calculated for drying fish. At 4 leagues N.W. \ W. from Cape La Ilune is the entrance of Little Kiver, which is about 100 fathoms wide at the cntriince, and 10 fathoms deep; a little way up there is anchorage in 10, 8, and 7 fathoms water, good ground. Between Cape La Ilunc and Little lliver the land is tolerably high, and forms a bay, where there arc several small idandii and rocks above water, the outermost of which lie N.N.E ^ E., 3 leagues from the Penguin Islands, and arc called the Magnetic Rocks. S. by W. i W., 7 miles from the entrance of Little lliver, and N. by W. ^ W. from tJie Penguin Islands, lie the Little liioer Hocks, which are just above water, with very deep water all around them. The isles of RAMEA, which are of various extent, both in height and circuit, lie N.W. ^ N., 5^ leagui^** from the Penguin Islands, and a league from the main. They extend east and west 5 miles, and north and soutli 2 miles, and have several rocha and breakers about them; but more on the south side than the north. The eastern- most island is the largest, and is very high and hilly ; the westernmost, called Columbc, is a remarkably high, round ii'Jand, of small circuit, with some rocky inlands and sunken rocks near it. RAMEA HARBOUR. — There is a harbour for small vessels, formed by the islands which lie near Great Ramea and the Columbe, called Ramea Harbour, where they may lie sheltered from all ^'/inds. To enter this from the westward, you should give the southern point a b..rth, on account of some rocks which lie off the starboard island, all of them being above water; steer E.N.E. towards the harbour, keeping as near mid-channel as you can: the passage is above a cable's length bread; and run for the anchorage in Ship Cove. This is the second inlet on the north-western shore ; you will here ride in safety, on clean ground, in 5 fathoms water. To enter from the east- ward, you must keep the northern side of Great Ramea on board, until you are up to the west end thereof; then steer S.W. into the harbour, keeping in the middle of the channel, in about 3 fathoms water, and anchor as before directed. This harbour is very convenient for fisliing-vessels; in it, and also about the islands, are several plsvces fit for erecting stages, and drying fish, which seem to be well calculated for that purpose. The Ramea Rocks are two in number, close to each other; they lie about south, distant 4 miles from the east end of Great Ramea. W.S.W., a league from these rocks is a small bank, with only 6 fathoms water on it; and nearly in the middle, between Ramea and Penguin Islands, is the New Bank, with from 14 to 50 fathoms water. To run upon the shoalest part of this bank, bring the two Ramea Rocks on with the south- western part of Ramea Islands, and between tliem and Columbe; and the entrance to Little River N.E. a F. OLD MAN'S BAY.— At 4 miles to the westward of Little River is Old Man's Bay, which runs in N.N.E., about 7 miles, and is nearly a mile wide: the water throughout the bay is very deep. At H mile up the bay, on the eastern side, is a small island, called Adam's Island, behind which vessels can ride, if necessary, in 30 and 40 fathoms; but the best anchorage is at the head, in 14 or 16 fathoms. MOSQUITO HARBOUR lies about ^ a league to the westward of Old Man's Bay; it is a snug and safe harbour, and will hold a great number of vessels in perfect secu- Capo Chapcau Rouge to Cuju; llay. 57 113 water, tall shoal, into ilna K'k above t on with [ Into the ayi from athoms. and Is (it h« slioiv. danger riils har- it, iind a 1 space of er, whioli up there Tunc and >ral small 'lies from W. from with very id circuit, :he main, cral rocha i eastern- Columbe, ud su7iken be islands ;hey may give the rd island, as near m for the lore; you the east- au are up niddle of a harbour several 1 for that >ut south, cse rocks between ater. To he south- trance to an's Bay, roughout .11 island, fathoms ; an's Bay ; "ect secu- rity; but the entrance iore. The best place for large ships to anchor in Is, betwixt Grandy's Cove and a small island, lying near the west point of Boar Island, in 20 or 24 fathoms, good ground, and sheltered from all winds. To sail Into Grandy's Cove from the westward Is dangerous, unless well acquainted; there are several safe passages in from the southward and eastward, between the islands, and good anchorage; and, In bad weather, all the sunken rocks (llscover them- selves, and you may run In without any fear; but the Islands do not afford either wood or water. WOLF BAY extends Inwards N.E. by E., a league; the entrance Is E.N.E., 2 miles from Boar Island, and 2 miles to the westward of Red Island Harbour. The east point of the entrance Is composed of low rv^ged rocks, off which Is a sunken rock, at the distance of \ of a mile from shore, over which the sea breaks In bad weather. Near the head of i/he bay is tolerably good anchorage, and plenty of wood and water. King's Harbour lies round the west "point of Wolf Bay, and runs in N.E. by E., | of a mile; before Its mouth is a cluster of little islands. To sail in, keep the east point of [N. America — Part I.] I I> 8 StiUiiKj Dh'vrlions from thoHc iMlimtls on bn:inl, anil wtoor N. by W. and north I'or tlie L-ntranoo of tliu harbour, anchorinngth from the point is a sunken rock, that always hIkiwh itself. Over the head of the Ila-IIa is Hiehurd's Head, a mark lor running u[)on Rumea Shoal. (IIIKAT HAKACIIAIS— About 4 miles to the westward of the Uurgeo Isles is the (ireat IJaraehais Point, which is low, wliite, and rocky; and E.N.E. ^ E., ^ a lenjfue from this point, is the west entrance into the (Irci.t Harachais, wherein is room and deptii for small vessels. Hetween the Murjrco Isles and the (Ireat Harry- nway I'oint are several sunken rocks, some of which are k a lea;,'ue from the shore. CON NOIRE HAY.— N.W ^ N., 4 leagues from the Uurgco Tslcs, is the east point of the ]{ay of (Jonnoire; this point is so far remarkable that it vises with an easy ascent to a moderate height, and much higher than the land within it; the west point of the bay is low and Hat, and to the westward of this are several small islands. The bay runs in N.E. by N., about a league, from the < ist point to the middle head, which lies between the two arms, and is ^ a leajrue wide, with 14, 12, 10, and 8 fathoms, close to both shores, good anchorage, and clear ground, but open to S.W. winds. The N.E. nrm affords shelter for small vessels from all winds. 'lo sail in, keep nearest the star- board shore, and anchor before a snudl cove on that side, near the head of the arm, in .'5| Iklhoms. Towards the head of the arm on the north-western side, is a hank of mud and sund, upon which a vessel may run, if necessary, and receive no damage. TiiK IJAY OF CUTTEAU lies about 2 K agues to the westwnvd of Connoire; its depth will admit small vessels only. Hound the west point of dilliau is Cincj Serf, wherein are a uund)ev of islands, which form several small snug harbours, lli^ht oft' Cin(j Serf, about k a league from the shore, is a low rocky island, called Capt Island, westward of which is the safest passage into the largest harbour; keep near this rock, steering E.N.E. ^ E. towards the soutli-eastern shore, until you get abreast of a sniall woody island; this is the easternmost except one, and lies about | of a mile E.N.E. from a white rock in the middle of the channel; haul short round this island, and an- chor behind it, in 7 lathorns water; here you will lie safely, sheltered from all winds, or you may go farther up, and anchor at its head, in 4 i'athoms. (illAND BRUIT.— At 4 miles to the westward of the rocky island of Cinq Serf, is the harbour of Grand Uriiit, which is small l)ut commodious, and may be known by a very high remarkable mountain over it, k a league inland, which is the highest land on all the coast: down this mountain runs a considerable brook, (miptying itself, by n cascade, into the harbour. Before the mouth of the harbour are several little islands, the largest of v;d\ich is of middling height, with three green hillocks on it. A little out- side of this island is a round rock, r.ather high above water, called the Colmnhe of Great Bruit, and \ of a mile to the southward of this rock is a low rock: in a direct line be- tween the low rock and the rocky isles cf Cincj Serf, ^ a league from the former, is a sunken rock, whereon the sea does not break in fine weather. The safest passage into (irand Bruit is to the north-eastward of this rock, and of the islands lying before the harbour, between them and the three islands (which are low, and lay under the shore) ; and, after you are to the northward of the sunken rock, above mentioned, there is no danger but what shoAvs itself. The li; rbour extends N.N.E., h a mile, and is but \ of a mile wide in the broadest part; but it is bold-to on both sides, and has a depth of from 4 to 7 fathoms. BAY OP KOTTE.— To the westward of Great Bniit, between it and La Poile Bay, lies the Bay of Rotte, wherein are a great many islands and sunken rocks. The southernmost i.s a remarkable high round rock, called the Culumbe of Rotte, which lies N.W. by W., 8^ leagues from the southernmost of the Burgcos. Between this island and Grand Bruit is a reef of rocks, some above and some under water; but they do not lie to the southward of the direct line between the islands. Within the islands of Rotte there is shelter for shipping; the safest psissnge in is to the westward of the islands be- tween them and Little Ireland, which lies oil' the east point of La Poile Bay. LA POILE BAY is large and spacious, and has several commodious harbours. It may be known by the high land of Grand Bruit, which is only 5 mill's to the eastward Capo Chft/mut Ttott(/<> to Capo Ihiij. 51) Poile The hich lies lis island y do not of llotte iinds be- ftf It; and likewlhc by the hind on the eiist side of tlie buy, whieh rises in ri'n\:irk.ii.'y iiigh cnij;};y hills. About 1{ mile S.NV. from itn east point lies Little Ireland, a small low iuhind, environed with MUiiken roch, Home of which are i^ of a mile otl'. North, ab«)Ut ^ a mile from Little Ireland, is a mnhi-ii rock that &hows itself at low water; this is the only danj^er in Koin<{ into the bay, excepting such us lie very near the shore. CiREAT ANo LITTLK HAUHOURS.— At 2 nnh-. withiu the west point of the bay, and N. ^ \V., '2 miles from Litth" Ireland, is Tweeds, or (Jreat Harbour; its south point is low, and it extetids inwards W.N. \V., a mile; it is about 1.J cal)le's l('n;i;lh wide in the narrow-cst part; and the anchorage is near the head of the harimur, iu Iw or 20 tiithoms, dear grouud, and sheltered from all wiuds. At ,J a mile to the north- ward of (Jreat Harbour, is Little lIarl)our, the north point of which, called Tooth's Head, is the first high blull" hcail on the west side of the bay; the harbour exteruls inwards W.N.W., about a mile. In sailing in, give the south ])oint a small berth. Y«m may anchor about half-way up the harbour, in 10 fathoms water, before the stage which is on its northern side. GALLY BOY'S IIARIIOUR lies on thceast side of the bay, opposite Tooth's Head; it is small, snug, and convenient for shii)s bound to the westward. The north l)oint is high and steep, with n white spot in the dill", and near its ^^outhern jioint are some hillocks close to the shore. To sad in or out, keep the north side on board. You must anchor so soon as you are within the inner south jMunt, in 9 or 10 fathoms, good ground, and sheltered from all Avinds. At a mile to the northward of (ially Hoy's Harbour, between two sandy coves on the east side of the bay, and nearly 2 cables' length from the shore, is u sunken rock, that just uncovers at low water. liroad Cov(! is about 2 miles to the northward of Tooth's Head, on the same side of the bay. In this there is good anchorage in 12 or 14 fathoms. N.E. ARM. — About 2 leagues np the bay, on the eastern side, is the N.E. Ann, which is a spacious, safe, and commodious harbour. In sailing in, give the low sandy point on the S.E. side, a small berth, and anchor above it, where convenient, in 10 fathoms water, good holding-ground, sheltered from all winds, and very convenient lor wood and water. Indian Harbour and De Plate He just within the outer west point of La Poile Hay; these are two small coves, conveniently situated ibr the fishery, but fit only for snuUI vessels, which may get in at high water. Little Ireland bears from the southernmost of the IJurgoes N.W. by W. :}^ W., 9.1 leagues: and lies nearly 11 leagues to the eastward of Cape Ray. GARIA BAY. — From Little Ireland to Harbour la Cone and La Moine Bay, the course is W.N.AV. ^ W'» 9 or 10 miles; between lies the Bay of Garia, and several coves, fit only for small vessels; before these are several islands and sunken rocks scattered along the shore, but none of them lie with ut the above course. In bad Aveather, all the sunken rocks discover themselves. To sail into Garia Bay, you will, in coasting alontj the shore, discover a white head; this is the south i)oint of an island, lying unuer the land, off the eastern point of the bay, and a little to the westward of two green hillocks on the main; bring this white point N.N.E., and steer directly towards it; keep between it and the several islands that lie to the W.S.-westwaru. From the white point, the course into the bay is N . by W. : borrow toward the eastern point, which is low. The Bay of Garia atlbrds plenty of timber, large enough for building ships. LA ]\[OINE AND LA COUE HARBOURS.— The S.W. point of the entrance into Harbour la Cone, called Rose Blanche Point (near to which are some rocks above water,) is tolerably high, and the land near the shore over Harbour la Coue and La Moine Bay, is much higher than any other land in the vicinity: by this they may be known. La Moine Bay extends inwards N.E. ^ E., about 4 miles, and is ^ of a mile broad in the narrowest part. OIF the east j)oint are some small islands and rocks above water. In sailing in, keep the west point on board, until you have entered the bay ; then edge over towards the east shore, and run up to the head of the bay, where you may anchor in 10 or 11 fathoms, good ground: here is plenty of wood and water. To sail into Harbour la Coue, which lies at the west entrance into La Moine Bay, steer in N.N.W., between a rock above water, in the mouth of the harbour, and anchor in 6 or 8 fathoms water, mooring with a hawser on shore; or you may steer into the arm, which runs iu I 2 60 Suilinfj Directions from N.E.byE. from the harbour, and anchor in 20 fathoms, sheltered from all winds. This has been the rc!)ort of the small fishing-vesaels for many years. ROSE BLANCHE.— To the westward of Rose Blanche Point is the harbour of the same name; it is small and snug, and the anchorage is in 9 fathoms water. The chan- nel into the harbour is between the island lying off its western point, and Rose Blanche Point ; give the island a good berth, on account of some sunken rocks which lie on its eastern side, and keep the west side of the small island which lies close to the point, on board, anchoring within the N.E. point of this island in 9 fathoms. To enter into the N.W. pa;'t of the harbour would be dangerous, if a stranger, because of its numerous islands and rocks. Mill Face is a small cove, 2 miles to the westward of Rose Blanche Point, wherein is anchorage for small vessels in 4 fathoms. Off tlie west point of the cove are two small islands, and several sunken rocks; the passage in is to the eastward of these. At 7 miles to the westward of Rose Blanche Point are the Burnt Islands, which lie close undfir the shore, and are not easily to be distinguished from it; behind these is shelter for small vessels. Off these islands are sunken rocks, some of which are ^ a mile from the shore. CONNEY AND OTTER BAYS.— At 6 miles to the westward of Rose Blanche Point, are Conney and Otter Bays, both of which are rendered difficult of access by several sunken rocks outsid the passage, which do not show themselves in fine weather; but when once you are safe within Otter Bay, there is good ridiag in 7, 8, and 9 fathoms water. DEAD ISLANDS HARBOUR.- W.N.W. | W., nearly 4 leagues from Rose Blanche Point, are the Dead Islands, or Isle aux Morte, which lie close under the shore. In the passage to Dead Islands Harbour, between the islands and the main, is good anchor ge for shipping in 6 or 8 fathoms, sheltered from all winds; out it is very dan- gerous of access to strangers, as there are several sunken rocks in both the east and west entrances. The eastern entrance can be known by a remarkable white spot on one of the islands; bring this spot to bear N. by W., and steer in for it, keeping the starboard rocks on board, and leave the white spotted island on your port side. The western entrance may be recognised by a high point on the main, a little to the v/est- ward of the islands, on the western part of which point is a green hillock: keep this point close on board, until you get within a little round rock, near to the westernmost island, at the eastern point of entrance ; then haul over to the eastward for the great island, distinguished by a high hill, and steer E. | N., keeping the before-mentioned little rock in sight. PORT AUX BASQUE.— From the Dead Isles to Port aux Basque, the course and distance are W.N.W., about 4 miles ; between lie several small islands close under the shore, and tiiere are sunken rocks, some of which are i a mile from the shore. Port aux Basque is a small commodious harbour, which lies about 2i leagues to the eastward of Cape Kay. To fall in with it, bring the Sugar-Loaf Hill over Cape Ray, to bear N.N.W. ^ W., or the west end of the Table Mountain N.N.W. Steer in for the land with either of these marks, and you will fall directly in with the harbour : the S.W. point, called Point Blanche, is of a moderate height, and of white appearances; but the N.E. point is low and flat, and has, close to it, a black rock above water. In order to avoid the outer shoal, on which are 3 fathoms, and which lies E.S.E., f of a mile from Point Blanche, keep the said point on board, and brin^ the flag-stuff which is on the hill over the west side of the head of the harbour, on the S.W. point of Road Island : that direction will lead you in th»i middle of the channel, between the c ast and west rocks, the former of which always show themselves, and these you leave on your star- board hand: continue this course up to Road Island, and keep the west pjint on board, in order to avoiii the Frying-Pan Rock, which stretches out from a cove on the west shore, opposite the ." 'and ; and, so soon as you are above the island, haul to the E.N.E., and anchor between it and Harbour Island wherever you please, in 9 or 10 fathoms, good ground, and sheltered from all winds; this is called the Road, or Outer Harbour, ; nd is the only anchoring place for men-of-war, or ships drawing a great depth of water, but small vessels always lie up in the Inner Harbour. To sail into it, run in betwceu the west shore and i S.W. end of Harbour Island, and anchor behind the said island, in 3 or 4 fathoms. In some parts of this harbour ships can lay their broad- be w Cape Chapeau Rouge to Cape Ray. 61 The I side so near to the shore oa to reach it with a plank. This place has been frequented by fishermen for many years; it is well situated for their puqrases, and is capable of most excellent accommodations. A mile to the eastward of Basque is Little Bay. GRAND BAY lies about 2 miles to the westwtard of Port aux Basque; there are several small islands and rocks in and before it, the outermost of which are not above i of a mile from the shore ; on these the sea generally breaks. It is only fit for small vessels. From Port aux Basque to Point Enragce, the bearing and distance are W.N.W., about a league, and thence to Capo Ray, N.N.W., nearly 1^ league. Point Enragee is low; off it, and to the eastward of it, are some sunken rocksj a mile from the shore, on which the sea breaks. GAPE HAY is the S.W. extremity of Newfoundland, situated in latitude 47° 37' north, and longitude 59° 23' vest from Greenwich. The land of the cape is very re- markable ; near the shore it is low, but 3 miles inland is a very high table mountain, which rises almost perpendicular from the low land, and appears to be quite flat at the top, excepting a small hillock on the S.W. point of it. This land may be seen, in clear weather, from the distance of 16 or 18 leagues. Clot'e to the foot of the table moun- tain, between it and the point of the cape, is a high round hill, lesembling a sugar-loaf, (called the Sugar-Loaf of Cape Ray,) the summit of which is a little lower than that of the table mountain ; and to the northward of this hill, under the table mountain, are two other conical hills, resembling sugar-loaves, which are not so high as the former; one or other of these sugar-loaf hills are, from all points of view, seen detached from the table mountain. There is a sandy bay between Cape Ray and Point Enragee, wherein ships may anchor with the wind from N.N.W. to east, but they should be cautious not to be sur- prised there with S.W. winds, which blow directly in, and cause a great sea. The ground is not the best for holding, being fine sand. Towards the east side of this bay is a small ledge of rocks, a mile fi-om shore, on which the sea does not break in fine weather. The best place for large ships to anchor in is, to bring th(! point of the cape N.W., and the high white sand-hill in the bottom of the bay N.E., in 10 fathoms water. Small vessels may lie farther in. Be careful not to run so far to the eastward as to bring the end of the table mountain on with the sand-hill in tlie botU/ui of the bay, by which means the ledge of rocks, before mentioned, will bo uvv,i"i«id. N.W. ^ W., ne irly a mile from the point of the cape, is a small ledge of rocks, called the Cape Rocks, whereon the sea ahvays breaks; and a mile to the nortliward of the cape, close under the laud, is a low rocky island. There is a channel between the ledge and the cape, with 14 and 15 fathoms water; and also between it and the island, with 4 and 5 fathoms ; but the tides, which run here with great rapidity, render it unsafe to shipping. . The soundings, under 100 fathoms, do not extend above a league from the land to the southward and eastward of the cape, nor to the westward and northward of it, ex- cept on a bank, which lies off Port aux Basque, between 2 and 3 leagues from the land, whereon are from 70 to 100 fathoms, good iisliing ground. S.E. ^ S., about 13 leagues from Port aux Basque, in the latitude of 47° 14' north, is said to be a bank, whereon are 70 fathoms. - - . - TLe ISLAND of ST. PAUL lies in latitude 47° 11', and loneitudo «0° 11' west, and bears W.S.W. ^ W., distant 13^ leagues from Cape Hay, in Newfoundland, and E.N.E. ^ E., 4 leagues from the north cape of Breton Island ; it is about 3 miles long and a mile broad ; it has three high hills upon it, the highest being elevated 450 feet. The island is bold- to, and there is anchorage, close in, for small vessels all round it. There are now two lighthouses established on tliis island ; one on the northern end, and tiie other on the southern point, vessel very near the central rocks one of which will always be open, unless to a The northern light is a fixed light, and visible 6 leagues between the bearings of N. by E. and E. by N., (magnetic,) when it will be obscured by the hills to tl)e southward of it. The southern light revolves at about the same elevation .as the northern one (140 feet), and is visible fi leagues between the bearings of west and ij.S.K. At the soutiiern lighthouse a bell is kept tolling in foggy weather, worked by luuchiuery. 02 Sailing Directions from Trinity Cove is about a mile from the south point of the island, on the west side. On the north point of this cove a provision post is established, consisting of a dwellinjj,- house and a store, where two men reside. This depot is for the relief of shipwrecked persons, and supported by the Government of New Brunswick. It is to be hoped the new liglithouses will prevent those disastrous shipwrecks this island has been so much note'^ for. Atlantic Cove is on the east side of the island, and opposite to Trinity Cove. A land- ing may be effected at either of these coves, better than in any other place ; they afford .shelter only for boats. The N.W. cove has a bold beach, about 150 feet long; but the landing is sometimes difficult, on account of the swell. CAPE NO&TH is a lofty promontory at the N.E. extremity of Breton Island ; its latitude is 47° 3', the longitude 60° 24'. The entrance into the Gulf of St. Lawrence is formed by this cape and Cape Ray, and the latter bears from the former E.N.E:{^E., distant 18i^ leagues: the depth of water between, excepting near the island of St. Paul, is generally above 200 fathoms. Thk tides. — Between Cape Chapeaii Rouge and Cape Ray, in all the bays, &c., the tide generally Hows till 9 o'clock, on full and change, and its perpendicular rise is about 7 or 8 feet on spring;^ ; but it must be observed, tliat the tides are every where greatly influenced by the winds and weather. On the coast, between Cape Chapeau Rouge and St. Pierre, the current sets generally to the S.W. On the south side of Fortune Bay it sets to the eastward, and on the north side to the westward. Between Cape La Hune and Cape Ray the flood ^ets to the westward in the offing, very irregularly ; but gene- rally 2 or 3 hours after it is high water by the shore. The tide, or current, is incon- siderable, excepting near Cape Ray, where it is strong, and at times sets quite con- trai'y to what might be expected from the common course of the tides, and much stronger at one time thaii at another: these irregularities seem to depend chiefly on the winds. •' Off St. Paul's Island," Captain Bayfield observes, " the irregularity of the tidal streams add much to the danger arising from fogs, which prevail in southerly, easterly, and also with S.W. winds. During the whole of a fine calm day, at the end of .rune, Ave observed the current to set to the S.E., at the rate a knot, past the north point of the island." IV.— THE WESTERN COAST OF NEAVFOUNDLAND. FROM CAPE RAY TO THE STRAIT OF BELLE ISLE. Variation 24° to 33° west. FlivOM Cape Ray to Cape Anguille the course and distarce are N. JE., 17 or 18 iniles. Cape Anguille is the northernmost point of land you can see, after passing to the westward of Cape Ray ; it is high table land, and covered with wood in the country above it. Between the high land of the two capes the coast is low, and the shore forms a bay, wherein are the great and little rivers of Cod Roy ; the northernmost is the great river, which has a bar-harbour, fit to admit vessels of 8 or 10 feet draught only at high water. The shore may be ajiproached between the two capes to J a league, there being no danger so far off. It is a good salmon fishery, and for building small vessels and boats, thei'e being timber in abundance. ISLAND COD ROY.— The island of Cod Roy lies 1^ or 2 miles to the southward of Cape Anguille, close under the high land ; it is a low, flat, green island, of nearly 2 miles in compass, in the shape of a horse-shoe, forming between it and the main, a small snug harbour for vessels of 10 or 12 feet draught; the safest entrance to it is from the southward. COD ROY ROAD. — South-eastward frcun the island is Cod Roy Road, wherein is very good anchorage for shipping, in 8, 7, or G fathoms, on a clay bottom. With the C(i2)c Itay to the Strait of Belle hie. G3 or 18 Rin;^ to nuntry I'orins ; great ^t high there i^essels pward iieiirly jiain, a it is lioreiu th the i south point of the island, bearing about W.N.W., and the point of the beach on the inside of the island, at the south entrance into the harbour, on with a point on the main to the northward of the island, you will lie in 7 fathoms, and nearly ^ a mile from the shore, a league to the southward of Cod Roy Island is a high bluff point, called Stormy Point, or Point Enragee, off which a shoal stretches out full ^ mih; ; this point covers the road from the S.S.E. winds, and there is good anchorage all along the shore, between it and the island. ST. GEORGE'S BAY— From Cape Anguille to Cape St. George the course and distance are N.N.E. $ E., nearly 12 leagues; these two capes form the Great Bay of St. George, which extends inwards E.N.E., 18 leagues from the former, and E.S.E., 1 1 leagues from the latter. At the head of this bay, on the south side, round a low point of land, is a harbour, with anchorage, in 8, 10, or 11 fathoms water. The river St. George empties itself into the head of this bay, but it is not navigable for any thing but boats, and this appears to be fast filling up with sand. The tide rises here from 5 to 8 feet. There are a few wooden houses near the point, which are resorted to at particular seasons. On the north side of the bay, before the isthmus of Port-a-Port, is good anchorage, in 7 or 8 fathoms, with northerly winds : from off this place afish- ing-bank stretches out § across the bay, with from 7 to 19 fathoms water on it, dark sandy bottom. CAPE ST. GEORGE lies in latitude 48° 28' north, and longitude 59° 21' west. It may readily be known, not only by its being the north point of the Bay of St. George, but also by tlie steep cliffs on the north part of it, which rise peri)endicularly from the sea to a considerable height; and by Red Island, which lies 5 miles to the north-east- ward of the cape, and A a mile from the shore. This island is about 1^ mile in length, and of a middling height; the steep cliffs around it are of a x'eddish colour. There is anchorage with otF-shore winds under the N.E. end of the island, before a sandy cove on the main, which lies just to the northward of the steep cliffs, i.i 12 or 14 fathoms; you will there ride, covered from the S.W. winds by the island, and from the southerly and easterly winds by the main land; but there is no shelter wliatever with winds from the north or N.W., although this place was heretofore much resorted to by ves- sels in the fishing trade. From abreast of Red Island, distant 4 or 5 miles, to Long Point, at the entrance into the Bay of Port-a-Port, the bearing and distance arf, E. by N., 7 or 8 leagues; from Red Island to Guernsey Island, in the mouth of the Bay of Islands, E.K.E., nearly 16 leagues; from Red Islai/l to Cape St. Gregory N.E. by E. | E., full 20 leagues; and from Red Island to Point 71' :h, which is the north part of Ingorna- clioix Bay, N.E. by E., 49 leagues. PORT-A-PORT. — The land between Red Island and the entrance into Port-a- Port is rather low, with sandy beaches, except one remarkable high hillock, called Round Head, close to the shore, about 2 leagues to ^he E.N.Eastward of Red Island; but up the country, over Port-a-Pov* r.re high lands: and if you are 3 or 4 leagues off at sea, you cannot, discern the long point of land which forms the bay. This bay is capacious, l)eing above 5 miles broad at the entrance, and 4 leagues deep, running in to the south and south-westward, with good anchorages iii most parts of it. liong Point is the west point of the bay; it is low and rocky, and a ledge of rocks extends from it E.N.E., nearly a mile, S.E. by E. § E., 4 miles from Long Point, and ^ a league from the east shore, lies Fox Island, which is small, but of middling height. From the north end of this island a shoal stretches out nearly 2 miles to the N.N.East- ward, called Fox's Tail; and nearly in the middle of the bay, between Fox Island and the west shore, lies the Middle Ground, on one place of which, near the S.W. end, is not above 3 or 4 feet water. From the head of the bay, projecting out into the mid- dle of it, is a low point, called Middle Point, off which, extending 2 miles N.E. by N., is a shoal spit, purt of which dries at low water ; this Middle Point divides the bay into two parts, called East and AVest Bays. From the head of the East Bay over to the Bay of St. George, the distance is a large \ of a mile; this isthmus is very low, and has a jiond in the middle of it, into which the sea frequently dashes over, especially at high tides, and with gales of wind from the southward. On the east side of it is a tolerably high mountain, rising dix'ectly from the isthmus, and Hat at top; to the northward of this, and at about 5 miles distant from the isthmus, is a conspicuous valley or hollow, hereafter to be used as a mark. Sailhig Directions from N.E. by E. \ E., above 2 leagues from Long Point, and * a league from the shore, lies Shag Island, which appears at a distance Tike a high rock, and is easily to be dis- tinguished from the main; and W.N.W., about a league from it, lies the nnddle of the Loii^ Ledge^ which is a narrow ledge of rocks, stretching E. N.E. and W.S.W., about 4 miles ; the eastern part of them is above water : and the channel, into the btrjr of Tort- a-Port, between the west end of this ledge and the reef which stretches off from the west point of the bay, is a league wide. '' > ' / In sailing in to Port-a-Port, if coming from the south-westward, advance no nearer to the Long Point of the bay than 1 ^ mile, until you have brought the valley in the side of the mountain before mentioned (on the eart side of the isthmus), over the east end of Fox Island, or to the eastward of it, which will then bear south, a little easterly ; you will then be clear of the Long Point Reef, and may haul into the bay with safety ; but, if coming from the N.E. withou: the Long Ledge, or txirning into the bay, in order to keep clear of the S.W. end of Long Ledge, bring the isthmus, or the foot of the monntain (which is on the east side of the isthmus), open to the westward of Fox I::Ii:ad, nearly twice the breadth of the island, and it will lead you into the bay, clear of Long Ledge ; and when Shag Island is brought on with the foot of the high land on the south side of Coal River, bearing then E. J S., you will be within the Long Ledge. There is also a siife passage into the bay, between the Long Ledge and the main, on cither side of Shag Island, and taking care to avoid a small shoal, of 2^ fathoms, which 1 ;s W. by N ., a mile from the island. To sail up into the West Bay and Head Harbour, keep the'western shore on board, which is bold-to. In turning between it and the Middle Ground, stand no nearer to the Middle than 8 fathoms; but you may stand to the spit of the Middle Point into 6 or 5 fathoms. The anchorage in West Bay is in about 8 fathoms, and in Head Har- bour in about 5 fathoms. The West Road lies before a high stone beach, about 2 miles south-westward of Long Point, where you may lie very secure from westerly and N.W. winds, in about 10 or 12 fathoms water; this beach is steep-to, and forms an excellent place for landing and drying your fish. There is a good place at the northern end of Fox's Island for the same purpose. The whole bay and the adjacent coasts abound with cod, and extensive fishing banks lie all along the coasts. The East Road lies between Fox Island and the cast shore. To sail up to it, you should keep the high bluff head, which is about a league to the E.N.E. of the island, bearing to the southward of S.E. by E. ^ E., until the isthmus is brought to the east- ward of Fox Island; you will then be within the shoal called the Fox's Tail, and may haul to the southward, and anchor any where between the island and tlie main, in from 10 to 18 fathoms. To sail up the East Bay, pass between the island and the east shore; and after you are above the island, come no nearer to the main than -J a mile, until you are abreast of a bluff point above the island, called Road Point, just above which is the best anchor- age with N.E. winds, in about 12 fathoms water. To sail up the East Bay between the Middle Ground and Fox's Tail, bring the said bluff point on with the S.W. point of Fox Island; this mark will lead you up in the fairway between the two shoals. Give the island a berth, and anchor, as before directed,^ in from 8 to 12 fathoms water. BAY of ISLANDS.— Fro:ii the Long Point at the entrance of PorNa-Port to the Bay of Islands, the bearing ar 1 distance are N.E. by E. ^ E., 8 leagues. Be careful to avoid the Lovp^ Ledge. The land between is of considerable heif^ht, rising in craggy barren hills, directly irom the shore. The Bay of Islands mav be known by the many islands in the mouth of it, parlicidarly the three npmcd Guernsey Island, Tweed Island, and Pearl Island, which are nearly of equal height with the land on the main. If you are bound for liark or York ilarbours, which lie on the S.W. side of the bay, and are coming from the southward, run in between Guernsey Island and the South Head, both of which are bold-to; but with southerly and S."'//, winds approach not too near tlie Soutli Head, lest calms and sudden gusts of wind should proceed froiii the high land, under which you cannot anchor witli safety. There are several channels tbrmcd by the different islands, through which you may sail in or out of the bay, tliere being no danger but wliat shows itself, excepting a small ledge of roel's, which lie ^ a mile north-eastward from the northern Shag Rock, and in a line witl; the two Shag Rocks in one. If you bring the south Shag Rock open on either side of the north Shag ^'^^^^^ Cape Ray to the Strait of Belle Lsle. «5 to the !arel'ul craggy many slaiul, If you id arc Head, near high )rin<'(l ig no mile tocks Shag itock, you will go clear to the eastward or westward of the ledge. The safest passage into this bay from the northward, is between the two Shag Hocks, and then between Tweed and Pearl Islands. LARK HARBOUR. — From Guernsey Island to Tortoise Head, which is the north point of York Harbour, and the S.E. point of Lark Harbour, the course a ad distance are nearly S. by W. J W., 5 miles. Lark Harbour extends inwards W.S. W., nearly 2 miles, and is ^ of a mile broad in the entrance, which is the narrowest part; in sail- ing into it with a large ship, keep the port shore on board, and anchor with a low point on the starboard side bearing W.N.W., N.N.W.. ov N.N.E., and you will ride in 6 or 7 fathoms water, secure from all winds. YORK HARBOUR. — From Tortoise Head into York Harbour the course and dis- tance are W.S.W., nearly a league. There is good turning room between the Head and Governor's Island, which lies before the harliour; but you must be careful to avoid a shoal which runs off from a low beach point on the west end of Governor's Island, called Sword Point. There is also a sJioal which spits off from the next point of Governor's Island, which must also be avoided; Tortoise Head just touching Sword Point, will lead clear of it. In sailing in, give Sword Point a berth ; passing which, the best anchoring ground is in 10 fathoms, along a sandy beach on the main, with Tortoise Head open of Sword Point. West and north-westerly winds blow here with great violence. Harbour Island lies at the entrance of the River Humber, and S. by E. f E., 7 miles from Guernsey Island; at its S.W. point is Wood's Harbour, which is unfit for ship- ping. The River Humber, at about 5 leagues within the entrance, becomes narrow, and the stream is so rapid in some places, for about 4 leagues up, to a lake, that it is with great difficulty that even a boat can stem the current. The banks of this river are well clothed with timber; and formerly an extensive salmon fishery was carried on here. The North and South Arms arc both long inlets, with very deep water up to their heads. On the east side of Eagle Island, between the North and South Arras, is anchorage in 8, 10, or 12 fathoms water. Under the north side of Harbour Island also is good anchorage with S.AV, winds; and opposite to the S.E. end of Harbour Island, on the south side of the buy, is Frenchman's Cove, wherein is good anchorage in from 20 to 12 fathoms. The Bay of Islands was formerly much fro lented by v '^sels in the cod fishery, and stages were erected at Small Bay, which lies a little on the outside of South Head; and the large beach on Swords Point, in Governor's Island, is an excellent place for drying the fish. P^'oin the north Shag Rock to Cape St. Gregory the course and distance are nearly N.E., 8 miles; and thence 13 or 14 miles, on a similar bearing, will carry you to the entran'^e of Monne Bay. The land near the shore, from the north Shag Rock to Cape St. Gregory, is low, .along which lie sunken rocks, ^ of a mile from the shore ; but a vei'y little way inland it rises into a high mountain, terminating at the top in round hills. CAPE ST. GREGORY is high, and between it and Bonne Bay the land rises directly from the sea-shore to a considerable height; it is the most northerly land you can discern when you are sailing along shore between Red Island and the Bay of Islands. BONNE BAY may be known, at the distance of 4 or 5 leagues, by the land about it, all that on the S.W. side of the bay being very high and hilly, and that on the N.E. side, anus in it, and they are both bold-to. The Twin Islands lie N.E. by N. from Flat Island, distant a league, and have no danger about them. To the eastward of the Twins are several scattered rocks above water, named the Bay Islands, having deep water around them, but no anchorage. The land at the bottom of the bay is very high ; and there is the little river of Castors^ Mie entranc i to vt'hich is dangerous and shallow, therefore seldom frequented. From ti.'' northern point of this bay a rocky shoul extends all the way to Point Ferolle, stretching out 2^ miles from the s'lore. POINT FEROLLE lies N.E. by E. \ E. from Point Rich, distant 22 miles; it is of moderate height, and joined to the main by a neck of and, whicli divides the Bay of St. John's from New Ferolle Bay, making it appear like an island when seen from a distance; its; northern shore is bold-to: and this part of the coast will easily Iw known by the adjacent table-land uf St. John's, the west end of which mountain lies from the middle of Ferolle Point S. b]- W., and its eastern end S.E. \ S. NEW FEROLLE BAY is a sma^' cove lying to the eastward of the point, and is quite flat all over, there being not mc'o than 2 and 3 fathoms at any part, it is the gulf. Some of those bergs ground in dc^p water, while others are continually changing their position. T!iey are much more ni'merous in some seasons than in others; as I have seen 200 bergs, and large pieces of Ire, in the strait in the mcmth of August, in one year, whilst there were not above half-u- Ociien to be seen in the same month of the following season. " Navigation of the Strait at night. — From these remarks it will plainly appear, that the navigation of this strait is attended vdtli very great danger in dark or foggy nights, during which no vessel should attempt Ic run through; for I have founci, that with all our experience, we could not be sure oi'tht vessel's position within 10 miles, under such circumstances. On the approach of a dark or foggy night, therefore, it would be pru- dent to anchor in one of the bays on the north side of the strait, rather than to continue undor-way. A vessel bound into the gulf, and running with an easterly wind, will. n Sailing Directions frotn however, find no place fit for that purpose until Nhe arrives at Ulack Bay; and tliat i« not a very frood anchorage, I'or Ued \h\y can' ot be entered by ii large vessel with nu custei !y wind. Loup Hay is the firMt go(«l anchorage, under Huch circunistanee-'; at. i there the vessel woidd be so fur advanced in her run through the strait that it woui^ not be worth while to stop, since she might easily clear every thing in the venininir:] short distajice. JUit with a S.VV. wind, at the approach of nfght, and at)pearan< of a fog, a vessel bound out of le strait to the eastward, had better stand otl and on, under easy sail, tacking, by her dt t p-sea lead, fron» the Newfoundlands! '' till morning, if shi be not farther to the eastwunl than Port Fcrolle; if she 1)e I'arther Dvlvanccd, she liuu l)etter endeavour to make Forteau Hay before dark, and unel.'jr there for tlie night. In light winds or calms, during dark nights or foggy weather, it is better to bring-uf> with a stream anchor any where in the strait, than to drive about with the tides with- out knowing whither; but then a look-out must be kept for drifting ice-bergs." v.— THE COAST OF LABRADOR. FROM YORK POINT TO SANDWICH HARBOUR. Variation allotped from York Point to Sandivich Harhour, IJ Points. YORK, 01 CHATEAUX BAY, lies about 19 miles N.W. 'i N. from the touth- western point of Belle Isle, and 9 leagues N. i^ W. from the harbour of (iuirpon; it may easdy be known by two very remarkable hills situated on Castle and Ilenlcy Islands, which lie at the entrance of the bay ; these rocky hills appear Hat at the toj), and the steep hills ar^' ind them have the appearance of castle walls. The islands form the eastern side of the i.ntrance to the bay, while tho Capes York and Temple are to the westward; bu! !i.« i Itc mariner may not be able to discover the above hills at a dis- tance, because r>f ! r • nhxh. land behind, the better marks will be, to observt; that all the land to the v.kistward is of a high and uniform figure, terminating at the west side of the bay with a con-p'ouous nob or hillock, while the land to the eastward of Cha- teaux Bay is hilly and broken, having many islands near the shore; ^vhile to the west- ward there are none. To sail into Chateaux Bay, you must leave Castle and Henley Islands on your star- board side, and endeavour to keep Point Grenville, which has a beacon upon it, on with . the western point of Henley Island; this point is a smooth black rock, having a little (lark rock just appearing above water off its point ; keep this mark on until you get abreast of Whale Island; then, to avoid the middle rock, over which are only 9 feet water, and which lies neai-ly midway 'x Iween the east point of Whale Island and the black point of Henley Island, haul over ; lose to Honlej^ Black Rock, or borrow towards but not too near, to Whale Island, for here it runs oft shallow and flat; and when you are so far advanced as to open the narrow channel into Temple Bay, with the view of sailing up into Pitt's Harbour, then haul to the westward, until you bring the outer point of Castle Island a little open of Whale Island; this mark will lead you up into Pitt's Harbour, which is spacious, clear from danger, and. well sheltered from all winds; here you may ride in 10 or 14 fathoms, with plenty of timber ready for your use, and every convenience for carrying on your fishery. There is also a narrow passage into Pitt's Harbour, to the northward of Henley Island, through which you will have 3 fathoms watev. A mile to the eastward of Henley Island, lies Seal Island and 3^ miles farther is Duck Island; between is Goose and Bad Bay, full of rocks, both above and below the water, and also open to the easterly winds. To the eastward of Seal Island, distant 6 miles, are St. Peter's Islands, a cluster of barren rocks, within which is St. Petei-'s Bay, a good place of anchorage, but too much exposed to the so th and south-easterly winds to be much frequented. ■ v York Point to Sandwich Ihirhour. 71 irther is elow the flistant [•'s Bay, ly winds CAPE CIIAliriES.— To tiie north-enstwunl of St. retcr's Islnnd is C(i\w CImrl.'s milking with a higli hill, stccj) to suiuviinl, iiiul .sloping (l(»\vii iiiliinti, so titiit wlicti you uro to tlu! wf'stwunl of Chiitoaux Hiiy, it hiis the ftppoiiruiiou of an i.sland. Cano CluuU-Jt iHland liua H.E. by K- \ E., distant about l.J mile t'ruui (Jape tlharloH; it is ot moderate lieight, and has several sttuill rocks both to the eastward and to the westward ot it. Fj'oin St. Peter's Islands to Charles Island the course is E.N.E., distant 11 miles; between theiu lies Niger Sound, an inl t, about 2 leagues deep, and having several small islands before it. To ontir Niger Sound, you may piss either to the southward or northward of these islands, and obtain anchorage oci the northern side of the sound, in 9 fathoms water ; the course will be nearly N. by W. The following directions from Cape Charles Island to Sandwich liay, are chiefly by Mr. Lank. CAPE CHARLES HARBOUR. -From the north point of Cape Charles Island into Cape Charles Harbour, the course is N.W. \ N,, distant 4 miles; this harbour is Ibrmed by Eyre and Little Caribou the west. There is very good ai' muddy bottom, and you may s: pas'sage is between it and Litli. From Cape Charles Islaiul to distance 4^ miles; this course wil. ands on the eastern sides, and by the main o". in from 17 to 2'2 fathoms water in it, o.> ;> 'iier side of the centre island; but the i. st dands the course is E.N.E. \ N., and the ,1 clear to the eastward of the r«f7: in this harbour there is good an- chorage l'(ir small vessels. ST. LEWIS RIVER.— From the northernmost Battle Island to the entrance of the River St. Lewis, the course is N.N.W. ^ VV., distant 7 miles; steer in N.W. \ W., for 5 miles, then N.N.W. ^ W., « miles, to Woody Island. When you are about 4 miles up this river, from its entrance, you will find good anchorage, and this will continue until you arrive at Woody Island; but above that, the river becomes intri- cate, and has many shoals. The north point of the river is low for about 2 miles up, then both sides become rather high and wc. jdy ; at the head of the river are different kinds of very fine wood, birch, fir, juniper, ai d spruce; and the river is plentifully stored with salmon. ST. LEWIS'S SOUND.— A mile to the northward of the north point of St. Lewis River lies the entrance to St. Lewis's Sound, which runs up nearly N.W., about 3 miles, having very good anchorage at its upper part; but care should be taken lest a shoal, which stretches oil from a sandy beach on the port side, about 2 miles within the entrance, should do you any injury; you will, therefore, be sure to give this a good berth in passing. DEER HARBOUR. — From the northernmost Battle Island to the entrance of Deer Harbour, the course is N.N.W. ^ N., distant 2^ leagues. This is considered to be a very good harbour, secure from all winds, and in which vessels will find anchorage in from 10 to 18 fathoms; there is no danger in entering; and the best anchorage is at the back of Deer Island, called also Marnham Island. Port Marnham is formed by the east end of Marnham Island, and the main to the north and eastward of it, CAPE ST. LEWIS.— From the northernmost Battle Island to Cape St. Lewis, the course is N. \ W., dis<^ant 5 miles; this cu])e is high, ragged land. At \ of a mile from the point there are two flat rochj islets, and several sunken rocks, about the point of the cape; round the point is the entrance of a small cove running in S.W. ^ AV., ^ a mile ; it is commonly called Deep Water Creek, being very narrow, and having from 20 to 40 fathoms within it. About 1^ mile N.N.W. J N. from the cape is Fox Harbour, which is small, and fit only for shallops, but appears to be a convenient place for the fisheries. .^J^. om-^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) 1.0 1^ lU 1.1 2.0 Hi Hiotographic Sciences Corporation <^ L2|||||U ,.6 ^ 6" ► 23 WIST MAIN STREfT WEBSTER, N.Y. I45S0 (716) 872-4S03 \€^ f 6 72 Sailing Directions from PETTY HARBOUR.— From the northern part of Cape St. Lewis to the south head of Petty Harbour Bay, the course is about N.N.E. f E., distant 1 ^ mile ; the shores are bold and lofty; the entrance is 1^ mile wide; and the north point bears from the southern point N.E. by N.; the bay runs up nearly N.W. by N., full a mile, having from 20 to 40 fathoms water in it. At the bottom of the bay you will perceive Petty Harbour; the entrance is to the northward of a low point of land, which shuts the harbour in from the sea, so as to render it very difficult to distinguish its situation ; it is not above 50 fathoms broad at the entrance, with 5 fathoms mid-channel, and 3 to- wards the sides; but this narrow passage continues only a short way : for having passed through it, the harbour opens wide, and vessels will have plenty of room, and may an- chor in any part, in from 7 to 12 fathoms, lying land-locked. From the north head of Petty Harbour Bay to Point Spear, the course is N.E. JN., distant 2\ miles; and from Cape Lewis to Cape Spear, in nearly the same direction, 6 miles; between are Barren Bay and Spear Harbour. Barren Bay is a little to the northward of the northern part of Petty Harbour Bay, and affords no shelter; but Spear Harbour, which lies to the southward of Point Spear, is a very excellent harbour. In coming from the northward, and making Point Spear, you w'U open two islands, in the bottom of a small bay ; the best passage into Spear Harbour is between these islands ; keep the northern islands close on board, there being 4 fathoms alongside of it, and after you get about a cable's length within the islands, steer for the middle of the harbour, and anchor in 7 or 8 fathoms ; there is good room to moor. Small vessels may go on either side of the islands, the least water being 2 fathoms : but you ought to observe, that in coming from the southward, you will only be able to distinguish one island, for the northernmost islands will be shut in with the land, so as not to be seen until you get within the heads. SOPHIA, CHARLOTTE, and MECKLENBURGH HARBOURS.— From Point Spear to the entrance of these three harbours, the course is N.W.byN., about 3 miles; between are several small but high islands, lying within ^ a mile of the shore; these are commonly called Spear Islands; they are bold-to, and there are channels between them with 20 fathoms water. N.E. b^ E. \ E. from the southern head of the entrance to the three harbours, lie two small islands, close together, and therefore named the Double Island; these appear to be as high as they are broad. About a cable's length to the eastward of these islands, are two sunken rocks, over which the sea, in bad wea- ther, constantly breaks. Nearly in the middle of the entrance, also, lie two islands, being so close to each other as to seem one island ; these are steep-to, and ships may pass on either side of them, in 12, 13, and 14 fathoms, anchoring within them, in Queen's Road, in 16 fathoms; but to the southward of these islands you will find the widest passage, and most room for ships to work out. Sophia Harbour. — Tlie first and southernmost of these three harbours is Sophia Har hour, running in S.S.W., about 1^ mile, with from 10 to 15 fathoms water; it then trends away, round a low point to the eastward, and becomes a mile broad; it is thence shoal water, and only fit for small vessels. Port Charlotte is the middle harbour, and fit for any ship ; there is a low flat island on th'j starboard side of its entrance, from which runs a ree/ of rocks ^ of the channel over; to avoid this, keep the southern side on board: you will then have 9 fathoms close to the shore, until you get ^ of a mile within the harbour; you may then anchor in any part, in from 12 to 17 fathoms, only giving the starboard side a berth, to avoid a ree/'tnat lies on that side. Mechlenhurgh Harbour is the northernmost of the three harbours, and turns in N.N.W. i N. and N.W. by N., about 2 miles; in the lower part of this harbour there are 20 fatnoms ; but as you advance the water lessens, and in the upper part there is no more than 12 fathoms for ships to moor in. To sail up to the head of the bay, you must keep the port side nearest, in order to avoid the lec^e of rocks that lies on the starboard, about 30 fathoms from the shore. These rocks he within the narrowest part of the harbour, and above the low point on the starboard side; the best anchorage is at the head of the harbour. ST. FRANCIS HARBOUR.— From Point Spear to Cape Francis, the course and distance are nearly north, 6 miles, and from the islands at the entrance of the three har- bours to Cape St. Francis, N.E.fN., about 5 miles; between them, and nearly ^ a mile t the south mile; the bears from lile, haying leive Petty I shuts the ituation; it , and 3 to- nng id may an- iN.E.jN., i direction, ittle to the ; but Spear arbour. In unds, in the ese islands; i of it, and ddle of the vessels may )u ought to inguisn one ; to be seen From Point out 3 miles ; ihore; these els between he entrance ! named the ble's length bad wea- two islands, ships may n Queen's the widest lophiaHar- ;er; it then it is thence flat island the channel 9 fathoms len anchor h, to avoid turns in jour there there is no bay, you lies on the powest part chorage is course and three har- ■ly ^ a mile Yoi'k Point to Sandwich Harbour. 7S to the westward of the cape, is St. Francis Harbour. This is a snug and secure har- bour, though small, and generally filled with vessels during the fishing season, consider- able fisheries being carried on in its vicinity. There are two entrances to this harbour, one being to the northward, the other to the south-westward of Pigeon Island, this island lying directly before its entrance ; the south-eastern channel leads to a small but nar- row inlet, called Round Harbour; every where clean ground, with iO fathoms in the channel as you enter, and the depth gradually decreasing as you advance towards its head, where you have 5 and 3 fathoms. In entering to the south-westward for St. Francis Harbour, you should beware of, and give a berth to, the western side of Pigeon Island, for a rockt/ reef runs off it ; give this a berth ; proceed on N.N.E. ^ N., and having got' fairly between the two points of the harbour, you will perceive, on your starboard side, a small white rock, to which go not nearer than 7 fathoms, steer up north, and having passed mid -channel, or rather nearer the starboard shore, the rocks above water, which you will see on each side of you, turn westerly, and anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms. Small vessels go to Birnell's Beach, or up to the cove at the northern ex- tremity of the harbour. Cape St. Francis is the eastern point of an island, between which and Granby Island is a very narrow passage for boats, with 4 fathoms water within it. From this cape, in a N.N.-westerly direction, about | of a mile, is Indian Point, between which and Jasper Islands south-eastern point, is an opening leading into Indian Bight and Shoal Tickle, two narrow coves, the latter being shallow, and with only 2 and 1^ fathom water in it. To the northward of Indian Point are Hare and Fox Islands, having a narrow passage running northward between them. On crossing from Indian Bight to the channel, you will have deep water, but when you enter the passage it will shallow to 5, 4, 3, and 2 fathoms; this flat will continue for | of a mile; you then deepen your water again to 5, 7, 10, and 12 fathoms. Vessels frequently anchor in this place, on the western side of Hare Island, or rounding the northern end of Fox Island, run through Pearce's Tickle into Sealing Bight. SEALING BIGHT is a very commodious and convenient place for the fisheries. The best anchorage is on the northern part of the bay, to the westward of Jasper Island; here you may safely ride in 8, 10, or 11 fathoms, or farther in, with less water. There are several coves, situated along shore, to the northward of this anchorage, where small vessels may anchor. Fresh water can easily be obtained ; but wood is scarce. The southern entrance to this place is between Indian Point and Jasper Island on one side, and Hare and Fox Island on the other; the water is deep, and there is no danger, ex- cept a reef, which stretches out to the south-westward from Gull Island, over which the sea breaks very high in stormy weather ; it will, therefore, to avoid this reef, be always prudent to borrow close towards Indian Point, in either sailing in or out of Sealing Bight. Merchantman Harbour is about 2 miles W. i S. from St. Francis Island; it is small, but has from 7 to 15 fathoms water. FISHING SHIP HARBOUR.— From St. Francis Island to the northernmost Fishing Island, the course is N.N.E. f N., distant 3 miles. The Fishing Islands are three in number; the two northern ones are connected by a beach, which, with the main, forms Fishing Ship Harbour, where vessels may ride land-locked, and secure from all winds, in from 5 to 14 fathoms water, the entrance being to the southward of the southern Fishing Island. The best passage will be between the two western islands, that entrance bearing from Hare Island N. by W. There is no danger in this channel, and vessels may sail right through it, in nearly a N. by W. direction, up to the very head of the harbour, and anchor in 12 fathoms, having good room for ships to moor. There are two other passages into this place, one to the westward from the entrance of Gilbert's River, the other to tlie northward of all the Fishing Islands; the latter has 7 fathoms throughout, but is so narrow that you will have some difficulty in discovering the opening. GILBERT'S RIVER.— Between Fishing Islands and Granby Island is the northern entrance to Gilbert's River; the southern entrance is between Denbigh Island and the main, and this is much the wider of the two; there is also a channel between Denbigh and Granby Islands. The passage in has deep water every where. The course of the river is nearly N.W. by N., for about 6 miles; it then divides into two branches, one running N.W. by N., 7 or 8 miles, the other S.W. by W., about 6 miles. Both these branches are lull of rocks^ small islands^ and shoals; but in the [N. America — Part I.] L f i. \ 74 Sailitig Directions from " ; middle the anchorage is good all the way up, from 20 to 10 fathoms. This river has also a passage out to sea, between Hare and the Fishing Islands. CAPE ST. MICHAEL.— At 6 miles N.N.E. \ N. from the northernmost Fishing Island, and 16 miles N.N.E. J N. from Point Spear, is Cape St. Michael, high and steep, and easily known by a large bay to the northward of it; it lies in latitude 52" 47' north. OCCASIONAL HARBOUR.— About 2\ miles to the southward of Cape Saint Michael is Occasional Harbour, easily known by the Twins, ttvo large rochs, lying f of a mile outside of the entrance; they are very near each other, and vessels may pass on either side of them ; the entrance to the harbour is between two high lands, and runs in W. by N. for 2 miles, then N.W. by N. ; both sides are steep-to, without any dangers, and having good anchorage, in from 10 to 7 fathoms, about 2 miles from the entrance. The wind between the high land sets right into or out of the harbour. ST. MICHAEL'S BAY.— From Cape St. Michael's to Cape Bluff the course is nearly N.N.E., about 7^ miles ; and these two capes form the points of entrance to the Bay of St. Michael, which contains a vast number of islands, inlets and rivers; the largest island is named Square Island, lying at the mouth of the bay, and being 3^ miles long and very high; its N.E. point forms a loftv round hill, and makes, in coming from the southward, luce a separate island, being only joined by a narrow neck of land; the best anchorage for small vessels is on the southern side of St. Michael's Bay; to go there you should keep Cape St. Michael's shore on board, then run along the south side of the first island you meet with, which is called Long Island, till you get nearly to its western end; there you may anchor, in from 12 to 20 fathoms, land-locked, and can work out to sea again on either side of the island. From Cape St. Michael to the entrance of S juare Island Harbour, the course is N.N.W., 3 J miles; at the entrance lies a small island of moderate height ; to the westward of which is the best passage into the harbour, there being only 2 fathoms in that to the eastward of it. About a leagu N.N.W. from Square Island Round Hill, is the entrance to Deadman's Har- bour, ,/hich is formed by a number of little islands, and fit only for vessels of small dimensions. There is a passage between these islands and Cape Bluff, by which vessels may put out to sea. Cape Bluff is very high land, rugged at top, and steep toward the sea; it may be seen !/» or 16 leagues. Cape Bluff Harbour is a small place, and unfit for large vessels; to sail into it you should keep the cape on board until you reach a small island, which you should pass to the eastward, and then anchor. The several bays an: FROM CHATEAUX BAY TO CAPE WHITTLE, AT THE ENTRANCE OF THE GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE. ■'' '" "'' ' ' Variation allowed 2> A to 2^ degrees. ■-'■'■■■^ FROM York Point, the southern entrance of Chateaux Bay, to Wreck Bay, the course is W. ^ S., 10 J miles; the coast is straight and bold, but affords no shelter. Barge Bay lies W. by S., about 5 miles from Wreck Bay, and affords no anchorage. Greenish Pay lies about 5^ miles W. by N. from Barge Bay ; this bay is 2 miles wide at the entrance, and 2 miles deep; but it is open to the S.E., and the ground not good for holding, although it is occasionally used by small vessels. The Sunk Ledge is a cluster of rocks, awash at low water, lying S.E. JE., about ^ a mile from the Twin Islands, which are close to the east pomt of Red Bay. RED BAY. — This is an excellent harbour, and may always be known by Saddle Island, which lies at its entrance ; this island rises up at each end, and sinks down in the middle, somewhat similar to a saddle; there is also a remarkable round hill on the western side of the bay, and opposite to the west end of Saddle Island, which will tend to point out the harbour; the land on the west side of the bay is high, the eastern side rather low, and the head of the bay is high and woody. To the westward of Saddle Island, at the distance of f of a mile, is West Bay, § of a mile deep and ^ of a mile wide, where there is anchorage with westerly winds in 10 or 12 fathoms water, but it is open to easterly winds. The outer harbour of Red Bay is between Saddle Island and Harbour Island, at the entrance of the Inner Harbour, and the depth is from 6 to 9 fathoms. Immediately to the N.E. of this anchorage is the entrance of the Inner Harbour, which is between Harbour Island and the main to the eastward; it is 100 fathoms wide, but shoal on either side, narrowing the deep water channel of 7 fathoms, to about 50 fathoms in breadth. Within, there is a capacious basin 16 or 17 fathoms deep, muddy bottom, where any number of vessels may safely winter. It is easily entered with a leading wind, but there is not sufficient room lov a large vessel to beat in. There is no entrance to the eastward of Saddle Island, except for boats. At 3^ miles W. by S. from Red Bay, lies Carrol Cove, very small, and only used by a few fishermen. Two small islands lie near the eastern point of Black Bay, called 78 Sailing Directions from Little Modcste Islands. A dangerous rock, awash at low water, lies S.E. by S., ^ a mile from the west end of the wcsternniost isle; this rock must be carefully avoided. BLACK BAY lies to the W.S.-wcstward, distant 11 miles from Saddle Island; the anchorage here is tolerably good, but too much exposed to the S.E. winds. S.W. by S. fVom the western fM>int of entrance to Black Bay, distant J of a mile, is Modesto Island; it is small and low, but vessels froquuntlv run into a place within the island, called St. Modeste Bay, and anchor, but this, though occasionally used, cannot be recom- mended. DIABLE BAY lies 4 miles to the westward of Black Bay, and nearly midway be- tween is Capo Diuble ; and 3 miles farther westward is Loup Bay, which may be readily known by sumo remarkable red cliffs, which continue full 2 miles, and form the eastern point of the bay ; this is high table land, terminating with steen cliti's towards the sea. The entrance to Loup Bay is about 1 ^ mile wide, the two pomts of the cove bearing from each other S.W. and N.E. ; there is j^ood anchorage at the head oi' this cove, in 10 fathoms water, ^ of a mile offshore, with the entrance of the river N.E., and also on the S.W. side, in Schooner Cove, where small vessels may lie safely, in 7 fathoms, on a bottom of sand. At this cove is a fishing establishment and several houses. FORTEAU BAY lies 4 miles to the westward of Loup Bay ; the shore between them is rather low. Forteau Bay is about 4 miles broiul, and runs in nearly 3 miles; on the western side, near the head of the bay, is good riding, in from 10 to 13 fathoms, but exposed to the southward. Off the east point of the bay is a rock, which appears like a shallop under sail; and on the western side of the bay is a fall of water, wiiich, on coming from the eastward, will easily be perceptible. At the head of the bay is a fine river, abounding in salmon ; this is considered the best roadstead in the strait of Belle Isle. The Jersey fishing-vessels resort here during the summer, and have a large fishing establishment on the west side of the bay, opposite to which is the best anchor- age. W. by N., 7^ miles from the western point of Forteau Bay, is Wood Island; and 1^ mile westward of that is Greenly Island ; the former of these is of moderate height, there is a cove on the eastern side of Greenly Island, where a fishery is sometimes carried on; there is also a passage between Greenly Ibland and the main, which leads to Bradore Bay and Harbour; but you should be careful to give Grand Point a good berth in passing, as a dangerous reef lies directly off the the point, extending nearly ^ a mile ; and rocks, above and under water, line the shore above a mile to the eastward of the reef, running off shore ^ of a mile in some places. The safest course from Greenly Island, by a vessel bound up the St. Lawrence, is W. by S., which will clear all danger up to the east point of Anticosti, bearing from the south point of Greenly Island south 52° 30', (true,) distant 218 miles. In this part of the navigation the current through the Straits of Belle Isle should be taken into con- sideration, and that, in addition to the dangers on the coast, straggling ice-bergs are frequently met with. BRADORE BAY. — From Grand Point to Point Belle Amours, the course is about N.W., 9 miles; and Bradore Harbour lies in the N.E. corner of the bay, having Ledges Island, which is surrounded by islets and rocks, lying directly before it; southerly winds send in a heavy sea, which renders this bay very dangerous. Paroquet Island lies about H mile N. by W. ^ W. from Grand Point; and 1^ mile farther, in the same direction, lies the south point of Ledges Island ; between these islands is the entrance to Bradore Harbour. There is no passage on the N.W. side of Ledges Island into the harbour, as it is all studded with islets and rocks. Point Jones is on the main land, nearly opposite the centre of Ledges Island; here are the houses and flagstaff. At Mr. Jones's establishment, on the eastern side of the channel, the principal dangers going in are, the Gidl Rock and Ledge, which bear S.W. by W. from Jones's Point, on which the houses stand, distant 280 and 490 fathoms respectively. The rock just covers at high water, and can be seen, bat the ledge is extremely davgerous, having 2 fathoms least water over it. On the west side of this ledge, the western ends of Paroquet and Greenly Islands arc in one. Chateaux Bay to Cape Whittle. 79 by S., \ a tvoided. land; the i.W. by S. tu iBland; nd, calWd ie recom- idway be- h may be I form the 18 towards f the cove ad of this iver N.E., I safely, in id several c between ly 3 miles; 3 fathoms, !h appears ;er, wliich, ic bay is a e strait of ave a large !9t anchor- sland; and ate height, ire a vessel iiold. The liter in it; ometimcs rhich leads lint a good nearly \ a astward of wrence, is iring from this part into cou- )erg8 are 3e is about g Ledges southerly net Island the same entrance d into the nain land, staff. At dangers js's Point, rock just w, having n ends of BRADORE HARBOUR. — When coming from the eantward, give Grand Point u berth of full \ a mile ; or in hauling round tu the northward, take care that the west end of Paroipiet does not bear to the westward of north, for the reef is very dattgennu, and there is no warning by the lead. You may pass the west side of Paro<|uet within J: of a mile; having passed it, haul to the eastward, until the western extreme ot Greenly Island bo ^ a point open of Parof^uet, bearing S. ^ \V., which will clear both rock and ledge. Then steer with this mark on N. ^ E., until Jones's house bears PIN.E., and the N.E. island appears as the N.E. extreme of the Letlges, bearing N.E. by N. ; steer now for the latter, leaving the Gull Ruck tu the eastward, and lucking out fur another small rock on the opposite side, after passing which the channel is clear, keep' ing nearer the islets than tlie main; when oprmsite Jones's houses, a run of about 700 fathoms will take you to the entrance of the harbour, when you must haul sharp round to the westward, between the islets, into the harbour: this entrance is 80 fathoms wide, and 7 fathoms deep. This harbour will only accommodate a few vessels, which will lie land-locked, in from 4 to 17 fathoms; but farther up the bay there is more room and deeper water for anchorage, the passage to which is all clear, by keeping nearer to the islets than the main. When coming from the westward, beware of the reefs which extend J of a mile from the S.W. end of Ledges Island. To give these a good berth, do not bring Parotjuet to the southward of ^E. by E., until Jones's house bears N.E. by E.; then steer for it, until the marks come on for clearing the Gull Rock and Ledge, and proceed a» before. BELLE AMOURS HARBOUR lies on the N.W. side of Bradore Bay. This is a fine little harbour, where a great number of ships may lie land-locked, and might ^winter as securely as in a dock. Water may be had in the N.W. corner of the har- bour, also at the head of the north cove; but wood for fuel is very scarce. Point Belle Amours forms the west, and Stony Point and flat rocks the east side of the channel leading into the harbour. Stony Point is low and green, and bears E.N.E ^E., 1^ mile, and the flat rocks (which lie S. by E., 1^ mile from it,^ E.S.E. ^ E., l^milu from Point Belle Amours. There is a rocky patch, of 13 feet, lymg nearly midway be- tween the flat rocks and Point Belle Amours. Westward of this are other patches, of 3^ fathoms, and this is about the depth of the western passage; but in the eastern pas- sage, between the flat rocks and 13 feet patch, are from 6 to 17 fathoms. To enter the harbour from the eastward by the eastern passage, leave the flat rocks on the starboard side, distant | of a mile, and steering in N. by W- A W., you will see Harbour Point open to the westward of Stony Point rJ^ht a-head, (Harbour Point is a bare granite hill, 150 feet high, with several beacons of stones upon it,) you may approacli it witliin 100 fathoms, taking care not to approach the we"' .^ide of Stony Point within a good cable's length: then steer north, until you are abrc) ;>; of the rock above water on it, when you may steer a little to the westward, so as to br ng Harbour Point and Pond Point in one, (the latter point is nearly opposite to Stony Point.) Keep them in one, in order to round the north extreme of the flat, and you will have 4 fathoms, until Mark Point (the extreme on the north within the harbour,) comes on with Peak Point (a remarkable rocky point in Ihe middle bay, seen over the low land at the head of the harbour), bearing \V. i S. : when this mark comes on, haul sharp round to the westward, keeping a full cable's length from the high north shore, until you are well within the sandy spit ; then haul to the southward, and anchor any where, in 5 to 7 fathoms, mud. To enter the harbour by the tvestem passage, which is best with westerly winds, keep Point Belle Amours E.N.E., northerly, and take care not to shut in Stony Point be- hind it, for fear of the Middle Leches, which lie off the Middle Point; the outermost, with 15 feet over it, lies 600 fathoms offshore, having no passage between. Pass Point Belle Amours at the distance of 200 fathoms, and keep at that distance from the shore till past Pond Point; then haul in gradually to within a cable's length of the east side of Harbour Point, and proceed, as oefore directed. From Point Belle Amours to Whale Island, the south-eastermost of the Esquimaux Islands, the course is west, 10 miles; and from Greenly Island N.W. by W. J W., 18 miles; between this space on the main are several islets and harbours; the principal of which are Middle Bay, Five-Leagues Harbour, Salmon Bay, and Bonne Esperance Harbour. 80 Sailing Directions from MIDDLE BAY lies about 2 miles to the westward of Point Belle Amours; between which lies Middle Point, off which nro the Middle Ledges. This bay is a fine open roadstead, free from all danger, more than a mile wide, and extending inland 2 mdes to the N.N.E. \ E. In the outer part of the bay the shores, for the first mile, should not be approached within \50 fathoms; but farther in it is quite bold; in this bay are 4 to 13 fathoms, sandy bottom. Water may bo obtained at Isthmus Cove, on the east side, or at the head of the bay, where there are a few small trees. There is sufficient room for the largest shipM to beat in and out of this bay ; it, therefore, affords a very convenient occasional stopping place for vessels, it being the only open roadstead on this part of the coast. The Middle Leches and the Barrier Reefs, which lie to the westward of Five-Leagtics Point, are the only dangers in the wav of vessels approaching Middle Bay from the east or west, there being no islands off its entrance. Five-Leagues Harbour lies to the westward of Five-Leagues Point, and about 1 ^ mile westward of Middle Point; it is a small cove, and onlV fit for small schooners. Salmon Islet lies W. by N., 3 J- miles from Five-Leagues Point; there are several scattered ledges lying between them ; it is nearly ioined to the S.E. part of Caribou Island by a spit (n sand; shoal water extends nearly 400 fathoms south-eastward from Salmon Islet. The eastern entrance into Salmon Bay lies to the eastward of this islet and Caribou Island; but as there arc only 6 feet water, it will only admit small vessels. There is plenty of water in the western passage to this deep bay, which is through Bonne Esperance Bays and round the north end of Caribou. BoNNK Esperance Habbour lies to the westward of Caribou Island ; this is a spacious, well-sheltered harbour, with sufficient water for large vessels. There are several en- trances into this harbour, all having a number of islets before them. The principal entrance is from the southward, and lies E. by N., 3 miles from the south point of Whale Island. Between the Straits of Belle Isle and Salmon Bay soundings, in moderate depths of water, extend sufficiently far off shore every where to warn a vessel of her approach to the coast at night, or m foggy weather. Whale Island, before mentioned, lying 3 miles southward of Esquimaux Island, is about f of a mile long, and ^ of a mile broad ; it is about 100 feet high, in the centre of the island, on which there is a pile of stones supporting a pile of drift-wood. All vessels bound to Bonne Esperance endeavour to make this island. From the S.W. point of the island, a reef of rocks runs off 300 fathoms; but off its N.E. point only 70 fathoms. There is a ledge, of 9 feet water, lying W. A S., 350 fathoms from its S.W. point; and also several rocks, dry at low water, 100 fathoms off shore, on the east sMU of the same point. . ':^^- Esquimaux River — The Island of Esquimaux lies at the mouth of this river, about 3 miles northward of Whale Island; it is about 8 miles in circumference: there are numerous islands outside of it, and it cannot be distinguished from the main land, from a vessel off the coast. The eastern entrance into the bay is a very narrow channel between the east side of the island and the main, running in N.N.E., 1^ mile, where it opens into a wide space, with two islets in it. There is a trading post on the west side, about 2 miles above the Esquimaux Island; this river abounds with salmon. There is more room and deeper water to the westward of Esquimaux Island, but it is so studded with islands, that no directions can be given to be of any service to a stranger. The Esquimaux Islands may be said to commence off Salmon Island, and extend to the westward 14 miles; some of them are full 4 miles from the main land; they are mostly bare of trees, and are of all sizes and heights under 200 feet. Within this nu- merous group of islands and the main are various good bays and places of shelter; but the entrances into them are so intricate, narrow and dangerous, that no person, unless well acquainted, should attempt to navigate a vessel through them. From Whale Island south point to the southern part of Fort Rocks, the course is W. by N., 4^ miles; these are a number of low rocks extending 650 fathoms S.W. from the S.W. point of Old Fort Island. Mermot Island lies W.N.W., 1| mile from the Outer Fort Rock; it is low, and has a ledge off it, ^ of a mile to the S.W. The entrance to Old Fort Channel lies between Mermot and Fort Rocks ; being in mid-channel, the a isls Shi sou !; between , fine open nd 2 miles lie, should lis bay are )n the east » suiHcient )rd8 a very adstead on re-Leagncs y from the d about 1^ schooners, are several of Caribou tward from of this islet nail vessels, ia through s a spacious, several en- le principal ith point of ,te depths of ler approach X Island, is h, in the rift-wood. im the S.W. point only •om its S.W. the east si§9 Sr :e river, about there are n land, from •row channel mile, where on the west ivith salmon. md, but it is service to a nd extend to nd; they are thin this nu- shelter; but erson, unless the course is as S.W. from nile from the The entrance -channel, the JL.. Chateaux Bay to Cape WTitttle. 81 course in, throuffh the channel, to Old Fo. i Bay, is N.E. \ N., with very deep water all the way, at the distance of 4 miles. To the northward of Mermot Island is the Eider Group, and to the westward of them the Dog Islands, surrounded by innumerable rocka and ledges. The outermost of these rocks lie W. by N., distant 4 miles from the outermost Fort Rock: the south- westernmost of these islands are verv low, but the highest islands, though small, are of considerable elevation, and lie next the main. There is anchorage between these islands and the main; the best way to approach it is by running down with a westerly wind from Shecatia, close along the mam land, within all the rocks and ledges; there is deep water all the way. The Porpoise Rocks lie W.N.W. i W., 3J miles from the Outer Dog Rocks, and about I of a mile from the main. About 3 miles farther westward lies the Boulet Rock; this is a smooth, round, backed island, green at the top. The opening of Lobster Bay lies 1^ mile E.X.E. from the rock; together they serve to point out the position of a vessel off the coast. The Peril Rock^ which is the outermost and most dangerous, dries at half- tide, and lies 1^ mile S.S.W. from the Boulet. , Rocky Bay lies a mile to the eastward of Lobster Bay ; it runs in N.E. by E., 1 } mile, between steep and high rocky shores, in the upper part of which is good anchorage. Here is a house and fish stage ; this place is frequented by the fishermen. Lobster Bay runs inland, about 4 miles in a N.E. direction, between high, steep, and rocky shores ; here is anchorage when about half-way up, on a muddy bottom, but it is exposed to S.W. winds. Narpatepee Bay, which lies 3^ miles to the westward of Lobster Bay, is a straight and narrow inlet, very similar to Lobster Bay; it runs in N.E. ^ E., about 41 miles. These three bays are all open to south-westerly winds, and cannot be recommendea to shipping, as you can only get out of them with a northerly wind, being so narrow. Shecatia Island lies W.N.W., 3^ miles from Boulet Island, and near it, to the west- ward, lies Mistanoque Island, separated from it by an.unnavigable channel; these islands lie very near to the main. Mistanoque Harbour is on the north side of the island, directly opposite the mouth of the bay. In this harbour are from 15 to 20 fathoms, muddy bottom; however, you may anchor in less water a short distance to the east- ward, but the channel there is narrow, and vessels must moor in any case. The south passage to this harbour is between Enter Island and the west shore of Mistanoque; it is the best, being 400 fathoms wide, and 40 fathoms deep, and bold-to on either side. When you arrive at the western entrance, which is 80 fathoms broad, give the N.W. point of the island a berth of about 50 fathoms; and as soon as you have enticed the narrow channel, then borrow over to the island again, to avoid a -shoal on the west side of the entrance of the bay. The eastern passage is between Shecatica and the main, and is only fit for small vessels ; in the narrowest part it is only 30 fathoms wide, and 3 fathoms deep. There is nothing immediately outside of Shecatica, Mis- tanoque, Enter, or Divers Islands ; so that no other directions seem necessary, than to run through the centre of either channels, which may be preferred. This harbour having the advantage of two entrances, renders it preferable to many harbours on this coast. ' In the Bay of Mistanoque the anchorite is good up near the head; the channel is both long and narrow, running up N.E. ^ N., about 3 miles. The island and the main land, at the entrance, has a barren appearance, and is high; but both wood and water may be obtained in the bay. SHECATICA BAY runs close in to the westward of Mistanoque Island, and ex- tends many miles up the country, its course bending to the northward, and having various branches and turnings, with numerous islands, capable of giving shelter to vessels of all descriptions; but these are little frequented, the passages bemg too nar- row for strangers to attempt the navigation of. SHAG ISLANDS and ROCKS.— Nearly W. | S., distant above 2^ leagues from the island of Mistanoque, are the Shag Island and Rock. The island is small, high, and has a round-peaked hill in the middle, looking ^een. To the eastward of it are a number of rocks above water; the outermost, lying S.E. by E., 2 miles from the island, is the Shag Rock. When | of a mile from the Shag Rock, the south point of Shecatica will bear E.N.E., 8 miles; running on this course will take you a mile to the southward of the TTiree Rocks lying nearly midway between them. [N. Am£bica— Fast L] M 8« Sailing Directions from CUMBEllLAND HARBOUR lius N. by E. ^ E., about a milci from the outer Shag Hocks, and may rciulily be diHtingiUHliud by a remarkable hij^li hiU on tbu main land, appourint;; like a ciiHtle at its summit, being a steep clitl', looking like walls; this hill lies N. by W., nearly JIJ leagues from the entrance to the horbour. The outer islands, which form the harbour, are called the Duke and Cumberland Islands; these arc moderately high, the eastern one making in two round hills. The harbour should bo approached fVom between the Shag Rocks and the Three Rocks, which bear E.N.E. and W.S.W. of each other, distant 2 J miles. In entering this harbour there is no danger but what appears above woter, except a tmall rock^ wliich lies S. by W., about J u mile from the western head. The entrance to the harbour is ^ of a nule wide, and the inlet ^ a mile long. From the eastern head you must steer for the inner point on the western side, and keep along it to the inner point, bearing N. by W. j( W., J of a mile from the outer east point of entrance ; and after you reach that pomt, haul over to the eastward, and anchor in from 30 to 7 fathoms, excellent ground, and room enough for any shijjs. This is by far the most commodious and best harbour on the coast, and also the easiest of access. Fresh water u plentiful, but for wood you must go to Shecatica Bay. SANDY ISLAND HARBOUR is on the south side of Sandy Island, and bears N.N.W. i VV., about 2} miles from Shag Island. To sail into this, you should pass to the eastward of the Egg Rocks, which bear N.W. by W., about 1 J mile from Shag Island, keeping the starboard point of the bay on board; you will then perceive a amaW rock above water to the northward, lying off the entrance of the harbour, which you may pass on either side, and then steer in N.N.E. ^ E. for the harbour, there being no other danger. Here you will have room enough to moor in 5 and 6 fathoms water, with good ground and safe riding. There is no wood here, but water is plentiful. PORT AND RIVER ST. AUGUSTINE.— The entrance to the port is to the west- ward of St. Augustine's Chain, and 7 miles W. ^ S. of Shag Island. It is a very small harbour, and the passage in is intricate, but small vessels can moor in it. Hero is a seal-fiahing and trading post. The river ST. AUGUSTINE is 4J leagues from the entrance of the square channel which is between Shag Rock and the St. Augustine Square, and lies to the N.W., having several islands lying in the passage; but the river is shallow, and only fit for boats to enter. There is a sartdy bar across, -which dries at low water. At 2 miles up it divides into two branches, one running to the northward, and the other to the north-westward, for 14 or 15 leagues. Wood and water are plentiful. From St. Augustine's Chain to the bluff head of Great Mecattina Island, the course and distance are W. by S. J S., 7 leagues. The coast is lined with islands, within and about which are many harbours. The main land, in sailing along this part, from Shecatica to Ha-Ha Bay, cannot be seen ; and the adjacent islands are so high, so numerous, and near each other, that although there are navigable passages between them, yet you cannot discover their entrances, nor perceive them to be islands, until you get near, and entangled among them. EAGLE HARBOUR. — This lies at the western end of Long Island, to the east- ward of Ha-Ha Bay, and is formed by a cluster of islands, being capable of holding a great number of vessels in security; in it are from 20 to 10 fathoms water, the ground Holding well: but the entrances to it are too narrow and intricate for any thing but small vessels : the deepest of the entrances has only 3 fathoms in it. The approach to this harbour is on either side of the Fox Islands, which bear N.E. ^ N. from Tre1;)le Hill Islet, distant 9 miles. ^,^ This part of the coast is very dangerous for any vessel to fall in with In dark and foggy weather, on account of the infinite number of small low islets and rocks about it, many of the latter being under water, and to avoid which, no practical mark can be given ; it will, therefore, always be advisable and prudent to keep off the coast to a considerable distance. HA-HA BAY lies on the main, to the westward of Eagle Harbour, and has several small islands at its entrance, forming separate entrances ; the best of these is that which lies between Seal Point and Round Island, leaving all the islands on the starboard side; this is a wide and safe passage, having no danger but what is visible. Ha-Ha Bay runs in to the N.E. by N., 8 miles, and has many islands at its head, on the outer [i the main walls; thin The outer ; these arc r BhouM bo car fi.N>£> r, except a le entrance nstern head ,o the inner trance; and from 20 to 'ar the most Fresh water I, and hears ould pass to 5 from Shaff ceive a small r, which you lere being no thorns water, lentiful. to the west- a very small t. Here is a »f the square (1 lies to the ow, and only water. At ind the other ful. d, the course g, within and is part, from e so high, so ages between islands, until , to the east- i of holding a sr, the ground any thing but le approach to . from Treble in dark and rocks about it, mark can be ,he coast to a jour, and has )est of these is islands on the vhat is visible, at its head, on Chntoaux Bay to Cape tVJiittle. W the starboard side. Within these islandu, tu the eastward, ar(> numerous anchonigoti, with from to 20 fathoms water; vcsnclri may alno occasional ly anchor all along the* eastern side of the bay, in 12 and 14 fathoms, muddy bottom, but on the wostcrn side the water is too deep. N.N.E., about 2 miles from tne entrance on the west side, is a high bluflf head; round this head N.W. by W., ^ a mile, is a small but safe harlmur for small vessels, in which you will have J 2 rathoms, good ground; this harbour is formed by un Island, on either side of which there is a narrow but safr {lassagfl. FISII HAKHOUR is to the southward of lla-IIa Iky, and N. ^ W., 4} miles iVom the Hottle, at the north end of Great Moeattina Island, and runs in westerly ; it is small, and formed by an island covered with wood. You may sail in on either side of the island; but the northern passage is considered to be the better of the two. In the bay to the southward of the island, is a Ivdae of rochs^ partly visible at all times. S.S.E. Jf E. tVom the Woody Island lies a rocX, on which are only 2 feet at low water. You may anchor in the harbour at the back of this island in 7 or 8 fathoms, and have i)Ienty of room to moor. Off the northern point of the entrance to this harbour, vailed k>al Point, are two little islands, and a small sandy cove, where a seal fishery is carried on ; and it is also a trading post. Between Fish Harbour and IIa«IIu Bay there is a very remarkable round high hill, making in a peak, which may serve as a land-mark to point out either of these places of anchorages. GREAT MECATTINA ISLAND lies 2 miles off Rod Point, on the main land; it is 3^ miles long, and about 3 miles broad, being the most remarkable land at this part of the coast; it rises up in the middle to the nei^ht of about 500 feet, which ia much higher than either of the ends; it is granite, and is easily distinguished from its position, bem<; about 5 miles K.S.E. of the high land of Mccattina. Its E.N.E. point makes ^''.o a bluff head; and round this head to the northward, within a cluster of small islands, is a cove running in about a mile ; in this cove vessels can safely anchor in from 14 to 20 fathoms, good ground, and may obtain both wood and water. In entering this harbour you may pass safely on either side of the cluster of small islets lying off its mouth. It entering the south passage, keep Bluff Head on board; if by the north passage, pass between the cluster of islets and a small rock by itself, lying ^ of a mile N.\V. ot them, and a cable's length from thu very near d Pomt, at ntinuing on lits. Varia- 3. direction, en them is a good berth on the west sand, and is of the island part of the lam there is ttina Island ; md ledges in , it is a very ! Fin, Scale, lock is just nearer than g in the way ;mg the Cat Single Rock, to the west- ward of the rock, the entrance of the harbour will bear N.N.W., with nothing in your way, and you may steer directly for it. In coming from the westward, steer N.N.E. ^ E., passing Point Antrobus, the eastern {)oint of Little Mecattina Island, at the distance of ^ of amile ; continue on N.N.E. ^ E., eaving the Cat Rocks and Staff Islet and ledges on your port hand, coming no nearer the latter than ^ of a mile ; and, when abeam, you will see the entrance of the harbour bearing N. | W., distant a mile : it cannot be mistaken, because there is no other chan- nel through which you can see clear into the harbour. The entrance, 170 fathoms wide, and 20 fathoms deep, is between Daly and Price Islands ; or, from the former position abreast of Staff Islet, continue on N.N.E. ^ E., 300 fathoms farther, till the entrance bears N.N.W., then haul directly in for 't,, leaving Eden and Price's Island on your right, and Daly Island on your left, or westward is quite bold. About 170 fathoms within the entrance, on the east side, is the Watch Rock, above water, and farther in, the Bold Rock, a very small islet. On the west side lies Safe Rock, bearing N. ^ W., 200 fathoms from the east side of Daly Island; it is above water, and very small, but bold-to; midway between Safe Rock and Bold Rock lies Rag Ledge: it just dries at low water; this latter is the principal danger, but it can be always seen from aloft, and has a clear passage on either side, a mil cable's length wide; when within this ledge you may choose your anchorage by the lead, as there are some rocky patches, of 4 to 6 fathoms, to be avoided; the bottom is generally mud, with from 14 lo 9 fathoms. In running farther up the harbour you should keep more than half-way over from the islands on the eastern side, towards the west, to avoid the Foul Rock, of only 2 fathoms; it bears north, 600 fathoms, from Price Island. There is anchorage, nearly ^ a mile farther up than this ledge, to the eastward of Cluster Point; this is uie most secure berth in the harbour. Nearly all the harbours on the coast of Labrador have numerous rocks and islets before their entrances ; therefore a good chart, with plans of the harbours, on a large scale, would be much better to a stranger than any written directions that could be given. Cape Mackinnon is the south point of Little Mecattina Island, and lies W. by S., 3 miles from Point Antrobus. Spray Reef is small, and just awash at low water; it lies W.N.W. f W., 1^ mile from Cape Mackmnon. ITiis reef lies nearly in the centre of Aylmer Sound, and has deep water all round it. There is no good anchorage in Ayl- mer Sound, until you are tu the northward of the Doyle Islands. Lou Road lies within, or to the N.E. of the Doyle Islands, between them and Luisa Harbour; this is a fine open roadstead, in which vessels may anchor, in from 12 to 4 fathoms, over a muddy bottom. It is sheltered by the Doyle Islands to the S.W., and the passage in is close to the eastward of the islands ; the only danger in the way is Spray Reef, before men- tioned, and some ledges lying to the eastward of the eastern Doyle Island, near the mouth of Salaberry Bay. Harrington Islands form the S.W. side of Aylmer Sound, of which Cape Airy is the southern point, and lies 5 miles W. by S. from Cape Mackinnon. Black Reef lies off Cape Airy, from which it bears S. by W. ^ W., 2 miles, composed of low black rocks, above water, about 150 fathoms in diameter. Major Reef, which is awash at low water, bears W. by N., 1^ mile from Cape Airy; in the same line of bearing, and 4^ miles from the cape, are the Natagamu Islands ; they are small, with a remarkable mound on the largest of them. Natagamu River lies If mile N. by W. from the islands; it is a large stream, with deep water at the narrow entrance, which continues up to the falls; these descend perpendicularly 50 feet, on either side of an island, and are N.E. by E., 1^ mile from the entrance, and can partly be seen from the sea. St. Mary's Islands lie W.S.W., 10 miles from Cape Airy, and 7 miles off the main land; they are of bare steep granite, bold all round, and are about 200 feet above the sea. Cliff Islands lie about ^ a mile to the westward ; and a little farther, in the same direction, lie the Boat Islands, about 2^ miles W. ^ N. from St. Mary's. St. Mary^s Reefs, the most dangerous off this part of the coast, axe four ledges, under water, on some of which the sea breaks, and extend about a mile; thev lie about 6 miles W.S.W. i W. from the S.W. end of St. Mary's Islands. The Tender's Reefh small, and is aw.ish at low water; it bears N. by W. JW., near a mile from the northernmost St. Mary's Rock. The S.W. Islands lie about 1| mile north-westward 86 Sailing Directions, 8fc. of the Tender's Reef; they are a group of small islands, the westernmost of which is high and round. There is a clear passage between the Tender's Reef and S.W. Islands ; and also between the Boat Islands and St. Mary's Reef. WATAGHEISTIC ISLAND and SOUND— The island is hilly, and lies near the main, within, and to the northward of St. Mary's, Cliff, and Boat Islands; it is about 3 miles long, by 1^ mile broad, and lies in the mouth of a large bay, so as to form a large sound within it, in which there are several good anchoring places ; but these will be very difficult for a stranger to make out, as they cannot be reached passing ihrough 7 miles of dangerous navigation ; they should not be attempted but under ab- solute necessity. The eastern entrance, between Watagheistic Island and the main, is narrow and intricate ; but the western entrance is ^ a mile wide, and it may be passed through with proper care, though there are several ledges and rocks in it; but outside of either of the entrances there is no good anchorage. Cove Island lies to the eastward of Watagheistic, and 4 miles N.N.W. from the north point of St. Mary's Island; and there are rocks., both above and under water, thickly scattered all the way to the Netagamu Islands. Etamamu River enters a bay 4 miles N.~E. of the eastern entrance of Wapitagun ; the bay is full o{ islands and rocks; near the mouth of the river there is a trading post and a salmon fishery. iSoutk Maker's Ledge is a small rook, which is never entirely covered when the sea is smooth ; it bears west, 9 miles from St. Mary's Rocks, and S.E. ^ E., 6^ miles from Cape Whittle; but the Cormorant Rocks lie directly between them, leaving a channel between the rocks and the ledge nearly 2f miles wide ; the soundings between them are very irregular. This is the most dangerous ledge in this part of the coast. Mistassina Stone is a very remarkable block of granite ; it resembles a mortar when seen from the S.W., and has been called the Gun by the fishermen. It serves as an excellent guide to the eastern entrance of Wapitagun, which is } of a mile to the east- ward of it, and N. by E., 3^ miles from South Maker's Ledge. WAPITAGUN HARBOUR lies between Wapitagun Island and the Outer Islands; the latter are so close together that they appear like one island from the sea, but they completely shelter the harbour, which is a long narrow channel, running cast and west between them. There is no difficulty in making this harbour, for South Maker's Ledge lies directly opposite, and Lake Island is immediately to the westward of it, which is remarkable for its precipices of red granite, 100 feet high. These red cliffs are higher than anv other near; but they are stained white in places by the cormorants. From Cape Whittle, the western point of Lake Island, the western entrance of the harbour bears E.S.E. ^ E., 3 miles; N.N.W. ^ W., 4 miles from South Maker's Ledge; N. ^ E., nearly a mile from Slime Rock, the north-easternmost Cormorant Rock; and 2 miles westward of Mistassina Stone. This entrance is about 80 fathoms wide; but there are parts of the channel, within the eastern entrance, not more than 60 fathoms wide; and the harbour itself is narrow, and only fit for small handy vessels of 150 or 200 tons. This harbour is secure from all winds, and sufficiently large and deep for vessels of any size, when once they are in ; but both the eastern and western entrances are so extremely narrow between the islands; and it is necessary to turn round short at right angles, when coming in by the ■ /astern entrance, which is the one generally used, because the westerly winds are the only clear winds, and it is only in clear weather that a vessel can venture near such a place. Great promptness and attention in the management of the sails of a vessel are necessary in entering such narrow and intricate channels. The flood- tide from the eastward and ebb from the westward run past the entrances of Wapitagun, at a rate varying from ^ to 1 knot; but both the streams are much in- fluenced by the winds. High water, full and change, at lOh. 30m.; springs rise about 5 feet, neaps 3 feet. CAPE WHITTLE is in latitude 54° 10' 45'' north, and longitude 60° 10' west. Water may be had on Wapitagun and Lake Islands; but for wood you must go to the main land. Remarks. — The land from the Grand Point of Mecattina to Cape Whittle is skirted by many islands and rocks, some of which are 7 and 8 miles from the shore ; therefore, in coasting along, the land should always have a wide berth given it, as it is as dan- f which is J. Islands ; lies netu* inds; it is as to form but these jd passing under ab- le main, is be passed ut outside ". from the ider water, Magnetic Bearings and Distances, 87 gerous as can be imagined to a stranger falling in with it in the night, or in thick weather. It is seldom visited, and only by a few Quebec trading-schooners, fishermen, and eggers.* All the Islands along the coast of Labrador have a barren appearance, the outer ones being for the nn part small, low, rocky islets, and the inner ones large and high, covered with a sos . ,reen moss. The depth of water near the outer islands is often very great, being 70 •. 30 fathoms, so that there is no warning by the lead. From the quantity of wreck found among these islands, no doubt many melancholy shipwrecks nave taken place, which have never been heard of; even if the unfortunate crews landed on these barren rocks, they would perish by cold and hunger. The course of the tides flowing along the coast are irregular, depending much on the prevailing winds, after settled weather; spring-tides wUl rise 6 or 7 feet, neaps about 4 feet. ..£ -^ az. r' Vapitagun; raaing post n the sea is miles from g a channel in them are lortar when erves as an to the east- ter Islands; a, but they ist and west ker's Ledge it, which is 3 are higher nts. From the harbour ge;N.iE., and 2 miles it there are iswide; and 200 tons. or vessels of ances are so lort at right sed, because that a vessel nagement of annels. le entrances je much in- ;s rise about ;0° 10' west, list go to the tie is skirted >; therefore, it is as dan- Magnetic Bearings and Distances , in Nautical Miles, from place to place on the different Coasts of the Island of Newfoundland. EAST COAST — FROM CAPE RACE TO CAPE NORMAN. Variation 25° to 34° West. BEARINGS. MILE*. From Cape Race to the Virgin Rocks S.E. by E 87 „ Cape Ballard X.E. } E 8 ' Cape Ballard to Cape Broyle '. N.E. J N 19 „ Cape Spear N.E. | N 47 Cape Spear to South Head N. by E. ^ E 11 ' South Head to Cape St. Francis N. i W 8 Cape St. Francis to Harbour Grace W. ^N 16 „ north end of Belle Isle S.W. i W 11 j. „ Bacalhao Island N.N.E 16 *" Bacalhao N.E. end to Breakheart Point N.W. by W 5 \W. N. i>;- Breakheart Point to Random Sound entrance W. by N. „ Trinity Harbour N.N.W. ^ „ Catalina Head N. by W. J W, Catalina Head to Cape Bonavista N. ^ E Cape Bonavista to Barrow Harbour W.N.W. ^ W, 27 20 23 11 20 » n Young Harry Rocks N.N.E. ^ E 5 Stink Islands N. ^ E Cape Freels N. I E 29 36 * The "Egging Business." — It is reported that in some seasons full 20 small schooners, or shallops, from 20 to 30 tons, load with f>ggs from this coast. Halifax is the great market for them, where they at times fetch a much higher price than hen's eggs. They are also taken to Boston and other places; and arc stowed in the hold in bulk. These men (the eggers) combine together, and form a strong company. They suffer no one to interfere with their business, driving away the fishermen, or any one else that attempts to collect eggs near where they happen to be. Might makes right with them, if onr information be true. They have arms, and are said by the fisliermen not to be scrupulous in the use of them. As soon as they have filled one vessel with eggs, they send her to market; others follow in succession, so that the market is always supplied, but never over-stocked. One vessel of 25 tons, is said to have cleared £200 by this "egging business" in a favourable season.— 'Aiiu- tical Magazine, vol. xvii., p. 667. I I Magnetic Bearings and Distances. MILES. DEARIMOS. From Cape Freela to Funk Island N.E. AE 30 „ Offer Wadhum E. Grund N. ^ E 21 „ Snap Rock N. by E. ^ E 40 „ CapeFogo ,..N. byW 31 Cape Fogo to Funk Island E.S.E 31 fi Snap Rock N.E. by E. ^ E 18 „ Barrack Rock N.N.E. ^ E 8 Fogo Island west end to Tolinguet Harbour W.N.W 18 Tolinguet Harbour to Cutwell Harbour N.W. by W. i W. ... 32 . „ Nipper Harbour N.W. i W 41 „ Cape St. John N.N.W 32 Cape St. John to Partridge Island N.W. by N 28 „ St. Barbe Island east point N. i E 15 „ south point of Bell Mand N.N.E. ^ E 41 Bell Island N.E. point to Grois Island N. | E 7 Grois Island N.E. point to Cape Goose N.N.E 19 Cape Goose to Cape St. Anthony E. by N. ^ N 5 Cape St. Anthony to Cape Bauld, Quirpon Island N.E 18 Cape Bauld to the south point to Belle Isle N.E. by N 14 „ Cape Norman N.W. by W 19 SOUTH COAST— FROM CAPE RACE TO CAPE RAY. Variation 25° to 23° West. From Cape Race to Mistaken Point W. | N 5 Mistaken Point to Cape Pine W.N.W 15 Cape Pine to Cape Freels N.W. by W 4 Cape Freels to Lance Point N.W. by N 20 Lance Point to Cape St. Mary ..N.W. by W 7 Cape St. Mary to Cape Chapeau Rouge N.W. by W 49 „ Point Breen N. by W 9 Point Breen to Red Island, Placentia Bay N.N.E c 24 „ Gibraltar Rock N.E 16 Cape Chapeau Rouge to the south point jf Pierre 1 w i jj 34 Island f ' ' St. Pierre, Point Seches to Cape Angeac, Petit ) vr tit- 3 -cir « Miquelon JJN.W.JW o Cape Angeac to Cape Ray N.W 130 WEST COAST— FROM CAPE RAY TO CAPE NORMAN. Variation 23° to 34° West. From Cape Ray to Cape Anguilla N. f E St. Paul's Island W.S.W. J W. „ Cape North W.S.W.|W. ■M Cape Anguilla to Cape St. George N.E. by N. .. ,j „ Indian Head, George's Harbour E.N.E Cape St. George to Indian Head E.S.E. ^ E. .. „ Red Island N.E Red Island to Cape Gregory E.N.E Cape Gregory to Green Pomt E.N.E. J E. .. 18 40 53 35 51 30 6 62 21 MILES. ,.. 30 ... 21 ... 40 ... 31 ... 31 ... 18 ... 8 ... 18 ... 32 ... 41 .... 32 .... 28 .... 15 .... 41 .... 7 .... 19 .... 5 18 .... 14 19 Remarks on the Gidf of St. Lawrence. 89 ,..t;«,. ' v,.,',4 ,, ,„U,.>1.. BBARIKOI. M1L1I9. From Green Point to Cape Rich N.E. 4 E 63 Cape Rich to Flat Island N.E. I £ 9 Flat Island to Point Ferrol • E.N.E • «...«. 14 ■ Point Ferrol to the Flour Rocks <....hE.N'.E « 24 _^\,\ Flour Rocks tc Cape Norman ..£. | S • <• 38 ■■.^i f'vf vfiU'^-i ■'■ f'.iH' COAST or LABRADOR — CAPE SPEAR TO CAPE WHITTLE. Variation 34" to 28" West. 30 24 19 From N.E. point of Belle Isle to Point Spear N. J E t, „ Cape St. Lewis ^ N. | E ,, „ Caribou Island N. | W ; „ J, Castle Island, Chateaux )■«■ ^^ bv W i W Bay j ' ' J 'Z Castle Island to Point Amours W. i S Point Amours to Wood Island W. by N 11 "Wood Island to Murr Islands, off Great Mecattina W. i S 74 Murr Islands to St. Mary's Ledge W. by S 44 ■ St. Mary's Ledge to South Maker's Ledge West 9 South Maker's Ledge to Cape Whittle Rocks W.N.W 8 19 48 ;j^v,>n"it': 5 15 4 20 7 49 9 24 16 34 6 130 ^■A- v,.'Mr : -i' '; .' »">• fi'Ti ■ 18 40 53 35 51 30 6 62 21 VI.— THE GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE. T%e variation from St. Pauta Island, throvgh the gidf, on the south side of Anticosti to near Point de Monts, is 2 points westerly, decreasing gradually as you proceed up the river; at Bic abovi 18° 30',- at Condre Island 16° ; and at Qttebec 14° westerly. On the north shores of the gulf off Cape Whittle, 28° westerly; Mingan Islands 25° 30'; east end of Anticosti 25° 0'; Seven Islands 22° 30'; and Cape de Movts 22° west. REMARKS.— Mariners sailing from the British Channel for the Gulf of St. Law- rence, usually endeavour to strike soundings on the Grand Bank of Newfoundland, somewhere in or about the latitude of 46^ or 45° 30' north, always taking care to go to the southward of the Virgin Rocks, which have already been described, page 3. When having passed the meridian of Cape Race, and reached the longitude of 53° ■west, a N.W. * W. course will carry them clear of St. Peter's Island, and across the centre of St. Peter's Bank, and directly to the N.E. Cape of the island of Breton. This N.E. Cape of Breton and Cape Ray, the S.W. Point of Newfoundland, form the two points of entrance to the Gulrof St. Lawrence; they lie E.N.E. ^ E. and W.S.W. ^ W., distant 18 leagues from each other. Between them, and about 4 leagues E.N.E. from Cape North, is the little island of St. Paul, appearing with three hills upon it, and deep water all round. Ships bound for the Gulf of St. Lawrence, after passing the island of Miquelon and St. Peter's, will do well by endeavouring to steer a middle course between Newfound- land and Breton Island, passing on either side of St. Paul's Island, as best suits their convenience; but by no means should they run beyond the parallel of 47° 30' north until they fure assuredly well past Cape Ray, for the harbours on the South Coast of Newfoundland, to the westward of Fortune Island, are full of dangers, and but im- perfectly known ; while the whole shore is frequently enveloped in thick fogs, and the rocks cannot then be perceived before your vessel has got irrecoverably entangled among them. In this part also, shifts of winds are common; and it will often happen,- [N. America — Part I.] N 1 1 90 Sailing Directions for that after blowing a gale from one point of the compass, it will suddenly vary to the opposite point, and continue equally strong; thus it has been known, that wnile one vessel has been Iving-to with a heavy gale, another, not more than 30 leagues distant, has been in another gale equally heavy, but with the wind in a direct contrary direc- tion; this has proved fatal to many ships. ■ ' . t The winds within the Gulf are not so liable to such sudden changes as on the outside, or to the eastward of Breton Island. The island of ST. PAUL is not dangerous, and may be easily be discovered, even when the weather is foggy, by keeping a good look-out. There are now two excellent lights on this island; that on the northern end is a fixed light, and that on the southern end revolves : both these lights may be seen 6 leagues ; there is also a fog bell near to the southern light, which is tolled by machinery m thick weather. (See page 61.) The shores of the island of Breton are high; and although fogs do fre- f^uently obscure the land, yet, by proper attention, it will generally be discovered tune enough to avoid danger. To persons who may unfortunately be driven too near this coast, it wiay be serviceable to be apprized, that a settlement is now formed at Ashpee Bay, and good anchorage is to be had behind the island, where boats can land, and water and provisions be obtained ; while for the want of knowledge of such an establishment, many have been obliged to endure both hunger and fatigue unrelieved. Having entered the Gulf, you will seldom fail to see Magdalen and Bird Islands ; as you must pass them in your route to the River St. Lawrence, you had better, pai*- ticulary in thick weather, go either to the eastward and northward of these, between them and Newfoundland, or to the southward and westward, between them and Prince Edward's Island, and not attempt to go between them in such weather. The weather to the southward of the Magdalens, and between them and Prince Edward's Island, is generally much clearer than to the northward; therefoi'e, the passage that way is to be preferred, particularly after the early part of the year, for then south-westerly winds are most prevalent ; and also, if necessary, clear and good anchorage is to be had at the south-eastern part of the Magdalens in Pleasant Bay, very near the shore ; this is a safe place for vessels to ride in, with westerly winds, and greatly more to be recommended tlian to hazard the beating about in the gulf with a foul wind ; the passage into it is safe. Bearings and Distances of the principal Points and Places, -■• Cape Ray to the north side of the Bird Islands, N.W. by W., 24 leagues. Cape Ray to the east point of Anticosti, nearly N.N.W. ^ W., 43 leagues. Cape North to the N E. end of the Magdalen Islands, N.N.W. ^ W., 18 leagues. ' Cape North to the Bird Islands, N. ^ W., 19 leagues. N.E. end of the Magdalen Islands to the Bird Islands, N.E. by E. J E., 5^ leagues. East side of St. Paul's Island to the east side of the Bird Islands, N. by W. J W., 18 leagues. From the North Bird Island to the S.W. point of Anticosti, N.N.W., 134 miles. From North Bird Island to the east point of Anticosti, N. f E., 80 miles. From Cape North to South Cape of Amherst Island, N.W. by W. ^ W., 67 miles. From south point of Amherst Island to north point of Prince Edward's Island, W.byN.^N., 84 miles. . .- , Bird Islands to the eastern end of Brian Island, W. J N., 11 miles. ,^ .,? ^j,.. ^ Bird Islands to Cape Rosier, N.W. ^ N., 45 leagues. -,;j, y^' . Cape Rosier to the S.W. point of Anticosti, N.L. byE., 12 J leagues. ./, , , Cape Rosier to the west end of Anticosti, N. J E. 20 leagues. ViKva In crossing the Gulf of St. Lawrence, even during the summer months, islands of ice have frequently been met with. The ice that drifts out of the river all disappears by the latter end of May, but these masses make no part of it. The conjecture is, that they are not formed on any of the neighbouring coasts, but descend from the more northerly regions of Davis's Strait, &c., where, it is presumed, they are severed by the violence of storms, from the vast accumulations of the Arctic winter ; and passing near the coast of Labrador, are drawn by the indraught of the current into the Strait of Belle Isle. They often are 100 feet in height, with a circumference of many thousands ; the temperature of the atmosphere is very sensibly affected by them, wliich, even in Tlie Islatids in the Gidj' of St. Lawrence. 91 ary to the while one es distant, •ary direc- he outside, iiscovered, ! now two nd that on i also a fog her. (See »g8 do fre- discovered an too near formed at ;s can land, of such an unrelieved. rd Islands; better, pai-- se, between and Prince 'he weather 's Island, is it way is to ?terly winds 2 had at the :his is a safe commended ;e into it is :s. leagues. k leagues. )yW.fW., 4 miles. 67 miles, rd's Island, islands of disappears njecture is, >m the more ered by the lassing near e Strait of thousands ; ch, even in foggy weather, when they are not visible, sufficiently indicates their neighbourhood : by day, from the dazzling reflection of the sun's rays; also by moon-light, their appear- ance is brilliant and agreeable. Currents at the entrance of the Ga//".— Captain Bayfield, R.N., says "It is a general received opinion, that a current sets constantly to the south-eastward out of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, between Newfoundland and Cape Breton Islands ; and also that it frequently deflects to the southward towards the shores of the island last named, by another current from the northward, which is said to enter the gulf by the Straits of Belle Isle. *' I have, myself, observed that a current sets out between Cape Ray ana St. Paul's Island, during westerly winds and in calm weather, but it is checlced by easterly winds; and I believe it may sometimes run in a contrary direction from the same cause; northerly winds, and, perhaps, also the above-named current from the northward, may cause the stream to set to the southward towards Cape Breton Island: but the truth is, that the winds, both present and at a distance, possess so powerful and irregular an action upon the set and strength of the currents and tides in the entrance of the gulf, that I cannot say any thing certain respecting them. " The reality of a current inward, through the Straits of Belle Isle, is confirmed by the presence of ice-bergs. After entering the gulf it runs along the Labrador Coast, at the distance of 2 or 3 miles from the outer islands, leaving a narrow space in-shore, in which the streams of the tides, when uninfluenced by the wnids, are tolerably regular ; passing outside Mistanoque, Grand Meoattina, and the South Maker's Ledge, it pur- sues a direction given to it by the trending of the coast, till it is turned gradually to the southward by the weak current which is often found coming from the westward be- tween Anticosti and the north coast dui'ing westerly winds, and which is set off to the southward by Natashquan Point. The united streams continue their course southward at a rate diminishing as they become more widely spread, and which seldom exceeds i a knot; and finally joining the main downward current, out of the St. Lawrence, they all pursue a S.E. direction towards the main entrance of the gulf, between Cape Ray and the island of St. Paul. It is this current, from the nortnward, which is felt by vessels crossing from off the Bird Islands towards Anticosti, and which, together with the neglecting to allow for the local attraction of the compasses, has been the principal cause of masters of vessels so often finding themselves, unexpectedly, on the south coast. Many shipwrecks have arisen from this cause near Cape Rosier, Gaspe, Mai Bay, &c." The dense fogs met with in this gulf is one of the greatest sources of danger in its navigation; they sometimes last several days in succession; and to a vessel either run- ning up or beating down during their continuance, there is no safe guide but a con- stant use of the deep-sea lead, with a chart containing correct soundings. The fogs, during easterly gales, extend high up into the atmosphere; but those dense fogs which occur in calms, or even light winds, may sometimes be seen over from the mast-head when objects from the deck cannot be seen 50 yards distant. Winds. — The prevailing winds, during the navigable season, are either directly up or down the river; a S.E. wind in the gulf becomes E.S.E. between Anticosti and the south shore ; then E.N.E. above Point de Monts ; and N.E. .it Green Island. A W.S.W. wind, at Bic Island, will frequently become west, W.N.W., and N.W., as you run down along the south coast. South-easterly winds almost always bring rain and fogs ; while with westerly winds you generally have fine dry weather. Easterly winds pre- vail most in the spring; westerly winds, as the summer advances; and S.W. winds are the most prevalent during the summer months, both in the river and gulf. In October and November N.W. winds frequently blow with great violence, with heavy squalls, and with hail or snow. Late in the season the snow storms often continue a consider- able time, and have occasioned many losses. The MAODALSN ISXiAlf D8 are a long range of islands, forming an irregular curve, lying between latitude 47° 13' and 47° 38' north; the greatest length, from the east point to the S.W. cape of Amherst Island, is nearly 36 miles. When first made, they appear like several hilly islands, with channels between them ; but on a nearer ap- proach, they are seen to be all connected together, with the exception of Entry Island, by a double line of sand-bars and beaches, inclosing extensive lagoons. Entry Island, when first made from the eastward, appears like a double-peaked hill, sloping some- what abruptly down to perpendicular and high cliffs on either side. The central part N 2 92 Sailing Directions Jor of these islands attain an elevation of 200 to 580 feet. They contain a population of about 11,000 inhabitants, chiefly French; there are a few English and Irish families amonpt them. The principal dependance of the inhabitants is upon the cod fishery. Wood, for fuel, is scarce near the settlements, and large spars are not to be had. Ships may obtain small supplies of fresh provisions, especially from Entry Island; and water may be had from Amherst Harbour. The inhabitants are said to be remarkably healthy and cheerful. These islands possess no harbours for ships; but there are three fit for small vessels, named Amherst, Ilouse, and Grand Entry Harbours. ShoaU eastward of the Magdalens. — The principal dancers in approaching the Magdalens, from the eastward, are the Doyle Reef, Coltumine Shoalsy Alright Reef and Pearl Reef. The Doyle Reef lies S.E. J E., 6| miles from East Point, and has only 3 fathoms on it, with 12 or 13 fathoms round it; it consists of sharp rocks, and, as it seldom shows, it may be considered the worst danger on the east side of the Magdalens. The only mark for this reef IB, the north cape of the Magdalens open f of its breadth to the N.E. of the north-east cape. Columbine Rocks are a patch of rocks, with only 3 fathoms on them; they lie S.S.W. i W., 2J miles from Old Harry Head. Within them, towards Coffin Island, are numerous small shoals and patches, on some of which are only 3 feet. This part ia dangerous to approach at night, in foggy weather. Alright Reef lies S. 80° E., 9^ miles from Cape Alright, to the outer edge of the reef, which is 400 fathoms long by 300 wide; it is of wnite pointed rocks, having only 6 feet over them. To clear it on the S.W. side, keep the well-marked summit of Grindstone Island open to the south-westward of Cape Alright; and to clear the S.E. side of the reef, keep the east side of the woods of Wolf Island (seen over the bars,) open to the eastwara of Shag Island. Pearl Reef is a snudl dangerous reef of white-pointed rocks, having only 8 feet water over it. It bears E. by N., 4J miles from the N.E. part of Entry Island, and S.E. i S., 8^ miles from Cape Alright; even with a moderate dwell the sea breaks heavily upon it. Demoiselle Hill kept more than ^ a point open to the northward of Entry Island, will clear it to the northward. £ast Point. — The East Point of the Magdalen is of low sand, with several sand-hills, which extend westerly to near the N.E. cape. A long spit of sand, with from 2 to 3 fathoms ujion it, runs off S.E. ^ S., 1^ mile from the point; and the depth is only 4 to 6 fathoms, for 1^ mile farther, in the same direction. To clear this spit, in 5 or 6 fathoms, care must be taken not to bring Old Harry to bear to the southward of west. The tides set rapidly over this spit, causing a heavy breaking sea. Old Harry, the N.E. point of Coffin Island, lies W.S.W., 4^ miles from East Point. Coffin Island extends 4 miles westward from Old Harry. At the S.W. end of this island., between it and the sand-bars, is the entrance to Grand Entry Harbour; it is only 50 fathoms in breadth, and should not be attempted without a pilot. The depth at low water in the entrance is 10 feet, with 13 feet at high water, springs; it is a well-shel- tered and extensive harbour. Shag Island lies W.S.W., 6 miles from the Grand Entry ; and 6 miles farther is the south point of Alright Island, a very remarkable headland, a mile inward; it is 420 feet above the level of the sea. To the N.W. of Cape Alright, about 2f miles, is the entrance to House Harbour; it is narrow and crooked, with only 6 fathoms water in it. JSntry Island bears S. i E., 7 miles from. Cape Alright, and the channel into Plea- sant Bay leads between them, having passed between Alright Keef and Pearl Reef. Entiy Island is 480 feet above the level of the sea, and may be seen 8 or 9 leagues off, in clear weather; its red cliffs are magnificent and beautiful, rising at the N.£. point to 350 feet, and at the south point to 400 feet. The S.W. cliffs of Amherst are also steep, but of less height; and as there is no land to the southward and westward, it cannot be mistaken. Pleasant Bay lies to the N.E. of Amherst Island; it is the best roadstead in the Mag- dalens, and the only one vessels can venture to lie in, with all winds, during the sum- mer months. The best anchorage is in 4 fathoms, the rocky point off the entrance of Amherst Harbour bearing S.W. ^ W., ^ of a mile. Amherst Harbour is in the S.W. corner of Pleasant Bay; wis harbour is the easiest of access and egress of any of the 77ie Islands in the Oulf of St. Lawrence. 9t ilation of families i fishery, d. Ships nd water narkably are three hing the ght Reef, tthoms on I shows, it >nly mark i N.E. of they lie ,n Island, lis part ia f the reef, ving only lummit of r the S.E. the bars,) ily 8 feet iland, and ea breaks thward of iand-hills, om 2 to 3 only 4 to n 5 or 6 thward of ast Point* lis island; is only 50 >th at low well-shel- her is the it is 420 es, is the ater in it. nto Plea- earl Reef. lagues off, L£. point it are also stward, it the Mag- the sum- itrance of the S.W. ny of the Magdalens, with ' . advantage of a good roadstead before it ; nevertheless, the entrance is narrow and ra' ^tco crooked, with only 7 feet on the bar at low water. Shoals and dangers on the west side of the Maedalens, — These are the DeadnuaCa Islet, White Horse, Pierre de Chos Cap, and Wolf Rocks. Deadmaris Islet lies 7} miles N.W. \ W. from the western part of Amherst Island; it is very remarkable, standing alone, and is about 3 cables* in length, and I^ in breadth; about 170 feet above the sea, and has a reef extending from it, nearly ^ of a mile to- wards Amherst Island. The White Horse is a very dangerous reef; it lies N. 60° E., 7 miles from Deadman*s Islet, and 5 miles W.N.W. horn. Gull Islet ; it is small, only about a cable's length in diameter; it has 10 feet water in it, on which the sea oflen breaks. The Pierre de Oros Cap is another dangerous reef of rocks, and has 18 feet water on it, so that the sea only breaks upon it in heavy weather; it lies N.E. byE. \ E., 6 miles from the nearest part of Grindstone Island. A vessel will pass clear outside of it, and also the White Horse, if Deadman's Islet be not brought to the westward of S.W. i W. The Wolf Rocks is a rocky shoal, of 3 fathoms, lying about ^ a mile from the shore off Wolf Island, and 10 miles north-eastward of Hospitol Cape. Amherst Island, the largest and south-westernmost of the Magdalens, is 550 feet above the sea. About a mile N.W. of Amherst Harbour is a remarkable conical hill, named Demoiselle, which is 280 feet high, and serves as a mark for clearing Pearl Reef to the northward. Grindstone Island lies to the northward of Amherst Island, and is the second in 8ize» and elevated 550 feet above the sea; these islands are connected together by a double line of sand-bars; the northern shore of Grindstone Island is of red sand-stone cliffs, but Dot so high as those of Amherst Island. Wolf Island. — From Hospital Cape the sand-beaches continue in a north-easterly direction, for 10 miles, to Wolf Island, which is about f of a mile long, with low sand- stone cliffs; from Wolf Island the sand-beaches recommence and continue, with occa- sional sand-hills, 9 or 10 miles farther, to the North Cape in Grosse Island, a precipice of considerable height. The North Cape Rocks lie about 600 fathoms from tne shore off the cape. The sandy beaches and nilla continue curving to the eastward, 6 miles farther up to the East Point. The BIRD ISLANDS are small, and not far apart; they are of coarse red sand- stone, are moderately high, flat at the top, and have a white appearance; the southern one is the largest; from the east end a small ridge of rocks runs out; in the passage be- tween them there is also a rocky ledge. The edge of the bank of soundings, on which are 55 fathoms, lies 4 leagues to the eastward of these islands. In thick weather come no nearer the east side than 40 fathoms. BYRON ISLAND is about 4 miles long, in an E. by S. and W. by N. direction; it is only a mile broad, and uninhabited ; the north side is the highest, about 200 feet above the sea; on the south side are some coves, where boats may easily land with off- shore winds. The S.W. end of the island lies N.N.E., 8| miles from the North Cape, in the Magdalens; a reefrvaia off from this end \^ mile. The east end bears from the Bird Islands W. i N., 10 miles; and a reef runs off it J of a mile to the N.E.; there is also a reef runs off to the southward, from the S.W. point of the island, 1^ mile. Close to the eastward of this latter reef there is good anchorage, in 4 or 5 fathoms, or in 6 fathoms a mile from the shore. Small vessels oflen ride out heavy N.W. gales under this island, close to the reef. About midway between the Byron and Bird Island there is a rocky shoal, said to have only 4 fathoms on it in one part, but no less than 7 have been found on it; there is also a patch, of 5 fathoms, lying 3^ miles W.S.W. from Byron Island. In blowing weather both these patches should be avoided in large ships. The ISLAKB of ANTI008TI lies nearly N.W. and S.E., being 41 leagues long, and of irregular breadth ; about the middle it is 9 leagues wide, but its N.W. part is not above 9 or 10 miles broad. This island has been reported to be entirely destitute of either bays or harbours calciUated to afford shelter for large shipping; its soil is un- propitious, and its aspect forbidding. Anticosti divides the approach to the River St. Lawrence into two passages; these are called the North and South Channels: the 0^ Sailing Directions for \' former is, at its narrowest port, 5 leagues broad, and the latter 12^ leagues. The elevation is no where higher than 700 feet above the sea; the south coast is low and shelving, with reefs of fiat limestone^ which dry ot low water; the north coast, for 70 or 80 miles to the westward of the East Point, is bold, precipitous, and of considerable elevation, some of the rliil's 400 fuct high ; but the runiainder of the north coast is low. The only inhabitants > the island are the people in chai'gu of the lighthouses and pro- vision posts, and at s. Bay. ^ Provision posts have been established by the Government of Lower Canada, for the relief of the crews of vessels unfortunately wrecked upon the island; for if wrecked at the close of the navigable season, their crews would perish from want, and the severity of the climate. One of these provision posts is at Ellis Bay, 2 leagues S.E. from the west end of the island ; the second at the lighthouse on tlie S.W. Point ; a third at Jupiter River or Shallop Creek; and a fourth at Heath Point. Direction boards have been placed at different parts of the island, near the beach, in order to assist iiersons who may have the misfortune to be wrecked, in finding the provision posts above named. Ihese boards are nailed to trees with their branches cut off, to render the writing visible. They were placed as follows: — Ist, On the west point of the island; 2nd, 4 leagues south-eastward of Ellis Bay; 3rd, 10 leagues west- ward of Jupiter River; 4th, 7 leagues eastward of Jupiter River. They were for- merly erected where the lighthouses now are placed. LioHTHocsES. — There ore now two excellent lights established on the island of Anticosti. The S.W. Point lighthouse is built on the extremity of the point. The tower is of the usual conical form, 75 feet high. The light, which is bright, revolves every minute, and can be seen from N.N.W. round by west to S.S.E. ^ E. The lantern is elevated 100 feet above the sea at high water, and can be seen 15 miles from the deck, and 19^ miles at an elevation of 50 feet. To the lighthouse is attached a provision post, which forms a conspicuous land-mark. Heath Point lighthouse is of the same form, dimensions, and colour as that on the S.W. point of the island. It shows a bright fixed light from W.N.W. to N.E. by N. The lantern is elevated 100 feet above the sea. This light is visible 5 or 6 leagues in clear weather, and was first lighted in October 1848. East Cape is in latitude 49° 8' north, and longitude 61° 32' west. It is a perpen- dicular cliff, 100 feet high. South-westward of this, distant 3^ miles, is Heath Point, the low point on which the lighthouse stands. Between the two points is Wreck Bay, affording no anchorage. Heath Point Reef. — This is a dangerous reef running out 2 miles in an E.S.E. direc- tion to 5 fathoms, all large stones; 3 miles from the point are 7 fathoms. To avoid the foul ground, come not nearer to the east side of the point than 20 fathoms; to the south- westward of the point the shoal water only extends off | of a mile. A little farther to the westward is one of the best open anchorages on this side of the island. Anchor in 10 fathoms, with the lighthouse E. by N., and the Cormorant Point W.N.W., bottom sand and mud, and you will be nearly 2 miles from the shore. During westerly winds it would be dangerous to stand in too near the east side of Heath Point, for the winds coming along the land on each side of the island, some- times do not meet until several miles to the eastward of the point ; between them you will be becalmed, and a strong current round the point might set you upon the reef. Cormorant Point lies W. by N., 6 miles from Heath Point; and W.N.W., 16A miles farther, is the South Point: tne coast between is low. South Point Reef runs off to the southward, 1^ mile, on which the sea generally breaks. Heath Point lighthouse and Cormorant Point in one, E. by S., clears this reef full 2 miles. South Point is about 60 feet high — a sandy clay cliff. ^i^,. . ,,. From South Point to the lighthouse on the S.W. Point, the distance is 56 miles, and the land has much the same appearance all the way. In this space ai*e the Jupiter River or Shallop Creek, Pavilion River, and Salt-Lake River and Bay. Jupiter River lies 13 miles N.W. of South Point. The houses of the provision post are here. Pavilion River lies 10 miles from Jupiter River; the coast is all low, but may be approached safely by the deejj-sea lead, the reefs extending no where more TJic Islands in the Qulf of St. Lawronac. 95 than a mile off. Salt-Lake River and Ray lie 21 miles north-westward of Pavilion Kiver; between which the const is higher and bolder all the way to the S.W. Point than on any other part, and shoiild, in dark, foggy weather, be apnroached with cau- tion. When far enough to the westward, tack, at night, with the licnt bearing N.N.W. Salt-Lake Bay has fine sandy beaches, enclosing lagoons, into which the tide Bows. The S.W. Point, on which the lighthouse stands (before described), lies 1 1 miles north-westward of Salt-Lake Bay. It is a low projecting point of limestone, and has a cove on its north side, forming it into a small peninsula. A reef extends from the Eoint I of a mile in a west and S.W. direction ; boats can land on the south side on the caches, as well as in the cove on the north side ; a vessel may anchor, in case of necessity, to the northward of the lighthouse, in 12 or 13 fathoms, sand and gravel, the extremity of the point S.S.W. J W., J of o mile ; but this cannot be recommended as a roadstead, only with off-shore winds. Between the S.W. Point and Ellis Bay there is no safe anchorage ; and the reefs of flat limestone run off in most places a full mile, and have often 10 or 12 fathou)s water close to them. Observation River is the largest stream on the island; its entrance is 5 J miles north- ward of S.W. Point, but it is mostly barred up with sand. There are some high sandy cliffs, very conspicuous, on the north side of this river. St. Mary's Cliffs lie 16 miles north-westward of Observation River; they are of sand, and not so high as the former. When in sight of the light, a vessel should tack, at night, when it bears S.S.E. J E. Bccscie River is a small stream at the head of a cove, affording shelter for boats. rts entrance is 7 miles north-westward of St. Mary's Cliffs. Ellis Bat is the only good anchorage in the island ; it runs in between Cape Eagle and Cape Henry. A reef of flat limestone runs off a mile south-westward from Cape ll(!nry; and another reef runs off J of a mile to the westward from Cape Eagle: the entrance between them is 600 fathoms, from 3 fathoms on each side. Both the reefs show themselves by a line of breakers. In approaching this bay from the westward, run down along the reefs of Cape Henry in 10 fathoms, until the west side of the White Cliff, which is on the east side of the bay, comes on with the east side of the westernmost of two remarkable hills, back in the country, bearing N.E f N., then haul up with these marks on, which will lead you into smooth water, close under Cape Henry Reef, in 3^ fathoms. Continue running on until Gamache House bears N. by E., then haul up for it, and anchor in 3 fathoms, muddy bottom, about ^ a mile from the flats at the head of the bay, and 300 fathoms from those on either side. In approaching the bay from the eastward, with an easterly wind, keep along Cape Eagle Reef, in no less than 7 fathoms, till the east side of the White Cliff comes on with the east side of the same hill, as before; then haul up till the houses bear N. by E., and proceed as before. It is high water at Cape Henry, full and change, at Ih. 43m.; spring-tides rise about 7 feet, neaps 4 feet. Ellis Bay may be readily known by Cape Henry, which is a bluff point, and the opening to the southward snows distinctly. West Point is low and wooded, in latitude 49° 52' north, and longitude 64" 35' west; the reefs off the west point do not extend above a mile from shore. Between West Point and Cape Henry the reefs run off 1^ mile; this part should be approached with caution, by keeping the lead going. North Coast of Anticosti. — From the West Point to North Point the coast Is low, with reefs running off about a mile; come no nearer this part than 25 fathoms. From North Point to lugh Cliff, the distance is 13 miles; it is tow and wooded. High Cliff may be easily known by being the only one on the island that has not its base washed by the sea. White North Cliff lies 26 miles south-eastward of High Cliff; this part of the coast is dangerous, for at about J of the distance from High Cliff the reefs extend full 2 miles from the land, and continue so for some distance. On approaching White North Cliff they only reach about i a mile from the shore. White North Cliff may be seen 6 or 7 leagues. Charlton Point lies 10 miles south-eastward of White North Cliff; under this point vessels may anchor in fine weather, and procure wood and water. 96 Sailing Directions from Cape Obaervation lica 10 miles south-eastward of Charlton Point; this cape is a high, bold, rumarkablo headland. Bear Head lies \2\ miloH Houth-ciistward of Cape Obsur- vation, between which are hi)(h greyish cliffs. Bear Head in similar to Caix) Observa- tion, being 400 feet high; they may easily be distinguished by the latter being the westernmost high land; this part is l>old, having 100 fathoms within 3 miles ot' the land. Dear Day is the best anchorage on the north side of Anticosti ; it has a moderate depth of water, and good holding ground; it is situated between Bear Head and Cope llobcrt, which lies 6 miles S.S.E. ^ E. from it. The best anchorage is in 13 fathoms, with Bear Head N. by W. ^ W. and Cape Robert S.E. \ S.; both the capes are high cliffs. Table Head lies 19 miles south-eastward of Cape llobcrt; the coast is broken into small bays, which afford no anchorage. Table Head is remarkable by the hill, from which it derives its name, that rises immediately from the summit of the cliffs. Fox Point lies 4 miles farther to the S.E., and is much lower Uian Table Head. Fox Bay is less than 2 miles southward of the point, and a mile wide, and deep; there is a stream and lake at its head. There is a house and store at the N.W. part of the head of the bay: here the Crani'ctM was wrecked in November 1828, when tnu crew and passengers all perished for want of food before the following spring. Reef Point is the southern point of Fox Bay, from which a re«/runs out 1^ mile, having only a few feet over it, with 10 fathoms close to it. Between Fox Bay and East Cape the limestone cliffs are 100 feet high, bold, and free from danger, x ou may anchor at the distance of a mile fVom the shore, between Cape Sandtop and the East Cape, in 16 to 20 fathoms, fine sand. This island has hitherto been considered dangerous to vessels bound to Quebec ; but, with care, it will not be found so, for so soon as you can see the land, you may advance towards, and sail freely along it ; by which you will always get faster to the westward with foul winds, than you can do in the omng. There can be no danger of getting embayed, and the floods are regular near the island. Mr. Lambley, in a fiist-sailing schooner, frequently laid-to durmg the night with westerly winds, and always found himself to windward of the place in the morning; of course, ships beating in will always gain ground. The NORTH, ob CANADIAN CHANNEL, is bounded on the southward by the island of Anticosti, and on the northward by the main land ; here, in about the longi- tude of 64° 23' west, is the River St. John ; the land to the eastward of which, together with the adjacent islands, including Anticosti, is under tlie Government of Newfound- land; that to the westward of that river is under the Government of Quebec. To the eastward of St. John's River are the Mingan Islands ; these are a numerous cluster of islands lying off the main, with passages between, and places of good anchorage ; the westernmost is named Mingan Island, and bears from the western point of Anticosti N.E. by E. } E., distant 8 leagues; the Mingan settlements He to the E.N.-Eastward of the island, distant about 7 or 8 miles. The harbour is formed between Harbour Island and the main \ here vessels may ride securely in all weathers : the ground is good, and the anchorage in fV. ja 5 to 10 fathoms, with plenty of cod fish, salmon, and seals. The soil surrounding the settlement is fertile, the land, level, and a profitable trade is carried ou with the Indians. ., ,, .• n .,,!• , ir,, ■,, ■ ., * .-z,^ . THE NORTH COAST OF THE GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE. i I FROM CAPE WHITTLE TO THE RIVER ST. JOHN, INCLUDING ' TKE MINGAN ISLANDS. Rkmabks. — From Cape V/lutTle, th'' Test p(i";t of Lake Island, the coast runs W.N.W., nearly 63 miles. F- -m th. •.•upe to Kcffashka River, the coast is of granite, which rises into steep hills and ridges. «yhich are 8''ldom higher than 200 feet; this part of the coast is studded with iriumeijble rocks, islets, and small islands, some of wnich are 5 miles from the main land; these islands, as well as the main, are bare of wood. From Kegashka to Natashquan Point, a distance of 4^ leagues, the cliffs saQ all sandy, covered with spruce trees, and fronted by fine sandy beaches. - " " ' Capo Whittle 'o the Riter St. John. if Thii coMt, when Heeii fVom the di»tnnce, ia nil bo much alike, that It \» almoat irn- possible to distinguish one part from niinthur ; it is only when you approach within 3 or 4 miles of the outer rocks, its broken dangerous nature becomes apparent. The outer rocks oflf this part of the coast u •* so bold, that there is no warning by the hand-lead, bat there are soundings with the lU pp-scH lead in moderate but irregular depths oiTi y part of the coast; these, with tUu a><-*iiitance of the chai*t, and due at* tention to tlie lead, are sufficient to warn i vcDsel of her lippi-ooch towai'd danger at night, or iir foggy weather. Whittle llocha. — These are a number of rocks, ahnvf '"d undir water, lying south- westward of the cape, the outermost of which are half-ude rock«, and are 2} miles fi'on the cai>e, and callea the Whittle Rocks. Wolf Island lies N.W. by W. ^ W., 6i miles from Cape Whittle; it my b§ readily known by being larger and higher than tne other islands in its vicinity, b«/ing 150 feet high, ana making in two hills. Wolf Ba^ lies between the islaii and the ( vne; it runs in 6 or 7 milo!^, and has sufficient water in it; but a number of )oint of the main land on the N.W. side of the bay; continue running on this m. rk, eaving several rocks, which lie 600 fathoms from the eoat side of Audubon, on your port hand, and passing them, haul to the novthw.ird a little, so an to leave the Emery Kocks on the starboai'd; their outer points lie N.N.E. } E., 3 miles from the Outer Islet : when up to them, the^ay is open before you, and clear of danger; the farther you go in the better the gronud, and less sea with S.W. winds. If you run into Tertiary Shell Bay, there la nothing in the way excepting a small ri>ci, abr) ve water, ^ of h mile within the entrance, whicli must be left on your starboard hand ; it is quite bold ; within you will lie land-locked, in 5 to 1 1 fathoms, mud. At ^ a mile within the entrance it is only 120 fathoms wide; but it is wider farther in. When running for the basin, keop the N.W. shore on board, leaving Tertiary Shell Bay, and rocks north of it, to the eastward, until you are within ^ a mile of the island at the head of the b«y ; you uiuiit then steer over to the eastward, towards the island, to avoid a shotU ot M/ulder ntones extending 200 fathoms from the west side of the bay, leaving a deep channel between it and the island, 100 fathoms wide; leave the island about 50 fathoms to the eaNtwaid of you, and, as you pass through, you will deepen your water from 9 to 19 fathoms; as soon as you are past the inner end of the island, you must haul h- tl-'*' N.W., into tkm mouth of a small bay, and anchor, in 8 fathoms, mud. On the east side of the entrance of the river there is a house occupied by the fur traders. Olomanosheebo River lies 4 leagiio# westward of Coacoacho; this is a considerable river, falling 20 feet, over granite, into the head of a bay 4 miles deep; it is so shallow [N. America — Part I.] O 00 Sailing Directions from that boats can hardly enter at low water; the coast is studded with innumerable islands. Near the falls, on the east side, is a trading post. Trehle Islet and Loon Rock. — The latter lies 6 miles to the westward of the above river; it can always be seen, and lies 3 miles from the main land. Wash-shecootai Bay lies 10 miles to the westward of Olomanosheebo, is 2 J miles wide, and has off its entrance several small rocky ledges, which makes its entrance very diffi- cult. Up this river, on the east side, there is one of the Hudson Bay Company's trading posts. About 4 J miles farther westward is the entrance to Musquarro River, where there is another of the Hudson Bay Company's trading and fishing posts; the entrance is intricate and dangerous, and only fit for boats ; it may be known by some houses on the east side of the entrance. Curlew Point is about 5 miles westward of the Musquarro River, and is the east point of Regashka Bay. , -^- , Regashka Bay lies between Curlew and Regashka Points; it is 3 miles wide, and IJ mile deep. This is a wild place, t> small islets being too far apart to afford any shel- ter. It is oniy in *''e N.W. corner i the bay, behind Regashka Point, that a vessel can be sheltered from aoutherly winds ; there is room there for several small schooners, which may shelter themselves during the summer months. Wood and water may be had on the western part of the bay. Kegashka Bay has this advantage : there are no ledges or other dangers off its entrance. At 3 miles to the westward of this bay is the Karagashka River, having falls 40 feet high; but they cannot be seen from the sea : here is another fishing station of the Hudson Bay Company ; it only affords shelter for boats. At 2^ miles farther westward, fine sandy beaches, m front of sand-hills, covered with spruce trees, commence, and continue to Natashquan Point, a distance of 4|^ leagues. If ATASBQUAiM POINT. — This remarkable sandy point is the southernmost point on the north side of the gulf, eastward of the Seven Islands, and bears from the east point of Anticosti N.N.E., distant 57 miles; and fiom Natashquan Point, Colins Shoal, the outer danger off St. Genevieve Island, bears N.W. by W., 52 miles. About 1 ^ mile from the mouth of Long River, and 11 miles eastward of Natashquan Point, there is a shoal, on which the sea breaks, which has not been examined ; by not going nearer the shore than 17 fathoms, you will avoid it. At 1^ mile S.W. from Natashquan Point, there is a small cod bank of 4^ fathoms; and between Musquarro and Natashquan, at from 6 to 11 miles from the land, are several banks of sarid, gravel, and shells, of 24 to 40 fathoms, having upwards of 50 fathoms between them and the land. Abundance of cod fish are caught on these banks by the American fishing schooners. Natashquan River, the mouth of which is about a mile wide, enters i-i-e sea between two sandy points, about 3 miles north-westward from the south extremity of the point ; in the middle of the entrance is a low sandy island, having a narrow channel on each side of it; in the southern are from 9 to 11 feet at high water. Small schooners enter and lie where the Hudson Bay Company's houses are, on the south side within the entrance. It discharges a great body of water in the spring of the year, and makes the surface of the sea fresh for several miles around. They catch immense quantities of cod fish here in the early part of the spring. Little Natashquan Harbour, lying 3j miles N.N.E. from the river, formed by nu- merous rocks and islets, is only fit for small schooners under 100 tons. It is a con- venient place for the fishing vessels,* and is resorted to principally by the Americans ; its entrances are between reefs only 90 fathoms wide, and a pilot is necessary for those I * " They fish in boats, off the entrance of tlic Hivcr Natashquan, about 5 miles from the harbour. These boats are like the light whale-boats: each have one peculiar sail, something like a shoulder-of-mutton sail in shape, hut having a very short gaff and a boom like a schooner's mainsail; it also runs up and down the long slender mast with hoops. There is a small block at the mast-head, which slips on aiul (;ff with a strap, like that used for the head of a sprit: through this a single rope, as Imulyards, leads to the stern; another single rope is attached to the boom, as a sheet. There is no other rigging. The lightness and simplicity of this rig is w«.Il Kuitcd to the employment. " After the month of June the bait (capelins) leave this place, and, I suppose, the cod-fish follow their food. The fishermen follow the fish, and proceed more to the north-eastward, their next fishing-place being in small harbours, near Bradore Bay." — (Bayfield's Labrador.) — iVau^ ilfo^jT., vol. xvii., p. 665. , , ..-, Cape Whittle to the River St. John. /■ 99 unacquainted. There are thousands of rocks and small granite islands along this coast, and many anchorages like this, which no chart could show the way into. With a clear sky and a smooth sea, when the bottom can be seen in' 3 fathoms, with a handy, quick- working vessel, and a bright look-out, you may finu your way to such places, the exist- ence of which is always shown by crosses, or piles of stones, or drift-wood upon the islets; these are placed as guides for the fishermen. It is high water off this harbour at lib. Spring-tides rise 5 feet, neaps 3 feet. The coast between Natoshquan Point at St. Genevieve is low near the sea, rising a short distance back into mounds and ridges, no where exceeding 400 feet in height. There is a sandy tract of coast between Agwanus and Nabesippi Rivers ; the sandy tracts are always thickly wooded with spruce-trees. There are numerous coves and email bays for boats. The small bare islets are innumerable, but they do not extend above 2 miles from the main laud, and should not be approached within 20 fathoms. The current along this shore from the westward seldom exceeds ^ a knot. Between Natashquan and Grenevieve there is no safe harbour for shipping; but there are several rivers and small bays (as shown on the chart\ where boats, and even small schooners, might find shelter occasionally. The Hudson s Bay Company have also two or three settlements on this part of the coast. The MIirOAN ISIiANSS are a long chain of islands running nearly parallel with the coast, and lying between longitude 63° 6' and 64*^ 16' west. The general character of these islands is low, no where exceeding 300 feet in height. They possess very little soil, yet are thickly wooded on the side towards the mam land; but towards the sea, barren tracts often occur. There are 29 islands in all, none of which are inhabited. Wood and water may be obtained at all the principal islands. Clearwater Point, in longitude 63° 30' west, projects out to the southward so far as to divide these islands into two divisions. n. ; ;, , •:;'•.;-', ','.<'..!' Mount St. John, which is 1416 feet high, is the highest part of the main land in this neighbourhood ; it lies northward of the westermost Mingan Islands. There are other hills farther eastward, about 1000 feet in height; these are opposite Quarry Island: farther eastward the main land is low. The tides among these islands seldom exceed a knot, except in very narrow channels. St. Genevieve Island is the easternmost of the Mingan Islands, and is about 5 miles in circumference ; the N.E. point is bluff, and about 200 feet high. Mount St. Gene- vieve lies on the main, about 2^ miles northward of the island; it is about 300 feet in height. In approaching this island there are two patches of rocks to be avoided, called the Saints and Boioen Mocks. The Saints are two low bare rocks, lying i, a mile to the southward of the island, having a channel, of 5 fathoms, foul ground, between. The Bowen Rocks lie ^ of a mile apart: the N.W. Bowen has only 3 feet on it, and lies E.S.E. ^ E., distant ]| mile from the eastern Saint; the S.E. Bowen has 6 feet water over it, and lies ^ of a mile S.E. ^ S. from the N.W. Bowen. The soundings near these rocks are very irregular — from 6 fathoms, rock, to 43 fathoms, sand, sometimes in a single cast of the lead. These danbout 2 ingers lie ailes from the islands, and should be carefully avoided. Collins Shoal is a smaWpatch of rocks, having 15 feet water over them; they lie 2^ miles south from the S.E. point of Hunting Island. The marks on this dangerous shoal are, the east point of Genevieve just open to the eastward of the western Saints N. 38° E., and the north point of Wood Island the niaui or the islands; and wood may be had on the main. The tides here are very weak, spring-tides, and seldom amount to one knot. CnARLGS Island lies next to the westward of Hunting Island; its S.E. point bears N.W. by W., about 2| miles from Gun Island; it is about 3 miles long, and IJ mile wide, bold, and free irom shoals; its elevation is about 200 feet. Puffins Bay is the space between Hunting and Charles Islands. CHARLES HARBOUR lies between the main land and the island, and though narrow, it is very secure; the entrances are only 80 fathoms wide; within the harbour is anchorage, in from 4 to 6^ fathoms, mud. To enter the harbonr from the eastward, bring the N.E. end of Charles Island, which is high and cliffy, to bear N.W.; then steer for it, giving it a berth of 100 to 180 fathoms, as you round it to the westward into the harbour. To enter the harbour from the westward, by Trilobite Bay, give the N.W. point of Charles Island a berth of 60 to 240 fathoms, as you haul round it to the S.E. by E. into the harbour. The tides, with strong winds, will sometimes run 2 knots in the entrances to the harbour, but in the streams they are only weak. Whale Island lies on the west side of Trilobite Bay ; it is bold-to, and has excellent anchorage to the eastward of it, sheltered from all but southerly winds; the only danger to be avoided in working into Trilobite Bay, is a reef off Ammonite Point, which in- cludes a small islet, and extends ^ a mile off shore. CLEARWATER POINT lies 2^ miles to the westward of Whale Island, and about 2 miles from Ammonite Point ; it is low, but the shoal water off it only extends I Cape WIdttle to the River St. John. 101 /■ about \oi A mile to the southward. This point, projecting so far to the southward, divides the range of the Mingau Islands into two parts. A rocky shoal, of 3 fathoms, lies west, H mile from the point; and there are three other shoals, of 2 to 3 fathoms, lying to 'the northward of the former, nearly mid- way between Sea Cow Island south end and Clearwater Point, the westernmost rock being 2 miles from the point. To pass outside, or to the soutlnvard of tl'ese shoals, keep the south point oi Gull and Freight Islands in one, bearing N.VV. by W. ; this clears them full ^ a mile. Sea Cov3 Island \\q9 3^ miles W.N'.W. of Clearwater Point, having a good channel between it and the Clearwater Rocks; to the westv/.ird of Sua Cow Island lies "Walrus and Green Islands; these latter islands are small; but there is a clear passage between them, called Walrus Channel. Gull Island lies a mile W. J S. from Green Inland; both the latter are covered with grass; but it is only ^ a mile S.W. from the S.E. point of Es(ptimaux Island, having no passage between. The south end of Gull Island is bold-to within 2 cables' length. ESQUIMAUX ISLAND is 2| miles long, and 1| mile wide, about 200 or 250 feet in height on the iiorth side. From its S.W. point a shoal runs out towards Freight Island, which also has a shoal off it, stretching towards the latter, narrowing the chan- nel leading to Esquimaux Harbour to about 3^ cables' length. Freight l!iimaux Island, and haul round it to the southward into the harbour. Observe, that the marks to clear the shoals and islets westward of Point aux Morts, are the north and N.E. points of Esi^uimaux Island in one, bearing S.E. J E.; if you open these marks before you are abreast of Quin, you will be ashore. Good water may be had from the river near the Esquimaux Point, as well as from the streams on tlie island. The tides running through Es(|uimaux Harbour seldom exceed a knot; the llood setting in from the eastward, and the ebb the contrary. 102 Sailing Directions from h n ii Qvnrry Itland lies about 3^ cables' length to tbe westward of Niapisca Island, baving no safe passage between; it is about 2j^ miles in length, and 200 feet in height. Some reefs run off from the south side of the island nearly A a mile. Quarry Cove lies on the north side of the island, about ^ from the east end. This is a snug little land-locked harbour; when entering, keep nearest the west side, and anchor near the middle, in 9 or 10 fathoms. Thb cove runs in about 4 cables' length; and you may obtain good water ^:j[ from a small stream in the S.W. comer. '^' Large Island lies 400 fathoms to the westward of Quarry Island, having a clear navi- gable channel, of about 3^ cables* length between them. This island is 11 miles in cir- cumference, thickly wooded, and the highest part about 200 feet above the sea. Reefs run off from the south and S.W. points nearly | of a mile. The Middle Reef a paT-i of which is always above water; this part is surrounded by a shoal ^ a mile Ic ig, m a N.E. by N, direction, and ^ of a mile wide, and lies a mile south-eastward ( Outer Birch Island. Large Channel, lying between Middle Reef and Large Island, is If mile wide, having 40 to 50 fathoms in the middle. This is the best channel when bound to Min- gan Harbour with an easterly wind; the only thing to be guarded against is the reefs that extend 2 or 3 cables' length off the western shore of Large Island, as far in as the flower-pot columns ; the island then becomes bold. The Middle Reef may be approached to 13 fathoms; when farther in the Birch Island forms the west side of the channel. Middle Reef Channel, between the Outer Birch Island and Middle Reef, is a mile wide, with deep-water in it; the shoals, off the south point of the Outer Birch, only reach off about 1^ cable's length. The Birch Islands lie 2 miles to the westward of the north end of Large Island, and named the Outer and Inner Birch Islands ; the latter is the largest of the two. The channel between the islands is about 3 cables' length in width, sSlfoid ground, and not recommended; these islands are 300 feet high. The Outer Birch Island has a rce/" run- ning off its western side full i a mile. Off the N.W. point of the Inner Birch Island, which is low, an extensive reef rana off nearly a mile; about ^ a mile S.W. of this point lies a remarkable rock, called the Htdk Rock, resembling the hidl of a wrecked vessel ; the reef runs south-westward, about 3 cables' length from the rock. .-> MiNGAN Island, which lies 3{ miles westward cf Inner Birch Island, is 2 miles long, in a N.N.E. direction, and nearly a mile broad; bare of trees, and about 100 feet m height; the east side is bold; but the reefs run off from the S.W. point 600 fathoms, and from the south point 300 fathoms. Mingan Patch. — ^ITiis is a rocky patch, of 9 fathoms, on which there is a heavy swell at times ; it lies 3^ miles S.W. ^ S. from the south point of Mingan Island, and with the south point of the Outer Birch on with the north point of Large Island. The Paroquet Islets are four small islets, low, and bare of trees; these are the westernmost of the Mingan Group. The easternmost of these islets lies 2 miles N.W.by W. from the centre of Mingan Island; a rce/runs out S.S.W. from them f of a mile; and another reef, from their northern end, runs off ^ of a mile. The north- westernmost islet is the highest, and has shoal water off it, both to the eastward and westward, full \ of a mile; you may go to the northward of it within 2 cables' length, in 14 or 15 fathoms. The raroquet Channel is 1^ mile wide, with deep wat'>r in the middle. Both flood and ebb set out through it; the flood sets to the S.W., and the ebb to the southward; The Mingan Channel is safe throughout ; all the islands are bold, and free from dan- ger on their north sides. .,......,. MINGAN HARBOUR lies between Harbour Island (which is N.N.E. of Birch Islands), and the main land, which latter is low, and has a fine sandy beach ; but the island is about 100 feet in height, and bold towards the harbour; on the south side it is shelving and shoal ^ of a mile from shore. The length of tbe island is about 2 miles, its breadth about J a mile; it is thickly wooded, and has a ree/" off both the east and west ends, to the distance of 240 fathoms. The harbour is narrow, and well sheltered ; the anchorage within it is about a mile long, and 270 fathoms wide, with plenty of water for the largest ships ; bottoia fine sand. Northward of the east end of the island lies the mouth of Mingan River, off which there is a shoal extending 700 fathoms out from the entrance; this shoal dries at low water, and shelters the harbour from easterly winds. \ Cape North to the Out of Canso. 103 1, having t. Some e lies on d -locked e, in 9 or od water ear navi- es in cir- la. Reefs f, a pari lug, in a ( Outer lile wide, [ to Min- the reefs in as the ►proached ! channel, nile wide, r reach off )land, and wo. The i, and not ree/'run- ch Island, this point ed vessel ; iles long, H) feet in fathoms. This harbour, like the Esquimaux Harbour, has this advantage, that vessels can enter or leave it with either easterly or westerly winds. The western entrance is 170 fathoms wide, and the eastern entrance, between the above sandy shoal and the island, 200 fathoms. ..^.^^'j ,„..;„,j| ■„, ,,^.,„ rr ^,r ^.,{j „t,f,iA To enter the harhour from the eastward^ bring the north or inner side of the har- hour to bear N.W. ; the houses of the Hudson Bay Company ousht to appear then full their own breadth open to the northward of the island; keep the houses thus open, and steer for them, leavins the east end of the island 150 fathoms on your port hand, or southward of you, taking care to keep the south side of the sandy point of the main, which fornu the western entrance of the harbour, shut in behind the north side of the island; for when they are in one vou will Xk, aground on the sandy shoal off Mingan River; when past the east end of toe island, run along its north side, at the distance of a cable's length, and anchor, near the centre of the harbour, in 9 to 13 fathoms. When comity in hy the western entrance, run in towards the sandy beach of the main land, at the distance of | of a mile to the westward of the island, until the sandy point of the main, which forms the west end of the harbour, comes in one with the face of the clay cliffs to the eastward of the Company's houses, bearing E. by S., or in 11 fathoms water; with this mark on, run in along the beach, giving the above sandy point a berih of ^ a cable in passing; then choose your anchoring oertn, as before. High water at Mingan Harbour at Ih. 7m. Montange Island lies on the north side of the Mingan Island, opposite to Quarry Island; and 1^ mile farther eastward is Moniac Island. These islands lie | of a mile from the shore, having numerous islets between them; the shoals between the islands, all the way to the main, dry at low water; but they only extend about 3 cables* length to the southward of the islands, with irregular soundings of 4 to 8 fathoms a mile off; therefore, when beating through, keep within 1^ mile of the north side of the outer islr '■'' standing no farther northward than 10 fathoms. ^' ■•'' - LoTtg Point lies 5 miles to the westward of Harbour Island, between which there are no dangers. From Long Point a broad beach, of fine sand, reaches to the River St. John, a distance of 7 miles ; without this beach, shoal water extends off all the way for full J of a mile. ,,(j,} '.,:, ..L;,. /.r V ./, ..., . ■..,.-■. <- r. ;: fu; }{ ^■/AV^r.X-' ^ :/J4| /! '/ i: ivy swell und with are the 2 miles them f of le north- ward and length, t-jr in the and the iS from dan- of Birch i but the th side it t 2 miles, t and west ;ered; the water for id lies the t from the rly winds. . VII.— THE EASTERN COAST OF CAPE BRETON ISLAND, FROM CAPE NORTH, SOUTHWARD, TO THE GUT OP CANSO; ALSO, . » /wT* fvtit'f: .1 THE SOUTH COAST OF THE GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE, FROM CAPE NORTH TO POINT ESCUMENAC. , ' t - ' ' ' " -^ --'^ " ■ '.' ,-v Variation 22" to 20" west. Remarks on the Eastebn Coast of Cape Bbston Islanp. — This part of the coast is commonly made by vessels from Europe, when bound through the Gut of Canso, or to ports in Nova Scotia. It appears on the shore, and to some distance up che I country, barren and rocky; and the tops of the hills being much alike, having nothing T remarkable to distinguish them. The lighthouse and town of Louisbourg serve, however, to point out that part of the island on which they stand. There is now a lighthouse on the east point of Scatari Island, painted white; this exhibits a revolving light, visible I minute and invisible i a minute. There is also a lighthouse on Flat Island, upon the eastern side of the entrance to Sydney; this shows a fixed light, 160 feet above the sea. This latter lighthouse will easily be distinguished from the one on Scatari Island, by its being painted vertically red-and-white. Louisbourg lighthouse stands on the eastern side of the entrance of the harbour; and in order to distinguish it from'the other lighthouses, and to render it conspicuous when tiie back 104 I' I V I Sailing Directions from rith snow, it is built square, painted white, with vertical black stripes 'he coast continues rocky on the shore, with a few banks of red earth. land is covered wit on either side. The which appear less barren. Along the N.E. coast of Breton Island, from Cape North to Cape Ensum^, the water is deep, except near the shore. From Cape Eusume to Port Dauphin is high land; but from Port Dauphin to Scatari Island it becomes rather low, and a vessel may stand in shore, in clear weather, to 15 or 10 fathoms. Blancherotte, or White Cuff. — On the south-eastern coast of Breton is a remarkable cliff of whitish earth, in latitude 45° 39' north, and longitude 60° 25' west. At 4 miles to the westward is a small woody island, lying upwards of a mile from shore, and off the little harbour of Esprit. The land from hence to Madame Island is generally low ; it presents several banks of bright-red earth, with beaches between them. Albion Cliff, on the south side of Madame, is rocky, remarkably high and pre- cipitous. The interior of the island is but little known. Great caution ought to be exercised at all times when approachinir this island in any direction, as the currents set in various directions near tne North tJape, according to the winds at sea. BRETON ISLAND.— From the North Cape the land runs in a S.W. ^ S. direc- tion, 6 miles, to Ashpee Harbour, where vessels can find shelter, and a settlement is now formed. There is good anchorage behind the island, where boats om land, and water and provisions be obtained. For the want of a knowledge of such an establish- ment, many have been obliged to endure both hunger and fatigue unrelieved. Aralsow Cove lies 2 miles to the southward of Ashpee; the coast then turns to the eastward, 2 miles, to Cape Egmont, and from thence S.S.W., 11 miles, to Naganish Island, between which and Cape Ensume a good bay is formed, full 2^ miles deep, with 4 to 9 fathoms in it; and on the south side of Cape Ensume is another deep bay, nearly as large as the former, with 7 to 10 fathoms in it: but they are both open to easterly winds. From Cape Ensume to Black Point the course is S.W. by S., 20 miles. Black Point forms the western, and Siboux Islands the eastern sida of St. Ann's Harbour. ST. ANNE'S HARBOUR, situate on the N.E. side of the island, was called by the French, when in their possession, Port Dauphin, and is a very safe and spacious harbour. It has but a narrow entrance, and cames 4^ fathoms at low water, until you join the beach. When in mid-channel you will have 9 to 10 fathoms, and in the harbour from 5 to ^0 fathoms, muddy bottom. On the u Sailing Directions from Observat-'ons. — Messrs. DufTus's store is a fishing establishment. Mr. Duifus's house is on Kent Island, formerly called Mutton Island. The aforesaid Thomas Kelly piloted the ship Pittf of St. Kitt's, burthen nearly 400 tons, laden with timber, and drawing about 18 feet of water, safely through the foregoing described channel, from Kent Harbour. SYDNEY HARBOUR, formerly called Spanish River, the entrance to which lies 4 leagues S.E. of that of St. Anne, is -.nother excellent harbour, having a safe and secure entrance, with soundings, regular from sea, into 5 fathoms. This place abounds with excellent coal. Sydney is the capital of Breton Island; it is a free port, and the residence of the Erincipal officers of the island. Here are the courts of justice, and other public offices; arracks, &c. It is a thriving place, and an extensive coal trade is carried on ; and the land in the vicinity well cultivated. In going in, give the two points of the entrance a berth of 2 or 3 cables' lengths, ap- proaching no nearer than 6 or 5 fathoms. The soundings are regular to each shore to 5 and 4 fathoms. In the inner part of the entrance. Beach Point and Ledge, on the south side, are steep-to; but Sydney Flats, on the opposite side, are regular to 4 fathoms. When past the Beach Point, you may run up the river Dartmouth to the S.W., and come to anchor in any depth you please, to 5 and 10 fathoms, a fine muddy bottom. Here you may wood and water, at the creek or spring, close to the Governor's house. The water is remarkably pure. This harbour is capable of containing the whole navy of Great Britain. On Flat Point, without the east side of the entrance, a lighthouse is erected in latitude 46° 16' 21" north, and longitude 60" 8' 0" west; it is an octagonal tower of wood, 90 feet high, painted vertically red-and-white; and exhibits a brUliantfixed light, at 160 feet above the level of the sea, visible 5 leagues off, in clear weather. Fish of various kinds, cod, haddock, &c., are caught on the coast in great abundance. The tide in the harbour flow? at 9h., and rises 6 feet. West of Sydney Harbour are Indian Bay and Windham River, both places of an- chorage, and fit iov vessels to run into, although little frequented at present; beyond these IS Morien, or Cow Bay, at the northern point of which is Flint Island; there is a passage between this ipland and the main^ with 14 fathoms water, but this should be adopted with the greatest caution, on account of the numerous rocks under water that are scattered about. This bay is open to the north-eastward, and its farther end is encumbered with an extensive shallow flat, which dries at low water. Mire Bay is to the southward, and its entrance is bounded by Cape Morien and the island of Scatary, or Scatari; the bay is wide, and runs in 3 leagues, branching off at its upper part into two rivers; there is deep water within it, from 20 to 6 fathoms, and clear from dangers, but it affords no shelter for shipping. SCATARI ISLAND lies in about the latitude of 46° north; its length E. and W. is nearly 2 leagues, and its breadth about a league ; it is separated from Cape Breton by a channel into Mire Bay ; but this is too hazardous for strangers, and frequented only by those coasters who ore well acquainted with its dangers. The lighthouse on Scatari Island is placed on its east point, in latitude 46° 2' 17" north, and longitude 59° 41' 10" west. The tower is painted white, and exhibits a re- volving light, at 90 feet above the level of the sea, visible 1 minute and invisible ^ a minute alternately. A boat is kept to render assistance to vessels in distress, and a gun to answer signals when required. As vessels from Europe frequently first make the land about Scatari Island, the re- volving light on the eastern point will be found of great service ; and it appears, by the late survey of the St. Peter's Bank, that in latitude 46° north, the western edge of the bank, in 40 fathoms, pebbles and broken shells, lies E.S.E., or (east, true,) 111 miles from the lighthouse on Scatari Island. LOUISBOURG HARBOUR is situated on the S.E. side of Cape Breton, to the westward of Scatari Island, and is very easy of access; you may be soon in, and you may likewise be soon out, if you please. In doing so be careful to avoid the Nag's Head, a sunken rock, on the starboard hand going m. The east part of the harbour is the safest. The inhabitants consist of a few fishermen only. Water is plentiful here, Cape North to the Gut of Cansu. 107 s house piloted drawing n Kent bich lies safe and abounds le of the c offices; and the igths, ap- shore to side, are Vhen past to anchor you nia^ B water is On Flat n latitude rwood, 90 ;ht, at 160 of various tide in the ices of an- nt; beyond id; there is s should be • water that :ther end is [•ien and the ing ofi' at its iithoms, and hE. andW. Cape Breton i frequented ie 46° 2' 17" exhibits a re- , invisible i a distress, and jland, the re- :)pears, by the :n edge of the ue,) 111 miles {reton, to the »n in, and you oid the Nag's the harbour is plentiful here, but wood is scarce. The Nag's Head Rock lies nearly ^ from the lighthouse point, and has no more than 3 feet on it at low water. The port side going in is the boldest. Louisbourg lighthouse stands on the east side of the entrance to the harbour, 60 fathoms from shore; it is built on the site of the old French lighthouse, in latitude 45° 54' north, and longitude 59° 58' west; it shows a fixed light, visible from Cape Breton to oiT Cape Portland. This lighthouse is a square building, painted wl with vertical black stripes on cither side, m order to distmguish it from other lighv..juse8, and to render it conspicuous when the back land is covered with snow. The following remarks may be of service to vessels bound to Louisbourg. — When coming from the eastwar \ tney should bring the light to bear W. by N., or more northerly, before you run for it; and from the vKstward N. by £., or more northerly, in order to clear Green Island and the ledges which lie | of a mile S. by W. ^ W. from the light. When in the entrance of the harbour, which is ^ a mile wide, with the light bearing N.N.E., 2 or 3 cables' lengths distance, steer W.N.W. for ^ a mile, to avoid the Nag's Head, a sunken rock, on the starboard hand, bearing W. by N. from the light. The N.E. arm of the harbour affords the safest anchorage. The light at Louisbourg bears about S.S.W. ^ W. from the revolving light on Scatari Island. GABARUS BAY. — From the entrance of Louisbourg to Guyon Isle, called also Portland Isle, the course is S.W. by W., and the distance more than 3 leagues. Be- tween lies the bay called Gabarus Bay, which is spacious, and has a depth of from 20 to 7 fathoms. Off the south point of this bay, called Cape Portland, lie the Cormo- rants, a number of islets and rocks, which are dangerous. About 4 leagues to the west- ward of Gabarus Bay is the Forked Harbour, a narrow winding imet, where small vessels may run into, and lie land-locked; and 5 miles south-westward of this is the remarkable white cliff, already noticed, and called Cape Blancherrott'C. The shore now winds to the westward, to Cape Hinchinbroke and the isle of Madame. CHEDABUCTO BAY is wide and spacious; it is bold-to on both shores, and free from danger; on its southern side, which is high and nearly straight, are Fox's Island and Crow Harbour. Fox's Island is small, and lies near the shore. Cranberry Island, eastward of Cape Canso, and at the southern entrance of the Gut of Canso, is now distinguished by a lighthouse, which is of great importance to th .rode in this part. It is an octagonal tower, 88 feet high, and stands in latitude 45° 19' 58^" north, and longitude 60° 55' 40f''' west; it is painted red-and-white horizontally, and forms a conspicuous and useful object. It exhibits two fixed lights, one above the other MILFORD HAVEN, or the Harbour of Guisborough, at the head of the bay, is* impeded by a bar, but a sloop-of-war may pass over it. Within the bar vessels lie in perfect security; the tide, however, sets in and out with great rapidity. The town is, at present, a place of little trade; but it is protected by a battery. From Manchester, round the north shore of Chedabucto Bay, the shores are full of settlements, and wear a pleasing aspect; and on the northern side of Chedabucto Bay you will see several red cliffs ; this shore is sandy, with regular soundings in the middle of the bay : the water is deep, from 25 to 35 fathoms. The OUT of GAXSO ^When off Cape Canso and bound for the Gulf of St. Law- rence, the best passage is through the Gut of Canso, being shorter, and having the ad- vantage of several anchoring places, out of the strength of the tide, in case of contrary winds or bad weather. Having passed the dangers of Cape Canso, be careful to avoid the Cerberus Rock, on which the sea breaks when there is any wind, ancf'round Eddy Point, at the distance of at least ^ a mile, in order to clear the shoal stretching off, which shoal will readily be perceived by the race of the tide it forms. You may stop a tide, in moderate weather, abreast of Eddy Cove, within a mile of the point, in from 7 to 12 fathoms; and thence, by keeping about mid-channel, you may run through the gut free from danger. Holland Cove affords good anchorage out of the strength of the tide, in 6 or 7 fathoms, muddy bottom. At Ship Harbour there is excellent an- chorage, in 4 and 5 fathoms, soft bottom. In entering, give the starboard side, which is flat, a berth of a cable's length, and run on, until you shut in the north entrance of the gut. You may wood here, and water at Venus's Cove, on the opposite shore. Plaster Cove is plainly distinguished by its white appearance, when opposite to Hol- land Harbour: the anchorage, at its entrance, is on soft mud, in from 4 to 10 fathoms. P2 108 \'.i Suiliny Directions from Inhabitant Harbour is well sheltered, and has good anchorage throughout; when you are sailing in, keep near Evans Island, to avoie North to aces it falls id, which is lU arrive at ,0 avoid the I Cape North to Point Escumenac. WtB In the winter season the shores of lireton Island, when the weather is m?*^ tlnviitd with all sorts of fish; plenty of lobsters and oysters are to be found towui < Prince Edward's Island, especially at Hillsborough Bay. CAPE NORTH, which forms the western point of the entrance of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, lies in latitude 47° 2' 40" north, nnd longitude 60" 26' 23" west; Capo St. Lawrence lies W.N.W., 8 miles from Cape North, between which the land curves in to the southward; near the head of this bight are 12 fathoms water. From Cape St. Lawrence the land runs in a S.W. by W. direction, 31 miles, to CapeBeaque; 3 miles to the north-eastward of the cape, is the entrance to an inlet, which runs in south-westward, 4 miles, near the head of which lb a settlement ; its entrance is about i a mile wide, on the eastern side of which is Chctican Harbour, fit for small vessels. Salmon Riv<3r lies S.W., 9 miles from Cape Beaquc. Sea Wolves Island lies 7 miles W.S.W. from the western point of Salmon River, and 2 miles fVom the shore, having 16 fathoms water between ; this island is about 1 A mile in length, and bold-to. Cape Mabou lies 4 leagues S.W. by W. from the Sea Wolves Islands, and 6 miles S.W. of the cape is the village of Mabou, which stands on the eastern side of Hunting .River; this river is wide at the entrance, and continues so for full 4 miles, where two streams fall into it. Cape Linzee lies 4 miles W. by S. of Hunting River: this cape, with the Just au Corps Islands and Rocks, which run 3J miles in a S.W. direction from it, forms the N.if. point of St. George's Bay, and Cape St. George the S.W. point. Prom Just au Corps Island to the entrance of the Gut of Canso, the coast runs nearly south, 5^ leagues; and from Cape St. George, the entrance of the gut bears S.E. ^ S., 6 leagues. JESTICO, OE PORT HOOD, on the western side of Breton Island, is a safe har- bour for frigates with any wind ; the anchorage is in from 4 to 5 fathoms, mud and sandy bottom; here you may get both wood and water. The leading-mark goins in, is Cape Linzee on with the highest sand-hills that are on the N.N.E. side of the beach, bearing N. by E. or N.N.E. ; these, kept in a line, will lead you clear of Spit Head in 4 to 6 fathoms. On the opposite shore Is a long and broad JIat, stretching | of a mile from the shore, called the Dean, to which, come no nearer than 4 fathoms. Cod and herrinj^- fisheries are carried on here. Houdic Bank, a ahoalf with only 2 fathoms on it, lies on the east side of St. George's Bay ; its inner edge lies 2 miles from the eastern shore, with a clear channel of 1 1 to 7 fathoms between them; its northern edge lies S.by W. h W., 5 miles from Just au Corps Island; and its centre lies E. by S. 4 S., 11 miles from Cape St. George; this sboal is nearly 3 miles in length, and I| mile in breadth. The Gut of Canso may be consideied the best and most firequented passage for ships bound to or from Prince Edward's Island and other places in the Northumber- land Straits, because it is shorter, and has the advantage of anchorage in case of con- trary winds or bad weather. Its length is about 5 leagues, and its breadth about | of a mile. The east side is low, with beaches, but the west shore is for the most part high and rocky; Cape Porcupine is remarkably so. The deepest water is on the west- ern shore; but both shores are bold-to and sound, except three sunken roeks, which lie near to the eastern shore ; one of these rocks lies about midway between the southern entrance of the gut and Ship Harbour, and ndarly a cable's length from the eastern shore; the second lies near the western side of Gypsum or Plaster Cove, about | a cable's length from shore; and the third about 100 fathoms without Bear's Island, the S.E. part of the gut: these rocks have 6 or 8 feet water on them. Mill Creek, Gypsum or Plaster Cove, Venus Creek, Ship Harbour, Holland Cove, and Eddy Cove, afford excellent anchorages, with a moderate depth, and out of the stream of lue tide, which generally sets in from the southward, but very irregularly, being much influenced by the winds. After strong N.W. winds, which happen daily during the fall of the year, the water in the Gulf ot St. Lawrence is rendered low, which causes the current to run northward through the gut, at the rate of 4 or 5 knots, and the contrary happens after southerly winds. A lighthouse, exhibiting a fixed light, has been established on the western side of the entrance to the gut, in latitude 45° 41' 49" north, and longitude 61° 29' 21" west. The tower is white, and stands 120 yards from the shore. The light is 115 feet above no Sailing Ditrrt'ons from ^ tho level of tho tea, and mny be seen 6 leagues distant, or between Capo St. Gcorgo and Jcstico. There is good anchorage under the lighthouse with ofl-shore winds. It is liigh water, full and change, in the gut at 8h. 30m., but the tide in inid*channel runs an hour after high and low water. Suuietiuies, in or after strong winds, tho cur* rents appear aa if not influenced by tho tide, but run at the rate of 3 or 4 knots. From Cape St. George to the entrance of the gut the course is S.K. ^ S., 6 leagues ; but it is to be observed, that there is a ledge of roctu in the .^uu>g, near AubuHhee, some of which are nearly dry at low water, and nearly in tho direct course towards the gut; these must, of course, be avoided. Upon entering the gut from tho northward there will be seen, on your port hand, a rcu house on a point, called Belle Ashe's Point, off which, nearly a cuolc's length from the shore, is a aunken rock, which may readily be distinguished by the eddy of uie tide; within this point, to the S,E., is Gypsum or Plaster Cove. To sail into the cove, keep nearly in the mif U.— Tht^entrnncc to this harbour lies lOmiles S.by W. fVoin Capo St. George. H«r»! small ^«*i»iiels loft neighlwurhood ; but the harbour is so shoal, that even these com^)lete their cargoes outside the bay, although tho anchorage is not safe. The rivers which fall into this harbour run through many miles of line land, and the popu- lation is considerable. Mttliffuant Cove lies 10 miles W.S.W. of Cape St. George; it has a small stream at its head, and affords gO(xl landiiig for boats. It may be known by the sugar-loaf hill, 680 feet above the level of the sea, which stands about a mile in the rear of it. Arinaig. — The wooden pier at the village of Arisaig is 4 miles "W.S.W. of Malignant Cove; it only ailbrds shelter for boats and shailons during easterly winds, there ueing n() shelter with the wind between 'vest and north. Nearly a mile to tho eastward of this pier, and about ^ a mile N.E. of Arisaig church, there is a remarkable rocky called a bum. MEllTGUMISH HARBOUR.— Tho entrance to this harbour lies 14 miles to the westward of the Arisaig, and 27 miles W. by S. of Capo St. George. The coast betwcon is bold, and free from danger; is well settled and cultivated, the land rising a few miles from the shore to the heignt of 1100 feet in some parts. There arc 14 feet at low water over the bar, with sufEcient water for large ships within: but its entrance is so intricate, that a pilot is necessary; and as the northerly winds send in a heavy sea, that were a ship to take the ground going in, she would probably be lost. The bar is formed by rocky shoals running out from the points of the entrance. At present this harbour is seldom frequented oy any thing larger than coasting schooners. It was formerly visited by larger vessels for timber; but that article is now exhausted. From the entrance, the east end of Pictou Island bears N. i E., distant 10 miles; hero you may anchor, in moderate weather, in 4 to 6 fathoms, till yon obtain a pilot. PICTOU ISLAND is about 4^ miles long fVom cast to west, and 1^ mile wide. Its centre is 150 feet above the sea, is wooded on the northern side; but there are farms and settlements along its southern shore; low cliiTs form its outline. The best landing for boats is on the south side, at Roger's Point. Pictou Island Beefs extend from each end of the island a considerable distance. The Etist Reef runs off from the east point of the island, and is dangerous, being partly dry at low water; it runs out ^ a mile to 3 fathoms, and nearly a mile to 5 latnoms. This reef should be approached with caution at all times, particularly at night, and on a flood-tide, as there are 9 fathoms not far from its N.E. point. The west end of the island may be passed within ^ a mile in 3 fathoms; but there are rocks on either side of the west end of the island, nearly dry at low water, just within the 3 fathom line, extending 3 cables' length from the shore; and it shallows the same distance along the north shore; at night, come no nearer the north shore than 8 or 9 fathoms, nor to the south shore than 5 fathoms. The Middle Shoals are a chain of rocky patches^ of 10 feet, running 1^ mile in a W. by S. direction ; they reach from within ^ a mile of the Caribou Channel to within 1^ mile of the west end of Pictou Island, between which there is about 3 fathoms; to clear these shoals to the northward, in 4 fathoms, keep Roger's Point and west point of Pictou Island bearing E.S.E. \ E. ; large ships should come no nearer than 7 fathoms on that side. The Roaring Bull is a clifiy point, lying 4 miles eastward of Pictou lighthouse, from which a reef of sandstone runs out to the N.E., full 3 cables' length, to 3 fathoms. Mackenzie Head is recognized by a sharp-pointed cliff of clay and sandstone, 40 feet high, and by its bearing south from Logan Point, distant If mile; these points form the entrance to Pictou Bay, which is H mile deep. Mackenzie Shoal lies N.E. by E. from the head, f of a mile, and is a rocky bank of 16 feet. Caribou and Doctor's Points in one, bearing N. by W. J W., clears it to the eastward, a cable's length; and the light- house and town point of Pictou in one, bearing west, clears it to the northward. 112 Sailing Directions from I: 2 cables* length. The shallow water extends a full ^ mile from Mackenzie Head to the northward to 3 fathoms, and trends to the westward towards the lighthouse; all that side of the bay being shallow, with ridges of sand drying at low water. Ede Point is a clijQT, 30 feet hl^h, of clay and sandstone, lying nearly a mile within, or S.W. of Logan Point; it has also a shoal running off to the S.E., ^ of a mile, and shal- low water continues on to the westward as far as London Beach. Logan Point, like- wise, has reefs running off to the E.S.E.-ward, ^ a mile, to the 3 fathoms line. The lighthouse and Cole Point in one, S.W. by W. J W., leads across their S.E. part in 14 feet: but 4 fathoms is near enough to approach them. Pictou light can be seen on a clear night, 12 or 14 miles, and when in one with Cole Point, bearing S.W. by W. f W., clears the reef off the east end of Pictou Island, * a mile : and also the southern extremity of Pictou Island Bank, in 5\ fathoms. If beating in, tack, when standing to the northward, the moment the light begins to disappear behind Cole Point. If running in, keep the light W.S.W., till you get soundings in 5 fathoms, at low water, off Logan Point, and follow that depth 1^ mile to the S.W., taking care not to bring the light to the northward of west. Here you may anchor in the roads till day-light. Pictou lighthouse is an octagonal wooden structure, on the eastern side of the entrance, painted vertically with red-and-white stripes, exhibiting a fixed light 65 feet above the sea. This light, kept W.S.W., leads clear of the East Keefs of Pictou Island; and, as before observed, the light is visible 12 or 14 miles. PICTOU. — Pictou Harbour is in every respect the finest on the southern shores of the gulf, capable of containing ships of any burthen; here are coal-uines, valuable quarries of building stone, and a finely settled country in its neighbourhood. Pictou has been declared a free wharehousing port; and its trade is very considerable in lumber, coal, and the fishery. The trade of this port appears to be rapidly increasing, and the town of New Glasgow, in the neighbourhood of the coal-mines, promises to be of considerable importance. Coasters, from all parts of the gulf, resort to Pictou; and its exports have amounted to £100,000 in one season. A steamer runs regularly' between Pictou and Quebec ; and there is a regular communication by land with Halifax. The bi-anch-pilots of Pictou (which are generally active experienced men,) are always on the look-out for vessels ; should you not meet with one, there is good anchorage in Picton Roads in 5 to 6 fathoms, with the lighthouse bearing west. Here you might wait for day-light to obtain a pilot ; a stranger, particularly in a large ship, should not attempt to cross the bars without one, although there is good water on both bars. The outer bar has 21 feet at low water, bottom of sand; crossing this bar you fall into 4, 5, or 6 fathoms for about a mile, when you suddenly shoal again to 18 or 19 feet on the inner bar; this bar is also sand, and distant 4 cables' length from the lighthouse, and is a cable's length wide ; when across this inner bar, the water continues deep to the entrance of the harbour. There is very good anchorage between the bars, but it is open to the N.E. winds. From the lighthouse to the anchorage off the easternmost wharfs at Pictou, the channel of the harbour is direct nearly ^ of a mile wide, deep enough for the largest ships, and clear of danger. The Town of Pictou stands on the north shore of the harbour, 2 miles within the lighthouse ; the houses are crowded together along the shores of a small bay, but they are hidden from vessels entering the harbour by Battery Point, which shelters them from easterly winds, except the steeples of three churches ; many of the dwelling-houses are of stone, and the population upwards of 2000. Opposite the town the narbour expands into three arms, at tne heads of which are the east, west, and middle rivers. The Albion coal -mines and New Glaf^ -^w are up the east river; the other two branches arc only used by boats. To enter Pictou Harbour with a fair wind, when without Mackenzie Shoal, bring the lighthouse and town point of Pictou in one, bearing 1 or 2 degrees to the southward of west ; or, which is the same thing, with Smith Point, the extreme of the land, on the same side beyond the town. Run with these marks on, until Logan and Cole Points come in one, bearing N.E., when instantly sheer a little to the northward, sufficient to bring the town point in one with the north extreme of the sandy spit. Keep the last- named marks exactly in one, until the Roaring Bull comes in one with Mackenzie Head, Cape North to Point Escumenac. 113 Head to louse; all within, or and shal- oint, like- ine. The li. part in with Cole iland, ^ a If beating disappear undings in the S.W., anchor in e entrance, above the id; and, as n shores of s, valuable d. Pictou derable in increasing, mises to be ictou; and rly between luax. I are always ichorage in I you might should not bars. The Qu fall into • 19 feet on lighthouse, ues deep to rs, but It is nost wharfs enough for - , u within the y, but they jlters them ling-houses he harbour ddle rivers. TO branches J, bring the luthward of and, on the Dole Points sufficient to cp the last- }nzic Head, bearing S.E. by E. ^ E., when change the course smartly, and run from those marks, keeping the Roaring Bull just in sight, until the north extreme of Moodil Point (the first point on the south side within the lighthouse) opens to the northward of the sandy spit; then haul to the westward, at first towards the S.W. extreme of London Beach, and afterwards, so as to pass midway between it and the sandy spit into the harbour. With a beating wind a pilot is indispensable. It is high water, full and change, at the lighthouse, at lOh.; spring-tides rise 6 feet, neaps 4 feet. With good tides you will carry 4 fathoms over the bar. Caribou Reef ia very dangerous, and dries out to the distance of 3 cables' length from shore; it consists of large stones, with deep water very near its east side and north point. It stretches out from Caribou Point to the N.N.E. ^ a mile, to 3 fathoms. Doctor\f Capo sals dry ant full leor the cad and that thu i should hence to is Seven w Head ; [^lead, on jr in this pilot be- ll a pilot d seldom proached gh water ,ps 5 feet. een them he shore; lern edge is bold-to larer to it '. Egmont, hUchmaiCs ' eastward miles long Tom Cape bween this reen these B with off- lor in less ad off the and the atrance of % full mile >f Egmont ituated. rage under West Spit it there is sN.byE., d the land southward, t the West direction; the middle miles from fathoms is ^\''e8t Point , having 1 3 I soundmgs t should bo taken from the main land; and by keeping off the edge of the bank in 9 or 10 fathoms, you will pass 3 miles to the westward of it; near the outer edge of the bank, the tides run sometimes 2^ knots, causing a heavy sea, on a weather tide. The north POINT is low, with red cliffs. Vessels should always give this point a wide berth at night, or in foggy weather, on account of the ree/* which runs off from it to the north-eastward full 2 miles to 5 fathuius, and 1^ mile to 3 fathoms; without the 6-lalhoms line, rocky uneven soundings run out to 10 fathoms, sometimes causing a dangerous breaking sea. From the West Point to the North Point the land trends about N.N.E., 6 miles, to Cape Wolf, then N.E. by E., 27 miles. This coast is unbroken, and chiefly composed of red clay and sandstone cliffs. The shallow water runs off sonte of the |M)ints a con- siderable distance, so that large ships at night should keep off in 11 or 12 fathoms, when running along this part of the coast. : _, ,/ The TIDES. — Caj^tain Bayfield, R.N., in his valuable book of directions for the Northumberland Straits, says "The principal tide-wave, after entering the culf between Cape Breton Island and Newfounuland, sends off, laterally, waves to the S.W., on citner side of the Magdalen Islands. The first of these, which I shall call the eastern wave, coming from between those islands and the western shore of Cupe Breton Island, arrives at the eastern entrance of the strait soon alter 8 o'clock, and proceeds to the westward, making high water later, in succession, fVom east to west as far as Pictou, which it reaches at 10 hours. At the 6ame nominal hour, but 12 hours later, the other, or western wave, arrives at Cape Tormentine, having been retarded by the Ion" detour which it has taken to the northward and westward of the Magdalcns, and by the great extent of comoaratively shallow water which it has passed over in its subsequent pro- gress to the S.W. This wave makes high water later, in succession, at places along the eastern coast of New Brunswick, as we proceed to the southward; and, aller entering the strait from the N.W. to S.E., contrar} to the other eastern wave. •" i^ • ^> ■> • " Thus it is hin;h water, on the ftiU and change days, at Miscou, at about 2 J hours; at Point Escume? ac and the north point of Prince Edward's Island, forming the western entrance of the straits, soon after 4 hours; at the west point of Prince Edward's Island, at 6 hours; at Shediac, 8 hours; and at Cape Tormentine, 10 hours. When, therefore, the eastern wave arrives between Pictou and the Wood Islands, the western part of the proceeding tide-wave arrives between Cape Tormentine and Cape Traverse. They then meet, and combine to make high water at the same hour, namely, 10 hours, or a little later in the harbours, all over the central portion of the strait, from Pictou to Cape Tormentine; causing also an amount of rise of the tides every where more than double, and, in some of the Larbours, nearly three times as great as that which occurs at either entrance of the strait. " The eastern stream of flood enters the strait from the N.E., running at the rate of 2^ knots round the east point of Prince Edward's Island, but is much weaker in the ' offing and over towards the southern shore. It runs round Cape Bear, and with an increasing rate along the land to the westward; is strongest in the deep water near the land, iind runs at its extreme rate of 3 knots close past the Indian Bocks and Rifleman Reef. Loosing strength as it proceeds farther to the N.W., it is quite a weak stream when it meets the other flood-stream off the Tyron Shoals. This eastern flood-stream is not so strong along the southern or Nova Scotia shore, unless it be in Caribou Channel, for a short space, near Caribou Reef; and it is weak, not generally exceed'' ing I a knot in the miadle of the strait. " The other or western flood-stream comes from the northward, along the west coast of Prince Edward's Island, sweeping round the West Point, and running strongest in the deep water near the West Keef, where its rate is 2^ knots. Over towards the New Brunswick shore its rate seMom exceeds 1 J knot, and this is its average rate as it pursues its course to the S.E., until we arrive at Cape Tormentine, where the strongest part of the stream runs near the Jourimain Shoals, and thence to the south- ward, round and over the dangerous Tormentine Reefs, with a great ripple, at the rate of 3 knots." From this account of the tidal-stream it appears that a fast-sailing vessel, under favourable circumstances, might enter the strait with the flood, and arriving at Cape Tormentine soon after high water, might there take the ebb, and thus have the stream R 2 124 Sailing Directions from with her, with but slight interruption, fVotn one end of the strait to the other. Or % ves8ul with n beAting wind might no time her nrrival at the same point as tu bo able to continuo hur vojrage in Uiu vaiue direction with the ebb. lid .T.f.L.t,? ■ •.;: A>r u: THE NORTH COAST OP PRINCE EDWARD'S ISLAND, FROM CAPE EAST TO NORTH POINT. The north coast of Prince Edward's Island is of moderate height, and clear of detached tihouls, with rt^gular soundings near the shore, and M fathoms is generally about 4 miles oflT. The whole coast is oordered by a aandy thfdhw, running off about ^ a mile; and there are a few spits which run off nearly a mile. From Cape East, off which a danger<»u reeftwoA nearly a mile, to St. Peter's Bay, the coast runs W.N.W., 33 miles ; the coast is unbroken, formed of red sandstone cliffs. You will find 10 fathoms within a mile of this port, but the anchorage is not good. ST. PETER'S HARBOUR is of considerable extent, running nearly 7 miles to the eastward, but the entrance is shallow, and it has a shifting bar. There are sometimes 5 feet on the bar at low water, the outer edge of which, in 3 fathoms, is f off the shores ; within the harbour are 3 fathoms. High water, full and change, at 8h. 30m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 feet. SAVAGE HARBOUR lies 3 miles farther westward; it has onl;r 2 feet on the bar, but it runs inland to within a mile of the head of Hillsborough River, and is only fit for boats. The tides are the same as at St. I'eter's Bay. There is a road across irom the head of this river to UillHborough River. TRACADIE HARBOUR is 9 miles to the westward of Savage Harbour; it is only fit for small craft. Its entrance is remarkable, by having sand-hiUs 60 to 60 feet high at the east side of the entrance. The bar shifts, and is } of a mile firom shore, with 6 to 9 feet on it. Within the entrance the harbour is 8 miles wide, and 2^ miles deep. It is high water, full and change, at 7b.; springs rise 4 feet, nenps 2 feet. Little Rustico Harbour lies 4 miles westward of Tracadie Harbour, and ^ a mile west- ward of Stanhope Point, on which there is a sand-hill 30 feet high ; it haa a dangerous re«/' running out from it | of a mile, to 3 fathoms; and at ^ a mile from the shore, only a root in some places. Little Rustico is only fit for boats. GREAT RUSTICO lies farther westward, and has two narrow sandy entrances, distant 3 and 5 miles from Cape Turner. This place is only fit for schooners, as it has a shifting bar, of 4 to 6 feet, wnich is exceedingly dangerous, extending f of a mile from shore. There are two buoys pointing out the deepest water over each of the bars. It is high water, full and change at 6h. 40m.; springs rise 3^ feet, neaps 2 feet. There are extensive settlements here, and an English and Roman Catholic Church. Cape Tubnsb is the highest cliff on the island, being ot' red sandstone, 120 feet high ; it is 3 miles N.W. of the western entrance to Great Rustico. GRENVILLE HARBOUR, or New London, lies 8 miles N.W. by W. of Cape Turner. The entrance to this harbour is 4 of a mile wide, and 3 fathoms deep; but it is only fit for small vessels, on account of iu shifting bar ofsand^ where there is only 6 feet water sometimes between the two buoy*, ainl the channel in is narrow. The bar runs out to the distance of § of a mile, and th# !«h«llow water a mile to 5 fathoms. It is high water, full and change, at 6h. 1 Cm. , springs rise H^ feet, neaps 2 feet. There are increasing settlements and a fertile country around this harbour. New London being the principal place, where there is an English and Scotch Church. Capb Atlesbu&t lies 9 miles N.W. ^ W. from Grcnville Harbour entrance, and 7^ miles N.W. ^ W. of Cape Tyron, which is a remarkable red cliff, 110 feet high ; this part of the coast should not be approached nearer than 6 or 7 fathoms in a large ship, as the shallow water runs off some distance. RICHMOND BAY is of great extent, running in 10 miles to the S.W.; it contains seven islands and a number of creeks »nd rivers, some of which are navigable for vessels of considerable bui'then. Grand RiviT can be ascended 7 or 8 miles, where there are very fine settlements; and also at Port Hill on the N.W. side of the bay. MALPEQUE HARBOUR is on the eastern side of this bay, and is very superior to any other on the north coast of the island ; it has 1 6 feet water on the bar at low water, and 18 or 19 at high water, ordinary springs, with space and depth enough for any t Cape Eatt to North Point. 125 (leicrlntion tnd number of voisels. Tlio princit>al ontranco is between Fiiberyi or Itill- ho(>k Inland to the northward, and the Kojroltjr Hand, which dries out full ^ a uiilu iVoni Royalty Point. Just within this entrance the anchorage is good and whU sheltered. The We»t OuUy is the other entrance; it lies on the N.W. side of Fishery, or Bill- hook Island, and is so narrow and intricate as to be only fit for boats, or very small croft, although it ha« feet on its dangeroua bar 1 ^ mile out iVoin the shore. The Bar of Malpeque runs off from Fishery, or Billhook Island, E. by S., 1Z| miles; it then runs to the southward, so as to join the shore to the eastward of Cnpe Ayles- bury. This bar is exceedingly dangerous in bad weather, the bottom being sandstone ; then all signs of a channel are obliterated by heavy breakers. The northern part of this bar, to the distance of U mile to the eastward of Billhook Island, is very snallow, in some places only 4 feet at low water. There are two white beacons on the S.E. end of Billhook Island, which, kept in one, bearing W.N.W. J W., will lead through the narrows of the Ship Channel, and over the inner bar; but not over the outer bar in more than 13 feet at low water. To enable ships to cross the outer bar in tho deepest water, namely, 16 feet at low water, ordinary spring'tides, the outer buo^ is moored in 3|| fathoms, at the dirtance of a cable's len^n to the northward of the Ime beacons; the intention being, tnat a vessel, by runnms fVom the outer to tho inner buoy (which is placed on the inner bar of 19 feet,) should carry the deapest water. The narrow part \iS the Ship Channel is a cable's length wide, and 4 fathoms deep. Vessels may anchor outside the bar, in 7 to d fathoms, to wait for a pilot, and all stransrers should endeavour to obtain one, and not attempt to take the bar in blowing weather. When the marks can be seen, and a smooth bar, a vessel might proceed as follows :— When off the bar, in 6 fathoms, bring the beacons in one, bearing W.X.W. f W. ; then sheer to the northward of their line, to the distance of 1 or 2 cables', and the western beacon will appear a little to the northward of tho other. Steer now so as to make a direct course towards the beacons, keeping tho westernmost beacon open a little to the northward, and the vessel will pass the bar in 15 or 16 feet at low water, spring-tides. The water will deepen immediately within the bar to 18 feet or more; and as soon as it docs so, sheer at once to the Nouthward, and brinff the beacons exactly in one, taking care that this be done befovtr the Scotch Church, >&lpeque, opens to the westward of Darnley Point; for if not, tikc vessel will be on shore on the shallow part of the bar, on th(< north side of the clitnunel. Keep now the beacons in one, running towards them, and they will lead througk ii^Kf Narrows, and over the inner bar m 19 fe«t at low water; after which they may b«.> eitWr still kept in one, or the westernmost one a little open to the southward of tk« oth«r, until the vessel is ^ a mile within the inner bar, or witnin } of a mile of the beacons; then change the course so west, nnd the samdy south point of Billhook Island must be passed at the distance of a cable's length, steering that course into the h rbour. You should anchor with the beacon'^ bearing between £. by N. and E.N.E., distant Arom \ to \ of a mile, but not farther off, in order to avoid the Horse-Shoe Sands. The tides run the strongest in the entrance, where sprinp^ run 2^ knots; within the bay they are much weaker. It is high-water, full and ciiange, at 6h.; springs rise about 3 feet, neaps 2 feet. N.E. winds rise the tidcH, and w-esterly winds the contrary. The morning tides are the highest in summer months. CASCUMPEQUE HARBOUR.— The entrance to this harbour lies N.NW. i W., 20 miles from the principal entrance to Malpeque, and S.W.^W., 5 miles from Cape Kildare. It may also be known by some very remarkable high sand-hills 3| miles to the southward of its entrance, as there are no hiuh sand-hills to the northward of the harbour. It has two sand-bars, with 10 feet on them at low water. The entrance is 180 fathoms wide. The outer bar of sand lies 1^ mile out from the entrance; the channel across it is narrow, and is indicated by u white beacon (on the south extreme of the northern sand-bar,) in one with a white mark on a log hut bearing W. by K. . This harbour was formerly the most convenient port in the island for loading timber, and there was a very large quantity shipped; there being at that time 18 ieet water. 126 Sailing Directions from At prescnt'not more' than 12 feet can be calculated on at hi^h water, spring- tides ; but strong N.E. winds will sometimes raise the water a foot higher. The tides are very irregular at certain seasons. The morning tides in summer are much higher than the evening tides, which sometimes disappear, leaving only one day tide during the 24 hours. High water, full and change, at dh. 40m. ; springs rise about 3 feet, neaps 2 feet. A stranger bound to this port must always take a pilot; in fine weather you may anchor outside, in 5 or 6 fathoms, bottom sand. In easterly gales the V^r is covered by a line of breakers. In crossing the bar, observe, that the white mark on the log house must not be opened in the least to the northward of the beacon, as these objects in one, lead in close along the southern edge of the northern sand. The channel, from one bar to the other, and between sands only covered by a few feet water, is 100 fathoms wide, with anchorage in 24 to 3^ fathoms; the best berth is just outside the entrance, where the sands dry on each side. When inside the harbour, the vessels generally load at a wharf. From Cape Kildare to North Point the distance is 11 miles N. by E. ^ E. About midway between is the little River Tignish, with only 2 feet in its entrance at low water; but it affords shelter for fishing-boats. Along this part of the coast, from Kildare to Nord; Point, there are rocky irregular soundings, of 3 to 5 fathoms, extending off 2 miles in some places. Ships when crossing from the Magdalens to North Point, should be particularly on their guard against getting embayed in the great bight formed by the N.W. part of Prince Edward's Island. In N.E. gales gveat difficulty would be found in beating a ship out; as both the tide and the current appear to set from the northward into this bignt. The north point of Prince Edward's Island should at all times have a wide berth given it. Ships that are bound to Maramichi and the ports in Northumberland Straits to the westT/ard of Cape Tormentine, after passing St. Paul's Island generally go to the south- ward of the Magdalens, round the north point of Prince Edward's Island^ which is very dangerous at night and in thick weather; and the lead should be kept going in rounding it, more especially if you have had a northerly wind in crossing from the Magdalens. After passing the North Point, shape a course well to the westward, so aa to avoid the West JReef: passing which, you should keep the lead going, and taking your soundings from the edge of the bank running off from the main, or New Bruns- wick shore. After you are past the West Reef, in proceeding south-eastward you may take your soundings from either shore till you arrive near the Strait of Cape Tor- mentine. If bound farther eastward, keep on the island side : the soundings will guide you past Cape Traverse. On this side the tides are strong, but the anchorage is good, in case of it falling little wind. At night, when the land cannot be seen, and the wind contrary, a ship had better anchor to tne westward of Cape Tormentine until daylight. Vessels bound to Pictou and ports eastward of Cape Tormentine, generally pass through the Gut of Canso. But if entering by St. Paul's Island, care should be token to come no nearer to Cape East prince Edward's Island,) than 20 fathoms in thick weather or at night, nor to Bear Cape than 15 fathoms; then keep more to the south- ward, to give the Indian and "Rijleman Rocks a berth. The light on Point Prim will be of great service in this part of the passage; and the lead will be a sufficient guide along the north side from St. Peter's Island to Cape Traverse. ->/* Hur, which d brought liles S.W. imber, &Cj Idiramachi a sand bar The pas- srs, but is coast may e seen by 3au on the N.W. and bistigouche . course is navigation rhere good ather finer erly winds • generally Btte, where ad regular ti . Vessels bound into Chaleur Baj should endeavour to make the island of Miscou, as the bank extending about 22 miles to the eastward will give sufficient warning to a vessel approaching this part of the coast. The northern edge of the bamc, in 30 fathoms, is 7 or 8 miles to the northward of Birch Point, and passes the north point of Miscou at the distance of 4 miles, and forms a sure guide up the bay at night or in hazy weather. The shoalest part of the bank will be found on an east line from Point Birch, where, for the first 6 miles offshore, there are 5^ to 7 fathoms, rocky bottom; it ther. deepens to 12 and 17 fathoms, red sand, rock, and shells, for the next 9 miles; it theu soon deepens to 20 fathoms 7 miles farther, with 20 to SO fathoms, red sand, gravel, and shells. Vessels should not attempt to make Point Maquereau in foggy weather, which to the eastward is so bold, that there is very little warning by the lead; but when within the bay, from Port Daniel westward, the 30-fathom line extends some distance off from the north shore, which line should be kept while you are to the eastward of Carlisle. The soundings are generally sand and shells on the banks; but in the centre parts of the bay it is black and brown mud. A good look-out should always be kept for the numerous fishing schooners* generally riding on these banks during the summer- months, as easterly winds almost always bring on fogs. The north point of Miscou will be distinguished by a green mound, or grassy sand- hill, and the snallow water docs not extend more than I- of a mile offshore; but to the eastward, opposite a small lagoon, where there are several huts and fishing-stores, shallow water, to 3 fathoms, stretches off a mile north-eastward, and there are 5 fathoms 2^ miles off. From the S.W. part of Miscou Island an extensive ^a^ runs off in a N.W. direction full 4^ miles to 5 fathoms, and 2^ miles off to 8 fathoms; and they continue to run 4 or 5 miles N.X.Eastward from the harbour. Skippigar Flat lies to the westward of Miscou Flats, leaving a narrow, intricate channel of "- ' ' fathoms, which leads into Miscou Harbour, between them. This is the norther ?r. i )f the Shippigan Shoals, and has only 6 feet water on some parts of it; its nortu biue is 2| miles from Shippigan Island, and may be approached within 6 fathoms by a large vessel, and to 3 or 4 fathoms by smaller vessels. The western part of this flat forms the eastern boundary of Shippigan Sound. MISCOU HARBOUR lies between Miscou and Shippigan Island, and just within the sandy spit at the S.W. point of Miscou, where there is 4 to 6 fathoms, for upwards of a mile in length, and 2 cables' length wide ; this part forms the harbour for large vessels; but the harbour is extensive for small vessels, in 10 to 15 feet, bottom soft mud. There is a gully on the eastern side of the harbour, where boats can enter from the sea at high water. This place is much frequented by the American fishermen, who are good pilots for it. The channel leading into the harbour between the Miscou and Shippigan Flats, is only 170 fathoms wide in one part, and both the flats are steep- to, givmg no warning by the lead. Only small vessels ought to attempt this harbour without the assistance of a good pilot, or having first buoyed the channel. It is high water at 3h. 30m; spring- tides rise 5 feet, neaps 3 feet. Fisherman's Ledge. — This is a dangerous bed of rochs, with only 10 feet water on some parts; it lies to the northward of Carraquette Bank, and is separated from it by Fisherman's Channel, which is 7 to 4 fathoms deep, and a mile wide. This dangerous ledge is 1} mile long in an £. ^ S. direction, and | of a mile wide from 3 fathoms on each side, and lies more in the way than any other in the Bay of Chaleur. There are no marks for it. Its northern edge ues 3 miles northward of Carraquette Island, and its east and west ends bear N.N!e. from the correspondbg points of that island. Great Anse Cliff and Donax Point in one, bearing W. by N., leads through the Fisherman's Channel. * Notes on the St. Lavorence Fisheries : By Captain R. Fair, E.N. — " In cruising near the cast end of Prince Edward's Island, and running along the shore, we observed a great number of American fishing-vessels, but none near the shore, nor was there a single case which called for our interference; on the contrary, the Americans say, that a privilege has been granted them, and that they will not abuse it. Between the east end of Prince Edward's Island, to within 7 leagues of the Bay of Chaleur, we passed through a fleet of from 600 to 700 sail of American fishing schooners, all cod fishing." — Naut, Mag., June 1839. , . ■,, . m ,wi»..-„,. s- [!N. America — Part I,] ft 130 Sailing Dircetions from Pokesndie Shoal. — This extensive fiat runs off 2 miles to the north-eastward from Pokesudie Island, and has only 6 or 4 fathoma water on a great part of it. The eastern part of this i^oal forms the western part of the Shippigan Channel. Carraquette stee- ph licaring W. ^ S., in one with the sandy S.E. point of Canaquette Island, leads orer thq north point in 2 fathoms; and to clear the shoal iii 4^ fatlioms, the steeple must be kept half-way between the extreme of the sandy point and the extreme of the trees on the same island. SHIPPIGAN SOUND is formed by Shippigan Island and flats to the eastward, and Pokesudie Island add the main land on the west : it is an extensive place. Simon's Inlet, on the western side of the sound, at the southern point Pokesudie Island, is the best harbour in the sound; hr > you can lie land-locked, with water enough for large ships. On the opposite side if ..llemec Harbour, where you lie perfectly secure from all winds, in 3 ana 4 fathoitts at low water. There is a church and village at the head of the bay. There is a bar of mud and sand across the entrance of Alemec Bay, re- ducing the depth to 2| fathoms at low water, and ik.^t') Shippigan Harbour to 2^ fathoms. The church and villt^^ Of Shippigan stand on the south point of the bay; and 2}^ miles to the southward of the church is the entrance to the gully, where the tide is very rapid, but it is used by shallops and fishing boats, although there is often a very heavy surf. Shippigan Harbour has lately been visited by several vessels for timber, where they lie very secure. 2Vie Chaimd leading from Shippigan Flats to the church is 9 miles in length, without buoys; the water is deep, but the channel is narrow and crooked, without leading- marks, and some of the Wiks very steep, so that an experienced pilot is absolutely necessary to navigate a large vessel into this harbour with safety. In Shippigan Harbour it is hi^h water at 3h. 40m ; spring-tides rise 5^ to 6 f;. :;t, and neaps 3 feet. In the channel the rate seldom exceeds a knot. In fine weather the stream is regular, running in through the gully and through the Sound to the northward into Chaleur Bay, from about | ebb to J flood by the shore ; and in a contrary direction from ^ flood to ^ ebb. Carraquette Island is low and wooded, and If mile long, in a direction nearly parallel to the coast; sandy points extend from both ends of the island towards the mam land, so as to form a bay, in iJ'hich there is a land-locked anchorage for vessels v'lrawing under 15 feet. To the westward of the island it is all shoal to Point Mizzenett'!. Carraquette Shoal extends A\ mile^ to the eastward of the island, from which it dries out nearly 2 miles, and it is very shallow on all parts of it. From its east end, Carra- ?uette steeple bears W. ^ S., and in one with the extreme of the trees on Carraquette slar 1 ; and Shippigan steeple, sattth, in one with Pokesudie Point. This latter bear- ing clc-.i.rs the sLoal to the eastward, in 3 fathoms at low water ; bui a large ship must keep Pokesudie bearing S. by W. f W., and in one with Point Marcelle. Mizzdiiette ledge of rocks, with 5 feet least water, lies N.N .W., 1| mile from the west end of CMTaquette Island. Donax Point just open of Mizzenette Point W.N.W. | W., clears the ledge to the northward, in 3^ fathoms ; and also leads along the north side of the Carraquette Shoals, but will lead over the Scallop Pcttch, of 16 feet at low water, rocky; when on this patch, Carraquette Church steeple and the N.W. end of Carra- quette Island are in one ; the S.E. end of the island will then bear S.S.W. ^ W^ distant 2 miles : keep along the northern edge of Carraquette Shoal in 4 fathoms. Thb harbour of CARRAQUETTE.— The channel fottning the entrance to the harbour lies between the Carraquette and Pokesudie Shoals for about 2^ miles, and it has water enough for the largest ships, but it is crooked, about 2| cables' length wide, and very steep to the edge of the shoals, and being without good leading-marks, it becomes a very difficult channel. The harbour conimences immer^y them near Maguacha Point, off whicn a spit of only 6 feet runs off to the S. W., almost a mile ; approaching this latter point, you must bring Mount Scaumenac open to the S.W. of Dalhousie Island ; keep these marks on until you are in 8 or 9 fathoms on the New Brunswick shore, and have the Bonami Rocks S.W. of you, ^ a mile, then hatd to the northward, keeping in 8 or 9 fathoms, till Lalime Point, the western point of New Brunswick, comes just open north of Dalhousie Island, and the rocks and islet to the westward of it, bearing W. by N. : now steer in on these leading-marks W. by N., until you approach Dalhousie Island, leaving it 50 or 100 yards to the southward of you, and you will enter the harbour with safety, where you can anchor in 6 fathoms abreast of the town. If bound into the harbour by the v. ;8tern channel, you must steer to the northward, past the buoy on the Middle Ground, rounding it at 2 oi 3 cables' length : then keep on W. by N. or west, until the Church of Dalhousie bears S. by W., and midway between the island of Dalhousie and the islet to the westward of it. Steer in with the church S. by W., and it will take you across the 3-fathom flat into the harbour. KISTIGOUCHE RIVER.— The entrance of this river lies between Maffuacha Point and the Bonami Rocks, and is about 2 miles wide. The rocks bear W. ^N. from the point, and may be safely approached within 2 cables' leneth; but the spit off Maguacha Point must be carefully avoided. From hence to Cam^ell Town, at the head of the navigable river, the distance is 15 miles; the river is navigable for large vessels to within 4 miles of Campbell Town, where the channel becomes narrow and intricate. A stranger should not attempt to go farther than Dalhousie tr the anchorage at Fleurant Point, which is 2 miles to the northward of Dalhousie, without an experienced pilot. The Fleurant Point anchorage is very convenient for vessels wanting supplies of wood and water; jou can anchor m 7 or 8 fathoms, and leave it at any time of the tide, and with any wind. Campbeix Town is situated on the south side of the river, at the foot of the Sugar-Loaf Mountain, which is 950 feet high. At high water vessels of 19 and 20 feet water can set up to the town, and lay afloat at low water. It is high water at Campbell Town at 4h.; spring-tides rise 9 to 10 feet, neaps 7 feet. Carlton Road. — ^This is an excellent roadstead, affording an extensive anchorage, in 6 to 7 fathoms, and is situated in the bay on the west side of Tracadigash Point. Within this point is the entrance to a small lagoon, which boats can enter. On the north side of this lagoon stands the village of Charlton, with its church; the village extends along the north shore of the bay a considerable distance to the westward. The west side of this bay is shallow some distance off. Carlton Mountain lies immediately to the northward of the Tillage, and is 1830 feet high. The best berth to anchor is with Carlton steeple E. by S., and Tracadigash Point S. by E. ^ E. The tides in this bay are verv weak. Tracagidash Spit runs off ^ a mile from the sandy point, and must be carefuify avoided when taking or leaving the anchorage. The mark to clear the spit, in 5 fatnoms, is Mount Dalhousie just open south of Point Maguacha, bearing about W.N.W. f W.; at night come no nearer than 10 fathoms. When Carlton Church steeple bears N.E. by E., you may haul to the northward for the anchorage, coming no nearer than 7 fathoms, until the point bears southward of east. CASCAPEDIAC BAY.— From Tracadigash Point to Black Point the bearing is E. by S., distant 13 miles; between lies the capacious Bay of Cascapediac. At the head of the bay is the river of that name, but it can only be entered by boats. There are I Point Escumenac to Cape Qaspi. 133 ou must 's length be north .W.,and c buoy is mnd and it; here he point ng them you will i to clear )en north 1 A spit of oint, you sep these have the in 8 or ust open bearing 3alhousie enter the orthward, then keep midway with the ur. icha Point from the Maguacha ead of the vessels to 1 intricate, ihorage at iperienccd g supplies ime of the )ot of the tnd 20 feet I; Campbell ;horage, in ;ash Point. r. On the the village ?ard. The amediately hor is with in this bay id must be ax the spit, ring about on Church ge, coming bearing is Lt the head There are exteTuive ahaUowa at the head of the bay, as will be seen by the chart* Black Point is 400 feet in height, bold, and rocky. The west side of the bay is all settled by French and Arcadians. KTCHMOND.— This village, with its church, stands well within the bay on the eastern side, nearly 4 miles N.N.W. of Black Point, and a mile to the northward of Indian Point. The anchorage for the timber ships is before the town, in 3 fathoms, with the church bearing N.E. } E., and Black Point S.E. } S.; you may anchor farther out in 5 or 6 fathoms, but not so well sheltered. When coming towardsKichmond from the east, in order to avoid the ahoal that stretches off to the westwr.rd 1} mile from Indian Point, keep Red Point well open of Black Point S.E. ^ E., and come no nearer than 4 or 5 fathoms, until the church bears N.E. by E.; then steer for it, and anchor as before. Bonaveniure Point lies S.E. ^ S., 16 miles from Black Point, and 7 miles from Red Point; Bonaventure River lies 2 miles northward of the point, and has only 2 feet over the bar. A rocky ahoal runs off from the point to the westward, nearly a mile, and continues at some distance from the shore to near Red Point. '"ARLISLE POINT lies 5 miles E.S.E. from Bonaventure Point, and forms the western point of Paspebiac Bay, which is an excellent roadstead, and here is the prin- cipal fishing establishment in the Bay of Chaleur. New Carlisle is the county town, and the court house and jail can be seen from the anchorage : the point is wooded, and consists of sand. Paspebiac Point, which is 3^ miles to the eastward of Carlisle Point, and forms the eastern point of the bay, is a triangular point of sand and a shingle beaeh inclosing a small lagoon. The town is considerable, although straggling along the coast ; and there is an English and Roman Catholic Church. On the west side of the point are a number of fishing-huts, and the extensive whit buildings belonging to the fishing- establishment of Sfessrs. Robins & Co., of Jersey, /essela lie in this excellent road- stead, sheltered from S.E., round north, to west, although open to southerly winds. Jersey vessels lie moored here all the season : the holding-ground is excellent. A sandy apit runs out south-westward, nearly ^ a mile from the point. The best berth to anchor is in 6 fathoms, clay, with the sandy point S.E., and Robins' flagst .ff east. In rounding Paspebiac Point from the eastward, keep Daniel Hill open to the south- ward of Nouvelle Point E.N.E. \ E., until the Roman Catholic Church opens to the westward of the south end of the sandy spit N. by E. ^ E.; keep the lead going, and steer towards Carlisle Point, until Robins* store and the Roman Catholic Church corae in one N.E. ^ E.; now haul in to the northward for the anchorage by your lead, ^aking care to give the west side of the spi': a berth in going in. Nouvelle River is 5^ miles to tiie eastward of Paspebiac; it has 2 feet on the bar at low water, and will be known by its stages and fish-stores; its west side is a high cliff of red sandstone. From Nouvelle River to the west point of Port Daniel, the course is E.N.E. IE., distant 3 leagues; this part of the coast is bold- to, and nearly straight. Daniel Hill, which is about 400 feet high, and stands about a mile to the westward of the point, will serve to point out the port. PORT DANIEL. — This is a fine deep bay, with a river at the northern part of it; it is of a moderate depth of water, having 7 fathoms in a line between the points, de- creasing to 5 and 4 fathoms towards the river, which will only admit boats at high * Notes on the St Lawrence Fishervv: By Captain R. Faib, R.N. — "At Paspebiac is by far the most important and most extensive fishing establishment in the gulf. It belongs to the firm of Robins & Co., who have very extensive stores at this place : they build ships of con- siderable burthen, and send them loaded with fish to all parts of the world ; their chief mar- kets are the Brazils and Naples. They employ in the trade, from this place, four ships, three brigs, and a schooner, amounting to about 1500 tons, their crews about 150 men." "We loft Chaleur Bay and proceeded to tlie Magdalens, anchored in Pleasant Bay 19th of May (1838). We found the herring fishery had commenced (chiefly in the Harbours of , Amherst and House Harbour), by about 146 sail of American fishing-schooners, of from 60 to 80 tons, each carrying 7 or 8 men. It is computed that the American schooners average nearly 700 barrels each, and the barrel is valued at one pound sterhng, making for the 146 sail then in the bay, a presumed product of 100,000 barrels, value £100,000; the tonnage era- ployed about 10,000 tons, and the number of men 1000."-~iVaMf. Mag., June 1839. 134 ,", Sailing Directions from water. There are several houses and stores near the river ; and wood and water may be obtained. The bay is open to easterly winds ; and the west side of the bay is shal> low nearly ^ a mile off from the West Point round to the river. Pillar Point is the eastern point of the bay; about 9 of a mile within it is White Point, known by its colour; about midway between White Point and West Point, in 6 fathoms, is the best anchorage; but easterly winds send in a heavy swell, and on their appearance you ought to leave this anchorage. Mac^juereau Point lies 6 miles to the eastward of Pillar Point; about midway be- tween IS Rerl Point, known by its colour. Point Macquereau is about 200 feet high, and covered with wood. From Macquereau Point to Cape Despair the course is E.N.E. f E., 23 miles. In the bay between are the fishing establishments of N ewport. Great and Little Pabou, and Grand River: the latter is a considerable strcauM here is a village and extensive fishing establishment. ■•.<;,»'■..>' nkf.tV CAPE DESPAIR, the N.E. point of the bay of Chaleur, is of a moderate height; it consists of red sandstone cliffs. Nearly 8.S.E., 1^ mile from Cape Despair, lies the Leander JRock, on the shoalest part of which is 16 to 18 feet; it is about | of a mile in diameter: as this rock lies in the fairway of vessels coming from the northward for Chaleur Bay, it should be avoided by giving the cape a berth of 3 miles. In clear weather, when the marks can be seen, l^rce Rock kept well open of White Head, will lead clear outside of the shoal. There is a good channel !'3tween the cape and the rock; and White Head kept in the middle of Perce Rook, will lead through this inner channel, in 15 or 16 fathoms. Bonaventure Island lies E. by N., 7 miles from Cape Despair; it has bold perpen- dicular cliffs on all sides, except the west, rising in places to 250 feel above the sea. From i'.s west side shoal water runs off nearly ^ of a mile. Between the channel and Perce Rock the channel is 1^ mile wide, and free from danger. PERCE ROCK is 288 feet high, precipitous all round, and bold to seaward; it is about ^ of a mile long, in a S.E. direction ; between this rock and White Head is Perce Bay, and along its shores is the town of Perce, chiefly inhabited by persons engaged in the fisheries. From Perce Rock, nearly half-way across, the shoal water runs nearly j^ of a mile; and Perce Reef, which ia rocky, runs off ^ a mile from the centre of the town ; although small vessels anchor on each side this reef, it is not a safe roadstead for shipping. Perce Mountain is very remarkable, and can be seen at sea 40 miles off. Perce Rock is joined to the main by a reef. There is a regular tide of flood and ebb (but weak) sets through Perce Bay; but a few miles without Bonavista Island, the current from the river St. Lawrence runs to the southward at all times. ,„ ^^■^ MAL BAY is 4 miles deep, and 5 or 6 miles wide, and is entirely open to the south- eastward. The cliffs on its S.W. side are perpendicular, and 666 feet in height; a fine broad sandy beach extends across the head ot the bay. There is a river at the N.W. corner of the bay, which admits boats at high water. The N.E. part of the bay has low cliffs. There is anchorage round the shores of this bay ; but it cannot be recommended as a roadstead. Point Petee, the south point of Gaspe and N.E. point of Mai Bay, is low, and covered with white houses. Flat Island lies 4 cables' length eastward of the point; it is small, and low. There is a clear channel of 5 to 9 fathoms between it and the island, but no anchorage. Cape Gaspe bears from Flat Island N.N.E., 7 miles. OASPE BAT. — This fine bay has a good outer roadstead, offDouglastown, on the south side, and a fine safe harbour at its head, capable of holding a large fleet in safety ; also a basin, where ships might be refitted or hove down. From Flat Island to Sandy Beach Point the course is if. by W. ^ W., 16 miles ; and from Cope Gasp^ N.W.^ N., 11^^ miles. The southern shore presents a succession of steep cliffs, whicn are 200 feet high; but inland, a few miles, the mountains rise to 1,500 feet in height; all along this shore shoal waver runs off fit)m the cliffs nearly J a mile. CAPE GASPE is a remarkable headland, its N.E. side being all high cliffs, nearly 700 feet in height. Flower-Pot Rock lies close to the cape, and is a remarkable object; and for H or 6 miles within the N.E. side of the bay, is covered with houses, chiefly fish- ing estf.blishments belonging to Jersey merchants. This part of the bay is free from danger, except the Seal Rocks, which lie about 6| miles within Cape Gaspe, and a mile S.E. of C::pc Brule ; this reef Las only 4 feet water on its ehoalost part, is about ^ a Point Escumenac to Cape OaspL 135 ater may y is shal- nt 18 the m by its the Dcst ance you clway be- eet high, course is Newport, w here is e height ; -, lies the a mile in iward for In clear lead, will and the this inner perpen- re the sea. annel and rard; it is id is Perce mgaged in ins nearly itre of the dstead for • miles off. id and ebb island, the the south- ;ht; a fine the N.W. ay has low jmmended ) low, and e point; it the island, wn, on the ; in safety ; I to Sandy N.W.^N., re 200 feet along this iffs, nearly ble object; hiefly fish- free from and a mile ) about ^ a nile long and ^ of a mile wide. The mark for the outer edge of this shoal is, Cnpn firule in one with the next cliffy point up the bay ; therefore, when beating, keep Cape James well open of Cape Brule. Douglas Town stands on the south side of the river St. John, on a rising ground. The water, which is deep at the outer part of the bay, shoals regularly as you approach the anchorage off Douglas, where ther^i is plenty of room, in any depth between 5 und 10 fathoms, sand and clay bottom ; anchor, with the entrance of tne river St. John N.W. by W., in 6 to 8 fathoms, and you will be a full mile from the entrance. Water may be obtained at the river St. John, about 2 miles within the entrance. ^ Cape Haldimand is a bluff cliff, about 2 miles northward of Douglas; from the N.E. side of which Sandy Beach Point runs out, in a northerly direction, and forms GaspS Harbour; it is a narrow, low point of sand; the side next the sea is shallow near J a mile off, as '.vill bo leen hj the chart; but the inner, or western side, is bold and steep- to; on the eastern side it is also very steep immediately outside the shallow water, which extends from the beach; this renders it very dangerous at night, as the lead gives so little warning. The peninsula lies on the opposite side, abont a mile to the northward of the Sandy Beach Point ; it is low, and covered with trees, having several sheds near its west point ; between the shoals that run off from the north end of Sandy Beach Point, and those that extend eastward from the peninsula, is the entrance into Gaspd Harbour, which is only about 4 cables' length wide, and 10 to 11 fathoms deep, mid-channel. '"J* ;* GASPE HARBOUR. — When you get within Sandy Beach Point and the peninsula, you are in the harbour of Gaspc, and completely sheltered from all winds ; bottom mud, and the deepest water 11 fatnoms. Within the harbour the river divides into two branches, called the N.W. and S.W. arras; within the latter is the basin, where a great number of vessels may lie as securely as in a dock. The town of Gaspu is on the south side of the entrance to the basin, and along the shores of the basin tne principal inha- bitants reside; and here is the custom-house. Several schooners ore employed in the whale-fishery from this place; and an extensive cod-fishery is carried on in the bay, chiefly by the Jersey merchants. It is high water, full and change, at Ih. 50m.; spring-tides rise 5 feet, neaps 3 feet. Vessels having occasion to go to Gaspe to report or clear, can anchor off Douglas, and then go up to the town in a boat. A stranger, without a pilot, had better anchor off Douglas, than attempt to take the harbour on a dark night. In the suituner there is generally a land and sea-breeze, the sea-breeze setting in between 9 and 10 a.m., and continuing till sunset; it then falls calm, and the hmd- brceze comes on about 9 or 10 at night. When enterinff Oaspe Harboury the mark for the north end of Sandy Beach Point is. Point Panard, (a woody point on the north shore, nearly 3 miles within the penin- sula,) in one with the inner, or north side of the whale sheds on the peninsula point. The spruce-trees on the peninsula are to the northward of the whale sheds. The marks to lead in clear of Sandy Beach Point are, the extremity of the spruce-trees on the peninsula in one with Point Panard, bearing N.W., a little westerly ; keep this mark on until the windmill (which stands on the inside of Sandy Beach Point, near the main land,) comes in one with the inner, or west side of the end of Sandy Beach Point, bear- ing S. ^ W., when you must haul to the westward for the anchorage, or proceed for the basin. ' '' ' .." •;',. , ' -' ' - •••"• •'■■• -- m/- "• When working into the harbour, you must, when standing to thi "oittnM^ara towards Sandy Beach Point, tack as soon as the leading-mark cornea on; but when standing to the northward you may go by the lead. ,. tr CDRBENT8.-*<)ff Cape Gaspe the currents set stronsly to the southward towards Flat Island, sometimes 2 knots, which ought to be carefully guarded against when making for this bay with a northerly wind. When this current meets the swell from the south- ward, it causes a high short'-breaking sea from Cape Rozier across the entrance of Gaspe Bay. In light winds a vessel becomes quite unmanageable in this sea. Vessels ap- proaching the coast in this vicinity, should, at night, or in dark weather, keep the deep- sea lead going, as soundings extend a great distance from the l^d. ":ri! ■};('• 136 i; Sailing Directions from > Mil ,' Vni—NORTH COAST OP THE RIVER ST. LAWRENCE, FROM THE RIVER ST. JOHN TO POINT DE MONTS, AND FROM THENCE TO POINT MILLE VACHE. ■ ' Variation 22° westerly, df creating to H'* at Quebec. > FROM the River St. John to the Great Boule Island, which is the easternmost of the Seven lalando, the course is W. by N. ^ N., distance 77 miles. The coast is only partiiJly wooded; the hills next the sea seldom exceed 200 to 300 feet in height; but a short distance back they form a range of greater elevation, from 500 to 700 feet in height, and no where exceeding 1000 feet. The appearance of this part of the coast, from a vessel in the offing, is so much alike, that it is difficult to mase out one part of it from another. Mount St. John, lying N.E. ^ N., 1 1 miles from the mouth of the River St. John, is 1416 feet in height, and readily distinguished. Although this coast appears bold, it should be approached with caution, for there are several rocha along it, both above and under water; several of them are very dangerous, and nearly a mile from the shore. The River St. John. — The entrance of this river lies in latitude 50° 17' north, and lonffitude 64° 23' 30^' west; it is a large stream, frequented by fishing schooners early in the season. The entrance is 130 fathoms wide; between a sandy point on the east and clay-cliffs on the west, immediately within the entrance, the breadth increases to nearly ^ a mile, and then gradually decreases again, lliere are two log-houses on the west bank, about ^ a mile within the entrance, where the salmon fishermen reside, and vessels lie in 12 feet at low water, close to them. This river has a shifting bar, ^ a mile outside the entrance, rendering it impassable with south-westerly winds; there are only 3 or 4 feet on the bar at low water, and 7 to 10 feet at high water. There is good anchorage outside the bar, shoaling gradually to 3 fathoms } of a mile off*. Magpie Point lies W.N.W., 8 miles from the River St. John; between them is Magpie Bay, in which there is good anchorage with ofi-shore winds, in a moderate depth of water. Magpie River discharges itself by a rapid stream near the centre of the bay; the entrance is only 10 fathoms wide, and just within it there is a waterfall of 30 feet, so that even boats cannot enter. Nearly a mile westward of the river, and ^ of a mile off* shore, is a rockif shoal, on which the sea breaks; a heavy sea sets in with southerly winds. Ridge Point lies W.N.W. i W., 3 J miles from Magpie Point. From tl e former a long narrow rit^e extends 4^ miles to the westward, with 4 to 6 fathoms on it, all rocky ground; within this reef there is one large and several small islets. There are 20 fathoms just outside the ridge, and a heavy sea on it sometimes. SawbiU River is about 8 leagues to the westward of the River St. John. It may be distinguished by the peculiar hills on each side of it, which are barren, and also by the clay cliff's just within the entrance. It can only be entered in very fine weather: it then affords shelter for boats and small coasters. ShdUop River lies N.W. by W., 7J miles from Sawbill River. It only affords shel- ter for boats, and these can only enter when there is no surf. Off* this, as well as off" Sandy River, 2 J miles farther westward, there ar<3 severjj rocks, both above and under water; some of them lie full ^ a mile from the shore. Manitou RrvEE lies N.W. by W., 4^ miles from Shallop River, and 35 miles west- ward of St. John's River. It is the largest on the coast between the River St. John and Moisic. It may be readily known by a vessel when several leagues in the offing, by two remarkable patches of clay cliff"; one of these is close to the eastward, the other a mile to the northward of it. At a short distance within the entrance of this river, is one of the most magnificent waterfalls in Lower Canada; it falls 113 feet perpen- dicular in one unbroken sheet of water. There is good anchorage off" the river in fine weather, with off-shore winds, in 15 fathoms, the entrance bearing N.E. ^ E., 1^ mile; small vessels may anchor farther in-shore. There is a srnall rocky shoal lying W. by N., 2^ miles from the entrance of the river, about | of a mile from the land. B for ofB en Tlie Riicr St. John to Point dc Monts. 137 ,,t ii lOM tmost of is only ;ht; but feet in i8t, from lart of it be River 1 appears it, both lUe from ortb, and lers early I the east ;reases to BC9 on tbe csidoi and r, i a mile •e are only jre is good n them is moderate e centre of a waterfall i river, and lets in with 5 former a 18 on it, all There are m. It may and also by ne weather : affords shel- ls well as off re and under 5 miles west- ▼er St. John in the offing, ird, the other this river, is feet perpen- s river in fine L E., IJ mile; W. by N., ing Basin River lies W.N.W. i W., 10;{ miles from Manitou River; it is only fit fi.r boats. There are rapids j of a mile within the entrance. Cape Cormorant in \^ mile to the westward of Basin River. Reaskowltz Point is 5 J inUes W.N.W. i W. from Capo Cormorant; between them are llic Cornjorant Islets, joined to the shore at low water. The Cormorant Reef is dangerous; it has only 12 feet of water on it; it lies about a mile from the shore, and 2^ miles W. ^ N. from Cormorant Point. Point St. Charles is the eastern point of Moisic Bay. A reef runs off this point, which is extremely dangerous, by being so bolil, that there is no warning by the lead, and very little by the deep-sea lead. It is composed of numerous rocks, having deep water between them ; some of them are always above water, but the outermost aro always covered; these latter lie S.S.W., \ of a mile from Point St. Charles. Vessels beatmg here should guard against getting betialmed to the westward of this reef, lest the heavy S.W. swell should set them towards the reef, for the water is too deep to anchor, tdl close to the breakers. ., . Moisic Bay lies between Point St. Charles and Moisic River. It is 11 miles acrosi, having a depth of 50 or 60 fathoms between the points. Trout River is nearly in the centre of the bay. The eastern shores of this bay are rocky; but the western shore, from Trout River to Moisic River, is a bold sandy beach. Seal House Cove, on the east side of tbe bay, affords shelter only for boats. Moisic River enters the sea at the western point of the bay, Moisic Point forming the western side of the entrance. This is a larger river than St. John, but is much obstructed by sand-bars; it has about 9 feet at low water at the entrance, but boats cannot go far up the river, on account of the rapids. The tides rise here from 6 to 8 feet. Close to the bar of this river it is very steep, having 40 fathoms close to it. From Moisic Point a shoal runs off in ii westerly direction, 3^ miles, forming a large triangular shoal, of from 1 to 2 fathoms. Near the S.W. extremity lies the Moisic Roch, of only 9 feet; this lies 1? mile from the shore, and is extremely dangerous, being as bold as a wall on the south and S.W. sides, and can generally be seen in fine weather, from the chaige in the colour of the water. When a vessel is standing in towards this rock, she should tack when the north side of Manowin Island coined on with the south side of Great Boule Island, bearing W.N.W. ^ W.; you will then be a mile from the edge of the shoal. Sandy Point lies N.W. by W., 9 miles from the Moisic Rock ; between which lies Boule Bay, a place where vessels ought not to venture, on account of the southerly swell rolling in, as they would find it difficult to beat out. The East Rocks lie ni : the centre of Boule Bay ; they are low, bare of trees, and always above water. The SEVEN ISLAirBS lie directly before the beautiful bay of that name; they are very remarkable, being high, steep, and thinly wooded, and may be seen 7 or 8 leagues. The two easternmost islands are named the Great and Little Boule ; the former is 695 feet high; the passage between them is unsafe, on account of the baffling winds and strong tides. Westward of these are the two Basque Islands; Great Basque Island is 500 feet high. S.W. of the Basque Islands lie the Manowin and Carousel Islands; the former is 457 feet high, the latter is much lower, and is the south- ernmost of all the six islands. There are only six of these; but the peninsula which forms the western part of the bay, has every appearance of an island from a ship in the olHng, and is the highest, being 737 feet above the sea. This peninsula forms the west- ern point, and Sandy Point t lie eastern of this fine bay. SEVEN ISLANDS BAT is completely sheltered by the before-mentioned islands ; the entrance between Sandy Point on the east, and the high peninsula on the west, is 2J miles wide. A fine broad, bold, sandy beach extends for 3 miles northward from the east point of the bay, to the entrance of the principid river, near which stands the Hudson's Bay Company's trading post. You cannot see these houses from the outer parts of the bay ; but there is a wooden store on the beach, off which vessels usually anchor. This fine bay is sufficiently extensive for the largest fleets to lie in perfect safety, and so nearly land-locked as to resemble a lake. There are three channels leading into this bay, viz. : — The Eastern, Middle, and Western Channels. The eastern channel, between Sandy Point and Basque Island, is seldom used, having a rock in its centre, which is only covered at high tides, and a reef runs off to the eastward of the rock ^ of a mile, with G to 9 feet on it. The principal and best channel is the middle one, between Carousel and ^Manowin on the [N. Amekica— Part I.] T 1.38 Saifintj Dhrrtions from •' ) wont, nnd tho Daoquo Islands on tho cost; loiiving flio West Rwlcs nml Point Chasso on the pcninsuln, on jrour port hnnd, giving tlic latter point a berth of 1^ cable's hmgth, to uvoid a reef that runs oflT 1 20 fathoms. The cuurso through the middle channel into tho bay is north, by compass. Tho West Channel, though much narrower than tho middle one, is also free from danger, being f of a mile wide, between Point Croix and the West Rocks, off which there are two or three rocks lying a cable's length to the northward ; therefore civo the West Hocks a berth of 2 cables' length in passing. Tho obb-ti(lo is turned off towards those rocks by Point Croix, which must bo attended to. No loading-marks are necessary ; for simply by giving the shores a berth of 2 cables' length in every part, you may enter the bay with safety, even with tho largest of ships. With a scant wind from the north-wstward, this channel is preferable to tho Middle Channel, as it will save a goo The tide in the bay flows till Ih. 40m., full and change; spring-tides rise 9 feet, neaps 5 foot. Between the west point of Anticosti and Seven Islands Bay, the River St. Lawrence is 22 leagues wide, forming a clear open sea, without any danger whatever; but to tho westward of Seven Islands Bay the main land bends to tho southward, until it reaches Point dc M(^>nts, between which, and the opposite shore of Ca|)e Chatte, the river becomes contracted to about 8 leagues; the shore is bold all the way; but Point de Monts, and the land to the eastward of it, is somewhat lower than that to tho west- ward, j.nd there are a few places where vessels may occasionally anchor. St. Margarets Point lies W. ^ S., distant 4 leagues from Point St. Croix; between which is St. Margaret's Bay. Nearly in tho centre of the bay is tho river of that name, having a bar extending J of a mile from the entrance; although a largo stream, it only affords shelter for boats. St. Margaret's Point is rocky ^ of a mile off; and there is no warning by the lead, having no bottom at 68 fathoms within less than 2 miles of it. Oreat Cawee Island lies S.W. by W. ^ W., 16 miles from St. Margaret's Point. The coast between is low, and bordered with small islets and rocks close in-shore; but this part may be approached by the lear the Seven arable slant, in the river s rise 9 feet, 5t. Lawrence ; but to the ard, until it ktte, the river but Point de to the west- oix; between of that name, tream, it only and there ifl 2 miles of it. '8 Point. The lore; but this rs oft* this part L, and bare of lOuth of which 11 be sheltered in, and send in 1 too small for side of Great B mouth of the le north side of ly between the len you arrive bay which you water. Tlic Riccr St. John to Point do Mo/i(t. \S\) To enter thin anchovoffe from the wettwurd., the best and safeat way Ih to pnm l>etwct'n Little and Great Cawee falandM, hauling rlose round the wetit point of the latter into the anchorage. The tides run fair through between the main and the isliuids, seldom exceeding 1^ knot, but often less. JUtiffliah Point lies S.W. by W., 11 miles from Great Cawee Island; between wliicli is Lobster Bay, a good open roadstead. The anchorage is betwt^en Sproule Point, whicii lies } of A mile we3tward of Little Cawee Island, and the Crooked ulands. The N.K. {tart of this ba^ is an extensive Jiat, dry at low water, on which plenty of lobsturs are bund. Hero is room sufficient for the largest of ships. Penticost Uiver enters this bay about 1^ mile westward of the Crooked Islands; it affords shelter for boats, and even small vessels; but the entrance is only HO yards wide, and the ebb-tide runs out rapidly. From hence to English Point is u fine, bold, sandy beach. JSgff Island lies about S.S.W., 2 miles from English Point; between which lie the N.E. lieef ami North Itockti, which are low, narrow, and without trees; they are about } of A mile long, in a N.N.E. ^ E. direction. The North Koeks, which are always above water, lie 4 cables' length distant N.N.E. from the island, thence forming a black, low, narrow reef^ 3 cables' length in the same direction, both towards the main. A rei^f, under water, runs out from these rocks in a S.S.W. direction, 250 fathoms, leaving a very narrow channel Uttween them and the island, with ou)/ 3 fathoms in it. Tiie N.E. Reef runs off 6 cables' length from the N.E. part oi Egg Island, and is the greatest danger on the coast between Point de Monts and the Seven Islands; some of the rocks are awash at low tides. The island and the reefs form a natural breakwater, 1^ mile ^>ng, in o N.N.E. direc- tion; the northern end is jf of a mile from the main land, and the southern ner 'v a mile. Within, and westward of this breakwater, is good anchorage; but it is very > t.^eh narrowed by the /lata running off from the main, which, opposite to the north e^>il of Egg Island, is only about 370 fathoms. The best anchorage is to t'^ " S.W. of this narrow part, in 9 fathoms, sand. As the water is deep towards the ^ImJ and reefs, a ship snould have a good scope of cable with a westerly wind, lest t! ; aiiuhor should start, and you drive on the rocks before a second anchor can be let go ; with easterly winds you drag up hill, and there is not much danger of the anchor starting. You will lie sheltered from N.E. winds, with the S.W, end of Egg Island S.E. by S., and the inner side of the North Rocks N.E. The tides are very weak, from ^ to a knot. There is nothing in the way entering this anchorage from the southward, the south end of Egg Island being bold. If you nitend running through between the island and the main, stand to the northward to 8 or 9 fathoms, or until English Point is open ^ u point to the northward of the North Rocks ; then steer for English Point, givmg the niner side of the North Rocks a berth of a cable's length, until you have passed tliera ^ of a mile; you may then haul out to sea, not going to the southward of^ S.E. by E. till clear of tne N.E. Reef. You may run through this channel from the eastwartf, by reversing the directions. Calumet River lies 2A miles W. by S. of Egg Island. C'-ire are ree/s to the S.W. of the entrance a full mde, extending 600 fathoms from ii.: whore. Caribou Point lies 6^ miles southward of thi: river; on each side of this point are sandy coves, where pdot-boats find shelter, and often stop to look out for ships. TRINITY BAY lies N.E. by E., 2 leagues from 1 oint de Monts, and 5 miles south- westward of Caribou Point; it is a safe and converient anchorage for vessels unable to beat round Point de Monts with westerly winds; and pilots are often found waiting here for vessels bound upwards: but with easterly winds they take shelter in St. Augustine's Cove, about 1^ mile to the westward of the cape. On the N.E. point of the bay are also two large rocks; the northern one dries to the main with spring-ebbs, but the southern one dries nearly ^ of a mile to the southward of the point. This bay is 3 miles round, and there is a river falls into it, where good water may be obtained; another stream may also be found about ^ a mile to the west- ward of the west point of the bay. Wood is abundant. To sail into Trinity Bay, either from the S.W. or N.E., come not nearer either shore than 15 fathoms until the bay opens; then haul in, and anchor in 7 fathoms, with the lighthouse on Point de Monts bearing S.W. by W. Small vessels may anchor in 3 fathoms, iust within the reef, the western point bearing S.W.; and largo vessels may take a berth tt little farther out. v ' T 2 140 Sailing Directions from M i POnrr DE BZOXTTS UOHTROUSE stands 5 miles south-westward of Trinity Bay, and 1^ mile N.E. by E. ^ E, from the extremity of the cape; it stands low down and close to the sea, is of the usual form, nearly white; the lantern is elevated 100 feet above the level of the sea, and shows a bright fixed light, which may be seen 6 or 7 leagues. A led^e of rocks lies off Point de Monts S.W. from the light, and S.E. from the extremity of the point, and ^ a mile from the shore; there is only 9 or 10 feet water on it. Another rock, of 2 fathoms, lies ^ a mile from the light, and there is another rock nearly as faroff as the light to theE.S.E. These rocks are dangerous at night when round- ing the lifjht in thick weather; come no nearer to them than 15 fathoms at any time. Vessels bemg to the eastward, in a dark night, when the land cannot be seen, should tack when the light bears W.S.W., or even W. by S., if they are as near as Trinity Bay. Vessels to the westward of the light should tack as soon as it bears E. ^ N.; when it bears east, it will be shut in by the land. St. Augustine's Cove lies 1^ mile to the westward of Point de Monts; it only affords shelter for boats, and pilots are often found here waiting with easterly winds. The land begins to rise considerably immediately you are to the westward of Point de Monts. CAPE ST. NICHOLAS, a high, bare point, bears W. by N., 17 miles from Point de Monts; and 3 miles north-eastward from the cape is St. Nicholas Harbour; this is a narrow inlet between granite hills, 500 to 700 feet high, and runs in the direction of N.W. ^ N., 1 ^ mile. This harbour is very secure, and a vessel might be laid on shore and repaired as if she were in a dock. The entrance is 75 fathoms wide, and within the harbour 190 fathoms. The shoals on the east side of the entrance dry out so far as only to leave a channel 30 fathoms wide, with 5 feet in it at low water, spring-tides ; but at high water there are 14 to 17 feet, bottom of sand. There are some large stones which can be seen and avoided, if not water enough to go over them. In the deepest part of the harbour are 9^ fathoms. From Cross Point, the western point of the entrance, which is bold, the shoal water extends across a small bay to the westward of the point 400 fathoms, and off shore 100 fathoms. The anchorage between the shoals off the harbour's mouth is too much confined for large ships, being only about 3 cables' length in width, but the ground is good and depth moderate ; here you may anchor, and prepare for warping in. To enter this harbour from the bay, bring Cross Point, on which is placed a small wooden cross, to bear N.N.E. : steer for it, takmg care to leave it from 30 to 50 yards on your port hand; if the wind is free enough, you must continue to run on at the same distance from the shore, on the west side, until you deepen the water. If, when rounding the point, you meet with baffling winds out, you must immediately run a line on shore on the west side ; if getting stern way, drop your anchor under foot, then warp into deeper water. The har^ which commences at Cross Point, continues 200 fathoms within it, and the channel is rendered narrow by the shoals off the eastern side. In order to have the most room, you should anchor farther in than the three large rooks which will be seen on the eastern side of the harbour. To leave this harbour you should have a N.W. wind, or take the advantage of the land-breeze, or a calm morning, to warp out. The best wind to enter with is from W.S.W. ; a S.E. wind, if blowing fresh, causes too much sea in the entrance, and a N.W. wind blows right out. It is high water, full and change, Ih. 55m., spring-tides rise 12 feet, neap-tides 7 feet. Water can be easily uL tained on the eastern side of the harbour, or at the head of the harbour at high water. Point St. Giles lies W. by N., 13^ miles from Cape St. Nicholas: li is high and rocky, similar to the coast to the eastward; but Manicouagan Point, which lies W.S.W. ^ W., 17 J miles from the cape, is low, and thickly wooded, with a broad sandy beach ex- tending to the westward all the way to Outard Bay. The above change in the coast line is an excellont guide to warn mariners of their approach towards the Manicou- agan Shoal. The entrance to Manicouagan Bay lies between the before-mentioned points, and is all dry at low water, except a few narrow channels leading up the river. The ebb-tide runs out over Manicouagan Bar, to the eastward, at the rate of 1^ knot, and the flood is nearly as strong. Manicouagan Shoat. is of sand, with many large bouldeis on its eastern and southern parts; the easternmost point of (his extensive and dangerous sAoaHies E.S.E., The River St. John to Point de Monts. 141 Trinity (v down 100 feet 6 ;n or rom the it water her rock 1 round- ny time, should Trinity E.iN.; affords h. The Point de )m Point r; this is 'ection of on shore rithin the ut so far ing-tides ; 'ge stones le deepest nt of the westward tween the mly about 2 you may cd a small yards on t the same If, when run a line , then warp 00 fathoms 1 side. In large rocks you should lorning, to if blowing t. tides 7 feet, lead of the and rocky, S.W-iW., T beach ex- in the coast B Manicou- -mentioned p the river, of IJ^ knot, ;astern and lies E.S.E., 2 J miles from St. Giles Point, and E. by N., 54 miles from the N.E. part of Manicou- agan Point. From the south point of tne shoal it continues to the westward, curving with the land past Outard Point full 16 miles, and extending from the shore from 2 to 2 J miles. Near to Outard Point are all sand and clay cliffs. The tide of flood and ebb sets all along the edges of this shoal, but it is not perceptible more than 5 or 6 miles off shore. Great ripplings are frequently met with without the edges of this shoal, particularly off its south point. Bersimis Point lies S.W. by W., 10 miles from Outard Point, between which is the large Bay and River Outard; this river is full of shallows, and only fit for boats. Anchorage may be had in Outard Bay, on the west side, in 14 fathoms, with Bersimis Point bearing S.W. by W., distant 3^ miles; but the water in this bay is generally too deep for anchorage, and being open to easterly winds, cannot be recommended. Bersimis River has sand bars and shoals 1^ mile without the entrance, which dry at low water, and is, therefore, of no use to shipping. Immediately without these shoals the water becomes suddenly very deep (50 or 60 fathoms) within a mile from them. This point is low, of sand, and wooded with spruce-trees; it is difficult to be seen at 'night, and the lead affords no warning, rendering this point very dangerous when beating up at niglit or in foggy weather. From the south point of Bersimis, Point Mille Vache bears S.W. by W. J W., 29 miles. Jeremy Island lies 5^ miles W. I N. from Bersimis Point : a low sandy shore extends all the way between them. The island itself is low and rocky ; and close to the shore, on the main, within the island, is a trading post of the Hudson's Bay Com- pany, the houses of which may be seen 6 miles distant. Just to the eastward of Jeremy Island is a remarkable white patch in the land, which, in fine weather, looks like a church, and is a sure mark for the island. Cape Colomhier lies 5 miles to the westward of Jeremy Island ; between them is a rocky and broken shore. Off this cape lies the Gtdnare Shoal, discovered in 1830; it is a narrow ridge of granite rock, nearly 2 miles long, running parallel to the shore, having 2 to 3 fathoms over it at low water; it is very dangerous; there are 23 fathoms close to its S.W. end, and 4 to 5 fathoms between it and the shore. Wildfowl Reef lies 4 miles S.W. by W. ^ W. from Cape Colombier; it is a large bed of rocks, extending ^ of a mile from the shore. Vessels should be careful when standing in towards this part of the coast from Wildfowl Reef to the Gulnare Shoal; 30 fathoms is near enough to approach this part. Baie de Laval lies 4 miles to the westward of Wildfowl Reef; it will be easily known by a rocky island off its mouth, and the clay cliffs to the S.W. of it. The bay within is all dry at low water. Vessels may safely stand towards it; 10 fathoms being 2^ miles from the shore. Off the clay cliffs there is good anchorage, in 6 or 7 fathoms. Port Neuf lies to the south-westward of Baie de Laval, and has another fur trading and fishing establishment belongin<; to the Hudson's Bay Company ; this port stands 4 miles north-eastward of Point Mille Vache; and the houses and a small church can be plainly seen from a vessel in the offing. About J of a mile S.S.E. from the church, upon a low narrow peninsula, there is a clump of pine-trees; this peninsula runs N.N.E. for about 2 miles, and joins the remarkable clay cliffs before mentioned. U'here is 7 to 12 feet water between the main and the peninsula at high water. Here small vessels may find good shelter, by laying aground on the sand at low water. POINT MILLE VACHE lies S.W., 4 miles from Point Neuf; it is low, sandy, and wooded with spruce-trees. The shoals off this point narrow the navigable channel between them and Bicquette, on the opposite side, to Hi miles; both sides are bold-to, and the greatest attention to the soundings, and a good look-out, are absolutely neces- sary to a vessel running tip in dark nights or foggy weather. A revolving light has lately been established m Bicquette Island. Bersimis Point bears from Father Point (the pilots' rendezvous,) N. | E., distant 24 miles ; and from Barnaby Island, N. by E. \ E., distant 25 miles. Here veosels, with the wind at west, and a flood-tide, may cross over, and engage a pilot for the river; should the wind be S.W. by W., they will do well to keep the northern land on board, until they can make certain of fetching Father Point. The current is always strong between Mille Vache and Bicquette, running to the N.E. 142 Sailing Directions from AVhcn abreast of Point Mille Vache, or near it, the island of Bic will bear S.S.E. The tide flows at Mille Vache Point, full and change, at 2h. lOra. Spring-tides rise 12 feet, neaps 7 feet. ' THE SOUTHERN SHORE OF THE RIVER ST. LAWRENCE, FROM CAPE GASPE TO THE ISLAND OF BIC. V SOUTH CHANNEL.— The coast of the district of Gaspe is high, bold, and rugged, steep-to, and totally destitute of harbours. About 2 leagues to the northward of Cape Gaspe is Cape Rosier; it is a low rocky point, but the shoal water only runs off about 1^ of a mile. In the bay to the southward, at the distance of If mile, there is a reefxnns off ^ a mile. Vessels may find anchorage here in 14 to 7 fathoms, sheltered by the cape from N.W. winds, but the ground is not very good. There are fishery esta- blishments near the cape. ; , ■ Oriffin^s Cove lies N.N.W. from Cape Rosier, distant 6^ miles ; it is of no use to shipping; but boats belonging to the fishermen find shelter in this small bay, whose houses may be seen around it. Wood and water might be obtained here. Great Fox River lies 3 miles farther north-westward; it is only a small brook, which enters a little bay, having reefs off each point. Vessels might anchor off this place in the summer months. Here is a small settlement, where wood, water, and provisions might be had; the houses will be seen on its banks. Great Pond River lies N.W. ^N., 16 miles from Great Fox River; it is only a small creek, affording shelter to boats; it may be known by the houses and stages of the fishermen. Magdalen River lies N.W. ^ W., 24 miles from Great Pond; the mouth of this river is on the N.W. side of a sandy bay, close under Cape Magdalen, its N.W. point, off which a reef runs south-eastward 2 cables' length. This is a considerable stream, and sometimes visited by shallops and schooners of 80 tons ; at spring- tides dB feet water can be carried into this river. Vessels may anchor, in 7 fathoms, off the mouth of this river, in fine weather, at | of a mile from the sandy beach. Mount St. Louis River lies W.N.W., 16 miles from the Magdalen River, and is a much smaller stream, falling into a little bay, a mile wide, where vessels may anchor in fine weather in from 8 to 16 fathoms, mud, towards the west side, good holding ground; but it cannot be recommended to large vessels. You may easily know when you are off this river, by four lai^e openings in the high land within the space of 10 miles; the westernmost opening is Pierre River, the next, eastward, is Claude, then Mount Louis, and, to the eastward. Great Matte River. CAPE ST. ANN lies 26 miles farther to the westward. The mountains of St. Ann commence about 4 leagues south-westward of the cape, and continue in that direction 10 or 12 leagues; in clear weather they may be seen 80 or 90 miles; the highest peak lies 14 miles within Cape Chatte, and is 3,973 feet above the level of the sea. It is the highest land in British North America. There is a settlement at St. Ann's River, about 3^ leagues E.N.E. from Cape Chatte, where a few families reside, who are always readv to afford the mariner assistance, if required; but the little river of St. Ann's, as well as that near Cape Chatte, are both barred at the entrance, and afford very little advantage to shipping; but the former may be entered by small schooners at high water. The latter, called Cape Chatte River, becomes almost dty at low water, except one spot, where 10 feet water may occasion- ally be found; these rivers are therefore little frequented. CAPE CB/LTTE is a remarkable headland, in latitude 49° 6' north, and longitude 66° 49' west, and known by a short sugar-loaf hill upon it; it is the most northerly point of land (by compass) on the south side of the River St. Lawrence, but the laud that surrounds it, as well as that behind, is much more elevated. This shore, along the whole extent from Cape Gaspe to Cape Chatte, although free from danger, should be particularly guarded against in dark nights, or in foggy wea- ther; for all along it the water is too deep to afford sufficient warning by the fead for the safety of vessels ; and should a vessel get on shore on this rocky coast, even if S.S.E. -tides rise INCE, 1(1 rugged, thward of ly runs off there is a , sheltered shery esta- F no use to aay, whose Great Fox ters a little le summer ;ht be had; mly a small jgea of the )f this river '. point, off tream, and feet water )uth of this and is a anchor in ng ground; en you are miles; the )unt Louis, of St. Ann it direction jhest peak . It is the Upe Chatto, sistance, if , are both the former atte River, f occasion- 1 longitude ; northerly t the laud hough free (bggy wea- le lead for 1st, even if C j t i J r r s: a t< o t< ai C(qye Gaspe to the Island of Bic. 145 -ock lying k stands a as a large be within jcfs which thward off :om shore, f the bank und is all the coves of rocks; le 13 feet, , the land mile from (vrith clean nt Camille 5., 8 miles, St, and the jcked with lace is the le, with the 3use to the ween them eir cargoes ky Church ^.E.; good T the east arge stone the reef by he body of essels may nd of this nds on the the main, 3 fathoms )luff island uthoms at clean good el between ow water, m through jither end. The tide n Barnaby le Church ;s directly he first is 3., distant due north [1 the east \ fi'om the Between Barnaby and Bic Island lies the River Ottey and Old Bic Harbour. The Biver Ottey bears S.W. from Barnaby, distant about 5 miles, and is of little use to ship- ping except to water at. Old Bic is to the westward of Ottey River, about 3 miles, and is a very good place for small vessels to lie sheltered from westerly winds. This harbour has two round islands on the east side of it, and it is §^ of a mile from them to the west side of the harbour; anchor midway between the westernmost island and the west side of the harbour in 3 fathoms at low water, the west point bearing west, distant ^ of a mile. When coming from the N.W. for this anchorage, keep the westernmost of the two round islands, its own breadth open to the eastward of the west point of the harbour ; this will lead you clear of the eastern rock of the Cape Arignole Reef; this is the only danger in the way. A single family resides here, who occasionally can furnish you with provisions, if necessary. Cape Arignole bears from the Harbour of Old Bic due west, and is distant about 2^ miles. From the cape runs out a reefSi. by N., a mile, and the east part of that reet^ the west point of Old B'c Hatbou'*, and the west end of the island of Bic, are in a direct line, bearing W.N.W. and E.S.E.; the distance from the east end of the reef to Old Bic Harbour is a mile. To the S.E. of the cape is a bay, of no use to shipping, being all foul ground and shoal wf ;r. Another good leading-mark to clear the eastern reef of Cape Arignole, going in aud out of Old Bic Harbour, is to keep the swashway in the S.E. part of Old Bic Harbour, open to the eastward of the west point of the harbour, bearing E.S.E. \ S., in 4 fathoms water, spring-tides. The swashway here mentioned is made by a river running down between the mountains. Just to the westward of the swasnway the land appears like chalk, but it really is a white barren rock. It forms a very good mark for small vessels coming down from the westward, and intending to anchor at Old Bic, as the east part of the reef of the cape is covered at high water, and is all rocks^ which dry at low water. The high land of Bic, which lies to the southward of Cope Arignole, is 1234 feet above the sea,« and bears S.W. by S., about 2^ miles from the JS .W. point of the cape. The island op BIC is moderately high, and well clothed with trees : its length, east and west, is about 3 miles, and it is surrounded on the east, west, and north sides by dangerous reefs. Off its northern shore lies a woody islet, \ a i.vle long and 100 feet high, called Bicquette; this is nearly a mile distant from Bic Island: there is a nar- row channel for vessels between them, but it has several rocks in it, rendering it in- tricate and dangerous for a stranger to attempt. The best time to pass through is at low watei , when the dangers show ; by keeping mid-channel between them you will have .5 to 9 fathoms, ii regular soundings. The northern side of Bicquette is steep-to, and there are 15 fathoms water at a inuskel-shot distance from it. On Bicquette Islet is a revolving light, of the lirst class, shown every night from the 15th of April to the 15th of December in each year. The tower is 70 feet high, and the light stands 130 feet above the level of the sea, the N.W. Reef bearing from it due west, 1^ mile. This light revolves at regular intervals of 2 minutes. A gun (a 9-pounder) is placed near the lighthouse, and will be fired every hour during foggy weather and snow-storms. Bicquette and Bic Reefs. — Two reefs run off from the west end of Bicquette Islet, called the West and N. W. Reefs. The West Reef lies in a S W. by W. i W. direction. There are two large rocks above water, and a third that covers at high water; these extend in a line, nearly a mile from the island. The N.W. Reef is the greatest danger; it lies due west from the west end of the island, 1^ mile. The north extreme of Cape Arignole, kept open of the west end of Bic, clears the N.W. Reef to the westward ; this reef just covers at high water, and is bold on the north side. The S.E. Reef of Bic runs off from the east end of the island If mile in an E. by S. direction, and has three rocks at its outer pait, always above water; these rocks are bold on the north and south sides. The N.E. Reef of Bic is a smsW patch of black rocks, which show at low water, and lie 400 fathoms N.E. by E. from the N.E. point of the island. To clear this reef to the eastward, keep both the Bicoques Islets on the east side of Old Bic Harbour, open to the eastward of the S.E. Reef. The West Ground of Bic extends from the west end of the island W. ^ S., nearly | of a mile, and may be approached by the lead to 5 fathoms. Captain Bayfield, R.N., says " There is excellent anchorage under either end of Bic, and also between it and the main land, according to the wind; and vessels which may [N. America — Part I.] U 140 '* lilimj Directions from I beat down the estuary be met with an easterly wind, had better anf hor, than attempt to bet in long and foggy nights of the fall of the y{ ar. More shipwrecks have happened in consequence of vessels obstinately endeavouring to beat down against an easterly gale, with its accompanying fog, than from any otbor cause, and yet all that they may gain by such a course, might be run in a few hours of a fair wind." The new revolving li";ht on Bicquette will be of the greatest service in pointing out this anchorage at night. 'Fhe tides in the Bic Channel flow, full and change, at 2h. 15m.: its velocity at sprmg- tides is about l^knot, but strongest near the mam; but between Bicquette arid Crccn Island, the eddy flood-tide runs a the eastwnrd. FROM BIC ISLAND, ALONG THE SOUTHERN SHORE, WITH TilE ISLANDS, ROCKS, AND SHOALS IN THE RIVER, TO QUKBEO. The ALCIDES ROCK. — This i& a danger on which H IVi. ship Alrules is t imposed to hf.ve struck in 1760, and on which there are only 4 feet at ]>w water; It is standing on a shoal 100 fathoms long, and about 60 fathojris wide : i'nia small but dangerous rock lies muck Sn the way of vessels passing through the Bic Channel. It is bola-to, and lies S.W., 3J miles from the west point of Bic, and W. ^ S., 4| mi!. .3 i'nm the N.W. point of Cape Arigiiolc, and is about If mile from tlic southern 3i;ore. S.W., distant a mile from Cape Arignole, lies the east side of the lUy Ha-IIa; it is about f of a mile wide and 1 (hep. Smaij vessels may anchor with tl;t'. ejist part AVest end of Crane Island Shoal, red, in 3;^ fathoms, St. Thomas's Church bearing S.S.E.^E.; Middle Island and Crow Island in one ; and the south side of Crane Island bearing E. by N. North extremity of St. Thomas's Shoal, black, in 3^ fathoms, St. Thomas's Church bearing S. f E.; Haystack Island in one with the west end of Crane Island; and Point St. Yalliere and Belle Chasse touching. East end of the oa^cA, east end of Beaujeu Bank, white, in 3 fathoms, Onion Island bearing N.W. by W. ^ W. ; and the south side of Crane Island S.W. by W. i W. Patch off St. John's Church in the Traverse, black, in 3| fathoms, St. John's Church bearing S. by E. ; the high rock off Goose Island Reef, just shut in behind the south point of the South Pillar, bearing S.W. ^ W. Middle of St. Rogue's Shoal, in the Traverse, black, in 3^ fathoms, the east end of Coudre Island in one with Riviere de I'Eglise, on the north shore, bearing N. ^ W. ; the wood pillar, shut in its own breadth with the south side of Groose Island, bearing S.W. \ w. West end of the Middle Ground, north side of the Traverse, red, in 3 fathoms ; the east end of Coudre Island in one with Riviere de I'Eglise, bearing N. i W. ; the wood pillar and Goose Island touching. West end of Hare Island Shoal, red, in 4 fathoms; Eamourasca Church a little open to the westward of the large island of Kamourasca; the north side of Hare Island Reef in one with the north side of Hare Island, bearing N.E. ^ N. North extremity of the Pilgrim Bank, black, in 4J fathoms, with the west end of Hare Island and the west end of the Great Pilgrim in a line, bearing N.N.W.^ W. and S.S.E. i E.; the west end of the Brandy Pots and White Island touching. The Knoll, at the east end of Hare Island Reef, red, in 3^ fathoms; the south side of Hare Island and the middle of White Island in one ; the west end of Hare Island bearing N.W. ^ W. East end of Middle Bank, off the south side of Hare Island, white, 1^ fathom, the east end of Brandy Pots bearing N.W. ^ W. ; the west end of Hare Island in one with the summit of the Eboulemens Mountains, bearing W.S.W. ^ W. The east end of Red Island Reef, red, in 5^ fathoms, the south side of Red Island in one with the north side of Hare Island; and the beacon on Green Island open a little to the eastward of the lighthouse. N.B. Depths are at low water, spring-tides. j ,•- yi x ,1' / •,f ,• U2 148 Sailing Directions from !; Notice is hereby given, in order better to distinguish the channels of the River St. Lawrence, during the ensuing and following seasons of the navigation, all the buoys on the north side will be painted red, and those on the south faide will be painted black, with the following exceptions, viz. : — ,. {^ i ■ < I .^ . jhcoi; W t^st end of Madame Island Shoal, a red buoy. ' ' i r ; »< We^t end of Beaujeu Bank, a whitu buoy. East end of the patch, east of Boaujeu Bank, a white buoy. Patcii in the Traverse, chequered white-and-black buoy. " ' West end of Hare Island Bank, a red buov. East end of the Middle Bank, off the south side of Hare Island, a white buoy. Barret's Ledge, a chequered white-and-black buoy. East end of White Island Reef, a black buoy. . ., ; ; i East end of Red Island Reef, a red buoy. — Trinity House, Quebec, August I4th, 1848. CACANA is the high bluff land lying S.S.W. from the S.W. end of Green Island: the water between is deep. At l^ mile to the westward of Cacana, and just to the northward of the stream of it, lie the Perce or Percy Rocks; these form two clusters, about 1^ mile in extent; they are distant from the main nearly a mile, and are almost covered at high water; but there is a narrow passage to the southward of them, with 3^ fathoms in. You will always go clear of them to the northward, by keeping in not less than 8 fathoms water. BARRETS LEDGE is two detached rocks. On the south-western rock lies a che- quered black-and-white buoy, having the northern extremity of the main land within Green Island, in a line with the northernmost high land of Cape Arignole, bearing N. 64° E.; the summit of the southernmost mountain in the Highland of Kamourasca, in one with the south point of the Great Pilgrim Island, S. SCr" VV. ; the eastern side of the trees on Hare Island, in one with the west cape of the Bay of Rocks, on the north shore, N. 47° W.; and two houses near the River du Loup, S. 29° E.; the latter are the only two houses between the church and River du Loup. These rocks are distant from each other ^ of a mile, bearing N. 63° E., and S. 63° W. ; the N.E. rock has 10 feet water over it, and the S.W. rock only 12, while between them are 8 fathoms. The leading-mark through this part of the channel, leaving the Barret's Ledge and Middle Ground to the northward, and Percy Rocks and Pilgrim Shoal to the south- ward, is Green Island lighthouse, just shutting in with the S.W. point of the island, N.E. JE. RED ISLAND. — This is a low, flat, reddish-looking island, without trees, and not above 20 feet above the level of high water mark. It is surrounded with shoals, except its S.W. side, which is bold; but the rocky reef at its east end run" N.E., 2^ miles. You may anchor in 10 fathoms S.E. of this latter reef, in good hoiding- f round. This island is situated nearly in the middle of the river, bearing from Green sland lighthouse W.N.W., distant 5^ miles; while the outer or eastern extremity of the reefs about it bears from the same lighthouse N.W. by N. A lighthouse is erected on Red Island, bearing a red fixed light. • -- = - . A buoy, painted red, has been lately laid down near the east end of Red Island Reef; it lies in 5^ fathoms, with the south side of Red Island in one with the north side of Hare Island; and the beacon on Green Island open a lit . o to the eastward of the lighthouse. WHITE ISLAND.— This is a small island lying S.W. ^ AV. from Red Island, distant 3^ leagues, being round and covered with trees. A reef of rocks extends N.E. ^ E., full 5 miles from the east end of Hare Island, drying to about half that distance ; a black buoy is placed at the N.E. end of thb reef. Midway between the Red Island and this reef are 20 and 15 fathoms. It may be proper to remark here, that from the east part of Red Island Reef to the west part of liare Island Reef, a distance of 32 miles, the river is, by these islands and reefs, divided into two channels; that to the south-eastward is the ono most commonly fre- quented, the other, to the north-westward, having strong tides, deep water, and no good anchorage. The north channel is without buoys or lights; but in the south channel a vessel can anchor almost any where above Green Island, at any time when it may be necessary. ■--> . -, -i.^..*», . j,a ■», >.iii=- * . .t. Sic Island to Quebec. 149 1 HARE ISLAND lies S.W. ^ S., distant only IJ mile from White Island; thence it extends to the 8.W., 7^ miles, in no part exceeding in breadth a mile, but in several places not equalling ^ a mile. S. by W., a mile from the east end of Hare Island, lies the southernmost of some small islets, called the Brandy Pots, on which a telegraph is erected. The northernmost Brandy Pot is close to the southern one ; it is high, and covered with trees; the southernmost is a whitish rocA, nearly barren: they are each about ^ a mile long, lying N.W. and S.E. of each other, the ground between them drying at low water; they lie nearly ^ of a mile from the south side of Hare Island, with only a passage for boats between. A little to the east of the northern Brandy Pot is the Noggin, a small islet, covered with trees ; at low water these are connected by a chain of rocha, leaving a passage only fit for boats. Half-way between the Noggin and the east end of Hare Island is a reef of rod , which dries ot low water; it lies close to Hare Island, and therefore not in the way oi shipping, aud by keeping in 7 futhoniH, you will always go clear. To the westward of the Brandy Pots the south side of Hare Island has &fiot of hard ground extending from it, being 4 miles long and nearly ^ a mile broad. The whole of this side of the island is be ..ided by rocka. MIDDLE GROUND.- 3outh-westward of Barret's Ledge, and between Hare Island and the main land, lies a shoal, called the Middle Ground; its N.E. end begins where the Brandy Pots bear N.W., distant 2 miles ; it runs S.W. by W. from thence about 5 miles. The least water on its N.E. part is 10 feet, on which a white buoy has been placed, with the east end of the Brandy Pots bearing N.W. ^ W., and west end of Hare Island W.S.W. j V.; on its middle are 3 fathoms, and on its western end 4 fathoms. The anchorage upon it is good in fine weather. HARE ISLAND SHOAL. — This is a long shoal, bemnning about a mile above the west end of Hare Island and running up in a S.W. by W . direction, full 9 miles ; a con- siderable part of it becomes dry at low water : this dry part is about 2^ miles in extent, and lies on the northern part of the bank ; it is covered with grass and spruce bushes, and is about 2^ miles S.W. from Hare Island. There is good anchorage on the south side of this bank, in 7 fathoms. The west end of the reef bears from the west end of the Pilgritns N.W. by N., 3^ miles ; but the bank, of 2 to 2 J fathoms, runs nearly 4 miles farther, in a S.W. direction, and is now marked by a red buoy, which lies with Kamourasca Church a little open to the westward of the large island of Kamourasca. Near the east end of this bank is a hnoll, of 12 feet, on which a red buoy is placed; it lies with the west end of Hare Island N.W. i W., about 1^ mile. About ^ of a mile eastward of the buoy, is another hnoll, of 3 fathoms ; there is a narrow channel between the S.W. end of Hare Island and the bank, with 3^ to 4 fatlioras in it. From the east end of Hare Island Bank a narrow bank, with only 3^ to 4 f ithoms on it at low water, extends to the north-eastward 5 miles, to the Middle Knoll, on which a white buoy (before mentioned) is now placed; between this bank and the islond are from 10 to 18 fathoms. Heavy ships should not attempt to cross the Middle Bank at low water, spring-tides. The PILGRIMS are five islands, connected together by reefs, that become dry at low water; they occupy a space of about 4^ miles, and are distant 1^ mile from the main ; but there is no passage between them and the south land. The N.E. of Great Pilgrim bears from the Brandy Pots S. 18° W., distant 7 miles, and from the S.W. end of Hare Island S. 36° E., distant 4^ miles; this is the highest island, and covered with trees ; the others appear white and barren. The south-westernmost, or Long Island, has a telegraph upon it, and lies in the direction of S.W. and N.E. ; its west end bears from the west end of Hare Island S. by W. ^ W., 6 miles; they are all bold-to on the northern side. PiLGSiM Shoal is a narrow bank, about 4 miles in length, lying without the edge of the Loup Bank; it has from 12 to 15 feet upon it; its west end lies abreast of the mid- dle of the Pilgrims. The north extremity of this shoal is now marked by % black buoy ; it lies in 4^ fathoms, with the west end of Hare Island and the west end of the Great Pilgrim in a line, bearing N.N.W. ^ W. and S.S.E. ^ E. The leading-mai'k through, between Pilgrim Shoal and Hare Island, is the north side of Burnt Island just open of Grand Island, bearing S.W. ^ W. KAMOURASCA ISLANDS.— These are a collection of small islands lying off the south side of the river, between the Pilgrims and Cape Diable, and in front of the 150 Sailing Din'ctions from church and acttluuicnt of Kamuurasca. The Great or N.E. iBland bears from the weatera Filj^iin S.W. by W., ditttunt 2 leiigucH; there it a bank extending from one to the other, with 2 fathoniH upon it, called the Bank of Andre; if« northern edge is 8tee|)- to: the second is called Burnt Inland, and lieH to the westward of (treat iHlaud; on its western end is a telegraph. Crow Island lies S.y.W from the west end of IJuvat Island, distant } of a mile: there are also two lesser islk.idii ut the inner side of liurnt IsUnd. These islands occui _, a Hpace of .1 miles, and are about 1^ mile from shore, the bank between drying ut low water. Great and liurnt Islands are both bold and steep-to on the north siue; but Crow Island had shoal water around it, and bears from Kamourasca Church N.W., distant ^ of u mile; between is a »afe Itinding-pluce. After passing Kamourasca, the edge of the south bank may be easily ibUuwed, m 7 luthoms, or in 10 fathoms with u large ship, up to St. Ann's buoy. From Crow Island Cape Diable boara S.W. ^ W., distant nearly 3 miles; but from tht cape, in the direction of CrOfV Island, runs a rocky reef, the easternmost \nirt of which is covered at a nuarter-flood. At 2^ miles above Cape Diable is Point St. Denis, to the southward of wnich is a little cove. There is good riding op{M}tite this cove, at 1| mile from the shore, in from 6 to 8 fathoms. The land from St. Denis runs S.W. to Point Ouelie, and is all low, with rock» scat- tered before it. Point Ouelie has a rockyi reef attatched to it, which stretches out west and soutli-westerly. All the way to St. Itoque large stones are scattered through- out this mud-bank. Hounding this point you win open the lUver Ouclle, on the eastern banks of which is a church and settlement ; from Cape Diable to Point Ouelie the dis- tance is 8 miles. Nearly 8 miles to the south-westward of Point Ouelie, is Point lloijue. A sand-bank stretches out from this latter point full 4 miles, and continues full that distance from the shore, to the eastward, as far as Point Ouelie; near the north extremity of this bank, and N.N.W., about 4^ miles from Cape Ronue, the light- vessel is moored, which must be always left on your port or south side, when bound upwards. Between Points Ouelie and St. Rotjue is an extensive bay, cominoniv known by the -name of St. Ann's Bay; it is shallow all over; for a mmly Jtat^ beginning at Point Quelle, extends itself so far as the bay off St. Koque ; this dat is studded with sunken rockgy and is very dangeiouii. ' The northern SHORE, /rom Point MiUe Vache to Coudre Island.— Ths course and distance across the bav of Mille Vache to Esquimine Islets is S.W. J W., about IH miles; these islets consult of two largo rocks, having three siuall ones nearly a mile S.W. of them. From i" ase islets to the entrance of Saguenay River, the course is nearly S.W. by W., 22 miles. Little Bergeron lies 16 miles from the Escpiiuiines, between which the coast is clear, excepting a Jlat which occupies a buy on the west side of Cape Boudesir; but this lies so close in as to be little in the way, and ihero are 50 fathoms water very near the rocks on this part of the coast. Great and Little Ber- geron are two coves only separated by a point; they are full of rock-f, and dry at low water. Point Vache, the east point of Saguenay Itiver entrance, lies 6 miles S.W. of Little Bergeron. The high clay cliffs at this point, named Saguenay Cliffs, may be readily known; you may anchor, with these cliffs bearing W. by S., distant 3 miles, in 7 fathoms, with the S.W. end of Green Island and Red Islet in one, nearly a mile off shore; but immediately without this you fall into deep water. A black buoy is placed on a l2-/eet patch, off Vache Reef; to be left on tiie right hand when entering the Saguenay. In working up between the Esquimines and Red Islet Reef, oliserve, the flood does not extend above 5 or 6 miles from the north shore; therefore, keep within that dis- tance. The tides here are regular, and off Bergeron spring-tides run 2 to 3 knots. Should you be suddenly caught to the northward of Red Islet Reef by a shift of wind to the eastward, so that you ';aniiot fetch round the east end of the reef and gain the south channel, you may safely bei:r up and run to the westward, by giving Red Island, White Island, and Ilare Island, with its reefs, a berth of 2 miles, on your port hand, in passing. When you are 10 miles to the westward of Hare Island, you may safely haul across for the south channel. Observe, that by keepin"; Kamourasca Church just open to the westward of Grand Island, bearing S. by W. ^ W., you will clear the S.W. end of Hare Island Reef, (on which a red buoy ia placed,) in 3 fathoms at low water. As the river is all clear to the westward, there is no necessity for hauling across r Bic Islatid to Quehvc. 151 2W> tho so niuir to the reef. Tlirro ih anchoriige olung tho north Hideof Ilarc IslanJ, in 6 to 8 iiithoiiiB watk^r, but thin is pretty closu in. ImpK Point in tho S.W. point of tho o\ ' ance of Safni, untilit ioius the Great Coudre Dank, which, at the went end of the island, is 'A^ .uir4 wide. This bank extends all the way to the liurnt Cape Ledges, u diHtance of 6 leasues; its northern edge, which is nearly straight, forms the southern boundary of the North Channel in this part. ST. PAUL'S BAY, to the N.W. of Coudre Island, is ahoal and rocky, with a great ripple ut some distance off. In the channel between the tides run very strong; some- times 6 and 7 knots at spring-tides, and the water too deep for anchoring, except in Prairie Buy, before mentioned. Here it is high water, full and change, at 4h. 'iOm. Cape Corbeau forms the eastern, and Cape Labaic the western points of the bay ; they are 3^ miles apart. A stony bank runs off from the latter point nearly ^ of u mile ; and this bank extends about 11 miles to the westward along tne north shore. Tub south TRAVERSE.— The narrows of the South Traverse lie between the Middle Ground and the St. Ann and St. Ronue Shoals ; the east end of the Middle Ground lies with the east end of Coudre Island N.W. by ^V., distant Jl^ miles. Th(! nar- rowest part of this channel is pointed out by u light-vessel, which lies 5 miles W.S.W. from the black buoy* on St. Ann's Shoal, and which must be loft on your port hand going up. This is considered the most intricate part of the river ; the currents here are various, irregular, and strong, so that it requires the utmost attention. A bank occupies the middle of the River St. Lawrence, stretching all the way from Ilure Island to the Middle Bank; it is generally about a mile wide, with 8 to 14 fathoms on it; this was formerly called the ilnglUh Bank. The soundings are regular, and the b'^ttoni sand and mud, affording good anchorage. About a mile W. by S. of the light-vessel, a red buoy is placed, on the Middle Ground, to be left on your starboard hand; and nearly opposite is a black buoy on St. Roques Shoal, to be left on your port hand; 2 miles S.W. from the latter is another black buoy, also to be left on your port hand ; and opposite to this is a red buoy on the S.W. en'^ of the Middle Bank, to be left on your starboard hand. The narrows ex- tend from these latter buoys to the light-vessel, a distance of 3 miles, and is little more than 1 of a mile wide, with 4 to 10 fathoms at low water, spring-tides. Nearly 4 miles S.W. ^ S. from the latter buoy is another black buopr, off St. Jean, to be left on your port hand, having a black buoy on a spit about midway between them; and a little farther on is a chequered black-and-wnite buoy, on the Traverse Patch, of 3 fathoms, to be left on your starboard hand; but there is plenty of water on the north side of this buoy. From hence a S.W. by S. course, 2^ mdes, brings you abreast of the Stone Pillar, on which a revolving light was established in September, 1843. The Wood Pillar lies 1^ mile west of the Stone Pillar; it is a high round rock, with some trees on its western part. The Middle Bock, which dries at half-ebb, and on which a beacon is erected, lies about j a mile to the eastward of it; these are joined to Goose Island by a reef. The Seal Islands and Reefs lie to the northward of the Pillars; they extend S.W. by W. and N.E. by E., about 4 miles ; a great part of this reef dries at low water. An extensive bank runs from these reefs to the N.E. as far ns Coudre Island and the Middle Ground; this bank forms the south side of the middle channel, from abreast of Coudre to Goose Island. The ROCHE AVIGNON dries at } ebb, is 100 yards in length, quite round at the top, and lies 2 or 3 cables* length S.E. from the body of the South Pillar; there are 7 fathoms water close to it. Crane Island, kept well open to the southward of the large reef off Goose Island, leads clear to the southward of it. S.W. ^ W., about 1^ mile from the South Pillar, begins a ledge of high rocks, which runs up to the S.W. end of Goose Island, from which the upper end is but ^ a mile dis- tant ; with the exception of their eastern part, they are always above water ; this is called Ooose Island Reef, and forms the mark for clearing the Avignon. There is an * By a recent official notice, all the buoy's on south bank are said to bo black, a ad those on the north banks red, with a few exceptions. (See page 147.) ;Ont'ilU"tt { ' '. iL>, ',\^ wAci Htancu of iiidury of h a great ig; Boine- except in , 4h. 'iOtn. bay; they mile; and itween the ic Middle Tli«) nar- 9 w.s.w. port hand re vorious, scupies the anttoni sand ;ho Middle ;k buoy on : is another )uoy on the arrows ex- nd is little !8. Nearly , to be lel't them; and e Patchf of iter on the you abreast jr, 1843. rock, with bb, and on re joined to hey extend ; low water, ind and the u abreast of round at the there are of the large •ochs^ which ^ a mile dis- ater ; this is There is an a ad those on J)ic Isiand to Quehvc. 15.1 opening between the east end of Goose Island Reef and the South Pillar, leading towards I'ilier lloissd, having 4 to ^ fathoms in it. GOOSE ISLAND is connected to Crane Island by low meadow land, the wholo of which occupici an extent of nearly 11 miles in a S.\V. ^W. and N.E. ^ E. direction. A ihallowjlat runs off nearly a mile from the south side of this low land, which narrows the channel very much as you approach the Hoaujeu Bank, on each end of which a white buoy is now placed. The eastern buoy lies with Onion Island N.W. by W. i W., and the western buoy with the farm-house on Crane Island N. by W. There is a farm- house on the island, just to the eastward of which is the Hospital Rock; it is large, and close to the low water mark. At 2^ miles from the Hospital Rock the shore bo- comes rocky, a long ree/* commencing, which, as it lies close to Goose Island, is out of the way, and consequently easily avoided. CRANE ISLAND^ is about 3^ miles long; the northern side is cultivated, and a farm-house appears at the east end : to the S.E. of this house, about ^ a mile, lies Beaujeu Bank, having on its shoalest part not more than 6 feet water over it ; it is separated from Xheflat that runs off I'roin the main, by a channel, having 4 to 5 fathoms in it; but just within the west entrance of this channel lies a. knotty of only 12 feet. The '.;haiincl between Ueaujeu Bank and the eastern end of Crane Island has 4 to 5 fathoms in it; but its breadth scarcely exceeds ^ of a mile. On the N.W. side of this channel two red buoys are placed, opposite the white buoys on the Beaujeu Bank. BAYFIELD ISLANDS lie to the westward of Crane Island, exclusive of a num- ber of atnaU islets and rocks. The principal isles are the Canoe Isle, which lies northward of Crane Island; the Margaret Island; next westward is the Grossc Island, and the Isle aux Reaux, and the westernmost is Madame. The whole of these islands, from Crane Island to the west end of Madame Island, occupy a space of 14 miles. There arc several passages between these islands, with n good depth of water, leading into the Middle Channel. The quarantine station* is at Grosse Island ; the entrance is between it and Margaret Island, which is marked by a red buoy on the south, and a che(|uered buoy on the north side ; your course in is about N. by £. From the western end of Crane Island a reef of rocks extends | a mile, drying at low water; and a shallow spit runs out \\ mile farther westward; on which a red buoy is placed, with St. Thomas's Church bearing S.S.E. ^ S. Grosse Island is 2 miles in length, lying N.E. by E. and S.W. by W.; it is inhabited. Reaux Island is about the length of Grosse Island, but narrow, and is about 150 feet high. Madame Island is somewnat smaller than Reaux Island ; both are covered with trees. From Madame Island a rocky re#/* extends S.W. by W., 2^ miles, drying at low water; and ships ought not to go nearer to it than 7 or 8 fathoms water. The mark to clear it is, some part of Reaux Island kept open to the southwaru. of Madame Island. The western extremity of the reef lies with St. Valiere's Church bearing S.^E. A red buoy is now placed to mark the western point of this reef, which here divides the west- ern entrance of the north from the south channel. Thb SOUTHERN SHORE.— In following the southern shore from St. Roque Point, you will see the church of St. John's, standing on a projecting point, about 2^ leagues distant from the church of St. Roque; behind the latter, at some distance in- land, is a telegraph. Nearly at the same distance from St. John's Church, and in a similar direction, stands the telegraph of the islet; and between these is Fort Jolie and Three Salmon River, fit only for small craft. Farther on is the church and telegraph of St. Ignace; this lies to the southward of Beaujeu Bank, from which it is distant nearly a league. The shore all the way from St. Roque Point to St. Thomas's River * GROSSE ISLE.— Quebec, April 10(A, 1848.— An extract of the Official Gazette has been issueard shore, dope down ■ great ex- res are flat , with here id near the i with gar- rrence, and anchor in cannot be lere is bold stands the eat houses, locks, run- over them, )ther rocks, fissed in 10 Church of he FaUs of lore to the it Levy to ieep. The and extend n Barnaby h a part Bic Island to Quebec. 155 appointed by law to heave ballast into, being to the westward of the two beacons that stand on the south shore, between Patterson's and Charles's Coves : these beacons are situated on the brow of a hill, and, when in a line, bear S.E. The regulations, with respect to shipping and quarantine, in the port and harbour of Quebec, must be strictly attended to : all pilots are bound to give the masters of vessels due information relative to quarantine, as soon as they come on board ; and a copy of the harbour laws is delivered to each vessel, on her arrival, by the harbour- master : and those respecting shipping are always to be seen at the harbour-master^s office. The CITT of QUEBEC is built on Cape Diamond, which is exceedingly high ; from hence, and from Point Levy, the views are magnificent, and beautifulfy varied ; the capital, on the summit of the Cape, the River St. Charles flowing to the northward, the Falls of Montmorency to the north-eastward, and the well-cultivated Island of Orleans, form altogether a most beautiful spectacle. The Island of Orleans divides the river into two parts, or channels ; but the southern channel, which has been described, is the only one the pilots make use of for large ships. The River St. Lawrence is not navigable from the early part of December to the middle of April, on account of the seventy of the frosts ; during this period, its upper part, from Quebec to Kingston, in Upper Canada, and between the lakes, with the exception of Niagara and the Rapids, is frozen over; but below Quebec, although the river is never wholly frozen, yet the strength of the tides continually detach the masses of ice from the shores, and such immense bodies are kept in incessant agitation, by the flux and reflux, that the navigation becomes impracticable. At the beginning of May, the ice is either dissolved or carried off by the current. MIDDLE CHANNEL.— The north side of this channel is formed by Coudre Island and the banks which extend from its west end to Burnt Cape Ledge and Isle Reaux, and on the south side by the Middle Ground, Seal Islands and reefs, and the chain of islands and reefs extending from Goose Island to Margaret Island; here are seiveral entrances between the islands. To the northward of the Seal Islands there are only 3 fathoms at low water. This channel, having neither buoys or beacons, is not u^ed by the pilots; but most of the channels between the islands are used by the small coasting vessels. , ^ ,. ,,..,.,■ • rr ■ The NORTH CHANNE.L, now very little frequented, was formerly the most commonly used ; this charinel runs to the northward of Coudre Island, along the north shore to Cape Tourmente, through the North Traverse, which lies between the spit and reef which runs off from the east end of the Island of Orleans, to the northward, and the Brule Bank and shoals lying northward of Reaux Island, to the southward. In this channel the water is generally deep, the adjacent lands high, the tides strong, and the North Traverse intricate and narrow, besides which there are few places fit to an- chor in ; it is the want of convenient anchorages which renders the eastern part of this channel unfit for general use. Having arrived of the N.W. reef off Coudre by the marks already laid down for passing northward of that island, and having the west end of it clear of Cape Branche on Coudre, you have a fine straight channel for 21 miles to Cape Brule, and from 2 to 1^ mile in breadth, with from 20 to 5 fathoms in mid-channel; the latter depth is off Cape Rouge. The Coudre Bank, Tvhich forms the south side of this channel, is nearly straight, with regular soundings, of 4 to 6 fathoms, along its edge, up to the Neptune Rock^ when the north shore should be kept close on board, to prevent you getting into the s\irash between the Burnt Cape Ledges and the Brule Bank. There is anchorage near the sides of this channel, where the tideb are not so strong. Off Cape Mallard spring -ebbs run 4 knots, and the floods 3^ knots; but off St. Paul's Bay, within Coudre, the ebbs run 7 knots on spring- tides, and the floods 6, which cause great ripplings. Along the high northern shore a rocky skoal runs off, nearly f of a mile, from Cape Labaic, (the western point of St. Paul's Bay,) and extends along shore to the S.^., - lor 12 miUs, where it terminates about 1 miles north-eastward of Cape Rouge; from hence to Cape Tormente the shore is all bold. There is a landing-place about a mile N.E. of Cape Gribanne, and nearly opposite the east end of Burnt Cape Ledge, the S.W. X 2 156 Directions for Sailitig up J part of which ia always above water; thia is about 4^ miles from the Neptune Rock. From opposite the latter rock to Cape Tormente, tae coast is very high, and washed by the river; but at this latter cape another shoal commences, named the Seminaire Sank. The N.F. part of the Brule Bank lies about a mile to the westward of the S.W. part of Burnt Cape Ledge; the mark for it is, the east side of Heron Island and the west part of Burnt Cape Ledge in one, bearing S.E. The North Traverse. — The eastern entrance to this lies between Brule Bank and the Traverse Spit, which extends to the reefs that run off from the east end of Orleans, and is called the Eastern Narrows, being about 250 fathoms wide, with 4 fathoms at low water; the channel is not buoyed, but the Brule Bank, Traverse Spit, and also the banks N. W. of it, generally dry about half ebb, which serves to lessen the difficulty of these channels. The leading-mark through the Eastern Narrows is Point St. Valiere, Oil the south shore, on with the S.W. end of Reaux Island, bearing S.S.W. | W.; after running on the latter mark about a mile, you must keep along the south edge of the Traverse Spit, by steering S.W. by W., about 1^ mile farther, leaving all the shoals to the southward; having run the latter distance, you will arrive at the eastern entrance of the Western Narrows, and within 1^ mile of the east end of Orleans. This part is also 250 fathoms wide, and from 4 to 6 fathoms deep, and lies between the Traverse Spit and the west sand. The mark for the east end of the west sand is, Berthier Church, just shut in with the S.W. point of Reaux Island, bearing S. iW. From this spot the leading-mark through the Western Narrows b Point St. John and Point Dauphin, on Orleans Island, in one, bearing S.W. ^ W. As soon as you have passed the Western Narrows you enter a clear channel full ^ a mile wide in its narrowest part, between Orleans and Madame Island and Reef; on the western extremity of the latter, a red buoy is now placed. The North Channel* generally remains open and free from ice, in the fall of the year, some time after the navigation is closed in the South Channel ; although it is seldom used, yet it might be advantageous to do so at times, as with a scant NIw. wind, when it was desirable to keep the north shore aboard. DIRECTIONS FOR SAILING UP THE RIVER ST. LAWRENCE, FROM ANTICOSTI TO QUEBEC. REMARKS. — ^It has been observed, that the current 1 etween the S.W. point of Anticosti and the coast of Gaspe, sets strongly from the rivti' to the south-eastward; that in the spring of the year, probably in consequence of the nielting of the snow, its velocity is always the greatest. In summer it may be averaged at ubout the general rate of 2 miles an hour; but in spring it becomes variable, and much beyond that rapidity : at times it will run 3^ miles an hour, and often more than that, depending gi'eatly on tht ijuantity of ice and snow that has accumulated. And it has been said, that, during the months of May and June, the water will be elev^-ted 2 or 3 feet above its ordinary level. Mariners entering the river between Anticosti and Gaspe, when in the fairway, having the wind at north or north-east, and being uninformed of this current, will be led to imagine they are making a reach up, when really they will be approaching the southern snore; this is an error that must be particularly guarded against, espe- cially in long dark nights and foggy weather; be, therefore, always careful to tack in time. Ships coming up with contrary winds,' should work up on the south side of Anticosti, and being far enough to the westward to weather the west point of Anticosti, should stand to the northward, and endeavour to work up, within 3 or 4 leagues of the north- * Mr. Lambly, many years principal harbour-master at Quebec, emphatically says, "He believes few men now living will undertake to carry a ship through it, and that he considers it would bo the extreme of folly to attempt to open the use of it;" and further states to have " heard of men who knew and could do this, but never saw any of them take a ship through it;" anii adds, " he is sure they never will." Tlie nicer St. Lawrence. 157 ine Hock, td washed Seminaire theS.W. I and the ik and the r Orleans, iithoms at id also the ifficulty of t. Valiere, W. ; after Ige of the e shoals to n entrance 'his part is i Traverse i, Berthier From this and Point lel full i a ;ef; on the )f the year, is seldom vind, when NCE, point of eastward; snow, its le general iyond that been said, or 3 feet le fairway, nt, will be aching the inst, espe- 'ul to tack ' Anticosti, sti, should the north- Y says, "He le considers tea to have hip through ern shore : for the land is all bold-to ; you will be out of the strength of the current, and the nearer you get to the land, the more you will be favoured by the tide ; and when up to Trinity Bay, should your vessel sail well, you will, by keeping in with the north shore, have the advantage of a flood-tide, and may probably be enabled to get through the Narrows; but should your ship sail badly, you can take shelter in Trinity Bay, which is described in page 139 of this work. When between the S.W. and west points of Anticosti, both the currents and swell set in shore; and as the bottom is bad, the anchors will not hold; therefore, the greatest caution is necessary, on the first appearance of a decrease of wind, to endeavour to stand off the land; or, in the event of a calm, you might be set on shore, bv the current, near the St. Mary's cliffs, as a heavy swell sets in frequently some hours before there is any wind. When off the west end of Anticosti, with a fair wind, steer well to the northward, so as to keep out of the strength of the current, steering about W.N.W., or towards English Point; when you havo run better than, half of the distance, you must steer more southerly toward Point de Monts, and endeavour to make the light. Observe, this lighthouse is not on the extreme point, but 1^ mile N.E. of it; and there are rocks ^ a mile from the point : in clear weather the light can be seen 6 or 7 leagues. In thick weather, this is a most dangerous part of the navigation ; for when the wind is fair it is generally thick ; and the greatest caution is necessary when approaching this point ; the ship should be put under snug canvas, and the deep-sea lead kept going; for if you are to the northward of the point, souiidings will be obtained 5 or 6 miles from the land, in 40 to 50 fathoms. The vicinity of Cape Chatte has long been the dread of mariners navigating this river, from the number of wrecks, and still more numerous hair-breadth escapes that have occurred near it ; the errors in the variation in the old charta, the current, and local deviation, all tending to draw vessels upon the south shore. Captain Bayfield, R.N., in his general remarks on the navigation of the St. Lawrence, after his remarks on the errors in the variation, given in former charts, says, " There is another source of error, independent of charts altogether, which it is astonishing to find obtaining so little attention, particularly in the merchant-service, considering how much has been written concerning it of late years. I allude to the deviation, or local attrac- tion of the needle. This subject may be seen fully treated in Mr. Barlow's treatise on magnetic attraction; and Scoresby, in his works on the arctic regions, ar.d on the Green- land whale-fishery, gives many vabiable and practical directions lespecting tiie me- thods available, under different circumstances, for findinn; its amount in various posi- tions of the ship's head, and applying a correction accordir 'J / to the course steered. The amount of error, from this cause, will be a point of the compass in most vessels; and, in particular circumstances, may become twice that qu:^,ntit]/ in those latitudes, " An opinion is prevalent that the compasses of vessols are disturb ed in the Gulf and River St. Lawrence, and such disturbance has haan attributed to the magnetic ores of iron in the hills, particularly those of the north c.u •' . The magnetic oxide of iron does exist abundantly, and attracts the needle very powerfully at some points; particularly along the coast from the Bay of Seven Islands eastward. Among the Mingan Islands we found the variation to vary, from this cause, from 19° to 31° west. At Port Neuf, and on JManicouagan Point, the needle was also disturbed; but these effects were only noticed when the instruments were placed on the shore. In two instances only, when sailing within 2 miles of the shore, have we observed any effect of the kind upon the compasses on board the Gulruire, and then only to the amount of a few degrees. " When running from place to place, at greater distances from the roast, nothing of the kind has been noticed; no that I feel sure that in nine cases out of ten, where this erroneous reckoning has been alleged as the cause of accidents to vessels, they origi- nated either in errors of the 'ihaxt, or in the local attraction on board the vessels them- selves." Captain Bayfield further adds — • . • • " To render the effect of deviation apparent, I will suppose it to amount to a point of the compass, no common occurence m a six or eight pomt course, and the shin to be steering W.S.W. ^ W,, by the compass in the binnacle, she will then, in realiiy, be making a S.W. by W. i W. course, which would soon put her on shore on the south coast; an event that would be accelerated by the current, which, instead of stemming, she would have on her starboard bow, checking her in-shore. 158 Directions for Sailing tip r i: " A case exactly similar to the one I have supposed, occurred on the night of the 8th of September, 1831, when the ship Jane, of Belfast, having several large chain-cables, and other extra iron on board, by which the deviation must have been greatly increased, ran stem-on to Bicquette, with a fair wind, but -hick fog. She was steering the regular course up the middle of the estuary, but her master was quite unaware of the effect of the great mass of iron in her hold upon her compasses; and equally so, that previous to the accident which caused the total loss of his vessel, he had been running, for many miles, in less than 20 fathoms water, the bank of soundings not being laid down on his chart. "These remarks, and others which I have made respecting the deviation, will, I trust, show how important a knowledge of it is to the sa.*ety of a vessel ; and will, moreover, point it out as the duty of every commander, tc endeavour to ascertain its amount during the voyage, and before he arrives in a difficult navigation like the St. Lawrence, where fogs may frequently oblige him to run as high as Green Island without having been able to obtain a pilot." In clear 'leather you may run along the south shore; from off Cape Chatte, a W. ^ S. course, 1 1 or 12 leagues, will bring you abreast of Matane. The paps of Matane appear as two bills standing somewhat inland, when on a S.W. bearing. Mount Camille will also be vislL ', bear'ng W.S.W., distant 14 or 15 leagues; it forms in the shape of a circular island, a,i d appears to the northward of all the southern land. From off Matane to abreast f Mount Camille, steer W. by S., according to the wind. Continuing that course, you will pass Little and Great Matis: and continuing on W. by S., 5 leagues from Great Matis, you will arrive at Father Point, the principal residence of the pilots, and from which Mount Camille bears S.E. \ E. GREAT MATIS is 2 leagues west from Little Matis, and is also only fit for small vessels ; these may find shelter and anchorage with S.W. winds, but it nearly dries, and therefore is of little use to shipping. Little Matis may be distinguished from Great Matis by a round bluff rock, which lies S.E. from the north reef, distant 1 ^ mile, and a small sugar-loaf hill to the eastward of the rock. Great Matis has a large rock in the middle of the cove ; Little Matis has none ; but you must be within 2 or 3 leagues of the shore to make these coves out, for the points of land they are formed by are very low. The bank of soundings extends 4 or 5 miles off from those coves; but to the eastward of Matane you will have 60 fathoms only 3 miles off the shore. When beating up, it requires a tolerably good sailing vessel, and a flood-tide, to beat past Point de Monts against a wind right out ; but short boards round the point, and along the north shore, up to Cape St. Nicholas, will most readily succeed. It is not, however, advisable to keep this shore close aboard farther to the westward, lest ihe wind should fall to a calm; for there is a strong indraught towards the mouth of the Manicouagan River during the flood-tide. I" an easterly wind should chance to spring up, after the vessel has been drifted near the mouth of English Bay, it might be diffi- cult to beat out, or weather the eastern side of the Manicouagan Snoals. A vessel standing over to the southward from Point de Monts, with a west wind, on the starboard tack, will be carried oYe^ to the south coast at a rapid rate, Laving the current on the weatiier quarter; during her board back she will Le retarded, the cur- rent then being directly opposite to her course. When sailing at the rate of 4 knots, it will usually require only about half tho time to go from Point de Monts over to the south shore, that it will t>ike to return from the latter to the former. Tl.is is a most important circumstance, which it 'it necessary to guai'd against when beating up during dark nights, and especially in foggy weather. When running up, during foggy weather, when the land cannot be seen, the object should always be to strike soundings on the bank along the f.outh coast, about Matis, or Father Point at farthest; and then following it as a guide <;o the ivestwiii 1. Father Point is low, covered with houses, and the regular rendezvous of the pilots. With the point bearing south, by compass, distant 5 miles, the depth is 30 fathoms, soft clay; but you may haul in-shore to 10 fathoms, in foggy weather; and by bringing-to with your head off, and tiring a gun or two, you will get a pilot off. The distance fron' Cape Chatte to the west part of Father Point is about 24 leagues ; and front thence to the anchoring placj at Bic Island, is 1 7 miles : make an allowance for the current, and any ship may run it with safety. ■the 8th i-cables, icreased, ! regular eiFect of ;viou8 to br man^ m on his , I trust, loreover, i amount awrence, it having le appear tnille will dape of a [T Matane uing that 5 leagues ;he pilots, for small dries, and om Great mile, and ck in the leagues of are very |ut to the ie, to beat [oint, and It is not, ,, lest the 1th of the to spring be diffi- wind, on iving the the cur- 4 knots, [er to the \\6 a most |p during le object it Matis, Father Vith the l;lay ; but Ir-to with leagues ; lUowance The River St. Lawrence. 159 Ships bein^ off Little Matis will see the high land which is to the southward ot Cape Arignole ; but the cape itself and the island of Bic, being much lower, will not be visible; off Mount Camille, Bic Island may be perceived very plain in clear weather. Some years ago, a master of a vessel mistook the island of Barnaby for the island of Bic, and hauled to the southward ; when he found his mistake, after veering the ship, he just weathered Barnaby Island. Now, should a ship be running up in thick wea- ther, and not be certain of her distance, if she should be near F.ither Point, she cannot approach the land without gradually shoaling her water, consequently, keeping the lead going, and being in 9 or 10 fathoms water, should she make an island suddenly to the southward, it must be Barnaby Island. And if falling in with an island suddenly, with- out having hove tho lead, in any bearing to the westward cf M'^.S.W., one cast of the lead will reduce it to a certainty; for from W.S.W. to west, Barnaby will only have from 7 to 5 fathoms, and the island of Bic will have, in the same bearings, from 15 to 12 fathoms. Again, if the lead be kept going, and no soundings be found, then, falling in with land suddenly a-head, it must be Bicquette ; for there is deep water in the stream of Bicque .te, and when it bears south, 2 miles, there are 30 fathoms; and within J^ mile of the N.W. reef there is the same depth; a little off there are 60 fathoms: there are 12 fathoms close to both the island and reef. In the stream of Bicquette, when it bears W.S.W., if you should have 10 fathoms water, and see no land, you must haul off to the northward, o. run for Bic, as you think proper; if you are strangers, the safest way will be to haul off towards the northward, keeping in 9 or 10 fathoms water, and steer W.S.W. and W. by S., according to the depth of water ; that course will lead to the southward of Bic, and if you get sight of the reef at the east end of the island, which is always above water, steer west 1^ or 2 miles, and anchor in 11 or 12 fathoms. Shii)s being near Bic Island, in thick weather, should stand off and on to the north- ward of the island, and wait for the weather clearing up. The current between Mille Vache and. Bic Island will always be found str ~ng io the N.E. ; this must be particularly attended to, as it might drift you towards the Manicouagan Shoals. If desirous of anchoring on the south, side of Bic, and the wind should ' a easterly, run boldly to the southward, looking out for the reef at the east end of the island, as before directed ; give this reef a berth of :J of a mile, and run along in mid-channel until you find Cape Arignole bears S.S.E. ; the body of the island then bearing N.N.W. Large ships may anchor in 11 fathoms, the ground clear and good; but small vessels may run on until the island comes N.E., and the depth 8 fathoms; you will then be ^ a mile off the island, but the bottom will not be so clear as when you are in the deeper water. Fresh water may bo obtained in the cove to the westward of the east end of the island. In foggy weather it is not recommended to run inside of Bic without a Jilot; unless by persons very well acquainted. The new revolving light on Bicquette sland cannot fail to be of the greatest service to those navigating this part of the river. But, if the wind should be westerly, and you are tc windward of the island, in- tending to anchor there, stand to the southward, into 11 fathoms, then run down and anchor, as before directed; for, with little wind, 11 fathoms is the proper depth of the fairway, and the last half-flood and all the ebb set strongly between Bicquette and Bic. Should you, with an easterly wind, be too far to the westward to fetch round the east end of Bic, then^ in order to gain the anchorage, you should give Bicquette a berth of about A a mile ; run up, until the west end of Bic bears S.E., then Cape Arignole will be open of it. This latter mark leads to the westward of a reef, which is covered at a quarter-tide, and extends S.W. by W,, a mile from Bicquette ; while another reef, always visible, lies between the former and Bicquette. It also clears the A'.T^. Reef. By hauling round to the southward, with Cape Arignole open, you will pass athwart the opening between Bic and Bicquette, in from 13 to 6 fathoms. You cannot cross the West Grounds of Bic with these latter marks on; you must keep more to the west- ward. Come no nearer the west end of Bic than 5 fathoms; as the reef runs off W. by S., ^ of a mile, 160 Directions for Sailing up w i ! The N.W. rcc/of Bic vrill be cleared, by keeping, the west end of that island and Cape Arlgnole in a line, bearing S.E. When you are beating into Bic Harbour from the westward, while standing to the southward, take care not to shut in Mount Camille with Cape Arignole; and in standing to the northward, do not shut in Mount Camille with Bic Island. The tides flow at Bic Island, full and change, 2h. 15m.; and rise, in spring-tides, 12 or 14 feet, neap-tides 7 or 8 feet. The flood-tides never bend to the westward till an hour's flood by the shore, and in neap-tides the floods are very weak ; but in spring-tides ships will always find a flood- tide from Father Point to Bic Island. Between Barnaby and Bic Islands there is a bank of soundings, being a continuation of that which rurs from Cape Chatte; at the westerly part, about Barnaby and Bic, it extends 2^ leagues from the shore, and has regular soundings upon it; its' edge is very steep, for from 35 fathoms it sinks suddenly into more than twice that depth; but from 35 fathoms, towards the land, it decreases gradually; vessels may therefore stand to the so'ill)ward by the lead, and tack or anchor in any depth of water they think proper; Lu**, it will be advisable to go no nearer the land than 1 J mile, with Bic Island bearing from W.S.W. to S.W., lest you shut in the channel to the southward of Bic; an.i .v'f.h a sudden shift of the wind, should not be able to clear Bie to the V/. ,.tward from Bic Island, the bank of soundings runs all the way to Basque Island, paru'* ;1 to, and at 2 leagues distance from the shore: beyond Basque Island jt ])ends nearer to '^he land, and continues on to the Apple Islands, and to near Oreen Island Beef, 1;3 r ^4 fathoms being the fairway; ships may stand to the southward to 12 fathoms. From BIC ISLAND to GREEN ISLAND.— From the N.W. reef ofl' Bicquette, Green Island lighthouse bears S.W. by W. ^ W., 30 miles ; in clear weather the fixed light can be seen 17 or 18 miles; and the revolving light on Bicquette, about the same distance. Vessels having arrived at Bic Island, without being able to obtain a pilot at Father Point, and finding none to be had at Bic, may proceed towards Green Island, the latter bearing from the former S.W. by W. | W., distant nearly 10 leagues; in this course you will pass the Alcide Rock, Razade^, Basque, and Apple Islands, which have been already described, page 146. The edge of the bank of soundings continues all the way steep-to ; but from 35 fathoms, the depth decreases gradually towards the land, and between Bic and Green Islands ve.!sels will find anchorage all the way in 14 fathoms, and ships of lesser burthen in 9 fathoms. Between Bic and Basque Island the ground is all clean ; but between Basque and Green Island it is foul. There is shelter for small vessels at the east end of thj Razades, and also under the east end of Basque Island, in 3 fathoms, giving the east end of the reefs, which run ofl* those islands, a berth o{ \ of a mile; the anchorages are with the body of the islands bearing W.byS., or right abreast of Basque Island. Here, at Trois Pistoles, fresh water and provisions may be obtained, if necessary; and from hence are regular stages to Quebec. Pilots also reside here, and at Green Islanc-' Green Island Reef is extremely dangerous, and is rendered doubly so by the strong tides that set upon it, and which produce ripples, that cause alarm to strangers during a dark or foggy night; therefore, in a strong easterly gale, and thick weather, when the light on Green Island cannot be seen, the attempt to run through betwc n Red and Green Islands is attended with great risk, as, during the ebb, the tide setstowards the reef at the rate of 5 knots. It requires an experienced pilot at such a time to take a ship safely through. In such weather it would be better to heave-to off" Bic ; even in doing this there is danger of vessels running. Ii TJjc, or the Bicquette light has been seen, it is much safer to anchor under the lee, or to the westward of the islands, in 10 or 12 fathom«, even if 5 or 6 miles westivard of them; the ground is good for holding. Here you could wait till daylight. Vessels passing from Bic toward Green Island will keep about a leagua from shore, and have 14 or 15 fathoms all the way; and when up so far as Green Island, should the tide be done, they may anchor north-eastward of the reef, in 10 fathcims, and in the stream of the ledge, which runs N.E. by N. from the lighthouse point, at a mile dis- tance from the ledge. W^ is the tlie its tWf sho gull of( safe otfi war buo I 27/« Ricer St. Lawrouce. 161 and and jur from , Camille ; Camille tides, 12 e, and in 1 a flood- itinuation id Bic, it ge is very jpth; but fore stand hey tbink Bic Island thward of Jie to the j«c Island, id it bends een Island rard to 12 Bicquette, r the fixed lit the same n a pilot at een Island, ;ues; in this which have nues all the le land, and 14 fathoms, the ground sheUer for I of Basque 36 islands, a ng W.byS., d provisions bee. Pilots y the strong igers during jather, when en Red and •towards the me to take a Bic; even in Tht has been slands, in 10 for holding. 3 from shore, jland, should ns, and in the at a mile dis- 5 The high land of Arignole, kept open to the northward of Basque Island, will l»;ad clear of the lighthouse ledge ; and with the lighthouse bearmg S.\V. by b., the ledge will be exactly between the lighthouse and the ship. During north-easterly winds small vessels frequently run between the S.W. reef and Cacana, anchoring in 4 fathoms ; but it will always be more prudent to bear up for the Brandy Pots, lest you should be caught by adverse stormy weather. - Should you, therefore, have passed Green Island lighthouse, and no pilot be ob- tained, the weather clear, and the wind fair, steer boldly on S.W. ^ W., or S.W. by W., 3 leagues, you will then have White Island W. by S., and Ilare Island with the Brandy Pots S.W. by W., or nearly a-he^d. Give the Brandy Pots a berth of J of a mile, and run on a mile or more above them, then anchor in trom 7 to 14 iatboms; or should the wind shift to the westward, and your vessel be up to White Island, the tide being spent, stand to the southward, into 9 fathoms, or towards White Island, bto 6 or 7, then anchor; the ground is good. RED ISLAND. — Vessels coming up the river, and giving the southern shore a wide berth, will necessarily go near Red Island; the body of this island bears from the lighthouse on Green Island W.N.W. ^ N., distant 5^ miles; and the eastern point of the (langen is reefs which are attached to it, bears from the same lighthouse N.N. W. ; therefore the greatest care must be taken, especially at night, not to bring the light lo beav to the eastward of S. by E., until you are sure you are within 5 miles of it; if with the light S. b^ E. you cannot venture to enter the narrows, wait tbe return of day, and should the wmd be scant from the N.W., you may borrow on the south side of tbe Red Island, by observing these marks: open White Island to the northward of Hare Island, ani, as you draw to the westward, you may approach the shoal of White Island by tlie lead, remembering that the ebb-tide sets strongly down between White Island and Red Island, and the flood the contrai'y. The mark to run through the south channel, mid- way betwe.m Green Island and Red Island, is the Brandy Pots touching Hare Island S.W. f W. A vessel, in fine weather, may anchor on the south side of Red Island Reef, in 12 fathoms, at ^ of a mile's distance; but the tides here are strong, and set all round the compass. A red buoy is bow placed on the eastern end of Red Island R ef. Should the buoy be gone. Green Island lighthouse and the beacon in one, bearing S.S.E. \ E., clears the reef to the eastward. A new lighthouse has lately been erected on Red Island, bearing a red fixed light. The soundings between Red and Green Islcnds are irregular; for, at the distance of a mile from the latter, there are 40 fathoms, and from the former 20 fathoms; yet during the ebb-tides, and the wind easterly, the water breaks and ripples, but you need apprehend no danger. In beating up the northern shore from Bic to Green Island, you cannot stand to the northern land by the lead, on account of the great depth of water ; but Mille Vache Shoal begins at the little river of Port Neuf, and completesly surrounds the whole of the low point Jiat is to the westward of the houses, for nearly 4 r iles; its southern extremity is distant 1^ mile from the shore, part drying at low wate , and steep-to. At Port Neuf is a trading post, and provisions may be occasionally obtained there. When you have passed M.'ll*> Vache Point and Shoal, the land forms a deep bay; but it is shoul aud full of rocks, extending to the v^estward fuU 10 miles. At 3j leagues to the westward of the point are two islets, called the Esquernin Isles; to the eastward of these, nearly 8 miles, is Saut au Mouton, a small "iver, with a handsome cascade nea.r its entrance, which tails 80 feet. This will always attract notice when passing. Be- tween the Esquernin Isles and Saguenay ai'e three snail inlets, — Bondesire, and Little Great Bergerone; they are fretjueated by fishing boa s, but unfit for shipping. Ship8 working along the northern shore, between the Esquernin and Red Island, should keep within 2 leagues olf the land ; the shore is clear and bold, and the floous re- gular; but should a vessel be caught to the northward of Red Island by a sudden shift of easterly wind, and he unable to fetch roun the ed^e of the Middle Bank ; •vnd observe that the ship will go farther over to'.vards ti.'i Middle Bank than towards the shoals of St. Roque: and, if there be but little wind, be sure to borrow on the south side of the channel. Y 2 I 104 Directions for Sailing up ! I :i M; ! • r ■ Should the flood be done, «nd your ship in the narrows, or between the buoys, and any circumstance makes it necessary for you to anchor do not bring-to in the channel, but on fithcr ide a» most fonvciMtnt, and conic-to in 7 fathoms. Afler half-ebb tiio tides will be found to be more moderate. In the deep water they run very strongly; therefore, if you are obliged to anchor hero, take care to give a good scope of cablo before the stream comes strong; for should yuur anchor start, you may have to cut from it, as it seldom will take a i\ h hold, the ground in every part of the Traverse being hard, foul, and unfit for holduig well. Farther on, at or above the Pillars, the tides have less velocity, bein.; Of ulom more than 3^ knots an hour; ships therefore will fiyd good riding, with easterly winds, about 2 miles to the north-eastward of the South Pillar, in 7 fathoms, or to the jouthward of it, in a similar depth, on good ground. From abreast of the South Pillar to Crane Island, your course will be nearly S.W. by W., and the distance 4 leagues. In your progress you will ^)ass Goose Island Reef and Madame Beaujcu's Bank ; both of which have been described m page 153 of this work. Crane Island is a little above Goose Island, to which it is connected by low meadow land. The southern side of this part of the channel is formed by a muddy Jiut^ with regular soundings as you approach, and 3 fathoms over it, having good anchorage all tin; way ; but the northern side has the Rocsk Avignon and the Goose Island Reef, both of which are dangerous, and must be avoided. The mark to clear the Rock Avignon is, the whole of Crane Island open of the S.W. of the large re'j 2 sails' breadth open to the southward of the west end of Crane Island, and th. \ wijl carry you in the best water; and when up to Craue Island, you may bo tow 'loHe to it, for there are 7 fathoms close to the rocks. ANCHORAGES. — Ships M/iy anchor all the way from Pillar to the east end of Crane Island, in 7 fathoms water, the ground clean and good ; there is also good riding off the body of Crane Island, in 8 fathoms; but the best roadstead in the river, with easterly winds, is a mile to the westward of Crane Island. Vessels bound down the river, when advanced so far as the Pillars, if caught by strong easterly winds and bad weather, had always better run back to this place, than ride below it, at the risk of losing their anchors. Fhom crane island to POINT ST. VALIERE the course will be about W. by S. ^ S., and the distance 4 leagues. In jiursuing this track you will have to pass i\vi Jlut mud bank off St. Thomas's Church, ih-c Wye Rocks, the Belle Chusse Idets, and the small bank off Grosse Island. (For a description of these ilangers, see ptjgo 154.) In proceeding from Crane Island, you may keep the island on board, for it is 6teep-to; run on in from 7 to 10 fathoms, and S.W by W., distant 2 miles from the southern part of Cran€ Island, you will meet r/ith the northern extremity of St. Thomases Flat, which runs out nearly 2 miles from the main land, and dries at low water. A black buoy is now placed on its northern edge. In rounding Crane Island, steer W. by S., or stand towards it into 7 and 6 fathoms, soft mnddy ground; and when St. Thomas's Church comes S.E. ^ E., you will be abreast of the pomt, and may steer up W.S.W. J W. Having got above this flat, you will be abreast of the Wye Rocks. There is now a red buoy on the west end of Crane Island Shoal, with St. Thomas's Church bearing S.S.E. | E. The WYE ROCKS lie about :|^ of a mile from the shore, and have 4 feet over their western end, and 10 feet at their eastern part. Keep in not less than 6 fathoms water, and you will at all times go clear of them ; the long mark Vom the westward is, to keep Belle Chasse Islands alw;fys open to the southward of Point St. Valiere. The Hicer St. Latormcc. 165 ■ When you have arrive -3 have discharged the freshes, caused by the thawing of the snows in the spring of th year, this current will always run downward. 168 Directions for Vessels hound down the Gulf, Vi . From Bic to Green Island, on the southern side, the stream of flood is no where perceptible at 1^ mile from the islands. The ebb, or rather current, comes strongly from the N.W. out of the River Saguenay, and through the channel to the northward of Red Island. Here it always runs in a S.£. direction, 2^ miles an hour, with a west- erly wind; but only so to the southward and eastward of Red Island. Between Red Island and G-reen Island, the ebb runs from 4 to 6 knots. In crossing over to the north shore, this easterly current will be found to diminish; for, on the north side, the floo4 is pretty regular, and the ebb much weaker. Eastward of the Razade Rocks, and near Bic, the current assumes a N.E. direction, and sets strongly between Bic and Bicquette. To the southward of Bic, spring- floods run at the rate of 1^ knot; neaps are not per- ceptible; Ships that come to the southward of Bic, with a scant wind n-om the north- ward, should steer W. by N., to check the S.E. current, until they come into 18 fathomS water, or up to Basque, whenoe they may proceed for Green Island. The first of the flood, with spring-tides, sets from the N.E. along the north side of Green Island, and strongly towards the west end of it ; then 8.§.W. over the reef towards Cacana. In the middle of the channel no flood is perceptible. At 2 miles to the southward of Red Island it sets strongly to the N.W., and the ebb contrary. During spring-ebbs, the meeting of the N.E. and S.E. tides, qear the middle of Green Island, causes very strong rippRngs; and, to the eastward of Green Island, the S.E. ebb comes strongly about the east end of Red Island; here meeting, theN.E. tide causes a high rippling, much like broken water in strong easterly winds : but, in neap-tides, the floods are very #cak, and in the sprlfig of the year there are none; thus rendering this part of the river more tedious in its navigaition tlun any other, unless with a fi'ee wind. From the west end of Green Island a regular stream of flood and ebb commences; which runs dl hours upward and 7 downward. At the Brandy Pot^ it flows tide and quarter-tide; and above the Perce Rocks, on the south shore, it sets regularly up and dowtL, N.E. l^ E. and 8.W. by W. From the Briand^ Pots, the stream oi aopd sets towaide Hajre Island; and near the west end, N.W., with great strength, through the passage between the Island and shoa^ Above Hare Island, the flood sets v^ularly vp the river; the ebbs oontrarywise. ■' From the Pilgrims np to Cape Diable the flood is very weak, but it thence increases up to the buoys of the Traverse, where it runs at the rate of 5 knots. The first of the ebb sets towards the English Bank and Hare Island Shoal, when abreast of the greater island of Kamourasca, and the ebb contrary. At the Traverse, on the full and change, the tide on shore flows at ^ past 4, but it contioues to run to the westward until 6 o'clock, when regnlar in the channel. Witii westerly winds there is a deviati|On^ but it is certain that the tide on shore rises 8 feet befoiie the stream ' ^ds to the westward: and this allowance must always be made in etery paiit of )(L 'ir. In the Traverse tiie first of l^e flood sets fixun the N.N.E.; at Ae buoys, h ,. quarter-flood^ it takes a S.W. direction; and when the shnaU are covered at 'half-flood, at the Seal Reefs, it sets un- til high water S.W. by W. The ebbs, in a comtrttry direction, run with great strength ; frequently, in the spring of lAie year, at ^Uj rate of 6 or 7 knots. From Crane Island the flood sets fairly up the river, but the first of the ebb of L'IsIet sets to the northward for j an hour, then fair down the river, at the rate of not more than 3^ knt>ts an hour with spring-tides. ;lii( u:S> :lj l>iRj;c?;i(Pfj^ FQR vj;spf,s ;BQi;j^4>.PPJ5n'[^^^^^^ f !t fi;....!'; •;nW ')•;' \-if r:li -.'p!').! Renuarks on. (he pataage doum the JZtoer.-^Yessela generally stop at the Brandy Fots for a fair wind; but supposing, after they have passed Green Island, that the fair wind fails, and they are met by an easterly wind before arriving near the B not per* the north- [8 fathoms rth side of r the reef 2 miles to y. During en Island, ebb comes ises a high , the floods ; this part wind. '.::% Eunmienc'esi; rs tide and irly «p and r flopd sets trough the Mates of Pilotage for the River St. Lawrence. 169 be cautious in attempting to run inside of the island of Bio in foggy weather, unless very well acquainted. When leaving the Brandy Pots with a northerly wind and ebb-tide, keep well under White Island Reef, to prevent your being set over to Green Island Beef by the strength of the tide. When beating doum tU night, or in thick weather, the South Bank should be your guide. You should tack from it after striking soundings on its edge, and should not stand to the northward more than half-channel over in any part; thus keeping in the strength of the current down, and avoid the possibility of accidents from the shoals on the north coast, which, bein;; very steep, and afibrding little or no warning by the lead, have {)roved fatal to many vessels. Under those curcumstances, there is no safety unless the ead be kept constantly going when approaching the south coast. In the board to the southward, sail should be sufficiently reduced tor soundings to be easily obtained, and every thing in readiness to tack, or wear, at the shortest notice. These precautious become more necessary as the vessel descends the river, and the bank of soundings be- comes narrower. Off Matane there are 30 fathoms, sandy bottom, 1^ mile from the shore, and 60 fathoms 3 miles off; at 5 miles off no bottom will be found at 100 fathoms. The south bank becomes still narrower to the eastward of Matane, and ceases, in con- sequence, to be of use to vessels. Off Cape Chatte there are 30 fathoms water little more than ^ a mile from the shore. Below Cape Chatte there is plenty of room; and the chart will show that there are soundings in various depths, between 50 and 100 fathoms, from off the western end of Anticosti, to nearly opposite the Seven Islands, and also between the west and S.W. points of Anticosti; but eastward of the S.W. point, the bank is ver^ narrow, as far as Pavilion Point; from thence to Heath Point uiere is sufficient wammg by the deep- sea lead, as will be seen by the chart. .!/mJ(i/^.i-'-.-li irywise. '.e increases first of the the greater nd change, il 6 o'clock, t is certain and this "se the first kes a S.W. it sets un- it strength ; the ebb of the rate of ': / 1 1 , 1 1 r ."• ■[■> i i-'if<"' randy Pots le fair wind of Bic, it is y if late, or ut in thick •th the risk; jterly Wiind, rht m time, ower ,down >ilot should RATES OF PILOTAGE FOR THE RIVER ST. LAWRENCE. ♦— — From Bic lO Quebec. Per foot. £ s. d. From the 2nd to the 30th April, mclusive 10 6 1st May to the 10th November, inclusive 18 11th to the 19th November, inclusive 13 20th November to the 1st March, inclusive 18 From Quebec to Bic. From the 2nd to the 30th April, inclusive 18 3 Ist May to the 10th November, inclusive 15 9 11th to the 19th November, inclusive 10 9 20th November to the 1st March, inclusive 15 9 Rates of pilot-water and poundage on pilot-money are payable at the Naval Office, by masters and commanders of vessels. For every foot of water for which masters and commanders of vessels are bound to pay their pilots from Bic to Quebec, and from Quebec to Bic, 2s. 6d, currency, per foot. For vessels going to 7%ree Rivers or Montreal, Of 100 to 150 tons, inclusive, 21. currency. 151 „ 200 „ „ 3;. i 201 „ 250 „ „ 41 250 tons and upwards 51. On settling with pilots, masters or commanders of vessels, or the consignees of such vessels, are to deduct Is. in the pound for the amount of the sums to be paid for pilotage, which will be exacted by the Naval Officer at clearing out, the same being funded by law, under the direction of the Trinity House, for the relief of decayed pilots, their widows, and children. [N. America — Pabt I.] Z no lining Directions from \i* ''^>^^^ Itcgulations for the Pilotage above Bic to Quebec. At or above the anchorage of the Brandy Pots; Two-thirds of the present rate for a full pilotage. ; At above the Point of St. Roc; - One-third of ditto. For above the Point au Pins, on the Isle aux Chrues, and below PatricTCs Hole; One-fourth of ditto. And at and above PatricKs Hole. — ^The rates already established by law for shifting a vessel from one place to another in the JBarboto' of QuebeCy viz. : — \l. 3«. 4d. Bates above the Harbour of Quebec. From Quebec to Port Neuf. _ To Quebec from Port Neuf. For vessels of registered measurement, not ^.4/. currency exceeding 200 tons 2/. lOx. currencv. ttU 61. If above 200 and not exceeding 250 tons 31. 10s. .vr 61. If above 250 tons 4/. To Three Rivers, or above From Three Riven, and above Fort Neuf. Port Neuf. 6/. currency For vessels not exceeding 200 tons 41. currency. , f ;; ; . . 71 If above 200 and not exceeding 250 tons 41. 10s. 8L If above 250 tons 51 10s. To Montreal and above From Montreal and above Three Rivers. Three Rivers. 11 Z. currency For vessels not exceeding 200 tons 7/. 1 0». currency. 13/. If above 200 and not exceeding 250 tons 8/. 15«. 16Z. If above 250 tons lOZ. 15*. "' Pilots are at liberty to leave vessels 48 hours after they arrive at the place of their destination. .^^y/mmu }art%Q a^ixAH ■k. TX.— THE SOUTHERN COAST OF NOVA SCOTIA. FROM CIIEDABUOTO BAY TO HALIFAX HARBOUR. i> '<■ Variation 19° to 16° west. DESCRIPTION OF THE LAND.— The eastern part of Nova Scotia is broken into the sevei'al islauds and passages, as represented on the charts. Of the islands which are low and covered with stunted fir-trees, the first on the N.E. is called Durell's Island, the second, George's Island, and the third, Canso, or St. Andrew's Island; out- side this latter island is the smaller one, called Cranberry Island, which is now distin- guished bv a lighthouse. This is an octagonal tower, built of wood, 88 feet in height, painted white-and-red horizontally, and showing two fixed lights, one above the other. GAPE CAHSO is the outer, or easternmost point of St. Andrew's Island. From this cape, westward, to Torbay, the coast makes in several white heads or points; here the country is much broken; and near the S.E. extremity manv white stones appear from the offing, like sheep in the woods. During a southerly gale the sea is dreadful here. From Torbay to Liscombe Harbour there are banks of red earth and beaches; and from Liscombe Harbour to the Rugged Islands, (excepting the White Isles, which , are white rocks,) the capes and outer islands are bound with mack slatey rocks, gene- nerallv stretching out in spits from east to west; and from the Rugged Islands to Devils Island, at the entrance of the harbour qf Halifax, there are several remarkably steep red cliffs, linked with beach. The new lighthouse on Cranberry Island is now of great importance to the naviga- tion of this part; and Mr. Lockwood, a gentlemen well ac(}uainted with the subject. Chedabucto Bay to Halifax Harbour. 171 Die; r shifting I I Port Neuf. currency. ■g, and above if. ency. lal and. alioTe Rivers. currency. ;e of their L. '■ u a is broken lands which ed Durell's [aland; out- now distin- 3t in height, J the other. and. From )oints; here iones appear lis dreadful ,nd beaches; Isles, which rocks, gene- d Islands to . remarkably } the naviga- the subject, observes, that "The Gut of Canso will, by its means, become the common thoroughfare to the Gulf and River of fit. Lawrence, and tend to mitigate the inconvenience and rigours of a la1« or early passage to Quebec, &o." The fishermen of Arachat are well acquainted with the channels and inlets on this coast, and frequent them, more particularly in the snring and fall, to catch mackarel and herrings, of which large shoals commonly resort here; but the rocks are so numer- ous, and the passages so devious, that no stranger should attempt them. Of the many rocks hereabout, the outer breaker, called the Bass, a rock of 3 feet water, lies more than 2 miles E. \ S. fVorn the lighthouse on Cranberrv Island. At ^ of a mile S.E. from Cape Canso, is a similar rock, called the Roaring Bull; and at a mile to the E.S.E. of the latter, there is said to be another, discovered by a fisherman of Canso, in 1813; but its existence seems to be questionable. The harbour OP CANSO, within St. George's Island, is well sheltered, with good ground, and sufficient depth for vessels of any burthen. In a rough sea the dan- gers show themselves ; but with smooth water it is hazardous to enter the passages . without a pilot, or a leading wind. Sailing from the westward into Canso Harbour, so soon as you have passed the Roaring Bull, over which the sea generallv breaks, run for Pitipas, or Read Head, taking care, when above the black rocks, to keep them open of the rocky islets ofi* Cape Canso, until you bring Glasgow Head and the north end of Inner Island in one, which will carry you above Man-of-war Rock ; then steer westerly, being careful to avoid Mackarel Kock, and make for Burying Island, the north end of which you must not approach nearer than to have the deptn of 5 fathoms ; then anchor to the north-west- ward 0^ it, on a bottom of mud. Coming from the eastward, pass between Cape Canso and Cranborry Island, giving the latter a sufficient berth to avoid a shoal which stretches to the southward of it, and steer for Pitipas Head, as before directed. , ; The northern passage between Durell's and St. George's Island, notwithstandmg its narrowness, yet, having a depth of water and a clear channel, will be found to be the best passage. In sailing in, keep mid-channel between Bald and Nett Rocks, the former being above water, and the latter drying at | ebb ; when you may steer with safety, by attending to the chart, and the situation of Burying Island. High water at 8h. 50m.; tides rise 5 to 8 feet. DOVER BAY is a wild, deep indent, with a nuraDei* of islands and sunken rocks at its head; yet shelter may be found on the western shore, or during a S.E. gale, by giving a berth to the rocks that lie off the south end of Big Dover Island, which are very visible in bad weather; haul up under the island, and anchor between the small islands on the eastern side : within these islands Little Dover passage continues out south-eastward, having 5, 6, and 7 fathoms water, and quite safe. St. Andreiv's Passage, leading to Glasgow Hpvbour, being so thickly encumbered with rocks, can only be navigated by ihose who b^-e well acquainted with its dangers. These places (says Mr. Lockwood) deserve notice, as they may affiard shelter in cases of emergency, and in war time are nests for privateers; while from the heights adjacent may benad an extensive view of whatever passes in the offing. RASPBERRY HARBOUR is to the westward of that of Canso or Port Glasgow; it is small, and the shores within quite bold. At the entrance, on the eastern side, is an island, having a ledge close to it on the S.E. By rounding this ledge, you may steer directly into the harbour, and come to an anchor, under the island which lies in the middle of it, in the depUi of 7 fitthoms, where you will ride safely. The country here is rocky and barren, and there is a quarry of granite, much in reque^^t for millstones. The outlet between Raspberry Island and the main is a complete dock, where vessels can lash themselves to both shores, and ride in 30 feet water; but half-way through, it has only 10 feet. , WHITE HAVEN, which is 2 leagues to the westward of Raspberry Harbour, is a place of hideous aspect. Of its rocky islets, the larger and outer one, called White Head, from the colour of its sides, is 70 feet above the level of the sea. This islet ap- pears round and smooth, and is a useful mark, as the passage in, on either side, is in mid-channel. OflT the head arc two breakers, one S.S.E. and the other E. by S., A a Z 2 H« Sailing Directions from •■ mile off; there is also a^cA, of 4 feet, lying ^ a mile S.S.W. \ W. ft-om White Head. The most numerous visiters of this place are crows, eagles, &c.; yet the neighbour- ing fishermen, during spring and summer, find in it large quantities of mackarel, herrings, &c. TORBAY.— The entrance of this bay is formed on the west by a bold headland, called Berry Head. The channel in is between this head and the islets to the eastward. E.S.E. from the head, and south of George's Island, are three very dtmgeram rockty which do not break when the sea is smooth. Within the bay, under the western penin- sula, there is excellent anchorage, in from 6 to 4 fathoms, muddy bottom, up to the eastern part of the bay. There is also anchorage on the western side of the Day, in from 7 to 3 fathoms, similar ground, where a vessel may lie in safety during any gale. The adjacent lands are rocky, but a few salt-marshes enable the innabitants to main- tain some cattle; and vessels are built here, of from 40 to 120 tons, which are employed in the fisheries. The principal dangers to be avoided in entering are, the amall sunken rockt in the offing, which in smooth water do not breaJc; they should be lefl to the eastward. Within the bay the anchorage is excellent, on a muddy bottom, with the exception of a few spots of rocks, sheltered from every wind. Torbay to Country Harbour. — From Torbay, westward, to Country Harbour, the land in general continues rocky and sterile, with deep water close va, but regular soundings without, and from 30 to 20 fathoms of water. Coddle^ s Harbour,, which is 3^ leagues to the westward of Berry Head, affords shel- ter to small vessels only; and these enter on the eastern side, to clear the breakers. There is a deep inlet, called New Harbour, which lies about 7 miles from the islands, and connected with a chain of extensive lakes ; but its navigation is obstructed by a bar across its entrance ; and it is open to southerly winds. COUNTRY HARBOUR.— The fine harbour, called Country Harbour, is navigable, for the largest ships, 12 miles from its entrance. It is, at present, but thinly settled; yet there are reasons for believing that, in consequence of improvements in the neigh- bourhood, the population will speedily increase. The shores are bold; the anchorage soft mud, with a depth of 13 to 5 fathoms. Mr. Lockwood has said that " No position in thb province is more advantageous for settlers than this harbour : at its mouth the islands afford shelter to fishermen and small vessels, as well as the means of erecting their stages; and the fishing grounds, at a short distance in the ofiing, abound in halibut, haddock, cod, and what they term the bait-fishery — that is, mackarel, gaspereaux, smelts, &c. Salmon are plentiful in their season; and, but for the improvident use of this valuable addition to the means of sub- sistence, would continue for ages." The leches off the harbour generally break, and between them are deep passages. On advancing from the eastward, there are two rocks to be avoided, which lie, as shown on the charts; proceeding inward, you should give Green Island a small berth, and the dangers on that side will be avoided. The rocks on the west of the entrance, named Castor and Pottux, are above water and bold-to. When above them, give Cape Moco- dame a good berth, so as to avoid the Bull, a dangerous sunken rock, that breaks in rough weather, and lies about ^ a mile from the extremity of the cape. The black rocks are partly dry, and from them, upwards, there is no danger, and the anchorage good. Vessels entering this harbour must use the utmost caution in steering between the ledges and rocks which are scattered about : fortunately they commonly show themselves whenever there happens to be any sea; this will render the entrance less difficult: but having passed the black rock, which is the innermost danger, the navigation is perfectly safe for the largest fleet. The tides are scarcely perceptible, except when, in the spring, the ice and snow dissolve, and heavy rains are prevalent. It is high water, fuU and change, at 8h. 40m. Tides rise 6 to 9 feet. , HARBOUR ISLAND. — The islands on the east side of the entrance (Green Island, Goose Island, and Harbour Island, or the William and Augustus Islands of Des Barres,) are low and covered with scrubby trees. Within Harbour Island is excellent anchorage. ,'\ FISHERMAN'S HARBOUR, on the west side of Country Harbour, is a favourite resort of fishing-vessels. In entering this place, between Cape Mocodame and the Chedahucto Bay to Halifax Harbour. 173 ite Head, jigbbour- mackarel, headland, eastward. oua rochty jm penin- up to the te Day, in any gale. s to main- I employed ci* in the eastward. iception of irbour, the ut regular Sbrds shel- e breakers, the islands, ;ed by a bar i navigable, nly settled; I toe neigb- i anchorage itageous for lermen and grounds, at ey term the iful in their eans of sub- ip passages, ie, as shown irth, and the [inee, named Cape Moco- Eit breaks in e black rocks orage good, between the w themselves Ufficult: but n is perfectly in the spring, ter, full and >reen Island, ands of Des 1 is excellent is a favourite ame and the black ledge, great care must always be taken to avoid the BvU Rock, which dries at low water, but is covered at high water, and only breaks when the weather is bad. BICKERTON HARBOUR, to the west of Fisherman's Harbour, is fit for small vessels only; but it is a safe, convenient, snug little harbour. At 2 miles to the west of it is Hollin*s Harbour, a place of shelter for coasters, and resorted to by the fisher- men. Indian Harbour is a shallow and unsafe creek, but has good lands, well clothed with nine, maple, birch, and spruce. The next inlet, caHeaWine Harbour, has a bar ojaani, which is nearly dry. There are but few settlers on these harbours. ST. MARY'S RIVER.— The navigation of this river is impeded by a bar of 15 feet water, which extends across, at the distance of 1} mile above Gunning Point, the west point of the entrance. Below the bar, towards the western side, is a middle ground^ which appears uncovered in very low tides ; and, above the bar, nearly in mid-cnanneir is a anuui rocky ialet. The passage over the bar is on the eastern side of this islet. The tide, which is very rapid, marks out the channel ; the latter is devious, between mud- banks, extending from each shore, and dry at low water. The depths upwards ore from 24 to 18 feet. Sailing in, you should proceed for 4 miles N.N.W., then 2 miles N. by W. ; and afterwards r7.N.W. to the Fork, where it divides, the western branch termmatinff in a brook; the eastern branch continuing navigable ^ of a mile farther up to the rapids. The town of Sherbrook is, at present, a smtm village, at the head of the river, about 3 leagues from the sea. WEDGE ISLE.~This islet, called Wedge Isle, which lies at the distance of ^ a league south from the S.W. point of St. Mary's River, is remarkable, and serves as an excellent guide to the harbours in the neighbourhood. A beacon, erected upon it, may be seen from 6 to 8 miles off. This beacon is of wood; its top is 140 feet above the sea, covered at the top, and painted white. The side of this islet, towards the main land, is abrupt, and its summit is 115 feet above the sea. From its S.W. end ledges stretch outward to the distance of ^ a mile ; and some sunken rocks, extending towards it from the main, obstruct the passage nearly half-way over. About 2^ miles south from the Wedge is a fishing-bank, of 30 to 20 feet, the area of which is about 200 acres. Thb harbour or JEGOGAN may be readily found, on the eastward, by Wedge Isle, above described; and, on the westward by the bold and high land called Redman'd Head. The passage in is at the distance of ^ of a mile fVom that head ; because, at the distance of | of a mile, is a dry ledge, called the Shag. Within the small island on the east side of the entrance, called Tobacco Isle, there is anchorage in 4 or 5 fathoms, muddy bottom. LISCOMB HARBOUR.— The entrance of this harbour, which is one of the best on the coast, is between Liscomb Island and 'c headland on the west, called Smith, or White Point ; a mile to the northward of this is t ■ reen Point, which is bold-to. From the S.E. end of Liscomb Island, a lee^e, with breakers, extends to the distance of f of a mile. Within, and under the lee of the island, is safe anchorage in from 13 to 8 fathoms. On the N.E. of the island, a vessel caught in a S.E. gale may be sheltered by Redman's Head, already described, with the head S.S.E., in 6 and 7 fathoms, on a bottom of clay. On the west side, the ground, from Smith Point, is shoal to the distance of nearly a mile S.S.E.; and at 2 miles south from the point is a rock, with only 13 feet over it, and lies with Smith and Green Points in one. Another skoal of 12 feet, on which the sea breaks, lies If mile S.S.W. from the east end of Liscomb Island; a mile within, or nearer the island, in the same direction, lies a rock. The Black Prince Rock, drying at low water, and on which the sea always breaks, lies S.E. by E. from the east end of Liscomb Island. To enter the harbour from the southward, between the 12 and 13 feet shoals, which are 1^ mile apart, keep Green Point well open of Smith's Point, bearing N. by W. ^ W. ; when within a mile of Smith'f Point, keep more to the northward, and run up in mid-channel. The island side is bold. The first direction of the harbour is nearly north, then W.N.W. Opposite to the first fish-stage, at ^ a mile from shore, is as good a berth as can be desired, in 7 fathoms. From this place the harbour is navigable to the distance of 4 miles: it is, however, to be observed, that there are two sunken rocks on the north side. 3 174 •..»»wVv. Sailing Directions frotA BAY OF ISLANDS. — The ooaat between Liicotnb and Beaver Ilarboun, an ex- tent of 6 leoffues, is denominated the Bay of Islands. Within this space the tW«to, rocka, and let^ea arc innumerable : they form passages in all directions, which have, in Seneral, a cowl depth of water. At the eastern part of this labyrinth, near Liscomb, is Iarie«et-Jo8eph, an excellent harbour, capable of containing a fleet of the largest ships, but requires caution to enter; the settlers on which keep large herds of cattle, &c. Nicomuuirque is a small settlement in the same range; the inhabitants of which arc an industrious set of people. Newton-quaddy, next east of Beaver, has a few families situated on the side ot a shoal river; the land here is good. The White lalands, nearly half-way between the harbours of Beaver and Liscomb, appear of a light stone-colour, with green summits. The latter are about 60 feet above the level of the sea. The isles are bold on the south side ; the passage between them safe; and there is good anchorage within them, in from 10 to 7 fathoms. From these the rocka and ledgea extend fi or 6 miles from east to E.N.E. ; they ore bold-to and mostly dry ; the water within them being always smooth. BEAVER HARBOUR.— -The Pumpkin and Beaver Islands are very remarkable to vessels sailing along the coast, particularly Pumpkin Island, which is a lofty and dark barren rock ; but they afford a smooth and excellent shelter inside of them during a southerly gale. Southerland Island has, on its N.W. side, a deep and bold inlet, where a vessel may lie concealed, and as secure as in a dock. When in the offing, the har- bour is remarkable, on account of the small island which lies north of the Black rock, having at its southern end a red cliff, being the only one on this coast; having entered the harbour, you may choose your anchorage, according to the direction of the wind, the bottom being generally mud. The basin on the west side is so steep-to, that a vessel may be afloat with her side touching the beach. To enter the harbour, a stran- ger should take a pilot. On Beaver Outer Island, or William's Island, a revolving light has latel^r been esta- lilished; the light is visible 1^ minute, and obscured i a minute. The lighthouse is square, 70 feet high, painted white, with two black balls painted on its seaward side. A r^e/* extends eastward from Beaver Island, a considerable distance, so that, on enter- ing the bay, you should give the light a berth of J of a mile; and steer in N.N.W. The lighthouse stands in latitude 44" 47' 49" north, and longitude 62° 25' 18" west, by chronometer. Sambro lighthouse bears from it W. ^ S., distant 54 miles; and Cape Cianso lighthouse E. $ N., distant 70 miles, bearings magnetic. SHEET HARBOUR.— This harbour is nearly half-way between Country Harbour and Halifax. It is very extensive, but dangerous for vessels to approach in thick wea- ther. The narrow channel, between Sober island and the main, anords secure anchor- age, on a bottom of mud. The name is derived from a blank cliff, on a rocky isle at the entrance, which appears like a suspended sheet. Without the harbour are the several ledges shown on the charts. These ledges show themselves, excepting the outer one, called by the fishermen, Yankee Jack, and which, when the sea is smooth, is very dangerous. It has been asserted, that a rockj/ skoed lies ^ a mile to the south of the xankee, but its position has not been ascertained. Within the entrance is a rock^ 2 feet under water, which will be avoided by keeping the Sheet Rock open of the island next within it, on the eastern side. In sailing or turning up the harbour, give the sides a very moderate berth, and you will have from 11 to 15 fathoms, good holding ground. The flood, at the entrance of Sheet Harbour, sets S.S.W., about a mile an hour. High water, full and change, at 8h. 50m.; tiJes rise 7 feet. MUSHABOON. — To the westward of Sheet Harbour is a small bay, open to the S.E., which affords shelter at its head only, in from 7 to 5 fathoms, muddy bottom. It is connected to Sheet Harbour by a clear, deep, and bold passage, between an island and the main land. Here you may lash your vessel to the trees; and, lying in 6 fathoms, soft bottom, with the side touching tne cliff, be perfectlj^ sheltered from all winds. This place is uninhabited, the laud being incapable of cultivation. In going through the passage to Sheet Harbour, you must guard asaiast a. sunken rock at its mouth, which, from the smoothness of the water, seldom shows its position ; this rock lies 400 yards off Banbury Islands, and may easily be cleared by keeping the Sheet Roek open of the island. J ivi >? -\ Chedabucto Bay to Halifax Harbour. 175 m, an ex- tho !«/«<«, h have, in liscomb, is rgest ships, cattle, &c. lich arc an m Aunilies 1 Liscomb, foet aboYe ween them ^Tom these old-to and remarkable ly and dark a during a nlet, where ff, the har- black rock, ing entered f the wind, >-to, that a tur, a stran- ' been esta- ghthouse is laword side. ,t, on enter- in N.N.W. / 18" west, i; and Cape py Harbour 1 thick wea- ure anchor- y isle at the ledges show and which, rocky ihoal 'tained. by keeping n sailing or have from le an hour. open to the bottom. It en an island n 5 fathoms, _ all winds, ing through Duth, which, 00 yards off open of the SPRY HARBOT'R.— Cape Spry, or Taylor*! Head, divides Mushaboon fW>m Spry, or Taylor's Harbour. It has, on each side of the entrance, a high, rocky, barren oape, distinguishable at a long distance. When sailing in, you will perceive the land in the centre of the harbour, appearing in three distinct hiUs; keep the valley between the two easternmost, on with the Bud Rooks, which will lead you between Mad Moll Reef and Moloney Rook. You may now steer in for the anc^iorage, at the western head of the harbour, where a fleet may lie land-locked on a muddy bottom. This harbour is open to S.£. and S.S.E. winds : at the entrance the flood-tide sets in at about a mile on hour. DEANE, OB POPE'S HARBOUR, on the western side of Gerard's Isles, has a le^e at its entrance, forming an obtuse angle at the two points, f of a mile from each, and from which a ahoal extends to the southward ^ a mile. It may be passed on either side : but, on the west, care must be taken to avoid a shoal extending from the outer Tangier Island The best shelter is under the smaller island on the eastern side, where there are from 8 to 6 fathoms, with good clay ground. TANGIER HARBOUR, next to Deane, or Pope's, is formed by craggy, barren islands, which seciure vessels from all winds. At about 2 miles from its mouth is a hsdge that dries at low water. The anchorage is under the eastern shore above Fisher's Nose, in 5 to 4 fathoms, stiff mud. Here are some good tracts of pasture-land, and the few inhabitants are occupied in the fishing and coasting trades. SHOAL BAY is the Saunders Harbour of Des Barres. — This bay has aj[ood depth of water and excellent anchorage on fine white sand and strong mua. Thelatter is to the northward of the island now called Charles Island, and vessels lie in it, land-locked, in 7 fathoms. Off the mouth of the harbour is a rock^ that always breaks; but it is bold-to, and may be passed on either side. Some parts of the harbour will admit large ships to lie afloat, alongside the shore, over a bottom of black mud. Supplies of stocK^ &c., may be obtained m>m the inhabitants of this place. SHIP HARBOUR is easy, and safe to enter, having good anchorage in every part, the bottom being tough blue clay ; it leads to Charles's River, above the narrows of which, a fleet of the largest ships may lie alongside of each other, without the smallest motion. In this harbour, and on the isles about it, are several families, who keep small stocks of cattle, &c. The entrance, called by Des Barres, Knowles* Harbour, is deep and bold: it lies between two islands, of which the eastern is Brier's, or Charles's Island, on the western side of which is a lighthouse. A white cliff, which may be seen from a considerable distance in the offing, is a good mark for the harbour: at first it resembles a ship under sail, but on approaching seems more like a schooner's topsail. There is good anchorage in every part or the harbour. Brier's Island, above mentioned, is a low, rugged island, and ledges, partly dry, extend from it } of a mile to the eastward : avoiding these, when entering this way, you may range along the western island, and come to an anchor under its north pomt, in 6 or 7 fauioms, the bottom of mud. OWL'S HEAD, OR KEPPEL HARBOUR, which is next to the west of the har- bour last de8cril>v(% although ^malter than many other harbours on the coast, has sufficient space for a fleet. It may be known, at a distance, by Owl's Head, on the western side, which appears round, abrupt, and very remarkable. The neighbouring coast and isles are rugged and barren, but the harbour has a few settlers. The entrance is of sufficient breadth to allow a large ship to turn into it : and within the harbour shipping lie land-locked, when in 6 and 7 fathoms, with a bottom of mud. In taking a berth, you will be guided by the direction of the wind; as, with a S.W. gale) the western an- chorage ia to be preferred, and the eastern with a S.E. The flood-tide sets into this harbour from the S.W., at the rate of a mile an hour. At Owl's Head it is high water at 8h. 30m. ; tides rise from d to 7 feet. JEDORE HARBOUR is the Port Egmont of Des Barres. In the offing, at the distance of 2 leases from the land, the lK>dy of the flood sets in from S.W. by S., at the rate of ^ a nule an hour. It is high water at Jedore Head at 8h. 20m.; tides rise from 6 to 9 feet. From the appearance of this harbour on the charts, it might be presumed that it is spacious and commodious; but, on examination, it will be found really different. The entrance is imsafe and intricate; a shoal, of only 11 feet, lies at its mouth; the chan- nel within is narrow and winding, and there are extensive mud-flats, covered at high 176 Sailing Directiont from Wftter, and uncovered with the ebb; hence a stranger can enter with safety only at low water, the channel being cluurly in sight, and the water sufBcient for large ships. Tbv best anchorage is ubreant of the aand-beach, 2 miles within the entrance, in from 9 to 6 fathoms, on a bottom of stiflfmud. At 2^ miles above the beach the harbour divides; one branch on the port hand is navigable nearly to its extremity, and has uvtral tunk$n rocka in it; while to the starboard is a large space, with a clear bottom, and from 3 to ti fathoms. On the eastern shore are Oyster Fond and Navy Pool, two deep inlets, but choaked at their entrance by a bed of rocks; the river tormmates with a rapid. The lands at the head of the harl)our are stony, but tolerably goor in case of ;alled Clam, the size of ft from the isle the surface, the east end , the N.E. of /, called the and, during *oUuck Shoal, 1 down on tho ur. 1 for shipping, I, of moderate characteristic is that called will be found rs and sloops, lis tough blue 1 coming from ind; and, with only in cases Island, and re, the sound- - bound for the especially when L island, and its be necessary at illocks; that in er your proxi- iangerous hars; lad your depth id rate of about e placed on the distress. In making land more to the south-westward, and about Cwpe Sable, you must be par- ticularly careful to avoid Stal Itdand Roeka and the BraitU Rock. To tho westward of Great Seal Island the soundinffs are very irregular for upwards of 20 miles, at whidi distance are 46 fathoms, gravel and stones. Indeed, the sounding* along Nova Bcotia, trom Cape Canso to Cane Sable, partake of the same irregularity, from 2fi to 60 fkthoms; therefore you should not oome ne&rer th^ land than SJ fathoms, unless you are well assured of the exact part you are in, for otherwise, endeavouring to enter Halifax, you may be (fariven into Mah'>i.o or Mecklenburgh Bays, and be caught by S.G. winds. The weather is senerally toggy 4 or 6 leagues oflT shore, both in spring and summer; but it becomes clearer ai you got nearer the coast; and, with the wind on the land, it will be perfectly clear. From 1 to 3 leagues out to seaward, maokarel, halibut, rays, haddock, and cod are found in plenty; and at the entrance of the harbours and rivers, salmon is taken from April to August; the bays abound with herrmgs in June and July, and with tom-cod all the year round. KAUTAZ, the capital of Nova Scotia, is situated in 44** 39' north, and longitude 63° 37' west; its harbour being large enough to accommodate any quantity of shipping in perfect safety. Its direction lies nearly north and south, being about 16 nules in length, and terminates in Bedford Basin, which is an extensive sheet of water, containing 10 square miles of saib anchorage. The town is situated on the declivity of a peninsula. At the western side of the harbour, about 10 miles from its entrance ; and is said to have 15,000 inhabitants, a naval yard and hospital, together with a citadel. It is a free warehousing port, and contains two Episcopal churones, two Presbyterian, two Baptist, and three other chapels. The village of Dartmouth Is opposite .to Halifax; it is thinly settled; but the lands behind it are in an improving state; and there are some i'lue farms belonging to the descendants of the orignal German settlers. HALIFAX HARBOUR. — In approaching the harbour of Halifax, jou will per- ceive the coast about its environs, particularly to the southward, to be ragged and rocky, with patches of withered wood scattered about; but the land is rather low in general, and not visible 20 miles off, except from the quarter-deck of a 74, the high mountains of Le Have and Aspotogon excepted, which may be seen 9 leagues off. When Aspotogon Hills, which have a long level appearance, bear north, and you are 6 leagues distant, on E.N.E. course will carry vou to Sambro lighthouse; this stands on Sambro Island, and is rendered remarkable by being a high tower, elevated 210 feet above the sea. There are two 24-pounder8 placed on the island, under the direction of a small party of artillery-men; tuese are fired on tho approach of vessels, and contribute much to the mariner's safety, by warning him off the aidjacent breakers. Sambro Island and lighthouse lie on the S.W. side of the entrance to the harbour; it is in latitude 44° 26' north, and longitude 63° 35' west. S. by E., distant 2 full miles from the lighthouse, lies the Henereu Rocky with only 8 feet water over it; and E.N.E., distant a mile from the Henercy, lies the Loekwoody of 12 feet; these appear to be but little known, although they are both very dangerous. Thk LEDGES. — About 2 miles to the westward are the Western Ledgea; these are the Butt, the Horsea, and the S.W. or Outer Rock; the Bull is the westernmost and nearest to the land: this is a rock about water, lying above f of a mile S.£.by£. from Pendant Point, the lighthouse bearing from it K 7''^S. The Horses are about a mile to the south-eastward of the Bull, the lighthouse bearing E. by N., distant 1} mile; and the S.W. Rock, or licdge, lies with the lighthouse bearing N.E., distant 1^ mile. To avoid these, constant caution will be requisite, though they are surrounded by deep water, the channel between the Bull and the main having 10 fathoms water, and the Sassage clear. Between the Horses and the Bull are 11 fathoms, and no intermediate anger; and between the Hwses and the S.W. Rock there are 20 fathoms. The Owen Rock. — ^This rock was discovered by Captain Owen, R.N., in H.M. steam- vessel Colombia, on the 2l8t May, 1844; it has only 12 feet water on it. When the vessel touched there were 8 fathoms from the starboard, and 18 fathoms from the port paddle-box. It lies with Sambro lighthouse bearing S.W., distant 1^ of fk mile. The Eaatem Ledgea are the Siatera, or Black Rocka; these lie nearly E. by S. from the lighthouse, distant § of a mile. There is also the BeU Rock, lying farther in, uui [N. America — Part I.] A a 178 Sailimj Directions from w !l about \ of a mile from the land, the extremity of Chebucto Head bearing N.byE.iE., distant f of a mile. In advancing up the harbour, you will meet with several othei' rocks, as the Bock Head, which lies with Chebucto Head S.W. by W., distant 2^ miles ; and the DeviTs Island N.E. ^ E., about the same distance; the Thrum Cap, which ex- tends from the south end of Mar, NaVs, or Comwallis's Island; the Lichfield, on the western side of the harbour, having only 16 feet water over it; and the Mars Rock^ lying also on the western side. Point Sandwich bearing north, distant j a mile, and nearly in a line with it and the west side of George's Island ; all these are distinguished by buoys and flags being placed upon them. There is also a reef, called the Horse Shoe, which runs out from Mauger's Beach on the west side of Mac NaVs Island; this is dangerous, and must carefully be avoided. On Mauger's Beach is a tower, called Sherbrook Tower, on which is a lighthouse, elevated 58 feet above the level of the sea. This useful light is of a red colour, and intended to lead vessels up the harbour. When abreast of Chebucto Head, or when Sambro light bears W.S.W., the light on Mauger's Beach should never be brought to the westward of north. By keeping the light from north to N. by E., will lead clear of the Thrum Cap Shoal. This lighthouse bears from the Thrum Cap buoy N. J W., 2 miles. Vessels coming from the eastward must keep Sambro light open to the southward of Chebucto Head, until the light opens on Mauger's Beach, which will then bear N. J W., when they will be to the westward of Thrum Cap Shoal, and may shape a course up the harbour, always keeping the light on the beach open, and on the starboard bow. Vesseh from the westward will see the light when they are as far eastward as Che- bucto Head, which, being kept on the starboard bow, leads them up to the beach. Half-way between Maxiger's Beach aud George's Island is a shoal, on the opposite side, extending to the S.E. from Point Pleasant, nearly ^ of the channel over, and having a buoy at its extremity; the thwart-mark for this buoy is a little islet at the entrance of the N.W. arm, on with a remarkable stone upon the hill, appearing like a coach-box, and bearing W.S.W. Between Point Pleasant Shoal and Mauger's Beach is a middle ground, of 4^ and 5 fathoms, sometimes pointed out by a buoy; this middle ground extends north and south a cable's length, and is about 30 fathoms broad ; as you fall off to the eastward of it there will be found from 7 to 13 fathoms water, muddy bottom; while on the west side there ai'e from 10 to 14 fathoms, coarse rocky soundings. REID'S ROCK has 12 feet over it, and lies in shore, about midway between Point Pleasant and Halifax ; the thwart-mark for this danger is a farm-house in the wood, over a black rock on the shore, bearing W. by S. ; and opposite to Reid's Rock is a buoy on a spit, extending from the N.W. end of Mac Nab s Island. MAC N AB'S ISLAND lies on the eastern side of the channel, and is nearly 3 miles in length and 1 in breadth; there is a small island to the eastward of it, called CaroU's Island; boats can pass this way, or between it and the Devil's Island shore, in what is commonly called the S.E. Passage, but the channel is too shallow for shipping ; and it is further obstructed by a bar of sand to the southward, over which is only 8 feet water. Mac Nab's Island is well cultivated; and in Mac Nab's Cove there is good an- chorage, in from 9 to 4 fathoms, muddy bottom ; the best situation is in 7 fathoms, with Mauger's Beach and Sandwich Point locked ; George's Tower touching Ives Point. Upon Rock Head is a floating-beacon, with a cask at the top; it lies with George's Island tower in one with Ives Point, and Sambro lighthouse just seen over Chebucto Head. On Devil's Island, on the east side the entrance, a beacon of wood, painted white, is erected, 50 feet in height. On Thrum Cap Reef is a beacon-buoy; it lies with George's Island open of Ives Point. The above three beacons and Mauger's lighthouse are to be kept on the star- board side going into the harbour. There are also flag-beacons on the Lichfield and Mars Rocks, to be left on your port hand going in. The leading-mark in^ between these beacons, is the fla^-stafTon Citadel Hill open of Point Sandwich. ,,, , , .,. j, :,, a i ^ iveral othet* tit 2i miles ; >, which ex- ield, on the Mars Bochf a mile, and listinguished i the Horse Island; this a, lighthouse, colour, and the light on keeping the lis lighthouse southward of bearN.iW., 5 a course up board bow. ward as Che- le beach. 1 the opposite nel over, and ie islet at the pearing like a uger's Beach this middle ms broad ; as thoms water, coarse rocky jetween Point 5 in the wood, d*s Rock is a nearly 3 miles culled Caroirs ore, in what is ipping ; and it IS only 8 feet ere is good an- T fathoms, with Ives Point. with George's over Chebucto [linted white, is i open of Ives >pt on the star- ft on your port staff on Citadel Halifax to Cape Sable. 171) In standing in for the land off Halifax Harbour, you may know on which side of the harbour you are by a remarkable difference that takes place immediately from its mouths, in the colour of the shores; for if it should be red, you are to the eastward of it, and if white, you will be to the westward of it. To sail for Halifax Harbour. — Having made the lighthouse, and coming from the westward, at night, with a westerly wind, the light being 7 or 8 miles off", steer E.N.E. or E. by N., until you have passed the S.W. Ledges, and the lighthouse bears north; then run on N.E. or N.E. by N. until you bring it to bear N.W., which being done, take a N.N.E. or N.E. by N. course, until you bring it W.N.W.; you will then, agree- ably to the wind, haul up north, or N. by E., for Chebucto Head, avoiding the Bell Rock. Chebucto Head is bold-tc within J a mile from the shore ; rftn on north, along the west shore for Sandwich Point, which is also bold; thus you will safely pass the Lichfield Bock, leaving it on your port side ; this rock has a buoy and flag placed on its east- ern end. A mile northward of which is the Mars Rock, the situation of which is pointed out by another buoy and flag, which must also be left on the port hand. When abreast of Sandwich Point, get as near middle channel as you can, for on the opposite side is the Horse Shoe, a dangerous shelf, which stretches out from Mauger's Beach ; steer on mid-channel between Mauger's Beach and the Horse Shoe, and having passed the latter, edge over to Mac Nab's Island. Midway between the island and Point Pleasant Shoals, on the extremity of which is a buoy, and rather more than ^ a mile farther, on the same side, is Reidts Rock, the position of which is also denoted by another buoy : these are all to be left on the port side. On the starboard, or opposite side, is a red beacon-buoy placed upon the spit which runs oft' Mac Nab's Island ; you will sail on between these two latter buoys, and having passed the reef, steer directly nor|h for George's Island, which you may pass on either side, and run up for and abreast of the town of Halifax, where you wul find anchorage in 9 and 10 fathoms, muddy ground, 2 cables' length east of the mooring-buoys, or near enough to the wharfs to throw your hawser on shore. There is a middle ground between Mauger's Beach and Point Pleasant Shoal, which sometimes has a buoy upon it, but not less than 5 fathoms has yet been found upon it. "The great difliculty (says Mr. Chalmers, a Master in the Royal Navy) of making Halifax from the eastward, particularly in the winter season, is, that the winds are generally from the W.S.W. to N.W., and blow so hard as to reduce a ship to very low canvas, if not to bare poles : but should the wind come to the eastward, it is invariably attended with such thick weather as to prevent an observation, or seeing any great distance ; and consequently renders it imprudent to run on a lee shore under such circumstances, and more particularly in the winter time, when the easterly winds are attended with sleet and snow, which lodge about the masts, sails, rigging, and every Sart of the ship, becoming a solid body of ice so soon as the wind shifts round to the r.W., which it does suddenly from the eastward. What adds considerably to the above difficulty is, having been several days without an observation, and subject to a current, which sometimes runs strong to the southward, you may have the Bay of Fundy open, and be swept into it by the strong indraught which prevails when the wind has been any time from tne southward or eastward. "From the above circumstances, I wouH recommend that ships bound to Halifax in the winter, should shape a southerly course, and run down their longitude in latitude from 38° to 36°,* in which parallel they will make the principal part of the passage in a temperate climate, until they approach the coast of America, when they will be met by the westerly or even the N. W. winds, which will enable them (having got soundings, on St. George's Bank,) to make their course good along shore, and with a free wind and clear weather, cross the Bay of Fundy, with confidence of their situation; then, so * It has been recommended by some navigators to keep in high northern latitudes when crossing the Atlantic from Europe to the nortliern parts of America, the weather being found less severe to the northward. By crossing the Grand Bank in latitude 45° or 46° in the winter season, you are well to windward in case of meeting a heavy north-wester; you also escape being retarded in your progress by tlie easterly set of the Gulf Stream. Tbo New York packet-ships generally take tins route in their winter passages : and by slipping in to the north- ward of the Gulf Stream, and to the southward of Sable Island, they find a westerly current in their favour. This latter route is also recommended to those bound to Halifax and New Brunswick. A a '2 ! I 180 Sailing Directions from soon as thev have shut in the bay, keep the shore aa. board the whole way to Halifax lighthouse. Observe, in coming from the eastward with an easterly wind, the Thrum Cap Shoals, which must be particularly avoided. A red buoy, with a flag, as before noticed, now marks their extremity. To go clear of them, you should bring the easternmost land in sight a ship's length to the southward of Devu's Island, bearing E. by N., nearly, and steer in west or W. by S., as best suits the distance you are from the island, and according to the wind and situation. With respect to the shoals, you may pursue a west, N.W., or W.N.W. course, until George's Island comes a sail's breadth open to the westward of Mac Nab's Island; then endeavour to get the leading-marks on, and haul up north for the harbour. ' Or, when coming in from the south-eastward, you may steer for Chebucto Head, until the leading-marks come on for entering the harbour; taking care, if in the vicinity of Rock Head, to keep Sambro lighthouse well open of Chebucto Head, until you get the marks on for entering the harbour. Another long mark for Halifax Harbour, from abreast of Chebucto Head, and steer- ing in north or N. ^ W., is the middle of three hills, over Dartmouth village, having some trees upon it, in a line with the N.W. end of George's Island; this will lead clear of the dangers on both sides, and over the middle ground, in from 5 to 8 fathoms, and up to George's Island. The following directions for sailing into Halifax Harbour, are given by Mr. Lock- wood. — ''In approaching from the westward, round the lighthouse, at the distance of a league, to avoid the mnken rocks which lie to the southward, when the light bears N.W.by W., haul in north or N. byW., according to your distance off. The flag- staves on Citadel Hill'above the town ore distinguishable at a considerable distance; by keeping them open of Sandwich Point, you are led clear of the Belly Lichfieldy and Mars Rocks on the west side; and the Rock Head and Thrum Cap to the east. When arrived at Sandwich Point, keep Chebucto Head in sight, by not allowing it to be shut in; this plain mark will lead in the fairway home to George's Island. Leaving Point Pleasant Shoals on the left, and Mac Nab's Shoals on the right, round George's Island on either side, and anchor any where in 6, 10, or 13 fathoms, muddy ground. From George's Island to the entrance of Sackville River there is not a single obstruction." Men-of-war commonly anchor off the naval yard, which a stranger wul distinguish by the masting sheers ; merchant-vessels discharge their cargoes, and load alongside the wharfs. At Halifax dock-yard it is high water, full and change, at 8 o'clock; spring- tides rise from 6 to 9 feet. Catch Harbour, fit only for small vessels, lies to the westward of Chebucto Head; it has a bar across, with breakers, and only 9 feet water ; within it are 3 and 3^ fathoms, Several families of fishermen are its inhabitants, who chiefly subsist by supplying Halifax markets with fish. Remakes. — Leaving Halifax, and sailing westward, you will find the shores to be steep, and appear from seaward broken and rocky, with whitish cliffs; the high lands of Aspotogon and Le Have, before mentioned, are conspicuous and remarkable; to the westward the rocks about the land appear black, with reddish banks of earth. Le H&ve appears bald or barren at the top, with red earthy hillocks under it, and between Cape Le Have and Port Medway, or Jackson, are some hummocks in land, the coast to sea- ward being level and low, and the shores marked with white rocks, with low barren points; from thence to Shelburne and Roseway it is woody. Near Port Latour are several barren places, and thence to Cape Sable the land is low, with white sandy clifls, particularly visible at sea. The following remarks, on sailing between Halifax and the Gut of Canso, are by Mr. H. Davy, Master of H.M. ship Comwallis. "H.M. ship ComwaUis left Halifax June 4th, 1838, — wind north with fine weather. Sailed for the Gut of Canso. Passed out between the Thrum Cap buoy, having 10 fathoms. This channel is quite safe. Being thus cleared, steered E.S.E., 27 miles, which led us to the northward of the Jedore Shoals, the east, for White Head; wind and weather lo6king favourable. ''Just to the eastward of Cold Harbour is a remarkable red cliff, making in a well- formed saddle ; the red is bright, and the eastern coast rendered easily to be recognized, Halifax to Cape Sable. 181 to Halifax 2ap Shoals, oticed, now nmost land nearly, and island, and rsue a west, )pen to the •n, and haul i, you may be harbour; irell open of I, and steer- lage, having [lis will lead 8 fathoms, f Mr. Lock- e distance of light bears ; The flag- ble distance; jichfieldy and east. When it to be shut eaving Point orge*s Island )und. From obstruction." istinguish by alongside the spring-tides ibucto Head; d 3^ fathoms, lying Halifax shores to be he high lands kable; to the th. LeH&ve jatween Cape coast to sea- h low barren Latour are e sandy cliffs, Canso, are by fine weather, oy, having 10 ■^.E., 27 miles, s Head; wind ing in a well- )e recognized, ' from the circumstance of the coast, west of Halifax, having white cliffs. It is advisable for strangers running from Jedore to Canso, not to approach the coast nearer than 10 miles, until abreast of Torbay. This is a spacious bay, having Berry Head at its w<9'' a point and Cape Martingo at its eastern, 5 miles apart. White Head IslatJ, iav iiately to the eastward of Tor Bay, is the most remarkable land on the coast, and is i.;.. it, beacon to the pilots; it stands well out, and from the westward terminates the eastern view. Being 10 miles south of it, steer N.E. by £. for Canso lighthouse, which is a tall white building, and makes well out to seaward, on a small, low island, called Cranberry Island. It exhibits a good fixed light, which must be brought to bear west before keeping awav; then steer N.N.W., until George Island bears west, thence N.W. and N.N.W. for Cape Argos. Avoiding the Cerbenu Shoal, which is very dan- gerous, and directly in the track, leave it on your port hand. Cape Argos makes like a round island, and is bold to approach ; passing tnis, the distance across the gut be- comes narrow^ 1 to 1 J mile." — Naut. Mag.,, vol. viii., p. 299. SAMBRO HARBOUR is IJ mile N.N.W. from the lighthouse; off its entrance is the Bull Rock, and there are also two other rocks between ; the best channel into the har- bour is between Pennant Point and the Bull, but vessels from the eastward may run up between Sambro Island and the Inner Rock : you are to leave the Isle of Man to the port in entering; the anchorage is within the island, on a mudd;' bottom, with 3 fathoms water. The strait which connects the harbour with Londy basin is exceedingly narrow, and has only 2 fathoms water. This place is generally the resort of coasters in bad weather. The passage between the rocks and ledges that lie to the southward of Sambro Har- bour, may oftentimes conduce to the safety of vessels that make the land by mistake so far to the westward of the light as to be unable to clear the dangers southward of it, but should be attempted only in cases of emergency; the depth of water is sufficient fon the largest ships, but great prudence is required. PENNANT HARBOUR, named by Des Barres, Port Affleck, is situated round the point to the westward of Port Sambro ; it has a fair channel leading in between Pennant and Great Head Island, with good and secure anchorage in 6 or 8 fi&thoms; it is extensive, and safe in bad weather, and the dangers are all visible. TENNANT'S, ok BRISTOL BAY, is to the westward of Pennant Harbour; it is well sheltered above Macworth Point, and there is anchorage in 9 fathoms, on a bottom of tough clay. The passage in lies between the rocks of Point Macworth and the White Rocks. There is also a safe passage between Cape Pennant and Harvey Island, with anchorage in 5 to 8 fathoms. When entering, the land presents, to the eye of a stran- fer, the rudest features of nature; but it is extensive and safe, and in bad weather the angers all show themselves. It is high water, full and change, at 7h. 45m., and the tides rise about 8 feet. PROSPECT HARBOUR lies about 3 miles to the N.W. of Cape Prospect, which forms the west side of Bristol Bay, and its entrance is encumbered with a cluster of islands, which form the western side of Bristol Bay ; at the back of these islands is a Considerable inlet, called by Des Barres, Parker's River, but little frequented. Prospect Harbour wears, at its entrance, a rugged broken appearance; but it is safe, commodious, and extensive ; and in rough weather the dangers mostly show themselves. Vessels coming from the eastward and rounding Cape Prospect, must beware of a rock, with 17 feet over it ; it lies south, about ^ of a mile from the cape ; go not between it and the cape, but proceed on its southern side in 20 and 21 fathoms water, and by keeping more than ^ a mile from the land you will steer quite clear of danger, and may sail boklly up its eastern channel between Prospect and Betsey's Islands; having passed these, the channel narrows; the western passage is between Hobson's Nose and Dorman's Rock; there is good anchorage for large ships above Pyramid Island, and also for small vessels, within Betsey's Island, in 4^ fathoms, blue stiff clay. At the entrance to this harbour the depths are very irregular ; and there is a rocky over which the sea breaks, having 3 fathoms over it, and lying 2 cables' length to the eastward of Dorman's Rock. There are some residents on the western side of the bay. LEITH HARBOUR.— This lies about 2^ miles to the north-westward of Prospect Harbour; and here are situated the inlets called Shag and Blind Bays, both possessing excellent anchorages. At its entrance lies the H(^, a sunken rock, having 6 feet water ^"^s^M""':' 182 Sailing Directions from over it, and bearing E.S.E., about 1^ mile from Taylor's Island. In fair weather the Hos Rock may be readily perceived by a constant ripple over it, and in bad weather, with an on-shore wind, it will be distinguished by the breakers. There are good channels on both sides; but the eastern one is always to be preferred, on account of the ledga which extends E.S.E., about ^ a mile towards it, from Taylor's Island. DOVER PORT lies at the western side of the entrance to Blind Bay, and is chiefly formed by Taylor's and the adjacent islands; this is the Port Durham of former charts, and aflbrds safe and good anchorage; the eastern passage is the best: and in sailing in, you must give the re^that stretches off the east end of Taylor's Island a sufficient berth, anchoring within the body of the largest island in 7, 8, 9, or 10 fathoms, muddy bottom. The western entrance has some suviken rocks in it, and is in some places but shallow. Between the harbours of Halifax and Dover the shores are craggy, broken, and barren, 8teep-to, iron-bound, and destitute of trees ; but the creeks and inlets abound with fish, and great quantities of cod, herrings, and mackarel, are caught and cured here for the markets. MARGARET'S BAY.— The entrance to this bay is to the westward of Taylor's Island, about a league; the bay itself is full 25 miles in circumference, in length 9 miles, and in breadth, from Peggv's Point to Owl's Head, about 2 miles; here are harbours capable of receiving ships of the line, even against the sides of the shores. The high lands of Aspotogon, which appear to the westward, on the isthmus which separates Margaret's and Mahone Bays, are 43S feet above the level of the sea, and may be seen 7 or 8 leagues off. OWL'S HEAD is very remarkable, being round and abrupt. The lands and islands in the neighbourhood are rugged and barren. The body of the flood-tide sets in from S.W., at the rate of a mile an nour. Following the coast, which runs nearly 2 miles W.N.W. from Taylor's Island to E^t Point, there is a rock uncovered at low water, which lies near the land, having a passage between, with 4 and 5 fathoms water; the shore all the way is rugged and steep, against which the sea beats violently. N.N.W. from East Point, a mile, is Contact Pointy and in the same direction, l| mile farther, is Peggy's Point, beyond which, a short mile, is Shut -in Island, 200 feet high, and covered with trees; off the southern point of this island there is a shoal of 9 feet, with 6 and 7 fathoms between it and the island, and near to Peggy's Point there is another of 15 feet, with 6 fathoms to the northward of it. During southerly gales the water on the lee side of the islands becomes smooth, and the bottom holds well. Indian Harbour runs in here, and forms a place fit for small vessels, having a channel into it on either side of Shut-in Island. To the E.N.-eastward of Indian Harbour is Hagget's Cove, distant a mile, a cove or harbour of similar description. Luke's Island, Thrum Cap, Jolliman, and Wedge Islands, all lie off the eastern side of Margaret's Bay, and contribute to break off the force of the sea; so that under the lee of Luke's and Jolliman's Islands there is good anchorage at all times for ships of every description. FRENCH COVE is easy of access, and may be considered as a natural dock, exten- sive, with plenty of water, and well sheltered; this place is chiefly inhabited by Germans, whose industry is equally conspicuous and commendable. There is a shoal of 10 feet water lying opposite to the entrance of this cove at the distance of 2 miles ; but as tJie islands of the eastern shore are bold-to, no vessel need go out so far into the bay as to approach too near this danger. r ^ HEAD HARBOUR, or DELAWARE RIVER, lies at the farther end, on the north-eastern extremity of the btnr, and is an anchorage of most excellent description, forming so complete a place of safety that a fleet of ships might be securely moored side by side, and remain undisturbed by the most violent hurricane; the surrounding lands are high and broken. Mason's Point is in itself a good farm, well stocked with cattle, and excellently cultivated; and Moser Islands at its entrance are used as sheepfolds. The land on the port side of the entrance to the Head Harbour is 446 feet high. INGRAM RIVER. — To the westward of Head Harbour is Ingram River, running in to the northward of Moser Islands ; at its entrance it is ^ of a mile wide, with 7, 6, and 5 fathoms water: it then gradually decreases to its head, which is shallow and sandy. To the westward is Gaspar's Indent, open, shallow, and seldom frequented. These indent? or coves have rugged points projecting southward; and it is from these places Halifax to Cape Sable. 183 iatber the i weather, I channels the ledge i is chiefly ler charts, sailing in, lent berth, iy bottom, shallow, ind barren, i with fish, ere for the jf Taylor's Tth 9 miles, re harbours The high li separates (lay be seen and islands jets in from . andtoE^t ag a passage i and steep, is Contact id which, a le southern it and the loms to the ads becomes 33 a place fit nd. To the r harbour of ands, all lie e of the sea; orage at all dock, eicten- by Germans, aZ of 10 feet ; but as the ^he bay as to end, on the ; description, ' moored side unding lands 1 with cattle, is sheepfolds. t high. iver, running with 7, 6, and w and sandy, nted. These 1 these places small crafl are employed to take limestone, building sand, &c., the former of these being of a very superior quality. Cooper and Indian Rivers are both shallow, rocky nooks, but are the resorts of salmon; and in the lakes above, trout abound in great quantities, of delicate flavour, and commonly of a deeper red than the salmon. HUBBEUT'S COVE, the Fitzroy River of Des Barres, is situated at the N.W. corner of Margaret's Bay. Here, at the entrance, is a ridge of rocks, about 100 fathoms long, and covered at high water, so that when the sea is smooth it becomes invisible; in order to avoid this danger you have only to keep towards the western or eastern side of the harbour, for both sides are bold-to; the western channel is much the wider and better of the two : and by keeping the port shore on board, a stranger, or a ship dismasted, or in distress, or without anchors, may turn in and find shelter, running aground with perfect safety. In the neighbourhood is a saw-mill, and the inhabitants can furnish you with a carpenter and cooper, if wanted. Long Cove is 2^ miles to the southward of Hubbert's Cove, and afibrds good an- chorage with a westerly wind. To the southward of Long Cove the coast is bold and rugged, without any danger, except a amcdl rock, of 6 feet water, which lies close in to the land. NORTH-WEST HARBOUR is about a league to the southward of Long Cove; at its entrance is Horse Island, which divides it into two channels. There is a good passage, with 10 fathoms water, on each side of the island; and small vessels may find good an- chorage behind it, in from 6 to 9 fathoms, or farther up, in 5, 4, or 3 fathoms. Several families are settled at this place. Owl's Head is an abrupt precipice, and forms the south point of entrance to North-West Bay. .South- West, or Holdemess Island, is a remarkable rocky island, fuil 50 feet high, and steep on all sides. Directly to the northward of the northern part of the South- West Isle is a small spot, of 3 fathoms water; and to the north-westward of the island, is what is commonly called the South-West Harbour, formed between Owl's Head, which literally is a rocky island, separated from the main by a very narrow passage, not even navigable for boats. Here are 5, 6, and 7 fathoms water; but the place is seldom frequented. To the E.N.E. of South- West Island, distant nearly ^ a mile, is a rocky shoal, of 4 fathoms : this the sea frequently breaks over in bad weather, but it cannot be considered dangerous, unless to vessels that draw very deep water. The Horse Shoe, or Dog Rock, lies about south, distant 1^ mile from South-West Island, directly west from East Point, distant 2| miles, and from Taylor's Island, W. by N., 4^ miles: there are several small sunken rocks about it; part of it is con- stantly above the surface of the water, shelving on all sides, and the sea, in stormy wea- ther, breaks violently over it. At a little distance from it, on the western side, are 6 fathoms: and on its eastern side, at a similar distance from it, aire 8 fathoms; it then sinks into deep water: between the Horse Shoe and the South-West Island there are 12, 14, 26, 34, and 30 fathoms water. Vessels from the eastward, bound for Margaret's Bay, commonly go in between the Horse Shoe and East Point. A northerly course will carry you midway between them, right up to the head of the bay, without encountering any danger, except those already described. To the westward of South-West Island is Aspotogon Harbour, too shallow for ship- ping. At its entrance are Black, Saddle, and Gravelly Islands and Shoals; to the southward of these is Seal Ledge, shallow and dangerous, which lies W. ^ N., distant 2| miles from the Horse Shoe, and W.S.W., nearly 3 miles from the southern part of South-West Island. IsoNBOUND Island. — ^W.S.W. J S. from the south point of South-West Island, dis- tant 5 miles, is Ironbound Island, about a mile long, narrow, and steep-to; it lies S.S.E. ^ S., 1| mile from the extremity of the peninsma which divides Margaret's and Mahone Bays, and is called New Harbour Point ; between which is a good channel, with from 6 to 17 fathoms water, the ground being chiefly a black sand Gbeen Island. — S. ^ E., distant a league from Ironbound Island, S.W. by S., 7 miles from South-West Island, W.S.W., 3 leagues from Taylor's Island, and W.N.W. J W. from abreast of Sambro lighthouse, lies Green Island; it is small. Mid- way between Ironbound and Green Islands there is said to be a shocd of only 2 fathoms, but its exact position is uot accurately known, and therefore it is omitted in the charts. . \ 184 Sailing Directions from The mariner, in passing through the channel between these islands, will do well to look out for, and guard against, the probable existence of such a dhnger; there is other- wise water sufficiently deep for any vessel. MAHONE BAY is separated from Margaret's Bay b^ the peninsula, upon which the high and conspicuous mountain of Aspotogon is situatea; the appearance, in three regular risings, is a verv remarkable object to seaward, being visible more than 20 miles off. The entrance or the bay is encumbered with several islands, between all of which are good passages, with plenty of water and few dangers ; these lead to most excel- lent harbours, and places convenient and well adapted for the fisheries. We have already noticed Green and Ironbound Islands; these lie on the eastern side of the entrance to the Bay of Mahone. Adjacent to these, and on the same side, are the Tancook Islands, Flat Island, and the Knohme Bock: there are also the Bull Bock and the Outer Ledge. On the western side are the Duck and other islands. Oreat Duck laland lies W. by S. from Green Island, distant 4^ miles. Little Duck Island lies N.W. ^N., about 1§ of a mile from Great Duck Island, and W. * N., 6^ miles from Green Island. Nearly midway between Green Island and Little Duck Island lies the Outer Ledge, over which the sea always breaks; this danger bears from the east end of the Great Duck Island N.E. } N., distant 1^ mile; and from Green Island W. ^N., a league; over it is 4 feet water, and round it are 4^, 5, and 7 fathoms. Flat Island lies due west from Ironbound Island, distant 1^^ mile: and, in a similar direction from Flat Island, somewhere about a mile off, lies the Bull Rock; but the exact situation of this danger is not correctly ascertained, for Mr. De Barres places it more to the southward, and Mr. Lockwood to the northward of this position : it is a blind rock, uncovered at ^ ebb, with deep water all round it. The southern part of Flat Island, in a line with the southern points of Ironbound Island, wUl lead on the rock, as Mr. Des Barres has placed it; while the northern part of Flat Island, in a line with the northern shore of Ironbound Island, will lead to the northward of it; and Chester Church open of Great Tancook Island, will carry you clear to the westward of it in 7 and 10 fathoms water. Oreat Tancook is 1} mile long., and about a mile broad; to the eastward, between it and the main land, is the Little Tancook Island, separated by a channel ^ of a mile broad, in which are 7, 8, and 9 fathoms. A similar passage is between Little Tan- cook and Indian Point on the main, but there is a middle ground in it of 4 fathoms. Knohme Rock is above water, and shoals all round it; it lies to the eastward of the south-east part of Great Tancook; and at this part of the island is anchorage in 8 or 10 fathoms. Westward of Great Tancook, ^ of a mile, is a roekif shoal, of 6 feet, while between them the channel has 10 fathoms water. I'd the W. by N. of this shoal, a mile, is another, with from 6 to 12 feet over it. Between these shoals the passage is good, and has from 12 to 25 fathoms water in it. Off the north-west part of Great Tancook is Star Island; and a little to the eastward of it is a rocky patch of shallow ground, so Uiat vessels should never attempt the passage between Star and Tancook Islands. There is yet another danger, called ih^ Coachman^ s Ledge; it lies 2 miles to the north- ward of Great Tancook, and is only visible at low water. To lead clear to the eastward of this ledge, you should bring the eastern point of Great Tancook and the east side of Flat Island in one; to clear it to the southward, bring the west end of Ironbound Island open of the west part of Little Tancook, and Frederick's Island north point bearing W.S.W. ^ S., will carry you safe to the northward of it. Having passed the Coachman, the head of the bay lies open. On your starboard side is the high land and small river of Aspotogon, where small vessels occasionally run in and anchor ; there is a rocky shoal at its entrance, which must be avoided. To the northward is Cumberland Arm, easy of access, and affording good anchorage, with 7 and 8 fathoms, observing to give a berth to the starboard shore, which shallows some dis- tance out. There is also good riding on the port shore, behind an island which lies on the eastern side of the Chester I^insula; here vessels can ride, well-sheltered, in 8 fathoms water. Chester Totm is situated at the northern part of Mahone Bay, and is surrounded by a fine and fertile country : its inhabitants are industrious people, and the adjacent islands are well stocked with sheep: wood and water is in abundance, and several vessels are Halifax to Cape Sable. 185 do well to look there is other- la, upon which appearance, in libfe more than J, between all of i to most excel- Ve have already the entrance to 'ancook Islands, and the Outer 8. Little Duck [, and W. i N., •i; ad Little fiuck nger bears from ind from Green , and 7 fathoms. md, in a similar I Rock; but the Barres places it position: it is a southern part of will lead on the ; Island, in a line iward of it; and ( the westward of ward, between it mnel i of a mile ireen Little Tan- it of 4 fathoms, eastward of the inchorage in 8 or 5t, while between shoal, a mile, is jage is good, and ]^reat Tancook is tallow ground, so Tancook Islands, tiles to the north- ,r to the eastward and the east side jnd of Ironbound iland north point )ur starboard side ccasionally run in avoided. To the torage, with 7 and hallows some dis- and which lies on well-sheltered, in is surrounded by le adjacent islands leveral vesseb arc built here. The anchorages between the various islands and before the town arc good, well sheltered, and secure, and the depth of water moderate. The only danger is a «hoal, which partly dries at low water; this lies W. ^ S. from the town of Chester, from which it is distant If mile. -■, On the port side of Mahone Bay, and directly west of Tancook Islands, is a large Inlet or branch of a river, named by Des Barres, Prince's Sound; the passages into it are very safe, only giving a wide berth to the southern end of Edward s Island: steer mid-channel, and, when well in, anchor in 9 fathoms, or, within the innermost islands, in 5 or 6 fathoms; farther in it becomes flat and shallow. To sail into Mahone Bay from the eastward, the first land visible will commonly bo Green Island, which is round, bold, and moderately high : thence to Ironbound and Flat Islands (both steep-to) is 3 miles ; you may proceed and pass between them to- wards the Tancook Islands, which are inhabited : the channels between them are bold, and the anchor^es under their lee good, in from 7 to 12 fathoms water. But if you are proceeding for Chester, between Green and Duck Islands, you must beware of the Outer Ledge, which always shows itself by breakers. The mark to lead clear through this passage is, Chester Church well open of Great Tancook Island; this mark will also carry you safe to the westward of the Bull Rock, already described; and when you get near, or within i a mile of Tancook Island, steer out westward, and bring the same church to bear about north, and this will lead you up to the town. It is high water, full and change, in Mahone Bay at 8h. ; tides rise 7 feet. LUNENBURG BAY, called also Malaguash, is now ap lace of great population, and considerable trade; vessels carrying wood, cattle, vegetables, &c., are constantly employed from here to Halifax. The harbour is very easy of ::ccess, and there is good anchorage to the very town. At its entrance lies Cross Island, about .30 feet high, and containing 253 acres of land. On the N.E. side of this island is a nook, where coasters ride in safety. Off this part lie the Hounds Rocks, which, in passing, must have a berth : the west and south sides of the island are bold; and 2 miles from its southern end is an excellent fishing-bank, with from 14 to 17 fathoms water. There are good channels on either side of Cross Island. Cboss Island Lighthouse, upon the S.E. point of Cross Island, in latitude 44° 19' north, and longitude 64° 9' west, at the entrance of Lunenburg Bay, is an octa- {[on tower, painted red, with two lights placed vertically, and 30 feot apart. The lower ight is fixed, and the upper one flashing; it shows a flash at intervals of a minute. The lantern is painted black. Cross Island is low, and thickly wooded. Vessels sailing in or out, through the northern passage, should endeavour to keep about the middle of the channel, m order to avoid the shoals and rocks above men- tioned, and also those adjacent to the opposite, or Colesworth Point; having passed these, you should keep the northern shore on board, bringing Battery Point to bear nearly N.W., by whicn you will also go clear of the Sctdpin, or Cat nock. The Sculpin, or Cat Rock, lies nearly in the middle of the bay, bearing N.E., distant } of a mile from Oven's Point. According to Des Barres, there are but 3 feet over this danger; but it will easily be discovered by the breakers over it at low water. Sailing through the western channel, which is to be preferred, you should endeavour to steer N.N.wT, between Cross Island and Rose Point, where you will have 10 and 12 fathoms water. Keep the town of Lunenburg in sight, over the low land to the east- ward of Battery Point, and this will lead you clear of the rocky reefs about the Oven's Point; but beware how you lessen your water below 7 fathoms, for the soundings about the point are very irregular; bring the waggon-road at Lunenburg open of the west- ward of the Battery Pomt, and this will run you to the westward of the Sculpin, and between it and a rocky knoU of 4 fathoms water; having passed the Sculpin, haul ujp towards the northern shore, until you brmg Moreau and Battery Points in one, this being the direct mark for the Sculpin Rock: steer on in the direction of Battery Point, approaching it no nearer than a cable's length ; then round Battery Point, and bring the road well open of the Moreau Point; this will run you clear into the harbour, and between the Long Rock and the shoals of Battery Point, when you may direct your course for the town, where you will find 12 and 13 feet water alongside the wharfs; and near to them 20 and 24 feet, soft muddy ground, and perfectly secure. [N. Amsbica — Part L] B b 180 Sailing Directions from I. ! ) if ' Vessels having occasion to go to the southward of the Long Rock, which is the wider and safer passj^, will observe that there is a reef runs out nrom Woody Point, called the ShingteSf which must be carefully avoided: to do this, when you luive eo far entered the bay as to be equi-distant between the Ovens, (which are hollow cliiTs) Batterv, and Woody Points, then edge off a little to the westward, until you bring a farm-house, that stands over the middle of Sandy Bay, on with the end of a wood close to an open- ing, like an avenue, bearing N.W. ^ N. : steer with this mark on, until the west end of Lunenburg Town comes over Moroau Point, then steer north-eastward a little, ap- proach fiattery Point, and proceed, as before directed. The best anchorage in the Bay of Molaguash, or Lunenburg, is on its western side, about i a mile from the shore, and nearly midway between Oven's and Woody Points; where, with good ground tackle, you may safely ride out a south-easterly gale ; but the bottom is generally rocky and uneven. Wood, water, meat, and vegetables may easily be procured in abundance. It is high water, full and change, at 8 o'clock; and the tides rise from 6 to 8 feet. Dartmouth Bay. — This is situated between Oven and Rose Points; there are some settlements about the shores, and on an island at the bottom of the bay; it is easy of entrance, and jou may anchor abreast of this island in 3, 4, 6, or 7 fadioms: in sailing into this bay, it will be always advisable to borrow somewhat towards the Rose Point shore, because of the shoals which lie to the southward of the Oven's Point; there is othenvise no danger whatever. From Lunenburg to the Ironbound Island, at the entrance to Le Have River, the shor'is are bold, and much indented with irregidar inlets or bays. Ironbound Island lies about W.S.W. i S., distant nearly 2 leagues from Cross Island; it is inhabited, and some small rocky islets surround its northern shore : S.E. ^ E., 1^ mile from this island, is a bank of 20 and 25 fathoms, W.S.W., f of a mile from that, is a sm^l spot of 15 fathoms; these have from 30 to 40 fathoms about them. LE HAVE RIVER. — Vessois coming from the south-eastward for Le Have River, will not fail to discover Cape Le Have, a steep abrupt cliif, 107 feet high, bearing W. f S., about 12 leagues distant from Sambro lighthouse. S.E. by S., a mue from the cape, is the Black Rock, 10 feet high, and 100 feet long, with deep water all round it, and 9 to 1 1 fathoms between it and the shore, except on a small knoll, lying off and opposite to the cape, over which are only 4 fathoms. W. by S., distant 3^ miles, is Indian Island; and to the northward of the cape lie several islauids, with passages be- tween them ; but the best entrance to the River Le Have is to the northward of them all. There is also a channel to the northward of Ironbound Island, but it is narrow, and to navigate tiiis you must give the Ironbound Island a good berth ; you will then have from 12 to 4 fathoms water all through it; but the best passage is to the west- ward of the island, which is above 1^ mile broad, and has from 10 to 14 fathoms water within it ; about 3 miles to the north-westward of Ironbound Island, is a bar which runs across from shore to shore; over this are 12 and 15 feet, the deepest water being ^ across from the eastern shore: the soundings from Ironbound Island towards the bar are 11,14, 12, 9, 7, 6j o, 4, and 3 fathoms, the latter depth being close to the edge of the bar; but when you are well over that, you drop into 4, 5, and 6 fathoms, the river con- tinuing nav'g&ble 12 miles up, or so far as the falls; the general width of the river is ^ a mile, and when you are 8 miles up it, you will meet with the road from Lunenberg to Liverpool, v/here a ferry is established. There are several settlements on the banks of this nver ; and the whole wear a face of improvemeot and cultivation. Within and to the westward of Cape Le Have is Palmerston Bay; at the head of thk is Petit Riviere, a settlement formed by the French, the farms belonging to wUch are in excellent condition. Off the eastern entrance of this bay lies Ltdiaa Idand, bearing W. by S., distant 3^ miles from Cape Le Have. At Cape Le Have it is high water, full and change, at 8 o'clot^ : the tides rise from 5 to 7 teet. PORT METWAY, OR MED WAY, lies between Cape Le Have and Liverpool Bay, and is rising into considerable consequence, on account of its navigable capacity and convenience to the fisheries; it is, therefore, pretty numerously populated, and has several saw-mills; the inhabitants carrying on a good trade in timber, &c. The entrance to this port bears from Indian Island W.S.W., distant 7 miles, the land to the eastward of it being remarkably broken and hilly. On the starboard point of the entrance lies Frying Pan Island, which is connected, by a sandy reef, to numerous islets which Halifax to Cape Sable. 187 118 the wider point, called ,0 far entered Battery, and a farm-nouBe, ,e to an open- lie west end ol \ a little, ap- 8 western side, Woody Points; terly cole; l)ut iregetables may 1 6 to 8 feet, there are some ftv; it is easy oi hlans: in sailmg 3 the Rose Point I Point; there i» Have Biver, the ronbound Island is inhabited, and . from this island, 'small spot of 15 ,r Le Have River, feet hich, hearing 8., a mile from the ^ater all round it, iwOy lymg off and istant 3i miles, 18 , with passages be- ttorthward of them i, but it i» nanip^' ith; you wUl then ,age is to the west- U fathoms water ia a fcar which runs water being i across awards the bar are the edge of the bar, ,omB, tke river «m. thofthenvCTiBia from Lunenberg to aits on the banks of lion- y; at the head of^ [i^£?eiti8high !^ and Liverpool Bay, stretch along in aN.N.E. ^ northerly direction, until they ioin the main land: tliui which is next to Frying Pan Island is commonly called Glover s Island, and lies A a mile to the northward, and bears S.£. \ S., a good 1| mile from Metway Head. The entrance to this port may be known by the high land at Cape Metway, and the low ragged islands before mentioned; the width ot the channel is about | of a mile, and the depth of water from i to 14 fathoms. Directly in the way of your making for the entrance of the channel, lies the Souih-West Ledge and the Stone Horse Rock; the former bears from the Frying Pan Island S. | £., | of a mile. There is 19 feet water upon it, and the sea, in rough weather, breaks over it. The latter, or Stone Ilorso Rock, lieaE. by S., distant i of a mile from the S.W. Breaker, and dries at low water: there is 6, 7, and 8 fathoms between it and the Frying Pan Ledge; and should voa pass this way, you must give the island a good berth, on account of a spit «vhich runs out from it, in the direction of the Stone Horse Rock, a full 4 of a mile; but the best course will be ^ a mile outside of both these dangers: you will then pass in 12 and 14 fathoms water, and running on west, a little southerly, towards Kcmpenfult Head, you will open the channel, and may steer in directly north. Or, you may avoid the S.W. Ledge and Stone Horse Rocks, in coming from the eastward, by bringing the Liverpool lighthouse, which stands on Coffin Island, open of the land to the eastward of it : and when Frying Pan Island comes on N.N.E., distant If mile, steer in N. i E., which will carry you past Metway Point; and when opposite to Neil's Point you may anchor in 4 or 4^ fathoms water; from hence mud banks considerably narrow the passage, and a pilot will be found necessary ; but should you proceed farther without one, you will continue mid-channel from abreast of Neil's Point, N.N.W. ^ N., until Collin's Island bears west, and until Alicia River is just opening of Point Lucy, then steer N.W. by N. and W.N.W. J W., and anchor in 3 or 4 fathoms, muddy ground. To run up Alicia River, you must sail between Grass Island and Point Lucy, keeping close to the southern and western shores, in order to avoid the^fot which extends iroin the northward, leaving a deep but narrow channel. Barry's Bay, or Branch, which runs up to the westward, is shallow, and full of rocky shotda; and so is Brier Bay, which is situated on the N.E. side of the port. The tide runs commonly with great strength, and it is high water at 45 mln. after 7. LIVERPOOL BAY.— The entnince to this bay bears about W. by S., distant 17 or 19 leagues from Sambro lighthouse, Halifax; ana W.S.W. | W., 15 miles from Cape Le Have. Before it lies Coffin's Island, which is now distiuguished by a lighthouse, 75 above the level of the sea ; the light is on a revolving principle, and appears full at intervals of 2 minutes; between this island and the western land is the bay, affording good anchorage for larg^ ships, especially with the wind off shore. In the bay there is sufficient room for turning to windward, and the deepest water will be found near the western coasts. The land m the vicinity of the harbour is broken, rocky, and of a barren appearance, yet the commerce of the town is very considerable. The channel to the northward of Coffin's Island is shallow, having a mndy spit running from it and joining the main land ; therefore, none but small vessels ever attempt it ; but the passage to the southward is full 1^ mile wide, and has 15, 16, 17, and 18 fathoms water. Give the lighthouse point of die island a small berth, as t^flat of 3 and 4 fathoms encompasses it, and there is no other danger. Bald Point, or Western Head, is bold-to, and rendered remarkable by its havineno trees u^on it. Having entered this bay, and passed be- tween Coffin's and Moose Head, bringing the lighthouse to bear E. by N., distant 1^ mile, steer west; this will bring you abreast of Herring, or Schooner's Cove, situated on the N.E. side of the bay, and affording good shelter from sea-winds in 3 fathoms water, on a bottom of mud: or, proceeding farther, vessels of 200 or 300 tons, with high water, may pass over the bar, which stretches from Fort Point to the opposite shore ; but at low water this cannot be done, for then there is not more than 9 or 10 feet over it; when within the bar you will perceive the channel winds south-westerly, and you can anchor in not less than 2 fathoms, opposite the Town of Liverpool. Herring Bay is much exposed to the heavy south-easterly swells of the sea, and has not room for more than two sloops of war. It is high water in Liverpool Bay, full and change, at 50 min. after 7, and the tides rise from 5 to 8 feet. PORT MATOON, or MOUTON, called by De Barres, Gambler Harbour.— This port is formed by the Island Matoou, which lies across its entrances, dividing it into Bb 2 188 Sailuuj Directiona from i I two channels. In the eagtern passage lies the rocky ledge, calle nel, or nearly, ^ a mile from Mouton Island; in this passage you will find from 8 to 15 fathoms water; always giving the southern part of the island a berth, on account of a sandy flat which runs on it. In adopting tnis channel, mariners must look out for a small knoll, of 6 feet, said to lie E.N.E. f E., distant 1^ mile from the southern extre- mity of Mouton Island. This appears to be a modern discovery, and is not noticed in Des Barres' charts. The western passage to Port Mouton is between the island and the main, and only frequented by coasters and vessels of a small draueht of water ; it is encumbered with shoals, and too intricate for strangers ; the channel is narrow, and close to the main land, passing between it and the Bull Rock; having passed which, you can proceed to the anchorages either off the N.W. shore of Mouton Island, or round the Spectacles. The land now turns S.W. f W. from Point Mouton towards Port Jolie : midway is a black craggy point, with several rocks about it. S. ^ E., distant 2^ miles from Black Point, and S.W., 14 miles from Liverpool lighthouse, lies Little Hope, an island 21 feet high, and 200 fathoms long; this is a very great danger, and should have a beacon to distinguish it; round the island is shoal ground, partly drying, and with 3 and 4 fathoms upon some parts; it lies direct E.S.E. from the eastern point of entrance to Port Jolie, from which it is distant 2 miles. Between the island and point, some- what nearer to the latter, there is said to lie a dangerous shoal, not hitherto noticed in the charts. Port Jolie is an inlet, more than 6 miles deep, but very shallow, and having scarcely water enough for large boats. The lands adjacent appear barren and stony, yet have some families of fishermen settled there. Nearly soutn from the eastern point of Port Jolie, distant a mile, is a spot, of 3 fathoms, over which the sea commonly breaks; and on the western entrance of the port are some rocky ledges, which show themselves by the breaking of the water over tnem. There is also a small island, lying to the south- westward, called the Little or Lesser Hope. PORT L'EBERT.— This is the third inlet west of Liverpool, and may readily be known by the steep and abrupt appearance of its western head; and also by Green Island, which lies to the south-westward of its entrance. This island is somewhat re- markable, being destitute of trees. Port L'Ebert is divided from Port Jolie by a peninsula, which, at the head of the respective ports, is scarcely ^ a mile across. The channel in runs nearly north, 6 or 7 miles; but, although small vessels may run a con- siderable way up, ships of larger size can only find anchorage at its entrance; the depth, ^ a mile from the head, is from 9 to 12 feet; but at the mouth of the port are 6, 4, and 3 fathoms. SABLE RIVER lies to the south-westward of Port L'Ebert, distant 5 miles; at its entrance, nearly midway of the channel, is a rocky islet, which lies S.W. by W. from Green Island, distant 3^ miles; there is a passage on either side of the rock; that to the east- ward has 12, 13, and 15 fathoms water, but that to the westward is somewhat shallower; the two points of entrance of the river are distant from each other 1^ mile, with from 6 to U fathoms; but there is a bar, which renders this place totally unfit for affording Halifax to Cape Sable. 189 rttmoutht or kod, and lies )f this ledge I.W. part ol •emitv; over small apot of ,d of Mouton imile. The ou enter the irater, muddy r wind, to the ie distance of .S.S.WJrW.; iN.W.Shoal; W.,mid-chan- id from 8 to 15 n account of a look out for a louthem extre- j not noticed m main, and only acumbered witn ,86 to the mam ou can proceed L the Spectacles. .lie: midway is a liles from Black an island 21 feet lave a beacon to d with 3 and 4 oint of entrance and point, sorae- therto noticed m d having scarcely d stony., yet have ern point of Port lonly breaks; and low themselves by ying to the south- nd may readily be Hid also by Green id is somewhat re- n Port JoUe by a mile across. Ine els may run a con- tttrance; the depth, e port are 6, 4, and itant 6 miles; at its r by W. from Green k; thattotheeast- omewhatshallower; U mile, with from f unfit for affording shelter to any but the smallest class of vessels; it is, however, not destitute of inha* bitunts, some of whom are settled in a small nook close to the westward of the river, which is called the Little Harbour. RUGGED ISLAND HARBOUR lies W. by S., distant 15 miles from the Hope Island, and E.N.E., 9 miles from Shelburne light. It seems to have been so named from its craggy and rugged appearance, and the numerous dangerout ledges and sunken rocks at its entrance. This harbour is difficult of access, and seldom resorted to, un- less by the fishermen, who are familiar with its navigation; yet the anchorages are good, with 4^ and 4 fathoms. During sales of wind, the unevenness of the ground frequently causes the sea to put on a most formidable appearance, breaking violently from side to side. Off the western head, distant about a mile, is the Om, a bed of rocks, over which the water always breaks : but between the head and the Gull are from 6 to 8 fathoms. Vessels coming from the eastward, will perceive St. Thomas's, or Rugged Island, lying S.W. byW. from Green Island, distant 6} miles; this island, having nish rocky cliils on its eastern side, affords a good mark for the harbour. To the S.W of Rugged Island ore some rocky ledges; the outermost of these is called the Bear Rocks, bemg distant from the island } of a mile; between Rugged Island and the Bear Rocks are other dangers; and a little westward of the Bear is a sunken rock : these three latter lying in a sort of a triangular form. W. by N. from the Bear Rocks, distant a mile, is the Blow Breaker, a rock with only 4 feet over it : this apnears to be the Tyger of Des Barrcs, by whose description it should bear south from Rugg Point, which is the eastern boundary of the harbour. To sail from the eastward for Rugged Harbour, you will see the eastern cliffs of Rugged Island, bearing north, distant 1^ mile: keep a good look-out for the Blow, or Tyger Rock, and pass well to the outside of the foregoing dangers; and having cleared these, haul up N.N.W. for the islands on the left or port side of the harbour: in so doing you must be careful to avoid a shoeU which stretches half-way over from the star- board shore, narrowing the channel very considerably, so that between the shoal and Muffatt Island, the passage is not above i of a mile wide; pursuing this direction you will readily reach tne anchorage in the Northern Arm. In the best of the channel, Centre Island will be just open of Muffatt Island. Small vessels may be well sheltered within Cubb Basin, which is to the northward of Muffatt Island; and vessels coming from the southward or westward will have deep water on either side of the GuU Rocks, or Harbour about 7 feet. GREEN HARB9UR.— This port is to the westward of Rugged Island Harbour, having an island on its western side of the entrance, and running in full 3 miles : this and the River Jordan, situated still farther to the westward, appear to be places where good anchorages may be obtained, but they are at present little frequented oy shipping, although they have many inhabitants; they are open to southerly winds, which cause a heavy rolling sea. SHELBURNE HARBOUR, or PORT RpSEWAY, is, according to Mr. Lock- wood, justly esteemed the best in all Nova Scotia, from the ease of its access, and the perfect security of its anchorages. At the entrance of the harbour is the island of'Rose- neath, or M'Nutts, which is nearly 3 miles in length, and 1 ^ in its broadest part. On the S.E. point of this island stands an excellent lighthouse; this point is a high cliff of white rocks, the summit of which is without trees: the west side of the island is low. The lighthouse is painted black-and-white, in vertical stripes, and has a remarkable appearance in the day-time, on account of a dark wood that is behind it ; while, at night, two lights are exhibited from it; the upper light is 150 feet above the level of the sea, and the lower about 36 feet below the lantern at the top of the building. This light- house bears from the lighthouse of Sambro W.S.W., distant 30 leagues, being in lati- tude 43° 38' north, and longitude 65° 18' west. When coming in from sea, make for the lighthouse, bringing it to bear N. W., or N.W. by N.; then steer directly towards it. The dangers to be left to the eastward of you, are those adjacent to the Rugged Rocks, already mentioned. The BeU Rock, which is always visible, appearmg black and bold-to, lying E.N.E. ^ £., distant 2^ Bouinwuru ur weaiiwiu'u wiii iiuvc utsep wuiur uu uiiuer siue ui me vruil r between the Bear and Blow Rocks. At Cape Nesro and Rugged Island it is high water, full and change, at 8 o'clock; and the rise of the tide is 190 SaUinij Dircctiona from mtlos iVoin tlie lighthouse; and the Jifrg liock, which hnii only (i fuct water over it, aiul lien nearly 8. ^ W., 1^ mile from the lighthouio. In coming from the wontword, you may steer for the cntrnnco on cither aide of the Jigg Kock; and if from the eastward, on either ii«le of the Dull Kock. When you are abreast of the lighthouse, tou may Mail into the nurtliward of M'Nutt's Island, about N.W. by N., keening nearly in mid-channel : the island's side is bold-to, and the an- chorage is good, m 7, 8, or 10 fathoms, the bottom mud. Keep the western shore on board, for tnere is a ahallmo ipot^ somewhere about the eastern side, het^ein George's __ , o_^ • -n • . Lf-L IT •»« _L?_ .^1.1 — .^.- L " -^ Poii.t is about 2 nulos a aandtt tpit extends the anchorage is ox- ceudingly goo for the harbour until you get tho lighthouse to bear W. by N. ^ N., by which prec{^ution you will go cleur of every danger; or you may stop a tide at the entrance, in from 16 to 10 fathoms, sand nnd clay. Shelbume affords excellent shelter for ships in distress, and is secure against any trind, except a violent storm at S.S.W. ; abreast of the town, the wind from S. to £. does no harm, although from S. by W. to S.W. by S., if blowing hard for some con- siderable time, it will set the ?ni Jler vessels adrift at the wharfs ; but in the stream, as has been observed before, with good cables and anchors, no winds can injure you. Here you may be supplied with coraari;e, duck, spars, provisions, and water. Carpenters, pump, block, and sail-makers can be obtained if required; and the port charges for vessels, which put in for supplies only, is no more than 4d. per ton, light money, on foreign bottoms; but should you enter the custom-honse, the duties l)ecome much higher. It is high water, full and change, at 8 o'clock; spring-tides rise 8 feet, and neaps 6, but a fresh breeze from the S.£. commonly brings on high water sooner, and causes an additional rise of 2 or 3 feet. CAPE NEGRO HARBOUR is named from Cape Necro, the eastern limit of an island which lies before its entrance. This cape is remarkably high, rocky and barren, bearing S.W. | S., distant 7 miles from Shelburne lighthouse. This island is very low midway, and has the appearance of being two islan''... Tliere nre two passares into the harbour, one to the eastward of the island, and tlie utJu r t^ the westward of it; iho former is much the better of the two; but this is ;• vnao'i 1 .ingerou' ■ . account of two mnken rocks which lie off its entrance; thes* ci:' i.^va the Orem Mocks and the Budget : the Gray Kock lies N.N.E. from the cape, distant nearly a mile, and is situated Dv^arty on the starboard side of the channel. Some parts of these rocks are always Tis'ble, and serve as a mark for the harbour. T-^e Budget is p blind rock, of 6 feet, lying nearly mid-channel, and only | of a mile from u.f islan'l, havirig deep water round it. In the channel to the eastward of the liuij-^et vo . ;,iU hav iO, 12, and 14 fathoms; and the best direction to enter the har- b'.ui", 'ivii> be to steer -J from the rocks off the eastern point, until Shelbume lighthouse Is rhut iv , when you ^i!l be within the danger. There is excellent anchorage off the !N .E. pail; of Negro Island, in from 6 to 4 fathoms, on a bottom of stiff mud. The northern part of the island presents a low shingly beach, from which a bar ex- tends quite across to the eastern shore; over which ore 15 feet at low water; above this bar it is navigable fuU 6 miles, having a smooth cla} ey bottom, with 3, 4, and 5 fathoms water. < lal cc in Halifax to Cape Sable. 101 vor it, and lido of the en you aru and, about ind tho an- u shore on n Geor^a'fl )ut 2 milos nit extends rogo is cx« during tho nt, lies tho r going into 3urf Po?. . ■n shoi o hud irhilu ju the ? 7 fau;')n . he entrance ( I'uint, you ;ivc fi good irbour until rill go clear 10 fathoms, against any •om S. to E. r some con- te stream, as eyou. Here Carpenters, ; charges for t money, on ecome much et, and neaps r, and causes 1 limit of an ' and barren, d is very low ages into the rd of it; iho I . account of !ocA« and the ad is situated IS are always ly ^ of a mile tward of the nter the har- ne lighthouse orage off the fraud. The h a bar ex- water; above ,h 3, 4, and 6 I The poasago to tho westward of Nogro Island is somewhat intricate, eocumbcnHl with rockM and dangers, and should not do attempted, except in coses ol' extreme emer- Sincy ; in such rirrumstances, indecision or timidity might produce certain destruction; on tho c(unmaiuitrV post should be aloil, and, if not possessing confidence hiuwulf, he Hhould affect it. Capbiiri I)um Harrcs says, "If coming iVom tho westward, in hauling round Point Jeff"«>ry, t*) uvii'l the ledges, blind rocka, and ahouU extending easterly from the western shore, yi-'i "«hould sImiM your course N.N.E.| N. towards tnc cape, giving the Savage Racks u berth of 3 caoW ' 'ii^tths, until you open Davis's Island, a snil^ breadth off Point Williiini. Mavis's iHi^nd is the largest, iw<\ westernmost at the head of tho harbour; luii up in that direction, observing to ki i clear of tk sunken rock, which lies E.SJB. from Point William, u))out 300 fathoms ir nm the shore. Fishery Beach is bold-to." To sail through the N.£. passage, which is not so difllcult, k p Qrar's Rocks on board, and steer N.W. fur Point Joiu, 'jr^il yo see across tho UifimuB m the middle of Cape Negro, or until Shelbume lightuae ^ M>iut in, and having passed the liudget, from thence haul over to the westward, a'cping uiong tho shore about 2 ca/^les' leng^ths from the island, to avoid the shoal, whici .xtends half the distance over from Poi/it John towards tho ishvnd; and when you have opened the small island^ at th<> head of the buy, shape your course N.N.W. to the anchoring groui '; the bottom is mud and clay; along tho NJ2. side of Caj ' Negi > Island, tho auv uorage ' good stiff clay. The River Clyde, which descends from a cUain of lakes that extend E.N.I find W.S.W. a considerable distance in the interior, fal' ^ into the head of Ne^ro Har. 'Htu, after a run of 28 miles; and the af the Brier's )m9; you arc eering north- la the channel to the north- vest part: its it; dN.N.E. it through it. lient place for lich commonly ssibly stem it. 1. i aland to Anna- cy clifFa, above lummits appear and Gulliver's erminate by an nil, by keeping ) fathoms water 1 the lighthouse liea in latitude lea of the Gut is rrh the Gut with t but the truest that a ship may entrance is the has no channel lannel, and after 3t or west side of e that when they la the port shore, ce they can steer Annapolis, on the of a square shape, h argand burners, igues to the west- mt the lighthouse )t precipices of the down so suddenly jssel through with in shore, near the 8, and the scenery, Teasing, becommg such consequence, led preference for ence acoss the Bay ted, and generally f Annapolis up the le direction, with a »*sf liiyl- JlHir^s hland to CJnrjr^rio Bay. few rocky clifTs near the Gut, or narrows, and mun^ l.anks (»} id uartli lands, wnich appear very even. On Black Rock Point, on the southern shore of the Mines Channel, t I )hon>«<> lin been erected, exhibiting a fixed light. The lighthouse, which is a H(|uur< ^*X\\\\i, mv painted white, stands on Black Rock Point, in about latitude 45° 11' iiorUi, und \ ot a mile to the westward of Kennedy's Breakwater, and 2} miles to the custwartl ot (>rian'.ide ; there is, however, a fair landing at its eastern end, and anchorage ^ a mile off in 18 fathoms, with the low point bearing about N.E. by N.; here is also a stream of fresh water running into the sea. Cape D'Or and Cape Chignecto are high lands, with very steep cliffs of rocks and red earth, and deep water close under them. You have nearly the same kind of shore to the head of Chignecto Bay, where very extensive flats of mud and quicksand are left Dd 2 204 SailiiKj Directions from I s into two branches, the one leading to Cumberland Basin, and by the river Missequash to Verte Bay, in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and now becoming a pliice of very considerable commerce; the other running northerly, and taking the name of the Petcudiac Itiver. These parts, like the Basin of Mines, are fast rising into consequence, and becoming the seat of numerous settlements. The Cumberland Branch is navigable to within 13 miles of Yerte Bay; and it ia re- markable that when the rise of the tide in Cumberland Basin is 60 feet, that in Yerto Bay will only rise 8 feet. The river of Missequash, which runs across the isthmus, ia the present boundary between the provinces ot Nova Scotia and New Brunswick. i' CIIIGNECTO BAY TO THE MANAN ISLANDS, AND PASSAMAQUODDY BAY. The north COAST or the BAY OF FUNDY, from Cane Enragd towards Quaco, in the township of St. Martin's, is, at present, but thinly inhabited, and it con- tinues to be so as far as St. John's. The land is good, but much broken with steep valleys; the weather is generally humid, the winds ooisterous and changeable, and the intervals of sunshine limited and evanescent : but from Quaco to St. John's, the inte- rior hills rise in easy inequalities; the ravines of the cliffs are deep and gloomy, and the indentations frequently have beaches. At Black River, which is about 12 miles west of Quaco, is a safe inlet for a small vessel, although it is dry from half tide. A li<;hthouse is erected on u small rock lying off Quaco Head; it is painted red-and- white, in horizontal stripes ; the light is revolving, and elevated about 40 feet above high water mark ; the light shows twice full and twice dark in a minute, and can be seen from any quarter where a vessel can approach. QUACO LEDGE. — This is a dangerous gravelly shoal, situated about 12 miles S.E. ^ E. from Quaco, and W. by N., distant 11 miles from Haute Island; it extends N.W. by N. and S.E. by S., about 3^ miles, and is a mile broad; vessels have fre- quently grounded upon this bank; there are several irregular patches ofrochs lying off its N.E. side; the ledge shows itself at half tide, and dries for about 100 yards, having but 12 feet water over it with common tides; jf a mile to the N.E. the eddies, with the flood-tides, are strong and numerous, the ship's head going nearly round the compass in the space of ^ an hour ; the ebb is a true tide, and sets in a W.S.W. direction to- wards tne ledge. The soundings are from 7 to 14 fathoms, at about 2 cables* length all the way round, but they shoal more gradually from the N.E. The night tides here, and generally throughout the bay, are highest. At St. John's they are so during the summer, but the contrary during the winter months, or between the equinoxes. The mark to go clear to the southward of the Quaco Ledge, is Cupe D'Or on with the south side of the Island Haute. Chignvcio Bay to the Ma nan Islands, Sfc. 205 tyi und uru al Ughtit; it ml Uay, and north. It i« pd, two fixed Bca at high c the north- iinncl by the vancod about lorc, running and shows a 1 Apple River iie one leading 11 the Gulf of rce; the other parts, like the t of numerous f ; and it is re- , that in Verto the isthmus, is IJiunswick. IND Enrag6 towards ited, and it con- oken with steep igeable, and the John's, the inte- gloomy, and the it 12 miles west tide. painted red-and- it 40 feet above lute, and can be about 12 miles sland; it extends vessels have fre- of rocks \y\ngoS lOO yards, havmg ■e eddies, with the Bund the compass W. direction to- "cables' length all tt. At St. John's _onths, or between CO Ledge, is Cape ■T. ^Mni'S MA&aOVS. — 'Die entrance to thJH harbour hears from the Cut of Aniui.|K)lij4 about N. ^ \V., distant 11 lensups; it is diotingulHhed by a lixhthoUHo whiclt ktMiii.-. iti Farlridge Ixland. This llghtnouMe has been rebuilt, ami exhibitH u fixed white lights 110 teet from high water mark to lowest rcHectorn; the lij(bthoiiie is ])ainted ixnl-and-white, in vertical striites, and is furnislied with a belli to be invariably tolled in thick weather. Vcsnels coming from seaward, and making for this harbour, should, so soon as ever thoy cun well diHcern the lighthouse, make their signal for a pilot; l)ut if unable to succeed in reaching the harbour that tide, then endeavour to run in between Meogenes Isliiiid and the main, going cither on the south or on the north side of this island; in doing which, you will no where have lesH than 4, 5, and 6 fathoms water, with a bottom of sand and mud. Here you will obtain the best anchorage, by bringing the three hills in the country to the N.E., in a lino over Rocky I'oint Islantl, and the nouso on Meo- genes Island S.£. by S. Tub Deacon L>aHT. — Within Partridge Island, and upon a spit or bar, which ex- tends about ^ a mile S.S.K. off Sand I'oint, and which dries at i ebb, stands the beacon tower; upon this tower a light is established, which is eminently useful to the coasting-trade or St. John's; and to a)l other vessels havinr pilots on board, as it ena- bles them to enter the harbour all hours of the night. The house is painted wliite- and-black, in vertical stripes, and exhibits a fixed white light, 35 feet from high wn mark to reflectors. Th« OITT OF ST. JOHN stands on an irregular descent, having a southern asnect, and, on entering the river, has an imposing appearance. Tartridgc Island is about 2 miles to the southward of the city, answering the double purpose of protecting the harbour, and, by its lighthouse, guiding and directing the mariner to its entrance; the lantern is 120 feet above the sea, and the light is good. The ground, for several miles to the southward of Partridge Island, is muddy, and the depths gradual, from 7 to 20 fathoms, affording excellent anchorage ; the passage westward ot this island has in it 10 feet; that to the eastward has 16 feet, and abreast of the city are from 7 to 22 fathoms. At f of a mile to the northward of the lighthouse is the beacon light, fixed on the edge of a rocky ledge, forming the west side of the channel, and having deep water close to it. A breakwater is erected farther on, at the eastern side of the channel, and below tho town; this greutly intercepts the violence of the waves, which southerly gnles usually occasion. Every possible assistance is here given to ships wanting repair; they lie upon blocks, and undergo a thorough examination, without incurring the expense, injury, and loss of time occasioned by heaving them down. The population and commerce of St. John's are rapidly increasing ; and within the harbour is a valuable fishery, where large quantities of salmon, herrings, and chad are cured for exportation ; and ship-building has long been carried on here to a great extent. Ships of 1,000 tons have been built here. In 1824, upwards of 80 new vessels were registered at St. John's, amounting to about 20,000 tons; and it is, in fact, a thriving place, and annually improving. Tnere are also several vessels in the South Sea whale fishery belonging to the port. Vessels having made the havbour, and finding themselves able to enter, may, when they have passed Meogenes Island, edge in shore towards Rocky Point, until they per- ceive Meogenes Point is in a line with, or over the N.W. corner of Meogenes Island ; then, sailing in between Rocky Point and Partridge Island, with these marks on, will lead them in the deepest water, over the bar, until they open Point Maspeck to the northward of the low point of Partridge Island; when, putting the helm starboard, they should edge over towards Thompson's Point, until they get the red store at the south end of St. John's in a line over the beacon ; keep them in one, until they have passed the beacon at the distance of a ship's breadth : tnen haul up N.N.W. for the harbour, keeping the blockhouse, at the upper part of the harbour, open to the westward of the king's store, situated by the water side ; which mark will lead them, mid-channel, up to the wharfs, where they may lie aground, dry at half-tide, and clean the ship's bottom ; or ride afloat in the stream at single anchor, with a hawser fastened to the posts of the wharfs on shore. The flood-tide is weak here, but the ebb runs down rapidly past Meogenes Island into the Bay of Fundy. rwemamam^mmmm \ 206 Sailing Directions from Should the tide of ebb have taken phice at tlie beacon, then it would be hlpfldy impropti' to attempt gaining the harbour that tide, but wait for the next half-llood to go over the bar, as both sides of the entrance to the harbour are composed of sharp rocks, which dry at low water ; and the tide of ebb, especially in the sprmg of the year, when the ice and snow is dissolving, is so exceedingly rapid and strong, that all the anchors you possess will not be sufficient to prevent the ship from driving. " The River St. John," says Mr. Des Barres, " has sufficient depth of water for large ships to the falls; whence it continues navigable 80 miles up the country, for vessels of 100 tons. At Fort Frederick the rise of the tide is 18 feet, and at e.dg mestone, and ly cultivated, ton, and in all I's and Fred- illage about a in the United in the country rises so high ,0 the harbour, to each heard lOUse. Chiijnecto Bay to the Manan Islands, S^'c. 207 ■ hoisted, separated. to the direction itinguished,des- ilant over. •all). id by a small ton- stablishmcnt at the For the cast port, or St. Andrew's' steamer For a vessel on shore, in distress, should immediate aid be necessary, guns to be fired « a red flag, pierced white. • a ball at the mast-head. To enter St. John's Harbour on the east side of Partridge Island, you should bring the stone-barracks in one with the Wesleyan Chapel ; this mark will lead you clear of the foul ground off Partridge Island N. W. point, and as soon as you get Carlton Church on with the end of the cliff, starboard your helm, and keep this mark on for about \ of a mile, or until you bring the stone church (which stands at the north part of the city of St. John's,) in one with the outer end of the breakwater, then immediately change your ccurse, and run in by this latter mark 'past the Spit beacon lighthouse, leaving it on your port hand; passing this, run up the middle of the harbour, and anchor off the wharfs. TIDES.— The tides of the River St. John, at full and change, flow until llh. 44m.; equinoctial spring-tides rise 23 to 25 feet, neaps 21 to 23 feet. After the first quarter- flood, the tide below the surface runs into the harbour. During the summer and the depth of winter the tide generally flows in at half-flood. In autumn the river is swollen by rains, and between the middle of April and the beginning of May, by the melting of the ice and the great quantity of snow that accumulates on the banks of this vast navigable river. From these causes, the water streams out to seaward continually ; therefore vessels at that time seldom enter the harbour without a fresh leading wind. The falls are then impassable, as the tides do not rise to their level. The body of the river is 17 J feet above low water mark; consequently, after the tide has risen to that height, the water descends, or literally falls up into the river. When the tide has flowed 12 feet, the falls are smooth and passable for 20 minutes. Above the falls the water rises 4 feet, and at Majorfield, which is 60 miles in the interior, it rises only 1^ foot. Captain Napier, of H.M. ship Jason, says, "The great volume of fresh water which constantly flows down the harbour of St. John, in April and May, causes a continual ebb-tide during that period, sometimes to the depth of nearly 5 fathoms, under which the flood and ebb-tides flow regularly; the maximum of its velocity was found to be 4^ knots, and the minimum at 2 knots ; but as the log floated very deep in the fresh water, and ultimately sank into the salt water underneath, it will not be too much to esti- mate the maximum at 5 knots, and the minimum 2^ knots. The fact of the under-tide beginning at the depth of 5 fathoms, was ascertained by the sinking a lead down to that depth, when it was carried the same way as the current on the surface; but when lowered below that, it was drifted in a contrary direction." To the W.S.-westward of Meogenes Island is Flat Bay, called also Visarinkum ; it is a small harbour, with 5 and 4 fathoms water, used sometimes by the coasters. From hence the land runs nearly W.S.W., passing Negro Head, to Cape Mu?quash; off the point of which is Split Rock, lying close to the cape, with 8 fathoms water very near It, being distant from Partridge Island 8 J miles; the shore is iron-bound all the way, and has deep water close in to the land. MUSQUASH HARBOUR lies about a mile to the westward of the Split Rock; its entrance is about ^ a mile wide ; and there is good anchorage a little way in, with 4 fathoms water; but farther on a bar runs across the harbour, over which is only 1^^ fathom. Small vessels sometimes pass to the westward of the islands, and run up the river, which, when past the bar, has 2, 2 J, and 3 fathoms water; but this harbour is open to the southward. H.M. sloop Argus, Captain Arabin, sailed from Musquash Harbour at high water, and made the following courses and distances : — first, S. by W. ^ W., 30 miles ; then S.W. ^W, 30 miles; afterwards S. by W., 30 miles, and S.S.E., 30 miles: this latter course and distance took her in sight of the Seal Islands, and clear of the bay. From the entrance to Musquash the coast runs W.S.W., westerly, nearly 10 miles, to Point Lepreau; in this space are 4 or 5 inlets, but only calculated for small craft; the first of these is about 1^ mile to the westward of Musquash western point, and is of no 208 Sailing Directioiis from l\ 1 note whatever; in your way to it, a berth must be given to the shore, particularly about Musquash Point, on account of some rocks lying off that part; there are channels between these rocks, but few vessels will venture through them. About a mile farther is Chance Harbour, which is a mere shallow cove, of 2 fathoms water. Little Dipper is more westerly still, and situated 3J miles from Musquash Point; this also has only 18 feet water in it, and scarcely fit for anything but boats. Great Dipper is divided from Little Dipper by a fiat pomt of land, round which are several scattered rocks; this harbour can accommodate small craft, which sometimes run in there for shelter; but it is by no means to be recommended, unless in cases of neces- sity; there is a creek of fresh water runs into it, called Moose Creek. Farther westward, and about 2 miles from Point Lepreau, is Carriage Harbour; this is open to the eastward, and affords anchorage at its entrance, in from 7 to 3 fathoms; the land all the way from Musquash to Point Lepreau, is high, broken, and many scattered rocks lie off it, therefore vessels, in passing, should carefully give it a good berth. POINT LEPREAU LIGHTS.— A lighthouse has been erected upon this project- ing headland, on which two fixed lights are exhibited, one above the other, distant 18 feet. The lower lantern is fixed to the outside of the building, and throws its light quite inshore, both to the eastward and westward, into Maces Bay. The lighthouse is painted red-and-white, in horizontal stripes 5 feet broad, and bears from the eastern- most Wolves E. by N., 1 1 miles. MACES, OR MASON'S BAY, is formed to the westward of Point Lepreau, be- tween it and Red Head; these bear from each other N.W. and S.E., distant full 5 miles; there are numerous rocks, shoals, and small islets within it, but its navigation seems in- secure, for Mr. Lockwood emphatically observes, "This point ought to be classed as one of the dangers of the Bay of Fundy, for many serious accidents have lately happened in the neighbourhood of this promontory." Mason's Bay he calls "a deep and ugly in- dent, so much so, that ships bound to the river St. John, dreading to pass its entrance, get frequently embayed there, and some valuable vessels have thus been lost. Yet, at the head of this bay," he observes, " is a place called Pok Logan, where there is good shelter. Several rivers appear to fall into this bay ; and, perhaps, a better know- ledge would tend much to strip it of its fancied dangers." In the River Lepreau is good anchorage within the entrance, in 3 to 4 fathoms. Here are saw-mills; and vessels sometimes load their cargoes of deals here; and shelter may be found from a S.E. gale. In running for it from Point Lepreau, leave all the cluster of islets, called the Brotkers, on your starboard hand ; but Maces River is not so good to get out of as Beaver Harbour when the wind shifts to the westward. W. by S. from Point Lepreau, distant 3^ or 4 miles, there is supposed to be a dan- gerous shoal, but its actual situation is not known; if such should exist, it must be surrounded with very deep water, for a small distance from this imagined situation, ore 26, 28, and 31 fathoms, mud, mud and sand, and gravel. BEAVER HARBOUR lies 7 miles to the westward of Red Head; this is an excellent place to run for when caught by an easterly wind in the bay, and unable to fetch St. John's Harbour. It is above a mile wide at the entrance, with 10 fathoms Avater on each side, and 20 fathoms mid-channel. In entering, keep the western shore aboard, until you bring the Goal Rock to bear east, distant about \ a mile, where you may anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms, good holding-ground. There are no regular pilots, but the fishermen on the coast are well qualified for the task; although, in clear weather, they are not absolutely necessary. Bring the easternmost Wolf Island to bear south, and steer north for the entrance; keep on the west side, and anchor just before you come to the houses, which you will see as soon as you get well in. Wood, provisions, and water, to a limited extent, may be procured here. High water, full and change, at lOh. 45m.; common tides rise 17 feet, springs 26 feet. ETANG HARBOUR lies to the westward of Beaver Harbour, and runs in to the north-eastward from Campobello; before it lie several islands. There are tl: ee entrances to this harbour, so that vessels may go in or out at any time; the western entrance leads to La Tete Harbour, where anchorage may be obtained, in 10 to 5 fathoms; but there is no passage for ships round the northern end of Payne's Island. The channels be- tween Payne's and Bliss Islands are considered the best, as they will admit vessels working through them; but the eastern passage requires a leading wind. A pilot will E Chignecto Bay to the Manan Islands, 8fc. 209 irticularly e channels ' 2 fatlioms Musquash but boats, which are letimes run ;s of neces- ;. Farther 3 is open to j; the land ttered rocks his project- •, distant 18 3WS its light e lighthouse the eastern- jcpreau, be- full 5 miles; on seems in- ;lassed as one jly happened and ugly in- , its entrance, n lost. Yet, ?here there is better know- ■0 4 fathoms, j; and shelter leave all the liver is not so ird. I to be a tUm- it, it must be ned situation, td; this is an ly, and unable ith 10 fathoms western shore tile, where you liar pilots, but clear weather, to bear south, ust before you lod, provisions, [ill and change, y. runs in to the tb ee entrances 1 entrance leads oms; bvit there be channels be- l admit vessels d. A pilot will be necessary, on account of the intricacies of the channel, but one can easily be ob- tained any where on the coast. The bay is extensive, secure, and well sheltered. The tides the same as at Beaver Harbour. WOLF ISLANDS. — The Wolves may be passed on either side, having deep water close to them; but they afford no sheltered anchorage, except for small vessels m sum- mer time; they are from 60 to 100 feet high. With light winds, a lee-tide, or thick weather, you may let go an anchor any where between the Wolves and Beaver Har- bour, in good holding ground, with a depth of 20 to 25 fathoms. The MANAN ISLANDS. — Grand Manan is an island situated at the north- western entrance of the Bay of Fundy; it is in the province of New Brunswick, and forms a part of Charlotte County, being 1 1 J miles in length, and 6 in breadth, grossly estimated 37,000 acres. Its northern point is in latitude 44" 47'. The north-western part of the island is distant from Passamaquoddy Head about 6 miles; its north-eastern point, or Bishop's Head, bears from Cape Malpeck W.S.W. \ S., nearly 14J leagues, and W.N.W. ^ W. from the entrance to the Gut of Annapolis, about 14 leagues; and from Petit Passage N.W. by N., 32 miles. Its S.W. end, or head, bears from the light- house on Brier's Island N.W. by N., nearly, from which it is distant 30 miles; and N.W. by W. from the northern entrance to Petit Passage, distant 31 mUes. Thus situated, it commands an uninterrupted view of every vessel that passes to or from the Bay of Fundy ; it is naturally strong, and possesses harbours where the largest ships may ride in perfect security : its fisheries are in great estimation, its soil is generally good, and its trees are the firs, birch, beech, and maple, which, in size and quality, are equal to all the purposes for which those woods are commonly used. On its western side the cliffs are nearly perpendicular, rising 600 feet above the level of the sea; but on this side there is only one little inlet along the whole range that can even shelter boats; it is commonly called Dark Cove, bemg situated about 4 miles from the northern part of the island: there is, indeed, a place, called Bradford's Cove, about 5 or 6 miles more to the southward, but this is of no note whatever. There are soundings all along the shore, from Bishop's Head to the S.W. Head, 3, 4, 5, and 6 fathoms close to the land, deepening to 13, 20, 21, and 22, ^ a mile off, to 30, 40, and 50 fathoms at a mile distance, and still deeper as you increase your distance from the island. The Northern, or Bishop's Head, is abrupt and bold; but on its eastern side there ia anchorage in a place called Whale Cove; this is situated between Swallow's Tail and the North Point; here vessels frequently ride during southerly winds, to wait the turn of tide; the soundings are from 15 to 25 fathoms; but it must not be resorted to in northerly gales. Long Island Bay. — This lies to the south-eastward of Whale Cove, and is formed by the Swallow's Tail, which is a bold, hi^h, ragged, and barren-looking point; and Long Island, which bears nearly south from it, distant 1^ mile. This bay is easy of access, and possesses all the advantages of a harbour; the bottom of the bay is generally mud, excepting a ri^e of rocks and gravel, which extends from the ledge that shows itself within the SwSlow's Tail, and the cluster of sunken rocks that lie J a mile N.N.E. from Long Island Point, and these are 5 feet under water at low spring-tides. In the northern part of the bay the bottom is a stiff clay, and vessels ill provided with gear have often rode out the severest gales there; and under Long Island, opposite the beach, is good anchorage, even locking in the northern end of Long Island with Swallow's Tail; the ground here is a strong mud, and you will ride safe and unaffected by sea or wind from any quarter. Farther to the southward, and on the eastern coast of Great Manan, are the Duck Islands; here a pilot will be necessary; for though the ground is good about Great Duck Island, yet there are dangers which, when the tide becomes high, are completely hidden. To the south-westward of Duck Islands are the islands of Ross, the northern point of which is scarcely separated from Manan, Cheney's Island, and White Head Island; these are connected together by a sandy and rocky reef of foul ground, which extends S. i W. to the Diamond Rocks, of which we will speak hereafter. On White Head Island resides an able and active pilot, and the cove opposite to his house is commonly a great resort for vessels employed in the fisheries; but with easterly winds this is no desirable place. At the western side of Ross Island is part of what is [N. America. — Part L] E e r 1 1-. i '! 210 Sailing Directions from called Grand Harbour; it is a shallow, muddy basin ; but vessels may enter and lie securely in it, on the mud — a convenience somewhat desirable, should you have lost your anchors and cables on any of the outer ledges. The entrance to this place has 4, 5, 6, and 7 fathoms water, with a clayey bottom ; the channel is narrow, but secure from the sea. A Utile to the westward of White Head Island are the Green Islands; and to the southward of the Green Islands, about a mile, are the Three (Kent's) Islands : these latter are low and ledgy; the eastern, or largest one, is bold to the rocks, which are at all times to be seen ; and to the north-westward of these rocks is a ledge, called the Constable, which dries at low water. Under the lee of these and the Green Islands, occasional anchorage may be obtained in from 14 to 7 fathoms. WOOD ISLAND lies off the southern part of Grand Manan, and is If mile long; it runs parallel to the south-west head of Manan, and forms an excellent harbour between. The upper part of this inlet and the head of it afford most secure anchor- age ; and the inhabitants about Seal Cove and Red Head will furnish you with all neces- sary supplies you may stand in need of, for these place are all well settled. The manan LEDGES are those more distant islets, rocks, and dangers which lie to the southward of Grand Manan ; the outer and most dangerous of these is the Old Proprietor, covering a space of ^ an acre at low water, and drying at half-ebb ; but when covered, the tide sets directly over it, at the rate of 4 mUes an hour. It lies 5. J E., distant 9 J miles from Great Duck Island; S. byE., nearly 7 miles from the north-eastern part of White Head Island; E. ^ S., 6 J miles from the Gannet Rock; S.E. byE., 4 leagues from the S.W. head of Manan; N.N.W. ^ N., 18^ miles from Brier Island lighthouse ; N.N.W. ^W., 18 miles from the northern entrance to the Grand Passage; N.W. |W., 18 J miles from the Petit Passage; west, 35 miles from the Gut of Annapolis; and S.W., 15 leagues from the lighthouse on Partridge Island. About 2^ miles N.E. ^ N. from the Old Proprietor is the Clerk's Grourd, a rochy shoal, of 4i fathoms. N.W. by N., Ij mile from the Old Proprietor, is Crawley's Shoal, of 7' feet only; and west of the Crawley, Ij^ mile, is the Hans, of 5 feet. The Roaring Bull bears N. J E. from the Old Proprietor, distant 4 miles ; and, although it has 6 fathoms over it, it usually has a heavy dangerous ripple. The mark to go clear to the eastward of all these dangers is, the north-easternmost high land of Manan well open of the Long and Duck Islands; the mark to lead to the southward of them is, the south-west head of Manan open of Kent's Three Islands. In easterly winds the tide- rips are impassable. There are also other rocks within these : a range of which lie south of the south-west point of White Head Island; some of these have deep water between them, and occa- sion a continual ripple 3 miles from the shore, quite home to the long point ; these are called the Tinker, Three Diamonds, Rans, and many others without names; some of these show themselves, others have only 3 and 4 feet water over them.* S.S.E. J S., about f of a mile from the southern point of the Three Islands, is a knoll, called the Kent, which is dangerous, and has only 7 feet water over it; it bears about W.N.W. i W. from the Rans, and is not included within the confines of the mark given to avoid the dangers to the southward, viz., the S.W. head open of all the islands. There is also a danger said to lie S.E. ^ S. from the Kent Knoll, distant 2 miles, and W.S.W. I S., li mile from the Rans; but this is doubtful. The gannet ROCK is 40 feet above water, ard has now a lighthouse upon it, })ainted black-and-white in vertical stripes, exhibiting a flashing light; this is a bright ight, visible 40 seconds, and dark 20 seconds in each minute. It lies S.W. by S., dis- tant 3^ miles from the southern point of the Three Islands, and S.S.E., 6^ miles from * H.M. ship Alert is said to have discovered an additional rock, upon which that vessel struck in 1810, not noticed in any chart. By tliat ship's account it is said to lie S.S.E.| S., dis- tant 6 or 7 miles irom the S.W. end of White Head Island; N. by W., distant 17 miles from Brier's Itiland lighthouse, and distant 14 miles from the west end of the Grand Manan; and named by the fisherm*. n, Shand's Rock. We cannot help noticing the discordancy of the above bearings and distances, and are apprehensive there is some error in the account; at any rate, if this danger is not the Old Proprietor, it must be situated somewhere not far distant from it; and forms an additional stimulus for the vigilance of the manner. Chiynecto Bay to the Manan Islands, 8fc. 211 iter and lie u have lost is place has but secure ; and to the lands: these which are at !, called the ■een Islands, [3 mile long; lent harbour cure anchor- ith all neces- angers which ■ these is the half-ebb; but hour. It lies liles from the rannet Rock; 1^ miles from itrance to the niles from the ;e Island. 'ound, & rocky , is Crawley's ■ 5 feet. The id, although it •k to go clear )f Manan well of them is, the rinds the tide- he south-west lera, and occa- >int; these are ames; some of Islands, is a it bears about of the mark all the islands. it 2 miles, and house upon it, this is a bright .W. by S., dis- 6i miles from hich that vessel sS.S.E.:^S., dis- tit 17 miles from tid Manan; and ncy of the above it; at any rate, if distant from it; the S.W. head of the Grand Manan, and from the Machias Seal Islands W. by N.|N., about 13 miles. It has a number of small ledges and sunken rocks about it, which arc always breaking : this stands conspicuous, and, as Mr. Lockwood observed, several years ago, would be an admirable situation for a lighthouse, being in the immediate vicinity of all the sunken rocks and dangers.. Nearly W.S.W. from the Gannet, distant 1 i mile, is St. Manfs Ledge, part of which is always above water; and to the northward of St. Mary's Ledge, a mile, is the Long Ledge, equally visible; between and around these are numerous rocky shoals, with deep water between them, rendering this part partictdarly dangerous. Other reefs are supposed to exist to the westward, and be- tween the Gannet Ledges and the Machias Seal Islands; their imaginary situations arc marked on the chart, but no further particulars of them are known. Between the northernmost and southernmost of the Murr Leches there is range of dangerous rocks and shoals, many of them always above water, and which extend west- ward from the lighthouse about 4 miles; from this range, farther westerly, about 8 miles, lies a dangerous breaker, called the Roaring Bull. This may be avoided by keeping three remarkable headlands, near the S.W. end of Grand Manan, open. The three MACHIAS SEAL ISLANDS lie W.S.W. from the S.W. head of Manan, distant about 9 or 10 miles; they have channels between them with 10, 12, 20, and 30 fathoms round them. A sunken rock is said to lie to the north-eastward, and between them and Manan, but its exact position is not ascertained. Mariners navi- gating this part should keep a good look-out, for report places many dangers hereabout, some of which probably have existence, and might otherwise be attended with conse- quences the most fatal. Machias Seal Island Lights. — These are two fixed white lights, elevated about 45 feet above high water, and bear from each other E.S.E. and W.N.W., distant about 200 feet, by which circumstance (the two lighthouses at the same station) they will be immediately distinguished from all other lights upon the coast. Both the buildings are white. The following are the bearings from them, viz. : — To the southernmost Murr Ledge (St. Mary's) E.S.E., easterly; Gannet Rock light E. by S. ^ S., 13 miles ; southern head of Grand Manan E. by N. ^ N. ; northern head of Grand Manan N.E. ^E.; N.E. Rock, distant 2 miles, N.E.by N.; Little River Head N. by W. ; Libee Island lighthouse (American) N.W. by W. Vessels standing to the northward, between these lights and the Gannet Rock, should tack or haul off the moment they bring these lights in one, as they will then not be more than f of a mile from the Murr Ledges, if more than 5 miles to the cast of the lights. At 3| miles west from the Seal Islands is a rock, on \\ liich several vessels have struck. It was seen by Cavtain Johnson, of the ship Liverpool, trading to St. John's, in 1834, and is acknowledged to exist by the regular traders and pilots. PA8SAMAQU0DBT BAT.— This bay, with the Chapeneticook, or River St. Croix, divides the British American territories from those of the United States, as settled by the respective Commissioners in 1817, by which Moose, Dudley, and Frede- rick Islands were ceded to the United States, and all the other islands, with Grand Manan, settled to Great Britain; but the citizens of the former are to enjoy the privi- lege of navigating through the Ship Channel, between Deer Island Campo Bello. The entrances to Passamaquoddy Bay comprehend a space of nearly 12 miles. There are three principal channels or passages into it, namely, the Western Passage, Head Harbour Passage, or Ship Channel, and La Tete, or Eastern Passage. The first of these, or the Western Passage, is formed by the land round Quoddy Head and the opposite island of Campo BeUo; Head Harbour Passage, or Ship Channel, lies between Campo Bello and Deer Island; and La Tete, or the Eastern Passage, runs in to the eastward and northward of both Deer and Campo Bunt Desert ', and at a gh, and are s may, in >t Hills are within 4 or U )e taken to >unt Desert .e a proper lod divides, lid you are set E.N.E. the current to the Fox the north- On Mount Desert Hock is a conspicuous lighthouse, exhibiting a fixed light, tinged red, d6 feet above the sea. If you are bound to the eastward, to Machias or Passaniu- nuoddy, your course from Mount Desert Rock will be N.E., 11 or 12 leagues, up to Moose-a-reek light, which is a revolving light ; then N.E. by E., 3 leagues, will bring you to the Libee fixed light; continuing on about N.E. by E. ^ E., 8 leagues farther, brings you near to West Quoddy Head light, at the western entrance to Passainaquoddv Bay. In clear weather, Gr • l Manan will be seen a long while before you come to the Western Seal Islands, which are low ; and when it bears N.E. by E. from you, these islands will range in a line with you and the island. Proceeding along shore from West Quoddy Head, in a south-westerly direction, about 5 miles, you will open Bayle's Mistake, a place of little note; farther on is Moose Cove, fit only for boats; and beyond that is Little River, a good harbour for small ves- sels ; you will be able to see it before its entrance comes N.W. or N.N.W. As you enter you will observe a bluff point of rocky land to the starboard, and near the en- trance of the harbour an island. In passing this island you are to leave it to the port, and when you are ^ a mile beyond it, you may anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms, safe from all winds. Your direct course from West Quoddy Head to this harbour is S.W. by W., 4 leagues ; and 2 miles farther is the entrance to Little Machias Bay. LITTLE MACHIAS BAY has several rocky islets lying before it ; these are nearly in the centre as you enter, and have 8 and 12 fathoms close to them, being always visi- ble, and therefore less dangerous. The bay runs in N.N.W. ^ N., and has anchorage on the port side, in 5, 4, 3, and 2 fathoms, but open to the south-eastward. At 2 miles farther to the S.W. is Cross Island, the eastern boundary of Great Machias Bay. There is also a lighthouse erected on the Little Isle of Libee, which exhibits a fixed light, 65 feet high; this is to the south-westward of Cross Island, from which it is distant about 3 miles. GREAT MACHIAS BAY. — In sa'Hng into this bay from the eastward, you will observe the three low islands, called the Machias Seal Islands, which have been men- tioned before, and lie to the W.S.W. from the S.W. head of the Grand Manan, and 3 leagues to the south-eastward of Cross Island Great caution must be observed when passing them in the night, if the two lights on them cannot be seen. From these islands you may shape your course to the N. W., or steer W. by N. for !Machias. Leave Cross Island on the starboard hand, and having passed Libee light, steer north ; but in pass- ing Cross Island you must be careful of some dangerous ledges lying off it 1 ^ mile, in a S.W. direction. On this course you leave a Ifirge white rock, called the Channel Rock, on your port side : and if not bound into Machits Harbour, you may haul to the west- ward. When you have advanced J a mile above the rock, bring a high round island, which is covered with trees, to bear north, and anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms, muddy bottom ; this is called Jones's Harbour; but if you mean to go up to the town of Machias, keep on a northerly course until you have passed the high round island on your port hand ; then steer W\S.W. or W. by S. for a point covered with birch-trees, having a house upon it. On the starboard hand are several flats and shoals. You may keep on the port side after you pass this house, until the river opens to the northward, then run up to Cross River, and anchor in 4 fathoms. Machias is the chief town of Washington County, in the district of Maine. MOOSE- A-PECK HEx^D LIGHT is on Mistake Island, 54 feet above the level of the sea, and contains a revolving light ; its time of revolution is 4 minutes, showing in that time two bright faces. MOOSE- A-PECK HEAD to MACHIAS.— Give the light a berth of a mile, leaving it on the port hand, and steer N.E. bvE., 2^ leagues, when you will be up with Libr'» Island light on your starboard hand.; then run N.N.E., 2 leagues, which will brii you up with Stones Island on your port hand, having a rock lying east, J of a ml» , from the centre of the island ; from this steer north for Round Island, from which fol- low the eastern directions for Machias. MOOSE- A-PECK REACH.— When coming from the westward, .and past Ladle Island on your port hand, steer N.E. by E. for Tibbet's Island, which you leave on your f)ort hand; when you come to the east end of this island, give it a good berth, for at ow water there is a ledge of rocks that lies a cable's length to the S.E. of the said islands; when you pass it, and bring Moose-a-Peck Reach open, you may steer east for 21G Suillny Directions from Mr. Deal's house; but you must keep the atarhoard hand best on board, for there is a rock that lies about the middle of the sound, which has not above 2 feet water on it at low water. You may anchor to the westward of Mr. Deal's house. When bound to the eastward over Moose-a-Peck bar, which you must not cross before 2 hours' flood, you steer for Kelly's coffee-house, which lies on the port hand as you go to the eastwanf, on the N.E. point of Moose-a-Peck Reach ; when you are enter- ing on the bar, you will bring a bushy tree right against Kelly's house, which stands on the point. Your course over the bar is east ; you leave the Virgin's Breasts, one on your starboard, the other on your port hand. But if you are bound to Chandler's Kiver, you will leave the Virgin's Breasts on your starboard hand, and Rogue's Island on the same hand. There is a muddy bar which lies between Rogue's Island and the main land, but water enough on it at 2 hours' flood. Rogue's Island has a good harbour attheN.W. of it, safe from easterly winds, and a small distance from Chandler's River. When you go over Moose-a-Peck bar, bound to Machias, you leave the Virgin's Breasts, as before mentioned, keeping your course east, and a bare rock, called ^dpit Rock, on your starboard hand; you must keep Libee Island light open to the soutn- ward of this bare rock. (N.B. 1 his bare rock, which you leave on your starboard, may also be left on your port, and steer E.S.E. for Libee Island light.) MACHIAS TO GOLDSBOROUGH.— The shores from hence to the westward are so studded with islands, and encumbered with rocks, forming such a complicated and intricate variety of channels, that no description can bdequately elucidate them; wc must therefore refer the mariner to the inspection of his charts, by a reference to which he will best be enabled to estimate the course and distance of the objects of his search. There are numerous good harbours and inlets where vessels may be placed in safety, but these commonly are too winding and intricate for strangers. GOLDSBOROUGH HARBOUR.— The Skuttock Hills, before mentioned, form a good land-mark for Goldsborough, as they lie to the northward or N.N.E. of the har- bour. Hence, by bringing them in that direction, and steering on that course, you will, on approaching the harbour, see three islands, which lie in its mouth. In proceeding througl the eastern passages, these are to be left on the port hand; the small island without, called the Petit Manan, is of course to be left to the starboard. The latter, which is about a league from the land, has a few bushes, and also a lighthouse upon it; this is a stone building, 25 feet high, and exhibiting a fixed light, 5S feet above the level of the sea. From this lighthouse MovltorCs Ledge, which dries at low tides, bears W. by N., distant 4 miles; JackaorCa Ledge, or Eastern Itock, on which there are 12 feet at low water, bears east, 4 miles; the S.E. Rock, on which are 7 feet, bears S.E. by S., 4 miles; and a ledge, of 16 feet, bears from it S.S.E., 2 miles. Petit Manan is almost connected with the shore by a bar, which dries with the ebb. Within the en- trance the harbour is a mile wide, and you may anchor, in from 4 to 6 fathoms, where you please. On Nash Island, at the entrance of Pleasant River, there is a lighthouse, 47 feet above the level of the sea, containing a fixed light of a deep-red colour, which you leave on your starboard hand going in. The following are the bearing and distances from Xash Island light of the following rocks and ledges, viz.: — Black Rock (always above water,) S.E. by S. 4 S., 3 J miles; Jourdan's Outer Ledge, which is covered at high water, S.W. by W. J W., 4 miles. PLEASANT BAY lies to the north-eastward of Petit Manan Island, and leads to Columbia, Addison, and Harrington. The light on Petit Manan will be vei y useful both for this and Goldsborough Harbours ; but the navigation here is so intricate, that a pilot is indispensably necessary. When coming from the westward, and bound for Pleasant River, in passing Petit Manan lighthouse, bring it to bear S.W. by S., and steer N.E. by N., 3 leagues distant. In steering this course, if it is clear weather, you will see Captain Wass's house open between the island and main land; but this passage will not do at low water. You must leave this island (and a high dry ledge of rocks that lies to the westward of it,) on {our starboard hand : when you pass the bare ledge, you will see a bare isle, \rhich you eave on your starboard hand; then you may haul up for Captain Wass's house, and anchor, and take a pilot for Pleasant River. Pmmmaqnoddy Bay to Cape EUzahcth. 217 BOWBEAR IIARBOUIl. — In coming from the westward, nnil bound for Pigeon Hill or Bowbear Harbour, bring Petit Manan licht to bear N.E., and run for it, giving it a berth of ^ of a mile, and then steer N. i W., 4 miles: in steering this course you will leave the Egg Rock on your starboard hand, when you will make the westerly nh()»'c, giviuff it a berth of ^ ji mile; then steer N.N.E., a mile, when you will be oppo- site T)yer*!i house, where you may anchor, in 3 fathoms, safe from all winds. tne moutn ot tne Day, leaving a large ary teage on your port band; wnen abreast lis ledge, which is bold- to, give it a berth of 14 or 15 fathoms; then steer N. ^ E., ' 5 miles, where you may anchor, safe from all winds, in 4 or 5 fathoms, muddy I you may DYER'S BAY. — In coming from the eastward, ond Iwund for Dyer's Bay, you should give Petit Manan lighthouse a berth, as before; leave it on your starboard hand, and bring the light to bear N.E., } of a mile, then steer N. by W., which will carry you into the mouth of the bay, leaving a large dry ledge on your port hand; when abreast of this ' ' ' ' •••-••■ - - - . . „ . ^ 4 or bottom. GOLDSBOROUGII HARBOUR lies N.N.W. from Petit Manan lighthouse, dis- tant 2 leagues. When entering, you leave an island covered with trees, on the starboard, and two islands on your port hand; then steer N.N.W., 1^ mile, then N. ^ E., 4 miles, will bring you up to Goldsborough Point, where you may anchor, safe from all winds, in 3 or 4 fathoms, muddy bottom. In going fronj Mount Desert to Goldsborough, you must steer E. ^ N., for Skuttock Point, about 4 leagues, where there is an island, wnich you may pass on either side; but it is best to leave it on the port side, and then steer N.E., about 3 leagues, which will carry you up with Goldsborough Harbour. You will see three islands, which lie in the mouth of the harbour; you must leave them on your port hand, and go in the eastern ftassage. In standing in for this place, you will see Petit Manan lighthouse, which you eave on your starboard hand. North front Petit Manan, | of a mile distant, lies a ledge^ bare at half-tide, which ^ou keep within J a cable's length of when going over the bar, which you pass on your starboard hand when bound eastward ; at whiiSi, as you pass the bar, Skuttock Island will be a handspike's length open to the southward of Skut- tock Point; but to go over this bar requires a pilot. When near the bar, and up with Petit Munan Island, keep E.S.E., ^ a mile distant, whio'h will clear a ledge^ having 9 feet water at low water, that lies east of the channel going over the bar, ^ of a mile distant. There is a bar, which runs from the shore to this little island, which is about a league from the land. This bar has 3^ fathoms at high water, and 9 feet at low water. MOUNT DESERT ISLAND forms the northern side of the passage to Bear Island, and may be known by several high hills upon it. This island is about 12 miles linig from north to south, and 10 broad; it is nearly divided by a stream of water, called Sounie's Sound, at the head of which is Eden : at the entrance of Soame's Sound are two good harbours — N.E. and S.W. Harbours. Bear Island lies near the centre of the passage between Sutton's Island and Mount Desert; it is a small island, covered with spruce-trees. The light stands upon its west- ern end, elevated 6d feet alx)ve the level of the sea, exhibiting a fixed light, which may be seen, in clear weather, from 12 to 15 miles. Baker's Island and Cranberry Island form the western side of the entrance of the passage to Bear Island, and are covered with spruce-trees. Baker's Island light is situated near the centre of the island, elevated 70 feet above the lev«^l of the sea, exhibiting a fixed light, visible, in clear weather, at the distance of 15 miles. MOUNT DESERT'S EASTERN HARBOUR.— In coming from the westward, and intending to go into Mount Desert, bring Baker's Island light to bear north, and run for it, leaving it on your left hand; after passing it, steer N.N.W., until the light on Bear Island bea'*s W.N.W., and run direct for it. In running this course, you will leave Sutton's Ii. and on your port hand. The shores around this island are very bold, and you may noar it within a cable's length ; it lies near the centre of the passage, but the best watei is to the northward of it. If you wish to go to the westward of it, when between Bunker's Ledge and Cranberry Island, steer W. by S., until Sutton's Island eastern point bears N.E.; you can then anchor, or run farther in, into Hadlock's Harbour, to the south of you, or steer W.N.W., about 3 miles, for S.W. Harbour. Bunker's Ledge, on which is built a stone-beacon, with a cask placed on a staff in its centre, bears from the eastern end of Sutton's Island E. ^ N. about a mile, which you [N. America — Part I.] F f illH Sailing DinrtioNS from leave on your Mturhotird hand; you may nciir the le()ge within '2 cableH* lensthd. When the li|{ht on Htiiter'it Ixhind i« entirely oltHCured behind the eatttern point or Cranberry iHland, you are then to the woHtward of liunlcer'it Ledge; and Hhould you have a head wind, you may stand to the northward until the light on Hear Inland bears W. byN. In running for Bear iHlnml light, you may near nunkcr's Lcdgo within a cable*a len;fth, leaving it on your starboard hand; after passing the light ^ of a mile, vou may antlhor, in 12 fathoms water, with the light bearing from east to L.N.E., goo(l holding S round; or you may run for N.E. Harbour, about a mile to the northward of the light. r.W. by \\., ^ a mile from Hear Island light, lies a ledge, bare at low water, having on its western edge a spar-buoy, painted black, which you leave on your starboard hand. This ledge bears from the centre of N.E. Harbour S. ^ W. Baker's Island and Cranberry Island form the western side of the entrance of the passage to Hear Island, and arc covered with sprucc-trces. A bar extends from Baker's to Cranberry Islands, covered at high water, which is often mistaken by strangers for the passage into Crunb'srry Island Harbour. You must always recollect, that betbre entering Cranberry Island Harbour, the light on Baker's Island will be entirely ob- scured behind the eastern point of Cranberry Island. You may go in on either side of Bunker's Ledge, but strangers should leave it on the starboard hand. Between Her- ring Cove and Bear Island light, near the north shore, are several rocka and ledgeM, covered at high water. The S.W. IIahdour of Mount Desert. — This is one of the best harbours on the coast; as many as 400 vessels have been at anchor at one time here. To run in, if coming from the westward, when up with Long Island, steer N.N.E., 6 miles, (leaving the Two Duck Islands on your starboard, and the Three Calf Islands on vour port hand); this will bring you up midway between the Great Cranberry Island and Mount Desert: steer up midway, until you open S.W. Harbour, when you may haul in (keeping nearest the starboard hand, on account of a ledge on the port hand, which runs off ^ a mile,) N.W. or W.N.W., and anchor, in 5 or 6 fathoms, muddy bottom, safe from all winds. It is high water at 12 o'clock ; tides rise 12 feet. Off the S.W. point of Cranberry Island there is a rock, bearing west, distant j of a mile. The eastern passage into S.W. Harbour is between Bear Island (on which there is a fixed light,) and Sutton's Island ; after you have passed these, run until you get jhe harbour open, then follow the above directions. FRENCHMAN'S BAY, N.E. of MOUNT DESERT, lies to the westward of Gouldsborough, and with its three islands is the western opening between Skuttock Point and Mount Desert Island ; its entrance is wide, and within are Mosquito Harbour, Flander's Bay, Tounton and Skilling Rivers, and the town of Sullivan. On the port side is Egg Rock, near which are several islets; but of the particulars of this ex<;en8ive bay, we possess no accurate infurniation. On the opposite side of the entrance to Frenchman's Bay, are the Cranberry Islands; these are situated on the south-eastern side of Mount Desert Island; and to the S.S.E. of these are the Duck Islands. BLUE HILL SOL i^ D !;< to the S.W. of Mount Desert, running up to Union River. If you are bound here, a# so*'*** as you are past Long Island, you will open a large sound to the N.N.W., which cfMnmc vou ar*» to steer 6 or 7 leagues, when you will be up with Robertson's Island, leaving th«^ ship and barge on your port hand. Robertson's Island is the only island near that place that has a house upon it. The south part of that island is clear of trees, on which the house stands. When you come near the south part of the island, give it a berth of | of a mile, as there are several sunken rocks off the point. When you bring this island from S W. to N.W., you may anchor in 6 or 7 fathoms water, muddy bottom ; but if you are bound to Blue Hill Bay, you may stand to the northward direct for the Blue Hills, which you may see 10 or 15 leagues distant. If bound to Union River, you should take a pilot at Robertson's Island; a stranger should not go farther without one. ISLE AU Haute. — The Isle au Haute is remarkable land, composed of high, steep cliffs, and makes with a large bay on each side of it ; has good landing on its eastern end, and anchorage j a mile off, in 18 fathoms, with the low iioint bearing N.E. by N., where is also a stream of water running into the sea. The highest part of the island is in the middle, and represents a saddle. PdasatmujUoUily Hay to ('aptt Elizabeth. a 19 SADDLE li/VCK LED(>E in a liifili black r«)ck, formed aoniewliat like u vaddlu, on thu S.E. i'tid of wlik'h is erected a li};lilhouHe, built of hewn griinite, and of that colour; it iit elevated 40 feet above the level of the Hca, exhibiting ii tix«*lle Kock light, bring it to bear E.N.E., and run for it, following thu directions b(^»(;»re given. Woodew Hall Island bears from Seal Island W.S.W., 2 miles distant; Wooden Ball from MiM«!ii»» IIS Rock light N.N.E., 2 J mil«s; Seal Island from Martinicus Rock light N.E. b^ N., about 6 miles; and from Murtinieus Island, north, 4 miles. M XRTINICUS ISLAND is at the mouth of reiwbscot Bay. On the rock south of this island, there are two fixed lughts, 82 feet above the level of the sen, attached to H dwelling-house, 40 feet apart, bearing N.N.W. and S.S.E. from each other. PENOBSCOT BAY and RIVER.- This exionsive bay is included between Point Naskeag or Sedgwick Point on thi east, and White Head on the west ; the distance between these pomts is about 10 leagues, an< ' it therefore includes the Isle au Haute, Deer Island, the Fux Island, Long Island, and i number of small isles, rocks, and ledges. Through the bay, to the mouth of the rive • of its name, the western channel is by the headland on the west, called Owl's Head, on which there is a lighthouse, containmg a fixed light, 147 feet above the level of the sea; thence to Camden on the west, and Cape Rosiere on the east, to Bagaduce Point, or Castine River. The eastern channel is between Isle au Haute on the west, and the smaller isles on the east, through a channel called Long Reach, formed by the shore of Sedgwick on one side, and Deer Island on the other, until it unites with the main channel between Cape Rosiere and Long Island. Above this, on the east, stands Fort Castine, near to which is the town of Castine, opposite to Penobscot. Castine is the port of entry. Strangers bound up Penobscot Bay should always take a pilot. , The noble river, which empties its waters into the bi^y, and which is now de<;orated with numerous townships, is the most considerable in the district of Maine, and has its aources about 130 miles above the inlet of Castine. The head of tide and navigation F f 2 220 Sailing Directions from is, however, at Bangor, about 30 miles from the same: but vessels of 30 tons may approach within a mile of this place. At the entrance of the river is a depth of 10 fathoms. From Mount Desert Rock to White Head, which now has a lighthouse, 50 feet above the level of the sea, and visible 4 or 5 leagues off, having a fixed light, the bear- ing and distance are W.N.W., 13A leagues. On coming in this way, the best passage in is outside of the Two-Bush Isle and the Muscle Ledges, leaving the island on the port side, and steering E.N.E. or N.E. by E., about 2 leagues, when the river will be open. You may then bear away for either side of Iseboroug, or Long Island, pro- ceeding past Belfast Bay and Brigadier Island, keeping the port shore on boaid. When you pass Brigadier Island for Old Fort Point, (Fort Pownall,) observe, before you come to it, that an extensive ledge of rocks lies about ^ of a mile to the E.S.E. of it, which is uncovered at half-tide. Tliese rocks are readily discoverable when the wind blows, by the breakers. You may pass within a cable's length of Fort Point, in smooth water. If bound up the river from Old Fort Point, with the wind a-head and an ebb-tide, you may make a good harbour in the East River, at about a league E.N.E. from that point. The entrance of this river is on the south side of Orphan Island ; here you may lie safe from all winds, and anchor in 6 or 7 fathoms, good holding ground. You leave Orphan Island, and several rocks which are above water, on the port hand. If re- quisite, you may anchor to the N.W. of the island, on the starboard band, before you Eass through; but with the wind and tide favourable, you may proceed up to Marsh lay, keeping towards the port shore. Marsh Bay is IJ league above Orphan Island. When passing it, keep nearly in the middle of the river, and you will have neither rocks nor shoals until you arrive at the falls. Castine lighthouse is on Dices Head, ot the entrance of Castine Harbour, and is a fixed light, 116 feet above the level of the sea; it bears N.W. ^ W. from Fort Point Ledges, and from the eastern end of Long Island, S.E. by E. J E. The shore, near the light- house, is bold. To sail up to Castine, &c. by the S.E. and eastern side of Long Island, bring the light of Dices Head to bear N.E. by N., and run for it, until you are within ^ a mile of it : then steer E. by N. for the beacon on Hormar's Ledge, leaving Otter Rock beacon on your port hand a cable's length distant, and Bull's Head, Noddle's Point, and the beacon on Hormar's Ledge on the starboard hand. You may near the starboard shore off the entrance of Castine Harbour within a cable's length, and steer E.N.E., which will carry you up the Ship Channel. You may anchor off the town, near the wharfs, in from 8 to 10 fathoms water. This harbour is easy of access. The tide here rises, on the full and change, 10 or 11 feet; and it is high water at lOh. 45m. To enter Penobscot Bay from the S. W. — On approaching White Head, or its light- house, be careful not to haul in for it until it bears N.E., as you will thus avoid the ledges of rocks lying without the head. Within these ledges, at about a pistol-shot from shore, there is a safe passage. In passing the head to the eastward, you will see a good harbour to the port hand, called Seal Harbour, in which a vessel may He safely with any wind. In going into this harbour, give the port shore a berth, in order to avoid a sunken ledge^ extending about ^ over, and which always breaks, except at high water. From White Head to Birch Island and Point, the course and distance are N.E., 4 miles. This island has a rock^ about ^ a mile to the south-westward of it, which must be left on the port hand. When hauling round the island, give it a small berth, and steer N.N.E. for the Owl's Head, leaving the Two Owl's Islands on the starboard side. OWL'S HEAD HARBOUR makes with a deep cove ; to sail in, bring a rocky point, which will be on your starboard side, to bear N.E.; and a ledge of rocks that lie outside of that point, to bear E.N.E. , and anchor in 4 fathoms, muddy bottom. You will He open to the wind at E. by N. and E.N.E., but safely with all other winds. The tide of flood here sets to the eastward, and the tide of ebb S.W., through the Muscle Ledges. Owl's Head Light lies at the eastern point of the head, at the western side of the entrance to Penobscot Bay, and N. by E. from White Head lighthouse ; it exhibits a fi.xed light, 147 feet above the level of the sea. Passamaquoddy Bay to Cape Elizabeth. 221 \Q ton8 may depth of 10 use, 50 feet bt, the bear- i)est passage iland on the :iver ■will be Island, pro- oaid. When 1, before you E.S.E. of it, len the wind jrt Point, in an ebb-tide, E. from that id; here you round. You hand. Ifre- 1, before you up to Marsh tlhan Island, lave neither and is a fixed Point Ledges, ear the light- id, brinw the in ^ a mile of Rock beacon oint, and the arboard shore 3.N.E., which ir the wharfs, here rises, ou , or its light- bus avoid the a pistol-shot fard, you will vessel may lie )erth, in order aks, except at nee are N.E., it, which must all berth, and starboard side. bring a rocky f rocks that lie bottom. You 2r winds. The am side of the it exhibits a Camden Lighthouse is situated on the S.E. part of Negro Island, 8 miles to the N. ^ E. of Owl's Head; it contains a fixed light, 49 feet above the level of the sea, on Brown's Head, on the north Fox Island • and at the western entrance of Fox Island Passage is a fixed light, 20 feet above i:he ground, and 80 feet above the level of the sea. The I'ox Islands divide Penobscot Bay from Isle au Haute Bay ; there is a passage from one to the other round the north end of the island. CAMDEN HARBOUR. — In coming from the westward, and bound for Camden Harbour, bring Owl's Head light to bear south, and steer N. J E. for Camden light, leaving the Graves and N.E. Rocks on the -starboard hand. The Graves is a small black rock, and is above the surface of the water at all times, and you may near it within a cable's length on all sides. When up with the lighthouSL', leave it on the port hand a cable's length, and steer N.W. by N. ^ N.or N.N.W., about J a mile, and anchor near the north shore, in 4 or 5 fathoms, good holding-ground. If you are to the eastward, and bound for Camden Harbour, bring the light to bear W.S.W. or S.W. by W., to clear the N.E. Ledges, which bear from Camden light N.E. | N., about ^ of a mile. South of the Fox Islands, and dii'sctly before the entrance to Penobscot Bay, lie the Llatinicus Islands; the northern island is distant from the southern point of the South- ern Fox, full 8 miles; and in the channel between are 30 and 36 fathoms. The Matinicus Islands form a cluster; from off them to the eastward is the Seal Rock, distant about 5 miles ; and about midway between is another rock ; to the south-eastward, near 4 miles from the Matini(;us Islands, is the Wooden Ball Rock, being the outermost of the group: there are channels with deep water between them all; and the mariner will, by inspecting his chart, better comprehend their respective positions. To the westward are several detached Islands, prmcipally named the Green Islands, Matini(;k Island, St. George's Islands, and Mauheigan Island. Between Green Islands and Matinick is a reef of rocks under water; but there are deep-water channels between all the other islands. MANHEIGAN LIGHT.— On Manheigan Island, south of the entrance to St. George's River, is a revolving light. It has ten lamps and reflectors; these are so fitted on two sides of an oblong square, that one side produces a blood-red light, and the other a common white light. The time of revolution is 2 minutes 15 seconds, elevation 170 feet above the level of the sea. You can close to the island on either side, taking care to go between some dry ledges on the northern side of it. In the island is a small har- bour, open to the S.W. From the high light on Cape Cod, Manheigan Isle bears N.N.E. ^ N. (true), distant 35 leagues. GEORGE'S RIVER. — Broad Bay, leading to George's and Muscongus Rivers and the town of Waldobovough, is too intricate for description, being filled with rocks and small islands; its situation is between Mosquito Island and Penmanquid Point. There is a lighthouse now built upon Franklin Island, to the northward of Manlieigan Island ; it stands on the northern side of the island, near the entrance to George's River, and has a steady fixed light, 50 feet above the level of the sea. Directions. — Bring the north Danniscove Island, or White Island, tobearW.S.W., then steer E.N.E. for Franklin's lighthouse, which stands at the entrance; leave that on the starboard side, and you may sail past within a cable's length of it. When you get abreast of Franklin Island light (which is on your starbonrd hand), steer N.E. for Otter Island, distant 4 miles, and continue on until within ^ of a mile of it, leaving it on your port hand, and steer E.N.E. for Cauldwell's Island, at the S.W. end of which is a high round rock, called Goose Island Rock. Wiien abreast of this rock, pass it at the distance of a cable's length, leaving it on your starboard side, and steer N.E. by E. and N.E.; but you should keep Cauldwell's Island best on board, to avoid a sunken ledge lying in the middle of the river. In beating into George's River, be careful of a sunken rock which bears E.N.E. from Franklin's lighthouse, distant 2 leagues; also of another ledge lying off the S.E. end of Gay's Island, which extends ^ of the way across towards the Goose Rock. Should you fall in with Manheigan light, and bound to George's River, steer N.N.W., leaving Manheigan Island to the starboard, until you get Franklin's light- 222 Sailing Directions ftom \i t house to bear N.E. by £., when you may run for it, and sail as before directed. Frank- lin's light may safely be run for when bearing from N.E. by N. to E.N.E. In running from White Islands for George's River, be careful to avoid the New Harbour Ledges, which lie E.N.E., distant 3 miles from Penmanquid light, and have only 5 feet water over them. When beyond these ledges, you will see the western Egg Rock, which is large and dry, and bears about E.N.E. from Penmanquid Point, distant 2 leagues, and W. by S. from Franklin's lighthouse, 3 miles, which yeu leave on your port hand ; and you will then discover the eastern Egg Rock, lying nearly south from Franklin's light, 3 miles; this must be left to the starboard, 'i'hese Egg Rocks bear from each other E.S.E. and W.N.W., distant about a league: their appearance is very similar; but you will pass between them both, and have an excellent clear and open channel. They will be easily distinguished one from the other by their bearings fro'.u the lighthouse. Should you have the wind ahead, and be compelled to turn to windward, you can stand on to the northward, until Franklin's light comes E.N.E., and to the southward until it bears N.N.E., without danger. To the northward of the range of McCobb's Island and the western Egg Island, the ground is foul and rocky; and so it is to the eastward of the range of Franklin's Island light and the eastern Egg Island. McCobb's Island is that whicn forms the western entrance to George's River, and bears N.W., distant 1^ mile from from Franklin Island light. Penmanquid Light. — On Penmanq^uid Point, on the western side of the entrance to George's River, a lighthouse, contaming a fixed light, is erected, 30 feet high, and 75 feet above the level of the sea. It is a light to Bristol and Waldoborough Rivers, and bears N.W. ^ W. from Manheigan light, distant 12 miles. JOHN'S BAY HARBOUR.— Penmanquid Point forms the eastern side of the bay, and is a low bare point, but the shores are bold on all sides. The lighthouse is situated on the S.E. side of Penmanquid, and bears from the western point E.N.E., about ^ a mile. The Coast Pilot says, " Vessels westward bound, and falling in with Manheigan Island, and wishing to make a harbour in a strong S.W. wind, must observe the follow- ing directions: — Bring Manheigan light to bear S.E., and steer N.W., distant about 11 miles, for Penmanquid Point; and when the light on the said point bears E.N.E., distant ^ a mile, you are then up with the western point of Penmanquid : leave it ou your starboard hand, and give it a berth of |^ of a mile ; then steer for John's Har- bour, leaving John's Island (which is small and high, covered with spruce-trees, located near the centre of the bay), McCunn's Point, on your starboard; Bulford's Island, Stuart's Island, and McFarling's Point on the port hand. If from the westward, and bound into this harbour, bring John's Island to bear N. by E , and run until you are within a cable's length of it; then steer north for High Island Head, which leave on your port hand; and when abreast of the said head, steer N. ^ E., about f of a mile, and anchor in from 4 to 5 fathoms water, good holding ground. John's Bay lies about 5 miles to the eastward of Townsend Harbour, and is a fair, open bay, having neither rocks or shoals at its entrance ; and vessels may run in without fear, by following the above directions." TOWNSEND HARBOUR lies about 5 miles to the eastward of John's Bay Har- bour; and on the port side of the entrance is a lighthouse on Burnt Island, showing a fixed light, 56 feet above the level of the sea. To enter this harbour, a pilot is necessary. To the westward of George's River are several other inlets leading up the Dania- riscotty River to Nobleborough. Booth Bay is also situated to the westward; here stands a lighthouse, erected in 1822, on Burnt Island, to the northward of the Bantam Ledges. To the southward lie the Bantam Ledges, stretcliing into the sea 4 or 5 miles; these are a string of rocks, some above and some under water, lying on the starboard side of the entrance into Sheepscut River. SHEEPSCUT RIVER. — In coming for Sheepscut River from the westward, and making the island of Seguine, or Seaguin, upon which a lighthouse is now erected, having a f.xed light of the first magnitude ; the lantern is 200 feet above the level of the sea, and the Tight may be seen 9 or 10 miles off. From this lighthouse Pond Island light, at the entrance of Kennebeck River, bears N. J E.; you will leave the light on the starboard side, giving the island a berth of ^ a mile; and, passing to the eastward, bring it to bear S.W., and steer N.E. and N.E. by N., 3 leagues, which will Passamaquoddy Bay to Cape Elizabeth. 223 i. Frank- 1 the New , and have le western |i;id Point, 'u leave on sarly south Sgg Rocks )earance ia t clear and ir bearings d, you can southward McCobb's it is to the McCobb's ears N.W., ntrance to high, and igh llivers, of the bay, I is situated ut } a mile. Manheigan the follow- itant about irs E.N.E., leave it on )hn's Har- !es, located d's Island, tward, and til you are ve on your mile, and lies about ng neither lowing the Bay Har- showing a a pilot is :he Dama- rard; here ie Bantam )r 5 miles; starboard ;ward, and erected, le level of )nd Island ! the light uc to the wnich will bring you to Ebinicook Harbour; its entrance is narrow, but becomes broader when you get into it. The entrance in lies E. by N. Observe, you cannot get in with a N.E. or easterly wind, but must have it south or westerly. After you are within the har- bour, haul up N.E. or N.E. by N., there being several sunken rocks on the starboard side as you go in; there you will have 4 fathoms, muddy bottom, and lie safe from all winds. But if bound up Sheepscut River in a large vessel, and coming from the westward, you must go to the southward of Seguine Island, steering N.E. or N.E. by E., a ^eague; and when the river bears north, or north, a little westerly, run north, and keep the starboard hand on board. Many rocks and ledges, some above and some under water, lie to the north-eastward of Seguine; when you get up as hi^h as Ebenicook, leave the Mark Islands on your port, and keep your course north, a little easterly. Here it is requisite to have a pilot. The port of Wiscasset is about 5 leagues up from the entrance of the river. KENNEBECK RIVER.— Pond Island lighthouse bears N. i W., 2^ miles from Seguine lighthouse, and both show fixed lights. These lights are intended to facilitate the entrance to the Kennebeck River, which is one of the most considerable in the State of Maine. In coming from the westward for Kennebeck River, you should keep :J^ of a mile from Seguine light, to avoid JacKs Knife Ledge, which bears from the light N. W., distant ^ of a mile, and EUingswood Rock, lying north, about the same distance ; after passing the latter, you should bring Seguine light to bear south, and then steer north for Pond Island light; leaving this a cable's length on your port hand, care should be taken to haul quickly round Pond Island Point, in order to avoid the Two Sugar Loaves, two small islets, bearing north, distant ^ a mile from Pond Island, upon which the flood sets strongly. Your course, afi,er passing Pond Inland, will be about N.W. to the fort on Hunnewell's Point, which you must give a berth to, and steer on north '>r Cox's Head, about a mile; here also is another fort. Steer thence N.E. to Perkin's sland, which leave about a mile to the starboard, and give it a berth of a cable's length, to avoid two ledges that lie nearly abreast of Perkin's Island, and near the middle of the river; then proceed north for a mile farther, and you will find good anchorage at Per- kin's Flats, in 4, 5, or 6 fathoms water. This is as far as a vessel, conducted by a stranger to the place, should ever venture to advance, especially with a heavy ship. There is good anchorage any where between Seguine and Pond Island, when the weather is moderate, in from 5 to 8 fathoms, within ^ a mile of Pond Island; but should the wind blow with any violence, and you are far enough to windward to weather EUingswood Rock and Seguine Ledges, then it will sometimes be advisable to run for Townsend Harbour; or, with the wind at N.W. and a flood-tide, you may, by fetching within a cable's length of the Lower Sugar Loaf, and leaving it on the port side, run into good and safe anchorage, in from 6 to 3 fathoms, in Heald's Eddy. If bound into Kennebeck, and falling to the eastward of Seguine, bring the light on Pond Island to bear N.W. bv W., and run for it till within a cable's lengtb, then follow the preceding directions. There is safe anchorage, with an oflF-shore wind, any where between Small Point and Seguine, only taking care to avoid Jack's Knife Ledge. Safe anchorage may be found from Cox's Head to Perkin's Island, nearest the eastern shore. The usual rapidity of the tide between the Seguine and the en.jance to the Kennebeck is 3 to 4 knots. There is also a passage into the Kennebeck River, leaving Pond Island on the starboard hand; but that is not recommended, for only 16 feet can be obtained at high water. To the eastward of Seguine you will have deep water. At the westward, the tide of flood sets strongly into New Meadows, and W.N.W. into Broad Sound, and up to Portland; the ebb-tide is the reverse. SEGUINE ISLAND and LIGHTHOUSE.— This island is remarka,ble when bearing east or west, being 2 miles from land ; and when it bears north, shuts in with it. From this lighthouse Portland light bears W. ^ S., 20 miles; the two lighthouses on Cape Elizabeth W.S.W J W., 20 miles; and Alder's Ledge S.W. by W. J W., 18 miles. There are several rocky ledges near Seguine, which bear from the light as follows: — Five- Fathoms Ledge S. by W., } of a mile; Eillingswood Rock north, :|- of a mile; Seguine Ledges N.N.E., distant ^ a mile, which always dry; Jack's Knife Ledge N.W., \\ mile, over which are 8 feet water; Wood Island Reef N.N. W., distant 1^ mile, which has 4 feet water on it; a;nd the Whale's Back, N.N.E., distant 1^ mile. 224 Sailing Directions from HENDRTCK'3 HEAD LIGHT \s a fixed light, 30 feet above the level of the sea, on the starboard hand go.'ng in, near the mouth of Sheepscut River. NEW MEADOWS RIVER.— At about 6 leagues E.N.E. from Cape Elizabeth, and 2 miles westward of Small Point, is the mouth of the Meadows River, a large inlet, affording good shelter during adverse winds. If you should happen to fall in with this bay with the wind at S.E. or S.S.E., and bound to the eastward, you may make a good harbour in the above river. In standing to the northward, you will have a large round island on your starboard hand, covered with spruce-trees, together with two large rocks, one called the Brown Cow, and the other the White BuU, which are some dis- tance froir pch other. You m -i, leave the Brown Cow on your starboard, and the White Bull on your port hand, the latter of which you may go within a cable's length of, and when you have passed it, must steer for Horse Island, that lies on the starboard, which has a house upon it, that you may g<. within ^ of a mile of. To the westwj,rd of the island lies a large rock, which is_ covered at high water, but bare at half- tide; you may go on either sich of it when it is in sight, but the widest passage is to the eastward. When you have passed this rock, steer N. by W. or N.N.W., which course will carry you up to a large island, called Bear Island, which is covered with spruce and birch-trees. When you have passed this island about ^ of a mile, you may haul in for the starboard shore, and anchor in 5 or 6 fathoms water. This is the best place for anchoring with the wind S.S.E. or east; but be careful of a lec^e of rocks that runs to the northward of this inland, about ^ a mile off. You may anchor in this bay according as the wind may be , if it should be to the eastward, anchor on the east side. If you have lost your anchors and cables, there is a large cove on your starboard hand, about 2 miles from Bear Island, bearing about north, and which is sufficient to hold 30 or 40 vessels ; it is land-locked all round, so that no wind can damage a vessel after she gets into it. IIUSSEY SOUND. — If you come from the eastward, and make Seguine light, bring it to bear east, and steer west for the sound, if you have day-light and a leading- wind, as you have nothing but islands on your starboard hand, through which the tide of flood sets very strongly; when you get within 2 miles of Hussey's Sound, you will make two islands, without trees, called Green Ish.nds. Continue your course till Hussey's Sound bears N.N.E., then steer in. When past the two islands, after enter- ing the sound, leave three islands on your port, and two islands on your starboard side ; the northern island on your starboard is called Smith's Island ; when you have passed it about ^ of a mile, you may haul away E.N.E. till you shut in the said island to the S.E., then anchor, in 8 or 9 fathoms, muddy bottom, with Hog Island to the S.W., Basket Island to the N.W., Great Gabegue Island to the N.E., and Smith's Island to the S.E. ; here 200 sail of vessels may ride safe from all winds ; and when wind and tide serve, you may be out to sea again in an hour. HALF-WAY ROCK is higii and black, about 600 feet in diameter, elevated 16 feet above the level of the sea ; at 600 feet from the rock, on the N.W., north, N.E., east, and S.E. sides, there are 5 and 6 fathoms, deepening gradually to 25 fathoms. At f of a mile from it a reef extends W. by S., | of a mile, and it has 10 fathoms within a cable's length of it. You may near this rock on all sides within ^ of a mile, and find from 15 to 25 fathoms. From this rock Seguine lighthouse bears E. | N., 13 miles; Cape Elizabeth lighthouse S.W. by W. \ W., 9 miles; Cod Rock S.W. by S., about G miles; Portland lighthouse W. \ S., distant 8 miles; Green Islands W. \ N., about 5 miles; Drunken Ledges N.N.E., 2^ miles; Mark Island N. byE. ^E., 4^ miles; Jewill's Island N.W.byN., abou^ Smiles; and Eagle Island, north, 4^ miles. Drunken Ledges may be seen at all times., breaking with little sea. Mark Island is small and bare, and has a monument erected on it, as a guide for vessels into Broad Sound. Eagle Island is small, high, and covered with trees; these two islands form the east side of the entrance to Broad Sound ; and Brown Cow and Jewill's Islands form the west side. Green Islands lie S.W., 1^ mile from Jewill's Island. Coo Ledge is ^ a mile in circumference, and has 2^ fathoms on it at low water, gradually deepening to 5, /, B, and 12 fathoms; and bears from Portland lighthouse E.S.E., about 7 miles, and from Cape Elizabeth E. by N. ^ N., distance 5 mUes; this ledge breaks with strong S.E. winds. Passamaquoddy Bmj to Cape Elizabeth. J225 5 mues; this OAFS ELEEABETK and FORTIiAND BARBOUR.— Upon Portland Point, vrhich lies about 4 miles to the northward of Cape Elizabeth, stands a lighthouse, built of stone, and 72 feet high, exclusive of the lantern which is of the greatest utility on this coast. Its light is fixed. The sound or harbour of Portland is buoyed, and the following directions are to be observed when sailing in. On the observatory at Fort Hill is placed a telescope, by means of which vessels ap- proaching the coast can be discovered 15 leagues off; their colours or signals may be distinguished 8 leagues distant, if the weather be clear; and should anv assistance be wanted, they will place their ensign over the private signals, and if they can be dis- cerned, information of their situation will be made known to the owners. This obser- vatory is built on an eminence, 141 feet above high water mark, and the building is 32 feet high, being painted red, and having the telescope at the top; it bears from Port- land lighthouse N.N.W. \ W., distance 4 miles; and these in a line will be a good ma^k for clearing AlderCs Ledge, carrying you f of a mile to the eastward of it. Vessels of a large draught will find the best water by bringing Portland light N.W. by N., and steer N.W. by N., and run directly for it. If you should fall in to the eastward of Portland and make Seguine light, bring it to bear east, and steer west, which course you are to continue until you make Portland light to bear from N.W. to W.N.W., when you may run for it without fear. Kemember always to pay a due regard to the tide, the flood setting strongly between all the islands to the eastward. In coming from the sovth'westward, when within ^ a mile of Cape Elizabeth, the red buoy on Broad Cove Rock may be seen. This buoy bears N.N.E. from the pitch of the •- mile, and breaks at all times. With a southerly wind you may anchor near Stage Island, on which is a monument, in what is called Winter Harbour; enter the eastern way, and you will have room to turn your vessel, which you cannot do if you go in by the western. This anchorage is exposed to the N.E. and E.N.E. winds; but if your anchors and cables are not good, you may run into the pool, and lie safe from all winds. Saco is about a league to the N.^/., having a bar, with but 9 or IC feet at high water; but a considerable trade is carried on there. Richmond Island lies about 7 miles N.E. of Saco, and is fit only for small coasters ; but in sailing by this island you must be careful of a sunken ledge, called Watch Ledge, which lies off about S.E. from the N.E. end of the island, ^ a mile; keep, therefore, farther off, for it is not visible, unless when the wind blows fresh. CAPE PORPOISE LIGHT.— The lighthouse stands on the S.W. part of Goat Island, and contains a fixed light, elevated 33 feet above the level of the sea. Porpoise Harbour is not very safe for lar^-* vessels, and should not be attempted unless with a fair wind ; and a pilot is always : isary. KENNEBUNK HARBOUR is very shoal, and can only be entered at high water; the depth on the bar at low water is 2 or 3 feet. Common tides rise and fall 8 and 9 feet. The course and distance from Cape Porpoise to Cape Neddock are S.W., 13 miles; between lies Wells B&y ; and close to the northward of Cape Neddock Nubble is the Cape Harbour, which is very small. The WHITE HILLS are a most prominent and important land-mark in ap- proaching these coasts, and may be seen many leagues off at sea, like a bright cloud above the horizon, when no other land is in sight. They lie N.W. from Portland, and N.N.W. from Wood Island. They have been soen, in clear weather, in latitude 43° 10', 46 miles off Cape Liizabeth, where there are 80 fathoms water, muddy ground. If from this spot you steer N.W. or W.N.W., you will make Agamenticus Hills; which, when bearing W. by N., 6 or 7 leagues, appear to be three in number, the smallest being to the eastward. At the same time you will make Wells, or Bonabeg Hills, bearin"^ W.N.W.; and when on the northern pnrt of eleffery's Rank, in 45 fathoms, you will see the hills of Agamenticus bearing W. by N. or W.N. W. BOON ISLAND. — In coming from the eastward for this part of the coast, you should keep a good look-out for Boon Island, upon which stands a lighthouse of stone, with two buildmgs on it; the one for a dwelling, the other for an oil-house. This is a fixed light, 70 feet above the sea. A ledge of rocks lies due north from this island which must be carefully avoided; there is also, about a league to the eastward of the island, a dangerous reef under water, with only 4 feet upon it, over which the water breaks continually; the position of this reef will be seen on inspecting the chart: it is very dangerous, and therefore should be avoided. This reef lies about S.E., 5 or 6 leagues from Agamenticus Hills. Vessels, in making the land hereabout, should be careful, especially in thick weather, not to go to the northward of latitude 43°, unless they are well acquainted, and judge themselves to be to the westward of the Boon Island Ledges, as this has proved fatal to many who were unacquainted. In this direction, and between Jeffery's Bank and Fiscataqua Harbour, arc 80 70 and 75 fathoms; the ground in general is mud; and the current will be found settiii«' strongly to the south-westward. YORK LEDGES.— This rock is bare at 3 ebb, extending E.N.E. and AV.S.W., about 400 feet, and is about 300 feet wMc. N.E. of the main rock there is a shoal runs G.nr 2 228 Sailing Directions from )i lit n[ are the bearings and distances of places from Whale's Back light, Sister Shoal, N. 89°41 ' E., a mile, 1310 feet ; Eastern Sister, N. 75°53^E., off* 4 of a mile, havlrg only 2 fathoms upon it at low water. The soundings are gra- dual, from 5 to 20 fathoms, \ a mile from the rock. An iron beacon has been erected on this rock; it is 33^ feet high, and about 25 feet above the level of the water; upon the pillars rests an iron tabular column, supporting an iron base, of 3^ feet diameter, upon which is inscribed " Yobk Ledoe, 1841." The Triangular Shoal bears S.W., 2 miles from this beacon ; it has 4 fathoms on it at low water, and which breaks in a heavy sea. Boon Island light bears from the beacon £. |N., 5^ miles; Whale's Back light W. by S. i S., 5 miles; White Island light S. by W. J W., 8^ miles. York Harboui. is small, but safe when once entered; there are 12 feet at low water, and the tide rises 9 feet. The Isles of Shoals is the southernmost cluster or ledge of rocks which surround the entrance to Portsmouth Harbour; in clear weather they may be seen to the eastward 15 or 16 miles off; but in thick weather you will first discern the Meeting-house, which is built upon one of the islands. If bound to Newbury or Portsmouth, you should give them a large berth, going full 3 miles to the southward of them ; for about 2 miles off them lies Innex's Rock, drying before low water; this is about 2 miles S.W. by S. from Star Island. Whale's Back Lighthouse is situated on the eastern side of Portsmouth Harbour; its height is 68 feet above low water maik. It has two fixed lights, one 10 feet below the other. The following viz. : — Western Sister ! a mile, 3480 feet; Ordiorn's Point, S. 44° 30' W., a mile, 1920feet; Phillip's Rocks, (12 feet,) S. 83° 30' E., a mile, 300 feet; Kitt's buoy, S. 23° 50' E., 2130 feet. Gun Boat Shoal lies 4 miles southward of Portsmouth lighthouse ; it runs E.N.E. and W.S.W., about 2 cables' length, and has 3^ fathoms on its shoalest part, and bears from Whale's Back light S. by W. ^ W., and from Ordiorn's Point S. i E. PORTSMOUTH BARBOUR may be known by its lighthouse, which stands upon Fort Point, on the western side, and upon which one light is exhibited ; this is a fixed light, and stands 85 feet above the level of the sea. In coming from the south-westward, endeavour to bring the Dry Salvages, off Cape Anne, to bear S. by E., then steer N. ^ W. or N. by W., which will bring you to the Isles of Shoals, from whence you may take a fresh departure. Let Star Island bear S.S.E., and steer N.N.W. ; tlien turning in for Portsmouth, bring the light to bear north, but not to the westward of that until you have passed Ordiorn's Point; and when standing to the east- ward, tack about as soon as the lighthouse bears N. by W. J W., until you get within Wood Island. Be cautious of approaching too near Ordiorn's Point, for sunken rocks lie off it more than ^ a mile, which do not appear with off-shore winds. In standing to the eastward, be likewise cautious of the Whale's Back, which lies S.S.W. from Wood Island, and is covered at half-tide. Whale's Back will be easily distinguished by its lighthouse, which must be left on your starboard hand going in. At the entrance of the harbour the tide flows, on full and change days, at i past 1 1 o'clock. Ships bound to this port, from the eastward, with a turning wind, must be cautious of York Ledge, on which the beacon is erected. There is also a sunken ledge, called the Triangle, before mentioned, lying S.W., 2 miles from York Ledge beacon, which is never uncovered, but always breaks at low water. Some part of York Ledge is uncovered at half-tide. A ledge of rocks lies a mile north from Boon Island, of which beware. There is also a dangerous reef, bearing east, a league from the island, and S.E., 5 or 6 leagues from Agamenticus Hills ; these have been noticed before. ISLES OF SHOALS. — White Island, the south-westernmost of these islands, is rocky, extending | of a mile in length from S.E. to N. W., and about 1 f mile distant from the Meeting-house of Star !^land. A reef extends about ^ of a mile from its N.W. end, to which a berth must be given. White Island is now distinguished by a lighthouse, the light of which is elevated 67 feet above the level of high water; the lantern contains 15 patent lamps, with reflectors, Cape EUzahetli to Cape Anne. 229 thorns on it at lust be left on s, at \ past 1 1 on a revolving triangle, which will make one complete revolution in 3^ minutes, exhi- biting on one side a bright red light, on one side a blue, and on the other side the natural colour of the light. Each of theje lights may be distinctly seen for about &0 seconds, at the distance of 9 miles; the light wii! be wholly eclipsed, for about 10 seconds, between each colour; but within the above distance the light will not entirely disappear in clear weather ; taking the medium, the greatest power of light will be to the least, as 40 to 1. The bright, or natural light, will be first discernible, in clear weather, at the distance of about 7 leagues; and, as you approach, the red and blue in succession. The bright light will be visible 2 or 3 miles farther than the red, and the red about a similar dis- tance farther than the blue. There is also a bell of 800 pounds weight suspended to the tower of the lighthouse, which will be kept tolling at the rate of 10 strokes in a minute, by night as well as by day, whenever, from fog, or any other cause, the light or lighthouse cannot be seen at least 4 miles; at which distance it is calculated the bell may be heard, in moderate weather. From White Island lighthouse the bearings and distances to various spots are as fol- lows ; — fc) Portsmouth lighthouse N.N. W., 7^ miles : Square Rock lies directly in this range, and is distant from White Island lighthoiise | of a mile; to Boon Island light N.E. by N., distant 12 miles; to Cape Anne light S. | W., 19^ miles; to Rye Meeting-house N.W. by W. i W., 9 miles; and to Star Meeting-house N.E., | of a mile. Innes's Rock bears S.W. by S. from this island, distatit 2 miles, and is uncovered at low water; to the N.W. point of Hog Island N. byE. }E.; to Cedar Island Ledge E.N.E. J E., 1^ mile; to Anderson's Ledge S.E. byE. ^ E., 1| mile; and to White Island Ledge W.S.W., iofamile. Londoner" H Inland lies about \ a mile to the northward of White Island, and is about I of a mile in length from N. to S., high at each end, but at high tides the middle is sometimes covered; it is surrounded with rocks, some being always above water. The south end bears west from the Meeting-house, and the north end W.NW. ^ W., about ^ a mile distant. Star Island, distinguished by the conspicuous Meeting-house before mentioned, is about ^ of a mile in length from S.E. to N.W., and about ^ a mile in breadth ; its north end is covered with buildings. The Meeting-house stands on an eminence, a little to the northward of the middle of the island, fronting the west; the roof of this building is only 12 feet high; but thence to the top of the steeple, which stands on the middle of it, is 30 feet more; and the whole height, from the surface of the water, is about 87 feet: being painted white, it may be seen from a distance of 8 or 9 leagues. It bears from Thatcher's Island lights, Cape Anne, (hereafter noticed,) N. \ E., distant 6^ leagues; from Newbury Port lighthouse N.E. j E., distant 4^ leagues; from Portsmouth lighthouse S.S.E. ^E., 3 leagues; from the western Agamenticus Hill S. ^E. ;from Boon Island lighthouse S. W. ^ S., 4^ leagues; and Boon Island Ledge, which lies a league east from Boon Island, S.W. by W., 3A leagues. Off the south end of this island, at about J of a mile from shore, lies a rock, called AndersorCs Rock, which is uncovered at half-tide, and should, therefore, have a good berth when passing. From the Meeting- house it bears S.S.E. There is also a rock between this island and Londoner's Island, bearing from the Meeting-house N. by W. ^ W., distant ^ of a mile. Cedar Island is the small island which lies to the eastward of Star Island ; it is only ;|^ of a mile from east to west. The east end bears *rom the Meeting-house E. ^ N., and the west end E.N.E. J E., f of a mile distant. At J a mile from the S.E. end of this island is a rock, uncovered at half-tide, which bears E. by S. from the Meeting-house. Smutty Nose Island is nearly a mile in length from east to west, and about ^ a mile in breadth. It may be known by a windmill on its north part. At the west end is a fine harbour, called Haley's Cove, where 15 or 20 sm.iU vessels may lie safely in all winds. There are several buildings near this place. Between the island and Hog Island, which lies to the northward, there is a fine channel with sufficient depth of water for any vessel, by keeping nearly in mid-channel. The east end of Smutty Nose Island bears from the Meeting-house E.N.E., nearly ^ of a mile. Hog Island is a high island, Iving to the northward of Smutty Nose Island ; it is about a mile in length from east to west, and f of a mile from north to south. The 2.30 Sailing Directions from S west end lios from the Meeting-house N. by W. \ W.; oast end of ditto N.N.E., | of o mile distant. Lhich Inland is tho northurninost of the Isles of Shoals. It is low and rocky. Some parts arc covered iit high water, with rocks projecting in every direction, especially at the N.W. end, where a teilf/e runs off to the distance of A a mile: it is the most dan- gerous of the Isles of Shoals, and must be cautiously avoided. Its east end bears from tho Meeting-house nearly N. by E. J E., distant about 1 J mile. NEVVUUUY POUT.— The entrance of Newbury Port, or Newbury Harbour, in distinguished by two lighthouses^ standing on the northern part of Plum Island; it lies nearly 7A leagues S.W. J S. from Cape Neddock Nubble. It coming round Cajw Anne, and at about 2 miles to the northward of the Dry Salvage Rock, before mentioned, bring it to bear S.E., and steer N.W., 4^ leagues, which will bring you to Newbury Bar. In running from the bar to the eastward, strangers should not approach near Hampton Harbour, as off its mouth lie several tmnken rocks. The Marine Society of Newbury Port erected, some years since, at their own expense, several imts, at proper distances from each other and from the shore, and supplied them with firo-works, fuel, straw, lfn\ ; but owing to the strong winds driving the sand from their foundations, and the inhuman conduct of people who visited the island in sum- mer, these huts were in a few years totally destroyed. The misfortunes attending this enerous and humane attempt in favour of the shipwrecked mariner, deterred the _rlarine Society, as well as other bodies and individuals, from a like benevolent attempt, until the establishment of the Merrimack Humane Society in 1802. Conceiving it absolutely necessary that some relief should be afforded the unfortunate sufferer on so desolate a spot, and in the most inclement season of the year, the Society voted to build three huts on the island, and have carried their generous resolutions into full effect. The exertions of this benevolent Institution will be, in future, to preserve these huts in repair, and in perfect supply of materials for fire, and other necessaries for the support and preservation of lite. Many, no doubt, will owe their lives to the humanity of this design, and with grateful feelings contribute themselves to the preservation of others. The expense and trouble will be trivial in comparison with the noble purposes it may answer; and the hope of its answering these purposes, will be alone a sufficient remuneration to the generous projectors. From the report of a Committee, appointed by the Society, we have the following description of the huts, and directions to the mariner where to find them : — " The house for the keeper of the lights, erected by the United States, is about 20 rods south from the lighthouses. About 2500 paces, or 1^ mile south from this house and the lights, on the inside of the island, is the first hut, to which the mariner, in dapr-light, may be directed by a beacon, about 300 paces to the east, with a hand pointing to the hut. '• 2900 paces, or about 1 J mile south from this, is the second hut, with a similar bea- con, about 400 paces S.E., pointing to it. " 1700 paces, or about a mile south from this, is a third, with a beacon, bearing east, 500 paces distant. "5000 paces, or about, 3 miles south of this, is a house, occupied by Mr. Spiller.and family, which is about a mile from the south end of the island, and about west, a mile from the south end of the island, are two other houses, with families. " These huts, together with the other houses mentioned, form a chain from one extremity of the island to the other. The unfortunate mariner, whose fate may wreck him on this shore, can, by noticing the point of ti»o compass from which the wind blows at the time of his being wrecked, be governed in his course across the island, where he will find himself under the lee of the higher land, and protected in some measure from the violence of the tempest. By keeping alon" the margin of the island, where the travcjl- ling is good, and before coming quite to the marsh, either north or south, he will be certain of meeting with one of these huts or houses, where he may find temporary relief. To facilitate still further the means of conveying immediate assistance to those unfortunate mariners who may be wrecketl on this island, a number of gentlemen were incorporated for the purpose, and have completed a bridge and turnpike road from Newbury Port to Plum Island. This road leads in a south-easterly direction from Newbury Port, and the bridge crosses Plum Island nearly about ^ of u mile to the Cape Elizahctli to Cnpa Anne. 231 ^.E., J of a cky. Some specially nt most (lait- buurs i'roiii Harbour, is land ; it liua CaiHj Annt', nicntionod, ;o Newbury proach near wn expense, pplied them e sund from nd in sum* tending this leterred thu i>nt attempt, ^nceiving it ifierer on so aty voted to )ns into full to preserve ncousHaries lives to tho ilves to the larison with irposes, will le following C8, is about from this ;he mariner, with a hand similar bca- )earing east, Spiller.and west, a mile n from one y wreck him blows at the here he will ire from the 3 the travel- he will be temporary nee to those tlemen were 3 road from ection from mile to the S.W. of Seal Island. An elegant hotel has been erected at the coat end of the bridf^o, within 100 rods of the sea-shore, a mile south from tho lights, and about } of a mile northerly from tho northernmost house erected by the Alerrimack Humane Society before mentioned. The hotel is painted white, has Hcrve as a land-mark for seamen. has three white clnmncys, and may " It a vessel, by stress of weather, should be obliged to run ashore on this island, and the master^ can make any choice of the place it is most eligible to run on, as nearly opposite this house as possible, as assistance an«l shelter can be more promptly aflbrded, and the communication will be more direct with Newbury Port. " It rarely happens that any life is lost on this beach, in attempting to escape from the wreck, when the crew remain on board until low tide. Unless the vessel is in inuninent danger of going to pieces immediately, the seamen should never take to their boat." Hampton Harbour lies about 5 miles north from the southern extremity of Salisbury Point; oetween, at the distance of 3 miles N.byE.^E. from thu lights on Plum Island, lies another danf(erous rock^ having only 3^ feet water over it. Plum Island is situated between the mouth of Merrimack River on the north, and Ipswich Bay on the south; and is separated from the main land by a narrow sound. Its length is about 8^ miles, and its width, from the sea to the main, not more than 500 paces. On the north end of the island are two lighthouses, which are constantly lighted at night, and so constructed as to be easily moved; a circumstance renuisite from the frequent shifting of the bar at the mouth of Newbury Port Harbour. This bar is pro- bably formed by the current of the river, in its progress out, meeting the drift of the sea and opposing winds, and by that means forming a bank of loose sand, which the strength of the tide is insufRcicnt to force out. It extends across from Plum Island, and about a mile below the lights, to Salisbury Ikach. The channel over it ia ex- tremely narrow, and terminated on each side by very dangerous shoals; that on the north, called the North Breaker, and that on the south, the South Breaker. The light- houses are always so situated as to be brought in a range by the mariner coming over the bar; and as, by the violence of winds or tides, the bar shifts, the lighthouses are shifted to conform to it. My keeping the lights in one, vessels may, by day or night, come in with safety, and iind good anchorage, in 4 or 5 fathoms water, abreast or ue- twecn the two lights. That part of the island bounding on the sea, and extending above half its width, con- sists entirely of yellow sand, perfectly smooth on the beach, but, farther from the sea, driven by tne wind into hillocks, or heaps of fantastic forms, and preserved in that shape by the successive growth of grass and shrubs. On the back part of the island, where it is washed by the sound, is an extent of salt-marsh, bounding: its whob length. At the southernmost end of the island there are several houses, with families, and a considerable spot of land in good cultivation. To the northward is a grove of pine- trees, of 1 ^ mile in extent. If you advance no farther westward than for the lights on Plum Island to bear S.W., no danger is to be apprehended from either of the rocks above mentioned ; but that course to the? bar would lead to the North Breaker : you must, therefore, bring the lights to bear W. by S., and anchor in 11 or 12 fathoms water, should the tide not j)ermit you to sail in. No vessel going in should approach the South Breaker nearer than in 7 fathoms; or nearer the North Breaker, in coming from the eastward, than 9 fathoms. Pilots are always ready when the weather will permit them to go out; but if thev cannot get to you, keep the two lights in a line, and run for them, until within a cable s length of the eastern light ; then naul to the westward, and anchor between the two lights, in 4 fathoms. A vessel drawing 10 feet water may come in at $ flood; always observing to keep to the windward of the bar, unless the wind be fair. If the sea should be so great that the pilot cannot get over, then a signal will be made by him, when you must run direct for his boat, keeping the lights in range, which will carry you over in safety; or bring the western lighthouse S.W. by S., and run N.W. by N. for Salisbury Point; but as soon as you make that point, you should haul up N.W., which will carry you clear of Badger's Rocks and the Hump Sands. ? 2.32 S(tlUng Direct tons from In a courHC nearly north from thu lightliounca on Plum iHlantl, and about ^ a milo d'lHtant, across thu mouth of the Merrimack Kivcr, is the southern extremity of Salis- bury liuiich, called Salisbury Point. From this point a sand-bank extends on the verge of thu ocenn, without an inlet or interruption of any consuiiucnce, until it reaches Hampton River. Hm beach is ccmnccted with thu main land uy a salt-marsh, of con- siderable extent, intersected by a variety of small rivulets and creeks, which render it impossible for a shipwrecked mariner to reach the inhabited part of Salisbury. Here, too, the hapless seaman is sometimes destined to suffer the misfortunes of suipwreck, and to reacdi a desolate and inhospitable shore, only to aggravate the horrors of his death. If he can attain the first and wished -for object, m evading the jaws of the angry ocean, yet he finds himself a solitary wanderer on the coast, without shelter and without sustenance; and, in his fruitless search for them, must inevitably perish. As the N.K. storms arc generally most fatal to vessels on this part of the coast, Salisbury Beach is not so frequently a place of shipwreck as Plum Island. I3ut to guard against a possibility of accident, which must sometimes happen to the unskilful or inexperienced navigator, the Marine Society erected a hut, similar to those on Plum Island. Here they deposited every thing necessary for thu relief of such ns might need it, and were at the pains and expense frequently to inspect it, and renew their generosity by replenishing it: but this ims shared the same late with those on Plum Island ; not so much, however, from the insufficiency of its foundation, or the violence of the winds, but from the wantonness of individuals and companies who fre(;^uent this spot in the warm season on parties of pleasure. The Merrimack Humane Society has extended its benevolent views to this pai-t of the coast, and erected a hut about } of a mile north from Black Rocks, and about 150 paces from the sea-shoru. This hut is maintained in commodious repair, and provided with every thing suitable for those who may be so unfortunate as to need its shelter. Others, on the same coast, were to be erected as speedily as the funds of the Society and the charities of individuals rendered it possible, and conveniently furnished and provided for the same laudable purpose. Across the channel, from the Hump Sands to Block Rock Creek, lie seven or eight piers, on which are from 7 to 2^ feet at low water; they were sunk in the year 1770, and still remain. The mark to pass between them is, to bring the beacon at the west end of the town over the south corner of the North Meeting-house. The Hump Sands lie S.W. from Salisbury Point, which renders the channel very narrow and difficult to strangers. The Badger Rocks bear N.W. A N. from the light- houses, distant ^ a mile; they are covered at ^ flood, and are to be lefit on the starboard Land when going in. The Black Rocks^ which are always dry, lie } of a mile N.W. from the lighthouses : these also must be lefl on the starboard hand. The Half -tide Rocks bear W. by S. ^ S. from the Black Rocks, at the distance of 1^ mile; they are uncovered at half-tide, and have a buoy on them, which is to be left on the port side. Besides these there are the North Rocks, which are only seen at very low tides, and which bear W. by S. from the Black Rocks, from which they are 1 ^ mile distant ; there is a buoy on them, which is to be lefl on the starboard hano, the channel lying between these and the Half-tide Rocks. When you pass the Block Rocks, a W. by S. i S. course will bring you into the channel-way and good anchorage ; and, even in night or dark weather, when you judge yourself at about ^ a mile from the Black Rocks, you may anchor in safety; but it is always dangerous to run for this port in a gale of easterly wind. The signals for vessels when in sight, and supposed to be bound for Newbury Port, at the time when the sea is so great on the bar that pilots cannot get out to their assist- ance, are as follow : — When a vessel comes into the bay, and cannot get over the bar at high water, owing to insufficiency of the tide, a red square flag will be hoisted up, with a pendant under it ; and so soon as these signals are seen from the vessel in the bay, she must keep off, and try some other port. When the usual signals for vessels are kept up, the ship must lay off and on, without the bar, keeping to windward until signals be made for ner to come in ; and when it is a suitable time to come over the bar, a red square flag will be hoisted half-mast; she may then come in, keeping the lights in a range or in a line. Cape Elizabeth to Cape Anne. 233 AVhen a pendant is hoisted lialt'-most, tho vessel may come in, keeping the lights a little open to the northward. When a blue burgee is hoisted balf-iuMt, the vesiol may come in, keeping the lights a little open to the southward. When a vessel is seen in the bay, and does not come in before night comes on, the following lights will be nia*le. For a vessel to keep off*, and not attempt to come in over tho bar, during the night, a lantern will be hoisted to the top of the flag-stuff. When there is a proper time for a vessel to come in over the bar, durinor the night, two lanterns will be houitod, one at the top of the floff-staflT, and tho other half-mast hiub. The vessel must then lay off and on at the bar untifa liffht is made in the eastern light- house, at a window about 8 feet below the lantern. The vessel may then come over tho bar, keeping the lights in a line; and when she gets abreast or the upper light, there is good anchorage. The signal for vessels in distress is a white square flag, with a large black ball in the centre, hoisteu half-mast high. If you should make Cape Anne lights, and brins them, or the Dry Salvages, to bear S, by E., you may run with safety N. by W. ( • K. ^ W., 7 leog ies from Cape Anno to Portsmouth. In running the above course, you will make the Isles of Shoals, if it is any way clean from which you take a new departure. When you puss the aid islands, you bring Star Inland (on which the Meeting-house stands,) to bear S.'^ E., and then s1i-ar NlN.W. from the said island, distant 3 leagues, to Portsmouth ; or give V iute Island light a l)erth of li mile, bring it to bear east, then run N. byW. for Po*^?. v.Muth light. White Island is tne south-westernmost island. There is a very good harbour in the Isle of Shoals, wii' ♦be wind from no ..*i-easlurly round to southerly, and you may lie land-locked with an / o; .hem ; but if the wind hauls to the S.W. or W.N.W., you may run in between Sn. atty Nose Islnnd, which has a windmill on it, and Hog Island, where there is water enough for a first-ratc nmn-of-war to anchor, in 12 fathoms, muddy bottom. IPSWICH. — There are two lighthouses on Ipswi(rh Beach, bearing from each other W. \ N. and E. \ S. Keeping the two lights in one, will lead over the bar in the best water, a little to the south of tne buoy. Kun in close to the beach, and follow it close up, to avoid the northern spit on the starboard hand ; run up round the first high bluff luuvd, where you will find safe anchorage. There are 8 feet on the bar at low water. The western light at the entrance of Ipswich Harbour is revolving; the eastern fixed. ANNIS SQUAM, or SQUAM HARBOUR, in the south part of Ipswich Bay.— The lighthouse of Annis Squam stands on the eastern side of the entrance ; it is a wooden building, of an octagonal form, about 40 feet high, and about 50 feet above the surface of the water at common high tides. It is painted white, and may be known by its in- land situation, and being lower than any r:';> , pass even at low tide, but the water is shoal, and the bottom filled with large stones. As soon as the lights are discovered, you will be certain of your situation ; for being two separate lights, they cannot be mistaken for the single light of Boston, or that of Cape Cod, or for the Plymouth lights, which are double, and within a short distance from each other ; whereas the distance between the lights on Thatcher's Island is about ^ of a mile. The latter can be brought to range in one only in a S. by W. f W. and N. byE. f E. direc- tion ; while those of Plum Island (Newbury Port), when in a line, bear W. by S. and E. by N. The Plymouth lights cannot appear so arranged from the north until you aro on the shore, and from the south only when nearly in with the land. The lights of Cape Anne are therefore of great utility to all vessels in their passage in or out, as they at once serve to point out the situation of the Salvages and Londoner, and for a point of departure to vessels bound outward. Thatcher's Island is in latitude 42° 38', and longitude 70° 33'. Cape Anne is of moderate height, with trees upon it, and further remarkable by Pigeon Hill, appearing like a boat with the keel upwards. You will alwavs go clear of the Londoner, or Thatcher's Island Ledge, by keeping a league off; and m thick weather, or at night, signals from vessels will be answered by a cannon from the lighthouse. Thatcher's Island Ledge. — This ledge bears from the body of the island from E.S.E. to S.S.E., extending about 2 miles from the island. After getting the west light to bear N. ^ W., you are to the westward of the ledge ; then haul up to the N.W., to bring the lights to bear N.E. by E., and steer S.W. by W. for the eastern point, dis- tant 7^ miles from Thatcher's Island : then your course is W. by S., 7^ miles from the lights on Baker's Island. Cape Anne to Cape Cod. 235 high water, as CAPE ANNE HARBOUR.— In sailing from off Cape Anne lights to Cajje Anne Harbour, you will open Braces Cove before coining up with the harbour, which will, when open, bear N.N.W. On a small island within the harbour, named Ten Pounds Island, there is a lighthouse, of which the base is 25 feet above the level of the sea, and the tower itself 20 feet high. When you come from the eastward and make Cape Ann lights in the night, bring them to bear S.W., and run direct for them, which course will carry you within the Londoner: and when you pass the said rocks, bring the two lights in one, bearing N. by E. \ E., and then steer S.S.W. \ W. ; keeping this course about a mile, will carry you clear of Milk Island, which is very low, and cannot be seen on a dark night. When you judge yourself to the westward of this island, then haul to the westward until you bring the lights to bear E.N.E., when you must steer W.S.W., about 5 miles, which course will carry you to the eastern point: when you pass this point, keep on W.S.W., until you bring Norman's Woe, which is the highest land on the north side of the harbour, to bear N.N.W., and run in N.N.W., until you shut the lights in; then N.N.E. will carry you safely in. If you want to go inside the Salvages, keep close on board Halbut Point, which has a tree on the eastern part of it, and steer S.S.E. for Straits Mouth Island; but be care- ful to avoid Avery's Rock, by keeping the lights on the dry point of Straits Mouth Island, till you get close on board: then haul round the point, and E.S.E. will carry you to the lights. To avoid the Londoner, keep the lights close on board the body of the island on which they stand. The Londoner lies ^ a mile off; it breaks at all times, is quite dry at low water, and bears E.S.E. from the middle of Thatcher's Island. A long shoal runs off N.E., ^ a mile from the Londoner. Between Thatcher's Island and the Londoner are 3 fathoms at low water. From the Salvages to Halbut Point and Sandy Bay lies a large spot o^ flat ground, which at low water will take up a large vessel. Outside the Salvages is very bold. Halbut Point bears from the Salvages W .N.W., 2^ miles; and the Salvages bear from the lights N.N.E., 3 miles distant. The outer harbour of Cape Anne has good, safe anchorage against a northerly or east wind, where you ma; anchor in 7^ to 6^ fathoms, low tides, muddy bottom, the light- house bearing S.E. by E., about 1 or 1^ mile. In the S.E. harbour there is also good, safe anchorage with north, east, and S.E. winds: anchor with the light bearing from N.by E. to N.N.W., in 6 or 7 fathoms, muddy bottom, distant from the light ^ to ^ a mile. There are several sAoa/s within the harbour, marked as follows: — On the ledge off the eastern point is a spar-buoy, in 10 feet; on Round Rock id a spar-buoy, with a black head, in 2^ fathoms, S.W. ^ S., 1| mile from the light; on Cove Ledge is a spar-buoy, with black head, in 2 fathoms, W. by S., ^ a mile from the light; on Dog Bar Ledge is a spar-buoy, with white top, in 2 fathoms, S. by W. ^ W., 1^ mile from the light. Ten Pounds Island Light. — ^Vessels bound to Cape Anne Harbour, and falling in to the eastward of its east point, on which a fixed light is exhibited, which lies about 2 leagues S.E. from Cape Anne lights, must give that point a berth of about a mile; and when the light on Ten Pounds Island bears N.N.E., you will be to the westward of a ledge extending from the point, on which is a spar-buoy, in 10 feet water, bearing E. ^ S. from Ten Pounds Rock, and may steer direct for the light. This ledge bears from the light on Ton Pounds Island S. by W. | W., and about ^ or | of a mile from the shore. Running in, on a N.N.E. course, will lead clear between Ten Pounds Island and Ten Pounds Ledge; the latter bears from the light S.W. ^ W., ^ of a mile, and has only 6 feet water over it at low water, spring- tides, being about 10 fathoms in diameter; in passing between the island and ledge you will have 13, 14, and 15 feet at low water, springs. On the east side of Ten Pounds Island the ground is foul, and the passage unsafe ; out the south, west, and north sides are bold, and may be approached to within 60 and 40 fathoms. Give the west end of the island a berth of from 50 to 70 fathoms, and steer N.E., for the inner harbour. You may anchor at any distance from 100 fathoms to J of a mile from the island; the light will then bear from south to S.W. The anchorage is from 6 to 3 fathoms, muddy bottom ; this place is protected from all winds. Half-Wat Rock. — Should a vessel, bound for Cape Anne Harbour, fall so far to the south-westward as the Half-way Rock, which is 180 feet in diameter, 40 feet high, and bold-to, lying to the eastward of Marblehead, about 2^ miles from the nearest land ; and half-way between the lighthouses of Boston and Thatche; . Island, now distin- II 11 2 !| 236 Sailing Directions from % guished by a pyramidal beacon, the stone work of which is 15 feet high, with a base of 10 feet, and above the stone-work having a spindle of 15 feet high, on which is a copper ball, 2 feet in diameter ; care must be taken not to bring the light on Ten Pounds Island to bear to the eastward of N.E. by N., until you are 1 or 1^ mile to the eastward of the Half-way Rock, in order to avoid the S.E. Breakers, which run out from Baker's Island, and which bear from the lights on that island S.E. ^ S. to S.S.E. i E., and about 2^ miles distant. On the S.E. part of these breakers is a spar-buoy, painted black, which bears from the Half-way Rock N.E. b^ H., distant a mile. Having passed to the eastward of these brea.kers, you may bring the light on Ten Pounds Islands to bear N.E., and run for it. On this course. Ten Pounds Ledge will be left on the star- board, and the ledges off Norman's Woe Rock and Freshwater Cove on the port side; thus, when you are as far up as Ten Pounds Island, you may anchor as before directed. The bearings of the several ledges above Ten Pounds Island. — The ledge extending from the east point bears from the Ten Pounds Island light S. by W. | W., distant about 2 miles, and has from 6 to 10 feet over it at low water. A single rock lies about midway between the east point and Norman's Woe land, called the Round Rock; it has 12 feet over it at low ebbs, and bears from the light S.W. I S., distant U m»le. A large high rock, of 20 to 30 fathoms in diameter, stands about 30 fathoms off Norman's Woe Point; and in a southerly direction, about 100 fathoms from this rock, is a ledge, of only 7 and 8 feet water at low ebbs. A ledge, of only 3 feet water at low springs, lies about ^ of a mile from Freshwater Cove, and bears from the light W. J N., distant nearly 2 miles. The Half-way Rock bears from the light on Ten Pounds Island S.W. J W., distant 8 miles. SALEM HARBOUR. — The entrance to Salem Harbour is distinguished by two lighthouses; they are erected upon Baker's Island, near the middle of the entrance, and are about 40 feet asunder, bearing, when in a line, N.W. ^ W. One light is 72 feet, and the other 81^ feet high; the southern light is the highest. Baker's Island lies on the south side of the principal entrance to Salem, and 5 miles to the eastward of the town. The water near the island is deep, and there is no landing-place. Its north and east sides are rocky. The base of the lighthouses is 45 feet above tlie level of the sea; the lower lighthouse, which to the north is 25 feet high; the upper one is 40 feet : this latter may be seen 6^ and 7 leagues off. If bound to Salem, observe when you get abreast of Cape Anne, and bring the Cape lights to bear N. N.W., about 2 miles distant, to steer W. S.W., about 3 leagues, then W. by S., about 5 or 6 miles, which will carry you up with the lights on Baker's Island. Misery Island lies about a mile from Baker's Island, and is joined by a bar to Little Misery, which makes the north side of the channel opposite to Baker's Island. Misery Ledge has 8 feet least water, and bears from the lighthouses N.W. by W.^W., 1^ mile. The south part of Little Misery Island bears N.W.^N. from the lights, ^ of of a mlie. CAT ISLAND is about S.W. by W. from Baker's Island, 2 miles distant, and about a mile from Marblehead Neck, and ranges nearly between the two. On the N.W. end is a high beach, directly opposite the point of Marblehead, called Peach Point. The shore is irregular and rocky. Beyond and in a line with the island are two other heads, of nearly the same projection; and on the southern side are three high rocks, two of which are connected with the island by bars of sand, uncovered at low water: the other stands boldly up within these two, but more southerly. The Marine Society has erected a spar on Cat Island, 40 feet high, to the top of which is annexed a cask, of about 130 gallons, which is a good sea-mark, being seen at sea 20 to 30 feet above the land. A black spar-buoy lies off the S.E. end, bearing from the lights S.E. i S. to S.S.E. i E., 2i miles from the lights. Bowditch's Ledge, on the east end of which is a triangular monument of granite, 32 feet high, placed in 2^ fathoms, and bears from Baker's Island lighthouses W.N.W., ] ^ mile. Eagle Island is about 1^ mile from Peaches Point, and bears from the lighthouses W. by S. i S., IJ mile. A bar runs off from the western point of the island, in a Cape Anne to Cape Cod. 237 , with a base an which is a light on Ten i mile to the hich run out \ S. to S.S.E. a spar-buoy, mile. Having ounds Islands ft on the star- the port side; efore directed. dge extending , ^ W., distant m's Woe land, from the light 30 fathoms off from this rock, om Freshwater jr. ^ W., distant iguished by two )f the entrance, . One light is Baker's Island to the eastward ding-place. Its feet above the high; the upper d bring the Cape t 3 leagues, then a Baker's Island. ncd by a har to Baker's Island. N.W.byW.^W., ra the lights, i of ). istant, and about > On the N.W. led Peach Point. ^ island are two le are three high uncovered at low rly. The Marine which is annexed t sea 20 to 30 feet from the lights lument of granite, hthousesW.N.W., om the lighthouses )f the inland, in a N.W. direction, J a inile, and has a red spar-buoy on the east end of it. It may be avoided by keeping Grays Rocks to the southward of Marblehead Fort. If you fall in to the southward in proceeding for the lights, you should, so soon as you have made them, bring and keep the northern or lower light open to the eastward of the southern, and run for them, which will carry you to the eastward, and clear of the South iireaker of Baker's Island, which bears from the lights S.E. by S., 2^ miles distant, and is very dangerous. If the wind should be westerly in beating up, stand not to the southward or west- ward farther than to shut one light in with the other, in order to avoid the South Breaker; nor to the northward farther than to bring the li^ts to bear W. by S. ^ S., on account of Gale's Ledge, which bears from the lights N.E. by E., If mile distant. In going into Salem by the common or ship channel, between Baker's Island and ISlisery Island, which is about a mile wide, you may, so soon as you are up with Baker's Island, pass within 100 fathoms of it, and steer W. by N. for the Haste (which is a broken rock above water), lying near the middle of the channel, bearing from Baker's Island lighthouse W. ^ N., distant 2^ miles, and 1^ mile from Salem Neck. This course Avill carry you clear of Hardy's Rocks, on which is a beacon, which are covered at high water, leaving them to the southward, and BowditcKs Ledge to the northward. If you are in the mid-passage between Baker's Island and the Misery Isles, steer W.N.W. till you have passed BowditcKs Ledge, or till Cat Island (upon which a spar is erected, 40 feet high, with a large cask at the top), comes open to the westward of Eagle Island ; then haul up west for the Haste : you may there anchor in safety, in 5 fathoms water, good ground; but if you proceed into Salem Harbour, pass the Haste at about ^ a mile distant on your port hand, and steer S.W. by W., which will carry you into the harbour ; observe, there is a ledge of rocks i*uns off from the N.E. end of Winter Island, and '^hat Abbot's Rock lies abreast of it; to avoid which, you must keep above J of a mile from the shore. Abbot's Rock has 7 feet water on it on a common ebb, and lies with Castle Hill and house into the cove north of Fort Pickering, and Beverley Meeting-house well in witli Juniper Point, (or S.E. point of Salem Neck). Be careful, in keeping off shore, to avoid Abbot's Rock, that you go not too far, and get on the AqiM Vila:, which are sunken rocks, lying E.S.E. from Fort Pickering, distant nearly ^ a mile. When coining from the southward, if you are near Cat Island, you may pass to the eastward or westward of it. If you are to the eastward, give a berth of ^ of a mile, and steer N. by W. J W., or N.N.W., leaving the Brimbles and Eagle Island on the starboard, and Coney Island Ledge on the port : that course will carry you clear of Eagle Island Bar. Continue on the same course till you have passed the Haste, and get into the common ship channel; or you may continue the same course until you get under the north shore, where there is good anchorage. If you are to the westward of Cat Island, you may pass in the middle channel between that island and Marblehead Rock, and steer over north for the ship channel, leaving Gray's Rock und Coney Island to the Avestward. When past the Haste, and entering the ship channel, proceed as before. If in coming from the southward and eastward you should find yourself near Half- way Rock, upon which is a beacon, bring it to bear S.E., and steer W.AV. for the Haste, passing near to Black Rock, Avhich is steep-to, tind bears S.W. by S., If mile from Baker's Island, leaving that on the port hand, and the Brimbles and Eagle Island on tlie starboard. The Brimbles are sunken rocks, bare at low water; near them is a spar- buoy, painted red, which appears out of water at half-ebb. By continuing the above course you will leave the Haste on the port hand, and enter the common ship channel, as before directed. The tides here usually rise about 12 feet. There are several other channels for entering Salem, but they ought never to be attempted without a pilot. BEVERLEY and MANCHESTER.— To enter the Harbour of Beverley, follow the directions for Salem Harbour, till you bring the Haste to bear E.S.E., and run W.N.W., about 2 miles, and reach Beverley Bnr; this is a spot of sand running out from the southern or Salem side of the entrance, and has commonly a beacon upon the head of it, above \ of a mile from the bhore. The bar has very shoal water on the eastern or outward side near it, but good anchorage within. There is good water at 238 Sailing Directions from (. ! I ( i I the head of the bar. Having passed the bar, there is a sandy point from the Beverley, or northern side of the entrance; and bevond this point are the Lobster Rocks, which bear from the head of the bar, west a little south, and not ^ a mile distant, being above water at half-tide. To avoid this point, after liavin^ well cleared the bar, you will steer towards Ram-horn, Fiock which has also commonly a beacon, and is to be seen at half-tide, bearing S.AV. by S. from the head of the bar, i of a mile distant. There are several fathoms of water within a vessel's length of Ram-horn Rock. Givir g this a good berth, you will clear the sandy point, and steer for the Lobster Rock beacon, bearing from Ram-horn beacon N.W. by W., distant about \ of a mile. Passing this at sufficient distance, you wrll be opposite to the wharfs, and may anchor in deep water, in a very safe and excelleiiL iiarbour. To enter Manchester liarl.oiir you must bring the southern light to bear S. J E., and run north, a mile dibiunt. ./here you may anchor on good bottom. N.B. — Eastern Point b-arsfrom Baker's Island lights E. by N. ^ N., 7^ miles distant ; Half-way Rock bears from the lights S. 2° E., 3 miles distant. Hardy's Rocks bear from the lights YV. J N., distant J of a mile. In thick weather a gun will be fired from the lighthouse, in answer to any signal which then may be made. Marblehead Rock bears S.W., f of a mile from the western part of Cat Island. It is above water, and may be approached to a short distance without danger; on the rock is a monument, or beacon, painted white at the bottom, and black at tlie top. It is about 8 feet at the base, and 15 feet in height. The Brimhles are sunken rocks, bare at low water; near them is a spar-buoy, painted red, which is seen out of water at half-ebb. MARBLEHEAD HARBOUR.— Vessels bound to Marblehead, falling to the south- ward, ar ;5 running for the lights on Baker's Island, after making them, must keep the north and lower light open to the eastward cf the southern light, and run thus for them ; this will lead them to the eastward, and clear of the South Breakers off Baker's Island, which bears from the lights from S.E. ^ S. to S.S.E. ^ E., distant 2^ miles. Having made these lights, and the wind being westerly, when you get within 2 J miles of them, be careful not to stand to the southward and westward so far as to shut the northern light within the southern one, on account of the South Breakers; nor to the northward farther than to bring the lights to bear W.S.W. ^ W., on account of Gale's Ledge, which bears from the lights N.E. by E., distant 1 J mile. Drawing near the lights, you must take care of a ledge, called the Whale's Back, which bears from the lights N. by E., distant f of a mile, and comes above water at quarter-ebb. In going into Marblehead, and being up with the lights, give the north point of Baker's Island a berth of | of a mile, or less. Having the lights in a line, you will be up with the point. When the south light is open of the north light, you have passed the north pomt, leaving Misery Island on your starboard hand, which bears from the lights N.W. i N., J of a mile; your course will then be S.W. by S. or S.S.W., until you bring the south light to bear N.E. by E. ^ E., ivhen steer S.W. by W. i W., about 3 miles for Marblehead Harbour. Thus you will leave Hardy's Rocks, Eagle Island, and Gray's Rock, on the starboard hand; Pope's Head (which is a large high rock, bearing S.W. by W. from the lights, § of a nule) ; Brimbles, and the north point of Cat Island, on the port hand. The Brimbles bear from Eagle Island S.S.E. ^ E., distant ^ a mile; and Gray's Rock from the north point of Cat Island, N.W. by W., ^ of a mile. Falling in with the south point of Baker's Island, and it blowing hard from the east- ward, if you cannot avoid it, you may pass the point by keeping it »vell open on board, say at the distance of from 20 to 50 fathoUiS from the shore, where you wrll have from 4 to 5 fathoms water. When up with the S.W. point, steei W.S.W., which ill carry you between the North Gooseberry (which bears S.W. ^ S. from the lights, distant § of a mile) and Pope's Head, leaving the former on your port hand, and Pope's Head on your starboard hand, between which you will have from 3^ to 5 fathoms water. As soon as you have passed Pope's Head, haul to the northward, until the south light bears N.E. by E. i E., then steer S.W. by W. ^ W. for Marblehead Harbour. "The south entrance of the harbour of Marblehead is bold, and may be approached with safety with the light on the point of the neck, on the S.E. side of the harbour, Cape Anne to Cope Cod. 239 le Beverley, Locks, which being above lar, you will be seen at ;. There are \Wn% this a lock beacon, Passing this a deep water, bear S. i E., miles distant ; s Rocks bear to any signal jf Cat Island, langer; on the it the top. It -buoy, painted ig to the south- must keep the 1 thus lor them ; Baker's Island, iles. within 2i miles r as to shut the :ers; nor to the jcount of Gale's ; near the lights, from the bghts north point of ine, you will be you have passed I bears from the or S.S.W., until W. i W., about :s, Eagle Island, large high rock^ 3 north point of S.E. i E., distant .W. by W., i of rd from the east- II open on board, )U will have from which ill carry the lights, distant and Pope's Head thorns water. As south light bears )ur. ay be approached e of the harbour, bearing from N.N.W. to W. by N., until you are within A a mile of it; then bring tlie light to bear W. by S., and run for it till within 2 cables' lengtli; then steer N.AV. by W. until the lighthouse bears S.S.W., then steer S.W., and anchor with the light bearing from E. by S. to N.E. by E., from ^ to ^ a mile distant, in 6 fathoms, good holding-ground and clear bottom, secure from all but easterly gales. "The following are the bearings of places from the lighthouse. " Marblehead Rock S.E. by E. A E ^ mile. Half-way Rock E. by S 2^ Cat Island Rock E. a N | Baker's Island light N.E. by E 3 Hardy's Rocks N.E 2J Eagle Island N.E. ^ N i Gray's Rocks N.E. by E. ^ E 1 Peaches Point N. by W. ^ W 1 Fort Head North ^ "The above bearing"? are by compass." — American Coast Pilot. Vessels coming froL the eastward, and running for Half-way Rock, must not bring the rock to bear to the southward of W.S.W., to avoid the South Breaker, which bears from Half-way Rock N.E. ^ E., distant a mile. Being up with Half-way Rock, and bound to Marblehead, bring the rock to bear E. by S. ^ S., and steer W. by N. ^ N. for Fort Head, distant 3 mile?, leaving Cat Island on the starboard hand, which bears from Half-way Rock W.N.W., distant 1 1 mile, and Marblehead Rock on the port hand, which bears from Half-way Rock W. J N., distant 2 miles. Black Rock bears from Half-way Rock N.W. by W., distant 1^ mile. Cat Island Rock and Point Neck bear east and west of each other, distant about a mile. Vessels being up in Boston Bay, may, by bringing the Boston light to bear S.S.W., run N.N.E. for Marblehead Rock : they are distant from each other about 10 miles, ^alf-way Rock and Boston light bear from each other S.W. and N.E., distant 12 miles. Hardy's Rocks are covered at high water, and may be seen at quarter-ebb. The Whale's Back is covered at high water, and may be seen : t quarter-ebb. Gale's Rocks are seen only at low spring-tides. The South Breakers oflF Baker's Island aro always covered. The Brimbles are covered at high water, and are seen at half- tide. Black Rock is always out of water, but low. Cat Island Rock, Half-way Rock, Marblehead Rock, Gray's Rock, and Pope's Head, are large, and high above water. Half-way Rock is very bold all rounri it. Eagle Island is bold only on the south and east; from the N.E. part of it, quite to Hardy's Rocks, is very shoal water, and no passage for ships. The Outer Breakers (generally called the Outer, Middle, and Inner Breakers,) is a very extensive and dangerous shoal, extending from Searl's Rocks in a S.E. direction, about 2 miles, and in a westerly direction about J of a mile, bearing from the lights from S.E. ^ S. to S.S.E. ^ E., 2^ miles. To pass to the eastward of this dangerous shoal, have the northern, or low light, a little open to the northward of the high light. BOSTON is the capital of the Massachussets State and of Suffolk County ; it is in latitude 42° 22' north, and longitude 71° 3' west; is seated on a peninsula, and de- fended by a strong castle; the peninsula is formed by the harbour. The city extends in the form of a crescent about the harbour, and has a fine appearance. There is only one safe channel into the harbour, which in some parts is very narrow ; but within the harbour 500 ships may anchor, and at the Long Pier (2000 feet in length) ships of the greatest burthen may come close. Most of the public buildings are handsome; and liere is the monument of Dr. Franklin (who was born here) ; near to which are buildings of superior excellence. The streets are good ; the bridges over Charles River and the West Boston Bridge are of great length ; the latter, which leads to Cambridge, is 3,483 feet in length. The foreign and coasting-trade is considerable. Fifteen of the islands off the harbour are well cultivated, and offord agreeable places of resort in the summer to parties of pleasure. Near Boston the firjt hostilities commenced in 1775, between the colonists and troops of the mother-country, who evacuated the town in 1776. It is high water, full and change, at Boston Harbour at llh. loin. Spring-tides rise 13 feet, neaps 10 feet; variation 8° 58' west. The population of Boston is about 100,00 ; and three distinct railways have a terminus here. ^.: r: M). 240 Sailing Directions from BOSTON LI(;iITHO USE. —Vessels coming from the south-eastward, or from Cape Cod towards Boston, will, whi^u about a league distant from the former, steer N.W. by W. \ W. towards the lighthouse, the distance being about 12 leagues. The light- house, which it> 82 feet high, stands on a small island at the north side of the entrance of the channel. The light, which was formerly fixed, is now revolving, on the improved plan : it appears brilliant 40 seconds, and is obscured 20 seconds, alternately; this light IS visible 9 or 10 leagues off. Lon^j Island light lies west from it, and is about 27 feet high, as will be noticed here.'iftcr. The entrance to Boston Ilnrbour lies between the Liglitlvouse Island on tlu north side, and Point Alderton witi; Nantasket Heights on the =iouth. There are U\o huts erected near the llght'ir.use, with accommodations for shipwroi.ked ije:\men; and it ouaion is mounted at the lighthouse, to answer signiils. When yo:.! uieke tb^ li,frbt with i. 'V.ir wind, bring it to bear W. by N. or W.N.W., then steer ibi it uiktil you are v. iiiin 2 cables' length distance: come no nearer ti* it, but ran in uniU it bears N. by Ji.; you may then steer W. by S., about 2 miles, for Nantasket Koad, where, if the weather be so bad as to prevent your getting a pilot, from tlif- i^^land, you may anchor, and ride in sd'ety. If the wind be contrary, you may stand to the southward till you brini^ the licht to benr W.N.W., and to the northward till it bears W.S,W., v\X\\ you comit v. itliin 'A /ailes of it; then you must not stand to tho northward any Ihrtiier than to bring x\;q light to beiif W. by jST.. nor to tljc southward than till it bears W.J'T.W.; joa i* ly safely anchor in tlie bay if fhc wind bo off the shore. From C&yx: Anjjc to Bostoi) lighthouse, your course will bo S. vV., and the distance nearly 7 leagues. "Wiicn the lighthouses at Cape Anne bear S. by W. J W. from you, they arc on with i^nch other. To clear without Thatcher's Island Ledge, vou must keep about >\ mAi./-' di;stan£ from the lighthouse. In thick weather a gun will be fired from the iighthcase, to answer any signal which may then be made. When you proceed from Cape Cod to Boston Bay, with a flood-tide, you should steer about one point to the northward of the befbre-mention*^'! course, because the flood sets into Barnstaple Bay : this precaution is the more necesKiu y when the wind is northerly. You ire to be equally careful in steering from Boston Bay to Cape Cod. Until you advance within 2 leagues of Boston lighthouse, you will shoal your water from 35 to 19 fathoms. Your soundings will be irregular, and on the Cape Anne shore you will find the ground rocky ; but towards Cape Cod all is fine sand. BOSTON HARBOUR.— Off the entrance of Boston Harbour is a snail shoal, called the Cod Bank; it lies E. by S., nearly 3 miles from the lighthouse, and in the iairway of the harbour, with Alderton Point and the northern sides of Nantasket and Puttock Islands nearly in a line, AV, ^ S., while the S.W. ends of the Outer Brewster and Green Island are in one, bearing N.W. \ W. On the port side of the entrance are the Hardings Rocks, forming a cluster, which are steep-to, and lie about 2 j miles off the lighthouse. At low water the largest of these rocks shows itself about 23 feet long, and 4 feet high ; this is surrounded by smaller rocks under water, extending out about 140 fathoms on all sides : the marks for the largest are the S.W. point of the lighthouse and the western point of Great Brewster Island in one; and Nahant Rock nearly N. by E., a small ship's length open of the S.W. end of the Graves: these are a. parcel of dry rocks, appearing white, and lying in latitude 42° 22' north. A white buoy is now placed upon the N.E. side of the Hardings Rocks, 'which, in entering, must be left on the port hand. Alderton Shoal extends in a northern direction from the bluff head of Point Aider- ton,* about J over; there is a red buoy on the outer part of this shoal, which bears from the white buoy of the Hardings N.W. by W. \ W., distant 1^ mile. * The single rock that lies off the north part of Point Alderton. — The rock on with the first fence that runs over Strawberry Hill; Newcom'b's Barn, on Gallop's Island, half-way between the lighthouse on Long Island, and the beacon on the spit. When Newcomb's barn is on with the beacon, you pass to the north of this rock, on the north side of which a buoy is placed, and near it. Mark for a shoal in Lighthouse Channel. — The east low point of Gallop's Island just seen clear of the N.E. end of George's Island; the buoy of the Centurion just clear to the north of the Great Brewster; on this shoal, at low water, there are only 12 to 13 feet. Mr. Wilson, pilot for Boston Harbour, struck on this shoal in a ship drawing 14 feet 9 inches water: then the tide had flowed ^ of an liour. Cape Anne to Cape Coil. 241 r from Caoe steer N.W. The light- he entrance [le improved y; thia light bout 27 feet ,n tlu viorth are iv" <-■ huts andii-oanuon it, w'vtb I 'VAr ,11 are « ;;liin ■.by ii.-. yo^^ (veather be so ride in sdcty. i'i. Vessels leaving Cape Cod, bound to Bostcn, should calculate the tide, as the flood sets strongly to the S.W. off Cape Cod from the Race to Chatham. Flood sets to the south, ebb to the north; southern tide 9 hours, northern tide 3 hours." — American Coast Pilot. SCITUATE. — About half-way between the harbours of Boston and Plymouth is the township of Scituate, having a small harbour and lighthouse; the latter was principally erected for foreign vessels, which were accustomed to fall into the dangerous bay to the northward, and upon the Cohasset Rocks. The liglit house stands on Cedar Point, which mokes the north chop of the harbour, the first clitl 60 called being the south chop: ther^ are four of these cliffs extending towards the north, the southernmost being the highest. Scituate Lighthouse is built upon Cedar Point, about 4 miles from Cohasset Rocks, and is elevated 50 feet above the level of the sea, showing two lights, one above the other; the upper light is a brilliant white light, and the lower one red, which will effectually distinguish it from Boston light, to the northward, which revolves, and that of Ply- mouth, which shows two lights on the same buildir.g. From the body of the lighthouse, the northerly part of Cedar Point, and a ledge^ c&Ued Long Ledge, extend N.N.W., nearly a miic; so that vessels falling in a little more than a mile to the northward of the li»ht, Kiay bring the light to bear south ; and by making good their course north, they will clear the Outer Ledges of Cohasset Rocks. Sailing J a mile east of the body of the light, you will clear Cedar Point, Long Ledge, and the first Cliff Ledge. Ledges extend from all the four cliffs, but there are none Cape Anne to Cape Cod. 243 between them; and by keeping at the distance of ^ a mile from sliorc, till but the lftrp[e9t vesHcls will go dear of every thing. A S.S.E. course from the body of the light will clear Branches Point ; consequently, if the light has a berth of J a mile, there cftn ))c no danger steering in that direction. There is b passage within the Cohasset Rocks, frequented by coasters ; this is found by giving Scituate light a berth of J a mile, and running N.W. by N. to the southerly entering rock.* ^ At about 2 miles W. by N. from the light is a Meeting-house; and near the N.W. side of the harbour is a farm-house, with two large barns a little to the northward. To enter the harbour, the mouth of which is nearly t^ of a mile wide, bring the Meet- ing or the farm-house to bear aboi VV. by N. from the middle of the entrance, and run in on that direction for the farm-house, until you have passed the bir, which is a hard bed of stones and gravel, that does not shift ; and after you have got over the bar, and corae upon sandy ground, then haul up, and anchor near the beach, on the south side of the harbour. Ledge S. \ E., i^ miles; Branch Point U mile distant. There is a buoy on Philip's " ■ inff W.N.W. i W. Off Branch ^ oint there is a ledgCy with only 8 feet water_on it. It lies with Gurnet edge S. i E., i^ miles; Branch Poin Ledge, } of a mile in-shore of it, bearir PLYMOUTH HARBOUR is to the southward of Boston light, 9 leagues, and bears from Cape Cod W. \ S., distant 6 leaint of rocks extcn»' to a considerable ilistance from shore, many of whiclj are nearly uncovered at low ebbH. There is also shoal water all the way from S(U],ua8h to the Muscle Hank, so that you should not stand into less dei)th than that above mentioned; and in steer- ing towards the sands to the southward, tack in 4 fathoms, a» it is steep-to, and you may observe the ripples, unless the water he very smoi)th. The shoal extends from abreast of the lights to IJeueh Point, and the greatest part of it is uncovered at low ebba. In coming from the southward for Plymouth Ilarlwur, do not open the northern light to the westward, but keep them in one, bearing N.N.W. \ W., which will carry you into 5 fathoms, by the easternmost part of Brown's Islancf, keeping that course until within J a mile of the Gurnet Head, where you will have but 4 fathoms: Saquash Head will then bear W. by N., a little northerly, and the two outermost trees on tho head be in one; then steer directlj for them, until the lighthouse bears E.N.E., and the house on Saquash N.W., just open with the first sandy beach, where you may anchor in Saquash Road, in 4 fathoms, good clear bottom; but, if bound to Plymouth, or to the Cow Yard, steer as before directed. Should you full in to the southward of Brown's Island, between that and Monument Land, when;, in some places, vou will find 20 fathoms, do not attempt to run for the lights until you have brought them on with each other, bearin" N.N.AV. \ W. ; for if you do, you will run on Brown's Island, or Sand, whex'e there is no passage even for a boat at low water. In coming in T om the northward for Plymouth at night, do not bring the lights more southerly than S. by W., as thus you will avoid the Hif^h Pine Ledge, which liex north, 2^ or 3 miles from the Gurnet Head. The shoalest part of this ledge, which is uncoverod at low ebbs, lies about 1^ mile from the shore, with the high pines in a line with Captain's Hill, which will then bear W. by S. It extends N.N.E. and S.S.AV^, nearly a mile, and has 4 and 5 fathoms close to it, which deepens gradually as you loin to the eastward from it, having 10 and 12 fathoms at the distance of a mile. By night, wivh the lights bearing S. b_jr W., proceed to the southward until they bear N.W. ^r l^T-W. by W., when you will be clear of the rock, and may steer up "W. by S., until you have the lights bearing E.N.E., where it will be prudent to anchor until day-light. The tides flow in Plymouth until 9 o'clock, on the full and change. Should you make the Gurnet lights in the night, during hard northerly or N.W. winds, and cannot get into the harbour of Plymouth, you may run for that of Cape Cod, bringing the lights to bear W. by N., and steering for Race Point light, following the directions given for entering Province Town Harbour by the fixed light on Long Point, and come to an anchor. K it should blow so hard that you cannot turn up the harbour, you may anchor off the point, on a clear bottom. It is bold-to ; and, unless it be very dark, the sandy 'liiis may be seen before you can get on shore. CSAPE COD is the northern part of the peninsula of Barnstaple. On the hook of the cape is Province Town, distinguished by its very useful harbour, which has depth of water for any ships. On its extremity, called Point Race, is a lighthouse, exhibit- ing a revolving light, 155 feet above the level of the sea, but it cannot be seen inward- bound until it bears S.S.W. ^ W. ; and more to the S.E., at the Clay Ponds, is a larger one. The inhabitants are chiefl} fishermen. Cape Cod Tight. — By order of the United States, a lighthouse has been erected at the Clay Ponds, on Cape Cod, in latitude 42° 3' north, and longitude 70° 3' west. The house is erected on land elevated about 150 feet, which, with the elevation of the lantern, makes the whole height 220 feet above high water mark. The light, which was formerly revolving, is now fixed. If inward-bound to Boston, and you want to fall in with the back of Cape Cod, bring the light to bear S.W., 2 leagues distant; then steer W.N.W. for Boston light- house. opened tl»c steer N.W., fathoms, as [a n iK)int of iT uncovered UBcle Hnnk, nd in stoer- to, and you ctcnds from rered at low he northern h will carry that course (is: Saquash trcea on the B.N.E., and re you may o Plymouth, Cape Anne to Cape Cod. 245 1 TMonumcnt ( run for the for if re even for a ig the lights ■iy noticed; and is therefore readily known from the liglit on the high land, which xnny now, with propriety, bo called the high liglit of Caix! Cod. Cape Cod is low sandy land; but Race Point is very bold, and may be known by a number of fish-houses on it. From I to 3 miles to tne southward of Uace Point is what is called Herring Cove, where you have goo«l anchorage ^ a mile from the shore, the wind being from east to N.N.E., in 4 or even in 3 fathoms. Long Point Light. — On Long Point, at the entrance of Province Town Harbour, is a lighthouse, containing a fixed ligikf, 25 feet above the level of the sea. CAPE COD HARBOUR (Province Town) is one of the best harbours on this coast. If bound to this harbour from the northward, you may run within ^ a mile of the lighthouse on Race Point; after pa8sinn from the lighthouse, viz : — Tltp high land of the north point of the Mnnunienta W. by N. f N. diatant 110 leaguca; Brewster Meeting-houso, with steeple, 8. by W. to 8.; entrnuce i>r OrKans 8.E f 8., 6 miles; Eastham north Mo(>tinu«hou8o S.K. by E. } E., 4 mi' «« av'\ Silver Spring Harbour of Eastham E. by N. } N., 4 miles. Ttie above places .' . . J* barred haroourt; Q,xu\ flats extend offshore from 1 to 2 miles, with very shallow water over them. WELLFLEET IIAIIHOUK.— There is a rock in the possngo up to Wei Iflcet, about 12 feet in length and tH feet in breadth; it is named the Bay Hock: and there is not more than 1 or 2 feet water over it at low tide, while around it are 9 to 11 feet at low water. When on this rock, Chipman's Windmill, the southernmost mill in Wel~ ford, id a little open to the northwanl of a rock, called Blue Hock, and standing near the shuro at Wellilcet, bearing N.N.E. \ E. : this rock is covered at high water. The east point of the Ilorsc-Shoe bears from the lighthouse on Billiiigsgutu Island E.N.E., distant about ^ of a mile. On the south side of this island mnJ^ flats extend to the distance of ^ to } of a mile, having only from 6 to 9 feet water. The Meeting-house, with a steeple, at Brewntcr, to the eastward of Barnstaple, is the only one to be seen ; and this is a good mark to pass over the long shoal point that extends oiTfrom the lighthouse. BARNSTAPLE BAY.— From Centre Hill Point to Sanset Inlet the distance is about 4. miles, and the course S. ^ E.; the shore is clean and bold, having from 3^ to 4 fathoms, sandy bottom. A bar of sand lies parallel with the shore, near Centre Hill Point, which extends to the southward, and terminates about J of a mile to the north- ward of Sauset. From the shore over this bai* to 3 fathoms water, the distance is 240 to 25 fathom!), and the bar is from 100 to 140 fathoms wide, having over it 9, 10, and 1 1 feet ; while between that and the shore arc 3 and 3^ fathoms. From the south end of the bar, along shore, to the entrance of Sandwich, is 3 fathoms, and the distance from 70 to 90 fathoms, sandy bottom, and regular soundings in approaching the land. On the south side of Sauset Island is a low rocky point, of 90 fathoms. At } of a mile off shore are 3 fathoms, and at the distance of 1^ or 2 miles, 9 to 10 fathoms, muddy ground. Parsing from Sandwich to Barnstaple, they?a^«run offshore 100 and 180 fathoms. Barnstaple Liqht is fixed, and erected on a dwelling-house, over which it is elevated 16 feet. BARNSTAPLE HARBOUR.— To enter this harbour when coming from the northward, you must not approach nearer to the bar than 5 fathoms water, until the lighthouse on Sandy Neck bears S.W. ^ W., for a Umg bar stretches out from the point full 3 miles in a north-easterly direction, on tliu eastern part of which is a buoy, lying in 2 fathoms water, the light bearing from the buoy N.E. ^ E., distant 3 miles, when up to this buoy, haul close round it, leaving it on your starboard side; then run about 2 cables' length S.S.W., to clear the S.W. part of the bar, when steer S.W. by W. J W., 1^ mile, or until the light bears S.W. by S., which will be the case when you are up to Yarmouth Flats : then steer direct for the light. Always be careful to make the above courses good, for ihe flood-tide generally sets strongly over the flats, and the ebb runs equally strong to the northward over the bar. Continue your course for the light, until within a cable's length of the beach, and follow the shore round the point. There is safe anchorage inside, abreast of the light, with all winds; and with the light bearing from S.W. to N.E., you will have from 5 to 2^ fathoms. Vessels drawing 8 feet water aiay, at high water, bring the light to bear S.W. ^ W., and run directly for it. High water, full and change, at 1 1 nours. The tide rises 10 feet; and there are 7 feet on the bar at low water. CAPE COD TO CAPE MALABAR. From Cape Cod lighthouse the general tendency of the shore is S. by £., about 30 miles, to Cape Malabar, or the sandy point of Chatham. The Humane Society in America has furnished the following description of the coast hereabout, from Cfape Cod to Cape Malabar, together with the places and huta erected by them for the preservation and relief of such mariners as may unfor- tunately be wrecked upon this part : — hii ia :— The ±E. f 8., •r Spring harboura ; !tn. cet, about en; ia not 11 i'ect at II in Wel- ding nvur ter. Tlie d p:.n.e., nd to the nstaple, is point that distance is rnm 3^ to lentre Hill the north- ilistancu is iv it 9, 10, I the south he distance the land. At I of a fathoms, re 100 and vbich it is from the until the from the is a buoy, 3 miles. then run S.W. by case when careful to the flats, Cnpe Cod to Cape Malabar, 247 It T ir rour course round the , and with fc.W. 4 W., tide rises r £., about :ion of the and huts nay unfor- *'Tho cunrature of the shore nn the west side of Province Town and south oi' Hace Point, is called Herring Cove, which is 3 miles in length. There is good anohoripg- S-ound here; and vessels may ride safely in 4 or A fathoms of water, when the wind is om N.E. to S.E. '* On Race Point stand about a dozen fishing-huts, containing fire-places and other conveniences. The distance fVom these huts to Province Town, which lies on Cape Cod Harbour, is 3 miles. The passage is over a sandy beach, without grass or any other vegetable growing on it, to woods, through which is a winding roa49 \r a ridj^e as Buring inha- here, except ay be distin- E., and is in le declivities i there is an lOUses. The ably the part ent and fatal on the land; ! operation of into the bay. I shore, and a vith '' !fra"- been thought sposed to pay } will be built le from it the nds the light- the table-land lanks, which it s, during very ife to walk on succeed in his , as houses are t ; he must pass hich the inha- idle, or lowest thouse. It is a mmmit. In it I's Hollow. At ttle climbing is he wood on the louse stands on et Rivftr, which Pamet Hollow. as it is a wide head of Pamet H fence, carried :ed mariner will ^ marsh. If he iscover a house. house which is sh Valley. This ng to the right, d of Pamet. By sr house may be >ther. Either of opcnmg, called " Between the two last valleys the bank is very high and steep. From the edge of it, west, there is a strip of sand, 100 yards in breadth; then succeeds low brushwood ^ of a mile wide, and aluiost impassable; after which comes a thick, perplexing forest, in which not a house is to be discovered. Seamen, therefore, though the distance be- tween these two valleys is great, must not attempt to enter the wood, as, in a snow- storm, they would undoubtedly perish. This place, so formidable in description, will, however, lose somewhat of its terror, when it is observed, that no instance of a ship- wreck on this part of the coast is recollected by the oldest inhabitants of Wellfleet. " At ^ a mile south of Newcomb's Hollow is the sixth valley, called Pearce's Hollow. It is a small valley. A house stands at the distance of little more than ^ of a mile from the beach, W. by S. " The seventh valley is Cohoon's Hollow, ^ a mile south of Pearce's Hollow. It is not very wide. We3t from the entrance, several houses may be found at the distance of a mile. This hollow lies E. by N. from Wellfleet Meeting-house. " At 2 miles south of Cohoon's Hollow, the eighth valley, is Snow's Hollow. It is smaller than the last. West from the shore, at the distance of | of a mile, is the county road, which goes round the head of Blackfish Creek. Passing through this valley to the fence, which separates the road from the upland and marsh at the head of the creek, a house will immediately be found, by turning to the right hand, or north. There are houses on the left, but more remote. "The high land gradually subsides here, and H mile south, terminates at the ninth valley, called Fresh Brook Hollow, in which a house is to be tbund, a mile from the shore, west. "The tenth, 2^ miles south from Fresh Brook Hollow, is Plum Valley, about 300 yards wide. West is a house, J of a mile distant. "Between these two valleys is the table-land. "After this there is no hollow of importance to Cape Malabar. "From Fresh Brook Hollow to the commencement of Nauset Beach, the bank next the ocean is about 60 feet high. There are houses scattered over the plain open country ; but none of them are nearer than a mile to the shore. In a storm of wind and ram, they might be discerned by day-light; but in a snow-storm, which rages here with excessive fury, it would be almost impossible to discover them either by night or day. "Not far from this shore, south, the trustees have erected a third hut, on Nauset Beach.* Nauset Beach begins in latitude 41° 51', and extends south to lafif'^de 41° 4J '. It is divided into two parts, by a breach which the ocean has made through it. Thia breach is the m )uth of Nauset, or Stage Harbour ; and, from the opening, the breach extends north, 2^ miles, till it joins the main land. It is about a furlong wide, and forms Nauset Harbour, which is of little value, its entrance being obstructed by a bar. This northern part of the breach may be distinguished from the southern part by its being of a less regular form : storms have made frequent irruptions through the ridge, on which beach-grass grows. On an elevated part of the breach stands the hut, about 1^ mile north of the mouth of Nauset Harbour. Eastham Meeting-house lies from it W.S.W., distant IJ mile. The Meeting-house is without a steeple; but it may be dis- tinguished from the dwelling-houses near it by its situation, which is between two small groves of locusts, one on the south and one on the north ; that on the south being three times as long as the other. About 1^ mile from the hut, W. by N., appear the top and arms of a wmdmili. The Rev. Mr. Shaw and Elisha Mayo, Esq., of Eastham, have engaged to inspect this building. ♦"The southern part of Nauset Beach, most commonly called Chathaii' 3each, and by a few persons Potan>:maqunt Beach, begins at the mouth of Nauset Harbour, and ex- tends 8 or 9 miles south to the mouth of Chatham Harbour. It is about 130 fathoms wide. A regular well-formed ridge, which, in the most elevated part of it, is 40 feet high, runs the whole length of it; and, with the exception of a few spots, is covei'ed with beach-graes. This beach forms the barrier of Chatnam Harbour, which, from Strong Island, north, receives the name of Pleasant Bay. A mile south of the entrance of Nauset Harbour it joins the main land of Orleans, except in very high tides, when the sea flows from the north-eastern arm of Pleasant Bay into the harbour of Nauset, com- Chw valley is \ of hut. * On NauRCt Beach three lightliouscs have been erected, If [N. America — P;.rt I.] } feet apart. Kk 250 Genet'al Description of the i:i: I if y) ' fij pletely insulating the beach. By those who are acquainted with the shallow, it may be safely forded at any time; but strangers must not venture to pass it when covered with water, as below the channel is "t feet deep. On this beach, about half-way between the entrances of Nauset and Chatham Harbours, the trustees have erected a fourth hut. The spot selected is a narrow part of the beach. On the west, the water adjoining it is called Bass Hole. Salt Marsh is north and south of it next the beach, but is here in- terrupted. Orleans Meeting-house lies from it N.W. The Meeting-house is without a steeple, and is not seen; but it is very near a windmill placed on an elevated ground, a conspicuous object to seamen coming on the coast. It may be necessary to add, that there are three windmills in Orleans, forming a semi-circle ; that the mill referred to is on the right hand, or N.E. point, and that the mill in the middle point of the semi- circle stands on still higher ground. The Meeting-house of Chatham is situated from it S.W. This Meeting-house is also without a steeple, and is concealed by Great Hill, a noted land-mark. The hill appears with two summits, which are -^ o{ a, mile apart. The hut lies east from Sampson's Island, in Pleasant Bay. Timothy Bascom, Esq., of Orleans, has undertaken to inspect this hut. " Lest seamen should miss this hut, by striking to the leeward of it, the trustees have erected another on the same beach. It stands a mile north of the mouth of Chatham Harbour, east of the Meeting-house, and opposite to the town. " Another spot on the same beach would be a proper situation for a hut. It is north of the fourth hut, and east of the middle of Pocket Island. The highest part of the ridge is near it, south. A break in the ridge, over which the sea appears sometimes to have flowed, diviiles this high part from the northern portion of the beach. " On the beach of Cape Malabar, or the sandy point of Chatham, the trustees have built a sixth hut. This beach stretches from Chatham, 10 miles into the sea, towards Nantucket, and is from ^ to f of a mile in breadth. It is continually gaining south ; above 3 miles have been added to it during the past 50 years. On the east side of the beach is a curve in the shore, called Stewart's Bend, where vessels may anchor with safety, in 3 or 4 fathoms of water, when the wind blows from N. to S.W. North of the Benu there are several bars and shoals. A little below the middle of the beach, on the west side, is Wreck Cove, which is navigable for boats only. The hut stands 200 yards from the ocean, S.E. from the entrance of Wreck Cove, ^ a mile. Between the mouth of the cove and hut is Stewart's Knoll, an elevated part of the beach. The distance of the hut from the commencement of the bead" is 6 miles, and from its termination 4. Great Hill, in Chatham, bears N. by W., distaijt 6 miles, and the south end of Morris Island, which 13 on the west side of the beach, N. by E., distant 4 miles. Richard Sears, Esq., of Chatham, has engaged to visit the two last-mentioned huts. " At 2 miles below the sixth hut is r (ishing-house, built of thatch, in the form of a wigwam. It stands on the west side of the beach, :^ of a mile from the ocean. Annu- ally, in September, it is renewed, and geneL-iUy remains in tolerable preservation during the winter. " Another spot, a {aw rods from the ?ea, 4 miles south from the commencement of the beach, and ^ a mile north of the head of Wreck Cove, would be a proper situation ibr a hut. A little south of this spot, in storms and very high tides, the sea breaks over from the ocean into Wreck Cove. " Cape Malabar Beach may be distinguished from the two beaches before described, not only by its greater breadth, but also by its being of a less regular form. It is not so well covered with grass as Chatham Beach. From Stewart's Knoll, south, to the extremity, it is lowest in the middle. In this valley, and in other places, fresh water may be obtained by digging 2 feet into the sand, and Chatham Beaches. The same thing is true of Nauset "The six huts, the situations of which have thus been pointed out, are all of one size and shape. Each hut stands on piles, is 8 feet long, 8 feet wide, and 7 feet high : n. sliding door is on the south, a sliding shutter on the west, and a pole, rising 15 feet above the top of the building, on the east. Within it is supplied with straw or hay, and is farther accommodated with a bench. " The whole of the coast from Cape Cod to Cape Malabar, is sandy, and free from rocks. Along the shore, at the distance of -J mile, is a bar, which is called the Outer Bar, because there are smaller bars within it, perpetually varying. This Outer Bar is separated into many parts by guzzles, or small channels. It extends to Chatham; and. Banks heticccn Cape Sable and Cape Cod. 251 as It proccetls southward, {gradually approaches the shore, and becomes more shallow. Its geiKM'al depth at high water is "i fathoms, and 3 fathoms over the guzzles; and its least distance from the shore is about a furlong. Off the mouth of Chatham Harbour there are bars which reach f of a mile; and ott'the entrance of Nauset Harbour the bars extend ^ a n.ile. Large heavy ships strike on the Outer Bar, even at high water, and their fragments only reach the shore; but smaller vessels pass over it at full sea; and when they touch at low water, they beat over it, as the tide rises, and soon come to the land. If a vessel is cast away at low water, it ought to be left with as much expedition as possible; because the fury of the waves is then cheeked, in some measure, by the bar; and because the vessel is generally broken to pieces with the rising flood. But sea- men, shipwrecked at full sea, ought to remain on board till nearly low water; for the vessel does not then break to pieces; and, by attempting to reach the land before the tide ebbs away, they are in great danger of being drowned. On this subject there is one opinion only among judicious manners. It may be necessary, however, to remind them of a truth, of which they have full conviction, but which, amidst the agitation and terrors of a storm, they too frequently forget." NAUSET BEACH LIGHTS.— On Nauset Beach three lighthouses have been erected; they are 150 feet apart. The northernmost is in latitude 41° 51' 40" north. CHATHAM LIGHTS are situated on the S.E. part of the peninsula of Cape Cod, about 7 leagues to the southward of Cape Cod light. They are two fixed lights, on James's Head, 70 feet above the level of the sea; they are only of use in running over the shoals, as the beach has made out 2 or 3 miles since they were erected. Its harbour is convenient for the fishery, in which they have usually 40 vessels employed; and con- tains 20 feet at low water. There is also a fixed light on the sandy point of Monomy, 8 miles to the southward of the Chatham liglits. DESCRIPTIONS OF THE BANKS SITUATI:D BETWEEN CAPE SABLE AND THE PENINSULA OF CAPE COD. !s, fresh water rue of Nauset Before we conclude this section, it may be useful and proper to notice and des- cribe, as well as our information will admit, the sand-banks and soundings whicli the mariner navigating this part of the coast of America, situated between Cape Sable and Cape Cod, will, hi all probability, fall in with in this passage. These are Cashes Ledge, Jeffery's Bank, and St. George's Bank. CASHES LEDGE is situated direct'} opposite to Massachusetts Bay, and in a right line between Machias Bay and Cape CoJ , it was carefully c'xaiiiined by the master of H.M. sloop the Heaver, by whom we are furnished with the following description : — "I took my departure from Thatcher's island to the eastward of Cape Anne; the island bore from me north, distant 3 miles: from this bearing I steered E. | N., 65 miles, with a fair wind, and fell in with. ' iie north part of the bank where Cashes Ledge is, about 2 leagues to the northward of the shoal, in fiO fathoms, hard black clay. This bank lies north and south, 7 leagues, and east and west, 2 leagues; and in the centre of the bank is the shoalest ground. Its length and breadth are about ^ a mile; there ax'e on it, in some parts, 1 fathoms, in others only 4^, all exceedingly rocky. In the length of a boat you will have from 10 to 4^ fathoms, and there are 17 fathoms within a cable's length of the shoal, which gradually deepens as you stand from it, all over the bank to 90 fathoms; at this sounding you are on the edge of the bank. You will, in general, have upon the bank, oazy and sandy bottom, with black stones and broken shells, till you get in 25 or 30 fathoms; it then becoTues rocky. The current sets ex- ceeding strong and irregular; in less than an hour it will run all round the compass. All ships and vessels should endeavour to steer clear of this shoal, for I am persuaded, that in a fresh gale of wind they must strike; if not, tlie sea will run so as to founder them. By four days' observation, the weather being exceedingly clear, found the shoal to lie in latitude 43° 1' north, and longitude 69° 6 west. On its shoalest part there are only 12 feet water." Another navigator, the master of the Ari^onaut, has since confirmed the above extent of the bank, north and south, and state.-!, that its shoalest part is near the centre, but Kk 2 252 General Descriptto)i of the allows it to extend only | of a mile each way. " This ledge (he observes) bears^from Cape Anne £. ^ N., distant 24 leagues, and lies in the latitude and longitude just given;" adding, that "You will have on this part from 10 to 4 fathoms, very irregular soundings., and all rocky bottom. The current shifts all round the compass every hour, and generally runs at the rate 2 miles an hour." The following account of Cashes Ledge is given in the " American Coast Pilot." — "Cashes Ledge, tohich is dangerous. — The position or extent of this shoal is not accurately determined. It was recently searched for by Captain Owen, R N., three times, but without success. From the best information we can get, we give the fol- lowing ; — "East by compass, 17 or 18 leagues from Thatcher's Island, you get soundings upon the Fippaiiies, a bank of 8 or 10 leagues in extent from north to south, and about 3 miles wide in the centre of the northsrn end ; on the southern end it is 2 to 2^ miles wide. The depth varies from 27 to 46 fathoms, shelly and pebbles. "From the eastern edge of the Fippanies, east, 4 or 5 leagues, will bring you upon Cashes, on the shoal ground, which is upon the eastern edge of the bank, and is a^ut white rock, of from 200 to 300 feet in extent; upon this rock are 4 fathoms water. " South of the flat rock there Is a gully, of 90 fathoms water, which runs in upon the bank in a south-westerly direction; upon the south side of this gully, 3 miles south of the flat rock, there is a shoal, of 7 fathoms, from which the soundmgs run suddenly to 15 and 30 fathoms on all sides, except the cast, where it deepens suddenly to 80 futhoms. "N. by W., 9 miles from the flat rock, there is another shoal, of 14 fathoms; between this and the flat rock there are from 10 to 35 fathoms, rocky bottom, on which there is kelp 45 feet in length; on the flat rock there is none. "The above bearings and distances place the shoal ov flat rock in 69° 3' west longi- tude, and 42° 44' north latitude. (The old position is latitude 43° 4' north, and longitude 69° 11' west.)" JEFFERY'S BANK.— This Is an extensive deep-water bank, of 30,40, 50, and 60 fathoms, 16 leagues in length N.E. and S.W., and 3 leagues in breadth; it is generally represented in xhe charts as commencing close to the southward of Moimt Desert Rook, and extending to about the longitude of 68° 45' west. Outside of the bank the water deepens to 70 and 80 fathoms, and between it and the shores of America are 100, 70, 60, and 55 fathoms ; on or about it there is no danger whatever. ST. GEORGE'S BANK.— This bank was very little known until it was regularly surveyed in 1821, by the United States schooner Science, and the sloop Orbit, under the orders of Captain Isaac Hall. The following description is a copy of his report. " There are properly four shoals on St. George's Bank ; the whol ^3 of them are included between the latitudes of 41° 34' north and 41° 55' 30" north, and longitudes 67° 18' west and 67° 59' west. Between them are from 15 to 35 fathoms of water. "The largest, and on which is the greatest danger, is the most southerly and westerly. It Is somewhat triangular, with a long and narrow spit running out from t' y S.E. angle. The S.E. point is in latitude 41° 34' north, and longitude 67 40' Avest. The west point is in 41° 42', and longitude 67° 59'. The N.E. po'"nt is in latitude 41° 48' north, and longitude 67° 47' west. The eastern side of this shoal, althougli somewhat irre- gular, runs nearly S.S.E. and N.N.W., having on it from 3 f>3ct to 9 fathoms at com- mon low water; this a' pears to be Avhat is commonly called the Malabar Bank; it is composed of